JP6756768B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of performing a game using a game medium.

As a game machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device and the game medium wins a prize in a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area (also referred to as "starting prize"), it is determined. Some prize balls are paid out to the player. Further, a variable display device capable of variablely displaying (also referred to as "variable") the identification information when the game medium wins a prize in a specific winning area (also referred to as "starting area") is provided, and the variable display device can be used for identification. Depending on the display result of the variable display of information, the one configured to be controllable to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player or a predetermined state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. is there.

The advantageous state means an advantageous state for a player who has been given a predetermined game value. Specifically, the advantageous state is, for example, a state in which the state of the special variable winning means is advantageous to the player in which the game medium is likely to win a prize (big hit game state), or a state in which the right to become advantageous to the player is generated. , A state in which a predetermined game value is given, such as a state in which the conditions for paying out the prize game medium are easily satisfied. Further, the predetermined state is a state that is advantageous to the player as in the advantageous state, but is a state in which the degree of profit is relatively lower than that of the advantageous state (small hit game state).

In such a game machine, when the display result of the variable display device that displays the symbol as the identification information becomes the display mode (big hit symbol) indicating "big hit", for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times and the game medium is opened. It shifts to an advantageous state (big hit game state) where it is easy to win a prize, and in each opening period, it is large when there is a prize in a predetermined number (for example, 10) of large winning openings or when a predetermined opening time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses. The winning opening will be closed. Further, when the display result of the variable display device is in a display mode (small hit symbol) indicating "small hit", for example, an advantageous state in which the large winning opening is opened once and the game medium can win a prize (small hit game state). When a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.8 seconds) elapses, the big winning opening is closed.

Further, in the above-mentioned game machine, the first identification information is variably displayed when the game medium wins in the first start area, and the second identification information is variably displayed when the game medium wins in the second start area. Some of them can be displayed and the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (also referred to as "simultaneously variable"). Further, in such a game machine, when the variable display of the first identification information cannot be started, the information regarding the variable display of the first identification information is stored as the first hold storage, and the variable display of the second identification information is performed. If it cannot be started, it is possible to store the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information as the second hold storage. Then, in this game machine capable of simultaneous fluctuation, by providing a special state in which a time shorter than the normal state is set as the variable display time (variation time) of the second identification information, a predetermined state (small hit) is provided in the special state. Some are configured so that the frequency of control (for example, the frequency of small hits per unit time) is high. For example, in Patent Documents 1 and 2, in a high probability state (special state) of a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the fluctuation time of the second identification information is set shorter than that in the normal state (low probability state). It is described that control is possible in a state where the frequency of small hits is higher than in the normal state.

JP-A-2017-86643 (paragraphs 0128, 0234, 0237, 0512) Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-20287 (paragraph 0009, 0308-0311)

By the way, in Patent Documents 1 and 2 that can be controlled in the special state as described above, the fluctuation time of the second identification information is set to be relatively long in the normal state. Specifically, in Patent Document 1, it is set to 180 seconds to 300 seconds, and in Patent Document 2, it is set to 10 hours. As described above, in the gaming machine having a long fluctuation time of the second identification information in the normal state as described in Patent Documents 1 and 2, the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage (second hold display) in the normal state. It is not appropriate to make (also called) visible.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of realizing appropriate display control for the second hold display in a game machine that can be controlled in a special state.

(Means A) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can variablely display identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is capable of variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information. A variable display executing means capable of executing the display in parallel, a predetermined state control means which is advantageous for the player and can be controlled to a predetermined state different from the advantageous state, a normal state, and the second state rather than the normal state. A state control means that can control a special state that is frequently controlled to the predetermined state by selecting a short fluctuation time at a high rate as the execution time of the variable display of the identification information, and the first identification information. A first hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as a first hold storage, a second hold storage means that can store information about the variable display of the second identification information as a second hold storage, and the first hold. A hold display means capable of displaying a first hold display corresponding to memory and a second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage, and a corresponding display means capable of displaying a corresponding display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display means can display the first hold display in the normal state, but cannot display the second hold display, and displays the second hold display in the special state. It is possible, and it is possible to make the second hold display difficult to see in a specific period after the specific timing before the end of the special state, and the corresponding display means can be used in the normal state. The light emitting effect means is further provided with a light emitting unit and a light emitting effect means capable of executing a light emitting effect using the light emitting unit without displaying the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. The light emitting portion is emitted by a first specific pattern in which the light emitting portion is made to emit light by a light emitting mode in which a specific color is blinked, and a light emitting mode in which one of a plurality of colors including the specific color is changed to another color. The light emission effect can be executed by the second specific pattern to be caused, the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs between the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern, and the light emission cycle of the specific color is different. Differently, in the light emitting effect according to the first specific pattern, there are a plurality of blinking cycles of the specific color, and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which of the blinking cycles is.
(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of variably displaying identification information and controlling an advantageous state (for example, a big hit state) that is advantageous to the player, and is a first identification information (for example, a first identification information). Execution of steps S26A and S26B in the variable display execution means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) capable of executing the variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) in parallel. A predetermined state control means (for example, steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state is executed. (For example, a non-KT state) and a shorter fluctuation time at a higher rate are selected as the execution time for the variable display of the second identification information than in the normal state (see, for example, FIG. 13). The state control means (for example, steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state) that is frequently controlled to a predetermined state by The part to be executed), the first reserved storage means (for example, the first reserved storage buffer) that can store the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the first reserved storage, and the information related to the variable display of the second identification information. A second hold storage means that can be stored as a second hold storage (for example, a second hold storage buffer) and a first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage (for example, a first hold display in the first hold display unit 61). And the second hold display means (for example, the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62) corresponding to the second hold storage can be displayed (for example, step S707 in the effect control microcomputer 200 is executed. In the normal state (for example, non-KT state), the hold display means can display the first hold display, but cannot display the second hold display (for example, in step S7073). If it is Y, step S7075 is executed, and if it is N in step S7077, steps S7080 and S7082 are not executed), and further, a light emitting unit (LED909: left frame LED909b, top frame LED909a, right frame LED909c, accessory LED). , Board surface LED, light guide plate, seg display, dot display, etc.), which is a game machine (pachinko game machine 901, etc.) that emits light using the light emitting unit. The light emitting effect means (effect control board 12: CPU 90120 for effect control, etc.) capable of executing the effect is further provided, and the light emitting effect means is described by a light emitting mode in which a specific color (single color: blue, green, red, etc.) is blinked. Of the first specific pattern for causing the light emitting unit to emit light (light emission pattern table 90121 in FIG. 72: category: LP11 to LP13: light emission pattern LP11-1, LP12-1, LP13-1, etc.) and a plurality of colors including the specific color. The light emitting effect is produced by a second specific pattern (light emitting pattern table 901211: category LP14: light emitting pattern LP14-1 or the like in FIG. 72) in which the light emitting portion is made to emit light according to a light emitting mode in which one of the colors is changed to another color. It is feasible, and the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern have different expectations (big hit reliability, etc.) for the player, and the light emission cycle of the specific color is different (FIG. 74: switching unit light emission). The time Δtn is shorter than the blinking unit light emission time Δto1 to Δto3, etc.).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the player with respect to the second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory in the normal state, and it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display. .. Furthermore, according to this, the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern have different expectations for the player and different light emission cycles of the specific colors, thereby enhancing the effect of the light emission effect and hobby of the game. Can be improved.

(Means 2) When the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed in the means 1, the specific display corresponding to the second identification information (for example, the second in the second specific display unit 62a) is performed. A specific display means (for example, a portion for executing steps S9308 and S9310 in the effect control microcomputer 200) capable of displaying the specific display) is further provided, and the above-mentioned specific period (for example, a period in which the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time) is provided. ), The hold display means can display the second hold display and the specific display means can display the specific display, and the hold display means makes the second hold display difficult to see in the specific period. (For example, step S7082 is not executed when it is Y in step S7081) and the specific display means makes it difficult to see the specific display (for example, step S9310 is not executed when it is Y in step S9309). It may be characterized in that it is possible. According to such a configuration, when the special state ends, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the specific display corresponding to the second identification information.

(Means 3) In the means 2, with a predetermining means for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state based on the establishment of the start condition (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S65A and S65B). Prior to the determination of the prior determination means, the specific determination means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an advantageous state is obtained based on the second reserved storage) executes steps S312, S215, S216, and S322. Part), and the hold display means changes the second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory that is the judgment target of the specific judgment means to the first special mode according to the judgment result of the specific judgment means. It is possible to execute the first aspect change effect (for example, hold notice) to be caused, and the specific display means corresponds to the second identification information to be determined by the prior determination means according to the determination result of the prior determination means. The second aspect change effect (for example, specific notice) for changing the specific display to the second special aspect can be executed, and in a predetermined period including the specific period (for example, a period in which the remaining 9 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time) The hold display means restricts the execution of the first aspect change effect (for example, step S7079 is not executed when Y in step S7078), and the specific display means restricts the execution of the second aspect change effect (for example, step S7078). Step S9307 is not executed when it is Y in S9306). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid inconsistency in the effect in a specific period in which the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage and the specific display corresponding to the second identification information are difficult to see.

(Means 4) In any of the means 1 to the means 3, the state control means has a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state as a special state. It may be characterized in that it can be controlled to (for example, the second KT state). According to such a configuration, the monotonousness of the game playability in the special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game in the case of controlling the special state can be improved.

(Means 5) In any of the means 1 to the means 4, the effect symbols (for example, the background symbols in the first background symbol display unit 91a and the second background symbol display unit 92a) are variable in response to the variable display of the identification information. An effect control means (for example, an effect control microcomputer) capable of performing display and variable display of a reduced symbol smaller than the effect symbol (for example, a small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b or the second small symbol display unit 92b). The computer 200 includes a portion for executing S920D, S920E, S920H, S920I, and S920K), and the effect control means is an effect symbol (for example, a production symbol corresponding to variable display of the first identification information) in a normal state (for example, a non-KT state). , The variable display of the background symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a) is executed, and the variable display of the effect symbol (for example, the background symbol in the second background symbol display unit 92a) corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is executed. (For example, step S920E is executed when it is Y in step S920C, and step S920J is executed when it is N in step S920G), and the second identification information is variable in a special state (for example, KT state). The variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the display is executed, and the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is not executed (for example, step S920I is executed when Y of step S920G is executed, and the step Step S920F is executed when N of S920C), a reduced symbol corresponding to variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information depending on whether it is controlled in the normal state or the special state. (For example, the small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b or the second small symbol display unit 92b) is executed (for example, in steps S920D and S920H depending on whether it is in the non-KT state or the KT state). It may be characterized by performing either). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate display control corresponding to the state of the reduced symbol, and it is possible to reduce the degree of recognition of the second identification information to the variable display by the player in the normal state.

(Means 6) In any of means 1 to 5, the hold display means displays the second hold in a specific period including the timing when the special state ends (for example, a period in which the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time). Can be made difficult to see (see, for example, FIG. 64). According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine that can be controlled in a special state, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display. More specifically, when the special state ends, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display.

(Means 7) In means 6, regardless of whether the hold display means is controlled in a normal state or a special state, the first hold storage number display corresponding to the number of first hold storages (for example, the first hold). The storage number display 71) is displayed, and the second hold number display corresponding to the number of the second hold storage is not displayed (for example, when step S7071 is Y, step S7072 is executed and step S7076 is Y). Even if the process corresponds to step S7072 is not executed), it may be characterized. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the player with respect to the number of second reserved memories while ensuring the player's recognizability with respect to the number of first reserved memories, and the first reserved memory and the first (2) Appropriate display control can be realized for each of the reserved storage numbers.

(Means 8) In any of means 1 to means 7, the game medium (for example, a game ball) is provided on a predetermined path (for example, to the right of the game area 7) among the flow paths to which the game medium (for example, a game ball) flows down, and the game medium can pass through. After the specific area (for example, the operating gate 17) and the predetermined condition (for example, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) are satisfied, an advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) is based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area. ) And the predetermined condition are satisfied with the advantageous state control means (for example, the portion where steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 are executed in the case of Y in step S2501 in the game control microcomputer 560). Based on this, a predetermined promotion notification (for example, the first instruction notification) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the predetermined route is executed, and after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the execution of the predetermined promotion notification, the specific area is reached. With the promotion notification means (for example, the part that executes steps S4404, S4405, S4604, S4605 in the effect control microcomputer 200) that can execute the specific promotion notification (for example, the second instruction notification) that promotes the launch of the game medium. , May be further provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means 9 to 18. Conventionally, in a game machine, as a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-147835, and a winning opening provided in the game area. When a game ball wins a prize in a winning area such as, some are configured to give a predetermined winning value to the player. Further, a variable display means capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display means, a predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give the player (so-called pachinko machine). It is known that in the above-mentioned game machines, the strobe light emission effect can be executed, and the longer the strobe light emission period, the higher the reliability of the jackpot.
However, although it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by the light emitting effect, there is a problem that the effect of the effect is insufficient if the light emitting period is simply lengthened according to the reliability of the jackpot. Therefore, the purpose is to propose a game machine capable of enhancing the effect of the light emitting effect and improving the game entertainment.

(Means 9) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect is a light emitting unit (LED909: left frame LED909b, top frame LED909a, right frame LED909c, accessory LED, board surface LED, light guide plate, seg display, dot. A game machine (pachinko game machine 901, etc.) equipped with a display, etc., further equipped with a light emitting effect means (effect control board 9012: effect control CPU 90120, etc.) capable of executing a light emission effect using the light emitting unit. , The light emitting effect means has a first specific pattern (light emitting pattern table 901211: category: LP11 to LP13) in which the light emitting portion emits light by a light emitting mode in which a specific color (single color: blue, green, red, etc.) is blinked. : Light emission pattern LP11-1, LP12-1, LP13-1, etc.) and a second light emitting unit that emits light according to a light emitting mode in which one of a plurality of colors including the specific color is changed to another color. The light emission effect can be executed by the specific pattern (light emission pattern table 901211: category LP14: light emission pattern LP14-1 and the like in FIG. 136), and the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern are for the player. A game machine characterized in that expectations (big hit reliability, etc.) are different, and the light emission cycle of the specific color is different (FIG. 138: switching unit light emission time Δtn is shorter than blinking unit light emission time Δto1 to Δto3, etc.). Is. According to this, the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern have different expectations for the player and different light emission cycles of the specific colors, thereby enhancing the effect of the light emission effect and enhancing the game fun. Can be improved.

The invention according to the means 10 is a gaming machine (pachinko) including a light emitting unit (LED909: left frame LED909b, top frame LED909a, right frame LED909c, accessory LED, board surface LED, light guide plate, seg display, dot display, etc.). The game machine 901, etc.) is further provided with a light emitting effect means (effect control board 9012: effect control CPU 90120, etc.) capable of executing a light emitting effect using the light emitting unit, and the light emitting effect means is a specific color (single color). : Blue, green, red, etc.) The first pattern (light emitting pattern table 901211: category: LP1 to LP3: light emitting patterns LP1-1, LP1-2, LP2-1, LP2- 2, LP3-1, LP3-2, etc.) and a second pattern (light emission pattern table 901211: category LP4: light emission in FIG. 126) that causes the light emitting unit to emit light in a plurality of colors (blue, green, red → rainbow color, etc.). The light emitting effect can be executed by the patterns LP4-1, LP4-2, etc. (light emitting effect processing of FIG. 135, etc.), and the first pattern and the second pattern are expected by the player (big hit). (Reliability, etc.) are different, and the effect period is different (light emission pattern table 901211: light emission effect time in FIG. 126, FIG. 125, FIG. 144: the higher the jackpot reliability, the longer the light emission effect period, etc.). It is a game machine to play. According to this, by making the degree of expectation for the player different and the effect period different between the first pattern and the second pattern, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light emitting effect and improve the game interest. ..

The invention according to the means 11 is a gaming machine (pachinko) including a light emitting unit (LED909: left frame LED909b, top frame LED909a, right frame LED909c, accessory LED, board surface LED, light guide plate, seg display, dot display, etc.). The game machine 901, etc.) is further provided with a light emitting effect means (effect control board 9012: effect control CPU 90120, etc.) capable of executing a light emitting effect using the light emitting unit, and the light emitting effect means is at least a part. The light emission effect can be executed by a plurality of light emission patterns (light emission pattern table 901211: various light emission patterns, etc. in FIG. 126) having different light emission modes (emission colors, etc.), and the plurality of light emission patterns are all specific colors (light emission patterns, etc.). Single color: A light emitting mode including light emission of blue, green, red, etc., the degree of expectation for the player (big hit reliability, etc.) is different, and the light emission unit time for the specific color is different (FIG. 131: single color). While blue, green, and red emit light continuously, rainbow color repeats blue → green → red in that order, so the light emission time as a single color is short. Switching unit light emission time Δtn is continuous unit light emission time. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is shorter than Δtm, etc.). According to this, it is possible to pay attention to the difference in the period during which the specific color is emitted by making the expectations for the player different and the emission unit time for the specific color different in the plurality of emission patterns. This makes it possible to enhance the effect of the light emission effect and improve the game entertainment.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 12, the gaming machine described in the means 9 (the same applies to the means 10 and 11), wherein the light emitting effect means has the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern. The timing at which the light emitting unit starts light emission (reach state occurrence timing, etc.) is the same, but the timing at which the light emitting unit ends light emission (timing at which the light emission effect time elapses from the reach state occurrence timing, etc.) is different (FIG. 125, FIG. 144, etc.) may be configured. According to this, although the timing for starting the light emission is the same, the player can have a sense of expectation by making the timing for ending the light emission different.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 13, the gaming machine described in the means 9 (the same applies to the means 10 and 11), and the light emitting effect means blinks a first specific color (single color: blue, etc.). A first step of causing the light emitting unit to emit light according to a light emitting mode, and a second step of causing the light emitting unit to emit light according to a light emitting mode in which a second specific color (single color: green, red, etc.) after the first step is blinked. The light emitting effect according to the first specific pattern including the above can be executed, and after the period corresponding to the second stage ends, the light emitting effect according to the second specific pattern can be executed (FIG. 144: single color: blue). Etc. → single color: green, red, etc. → rainbow color, etc.), and a gaming machine characterized by this may be configured.
According to this, by executing the light emitting effect by the first specific pattern including two stages of blinking colors, the effect of the light emitting effect can be enhanced and the game entertainment can be improved. In addition, after the end of the period corresponding to the second stage, the player can have a sense of expectation by executing the light emission effect by the second specific pattern.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 14, the gaming machine described in the means 9 (the same applies to the means 10 and 11) has a variable display (special symbol display: first special symbol display, second special symbol display, etc.). Executable variable display means (special symbol display 904: first special symbol display 904A, second special symbol display 904B, etc.) and specific display (hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display by the variable display means. Etc.) is further provided with a specific display means (hold display 9025, etc.) capable of executing the specific display means, and the light emitting effect means is set to a display mode (color of hold display, lighting / blinking, etc.) of the specific display by the specific display means. A gaming machine characterized in that a light emitting effect is executed according to a corresponding pattern (holding display advance notice effect determination process in FIG. 142, look-ahead mode determination table 901219 in FIG. 143, etc.) may be configured. According to this, by executing the light emitting effect by the pattern corresponding to the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the variable display, the effect of the light emitting effect can be enhanced and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 15, the gaming machine described in any one of the means 9, 12 to 14 (the same applies to the means 10 and 11), and has a variable display (special symbol display: first special symbol display). , 2nd special symbol display, etc.) and variable display means (special symbol display 904: 1st special symbol display 904A, 2nd special symbol display 904B, etc.) and an advantageous state (big hit) that is advantageous for the player. A control means (main board 9011: microcomputer 90100 for game control, etc.) that can be controlled to (game state, etc.) is further provided, and the light emitting effect means makes the display result by the variable display means more advantageous by the control means. A gaming machine characterized in that a light emitting effect according to the second specific pattern is executed when the display result is controlled may be configured.
According to this, when the display result by the variable display means becomes a display result controlled in an advantageous state, the player can have a sense of expectation by executing the light emission effect by the second specific pattern.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 16, the gaming machine according to any one of the means 9, 12 to 15 (the same applies to the means 10 and 11), and the light emitting effect means is a mode of color change (the same applies to the means 10 and 11). The second specification is based on a plurality of common patterns (white-blue, white-green, white-red, etc.) in common (light emission pattern table 901211: light emission patterns LP11-1, LP12-1, LP13-1, LP14-1, etc. in FIG. 136). It is possible to execute the light emission effect by the pattern, and the expectation degree (big hit reliability, etc.) for the player is different and the light emission cycle of the common color is different in the plurality of common patterns (Fig. 140: The higher the big hit reliability). , The switching unit light emission time Δtn is short, etc.), and the gaming machine may be configured. According to this, a plurality of common patterns having a common mode of color change have different expectations for the player and different light emission cycles of the common color, thereby enhancing the effect of the light emission effect. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 17, the gaming machine described in any one of the means 9, 12 to 16 (the same applies to the means 10 and 11), and is in an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player. ) Is further provided with a specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120, etc.) capable of executing a specific effect (reach effect, etc.) corresponding to the notification of whether or not the result is true, and the light emitting effect means executes the specific effect by the specific effect executing means. A gaming machine characterized in that a light emitting effect is executed based on a predetermined operation of a player (button operation: with or without button operation promotion notification, etc.) may be configured. According to this, the effect of the light emitting effect is enhanced by executing the light emitting effect based on the predetermined action of the player during the execution of the specific effect corresponding to the notification of whether or not the advantageous state is advantageous for the player. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 18, the gaming machine according to any one of the means 9, 12 to 17 (the same applies to the means 10 and 11), wherein the light emitting portion (hat-shaped, stick-shaped, arch-shaped). Etc.) is configured to have a plurality of light emitting parts, and the light emitting effect means has a special pattern (a pattern in which the colors of the plurality of light emitting parts are changed in gradation) in which the plurality of light emitting parts are made to emit light in different colors. ) May be configured to be characterized in that the light emitting effect can be executed. According to this, by executing the light emitting effect by a special pattern in which a plurality of light emitting parts emit light in different colors, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light emitting effect and improve the game entertainment.

Further, the gaming machine according to another aspect includes the inventions according to A1 to A19 shown below. The invention according to the above means may further have a configuration of A1 to A19.

(Means A1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes an electric component (for example, a panel side LED 909d, 909e, a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, a right frame LED 909c, and a first effect motor 90303 for rotating a movable portion 90302. The electrical components are driven according to the control means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) for controlling the second effect motor 90330 for sliding the movable member 90321 and the control signal by the serial communication method from the control means. Output means (for example, illuminant drivers 90411a, 90411b, motor drive driver 90412, illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c) for outputting specific signals (for example, output signals from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11). ), The output means outputs a specific signal by the parallel communication method from the specific signal output terminals grouped into a plurality of different groups, and the output timing of the specific signal from the plurality of specific signal output terminals is for each group. (For example, as shown in FIG. 73, the output timings of the output signals from the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11 are distributed for each group), and a plurality of layers in which priorities are set (for example, A data setting area (for example, a control data area shown in FIG. 106) having layers 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 106 is provided, and each layer of the data setting area has at least a light emitter (for example, LED 909a to LED 909a) among electrical components. It is possible to set light emission data (for example, control data for causing LEDs 909a to 909e to emit light) for controlling light emission of 909e), and the control means can control light emission of the light emitter based on the light emission data. (For example, the effect control CPU 90120 outputs the control data set in the control data area shown in FIG. 106 to the light emitter control boards 9016C to 9016F), and is used in a plurality of layers of the data setting area. When the light emission data is set, the light emission control of the light emitting body is performed based on the light emission data set in the layer having the higher priority (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the control data in a plurality of layers. If so, the control data set in the layer to which the highest priority value is assigned is output to each illuminant control board 9016C to 9016F). According to such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the control accuracy of the electric components while suppressing the radiation of radio waves to the outside of the game machine.

(Means A2) In means A1, the light emitting means including a plurality of light emitting elements is controlled to emit light based on a specific signal output from a specific signal output terminal of the same group of output means (for example, a modification shown in FIG. 81). 5), the signal input to the same full-color LED may be connected to the drive output terminal belonging to the same group). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the light emitting timing of the light emitting means including the plurality of light emitting elements while suppressing the radiation of radio waves to the outside of the game machine.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or the means A2, the output means sets the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means as a first output state (for example, a normal slew rate) in which a waveform rises according to a predetermined mode. (See FIG. 71 (1)) and a second output state in which the waveform rises according to a mode of change that is slower than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 71 (2))). ) Can be set to any of the output states (for example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is low. It may be configured to be set to rate output (see FIG. 70). According to such a configuration, the setting can be changed according to the usage environment, and the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be enhanced according to the setting.

(Means A4) The means A3 includes a plurality of output means (for example, illuminant drivers 90411a, 90411b, motor drive driver 90412, illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c), and the plurality of output means output input control signals. The setting of the output state at the time is common (for example, as in the modification 3 shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the through output is set to the output of the normal slew rate for all the serial-parallel conversion circuits. Alternatively, for example, as in the modified example 4 shown in FIG. 80, the slew output may be set to a low slew rate output for all the serial-parallel conversion circuits.) .. According to such a configuration, design mistakes can be reduced while considering noise immunity.

(Means A5) In any of the means A1 to the means A4, the output means has a stop function (for example, a timeout) for stopping the output of a specific signal after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after inputting the control signal. It may be configured to have a function (for example, the timeout function is set to the enabled state by setting the T terminal to H (high). See FIG. 70). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a malfunction due to a wiring malfunction or the like, and it is possible to stably control electrical components.

(Means A6) In the means 5, the control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is used in the effect control process process (see step S9055) for at least a predetermined period (in this example, in this example). By repeatedly outputting control signals every 1 second), lighting control of the panel side LEDs 909d, 909e, the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b, and the right frame LED909c can be continuously executed, or the first production motor 90303 or the first effect motor 90303 or the first (2) The drive control of the effect motor 90330 is controlled so as to be continuously executed). According to such a configuration, control corresponding to the stop function of the output means can be realized.

(Means A7) In means A5 or means A6, the output means can set the stop function to enable or disable (for example, by setting the T terminal to L (low), the timeout function is set to the disabled state. The timeout function is set to the enabled state by setting the T terminal to H (high). See FIG. 70.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting of the stop function of the output means according to the application, and it is possible to reduce the cost by standardizing the parts.

(Means A8) In any one of the means A1 to the means A7, the first motion (standing motion which is the movement from the tilting position to the standing position) and the second motion (the tilting motion which is the movement from the standing position to the tilting position). ) Is possible, and an effect executing means (CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of executing an effect (processing during effect symbol change (S9075), processing during big hit game (S9078), etc.) is provided. The effect executing means is the first pattern in which the special effect of the first aspect is executed in accordance with the first operation of the movable body (the flame effect effect is executed at the time of the first movable body operation effect, and the second movable body operation effect is not executed). Production pattern A1, the production pattern A2) in which the flame effect effect is executed during the first movable body movement production and the flame effect production is also executed during the second movable body movement production, and the first movement accompanying the first movement of the movable body. A second pattern (at the time of the first movable body movement effect) in which the special effect of the second aspect different from the first aspect is executed in accordance with the first operation after the second operation of the movable body after executing the special effect of the aspect. It may be configured so that the effect can be executed by the effect pattern A3) in which the flame effect effect is executed and the lightning effect effect is executed at the time of the second movable body motion effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the effect by changing the mode of the special effect associated with the first movement of the movable body, and to improve the interest of the effect when the movable body operates. it can.

(Means A9) In any of means A1 to means A8, whether or not the special effect is executed during the execution of the specific effect (execution of the fifth round and is controlled to the probabilistic state after the end of the jackpot game state) is determined. It is an effect (an effect in which an image in which a flame effect image 901010 or a thunder effect image 901020 is superimposed and displayed on a black image 901001 is displayed on the effect display device 905) before the effect (a challenge effect notified by an effect mode). , The rate at which the predetermined notification is performed in the specific effect differs depending on which of the first pattern and the second pattern the effect is executed (when the effect pattern A3 is selected, the effect patterns A1, The probability variation jackpot may be notified at a higher rate than when A2 is selected). According to such a configuration, the player becomes interested in which of the first pattern and the second pattern the effect is executed, and the interest can be improved.

(Means A10) In any one of the means A1 to the means A9, the effect executing means executes the special effect of the second aspect in accordance with the first operation of the movable body in the third pattern (at the time of the first movable body operation effect). The lightning effect effect is executed and the second movable body motion effect is not executed. Effect pattern B1, The lightning effect effect is executed during the first movable body motion effect, and the lightning effect effect is also executed during the second movable body motion effect. The effect can be executed in the effect pattern B2), and when the effect is executed in the third pattern, the ratio of the predetermined state (probability change state) is higher than that in the case where the effect is executed in the first pattern. It may be configured. According to such a configuration, the player expects that the special effect of the second aspect is executed in association with the first operation of the movable body, but tentatively, the special effect of the first aspect is performed in association with the first operation. Even when the effect is executed, it is expected that the special effect of the second aspect will be executed along with the subsequent first operation, so that the interest in the special effect can be maintained.

(Means A11) In any one of the means A1 to the means A10, an operating means (push button 9031B) that can be operated by the player is further provided, and the mode of the special effect is changed according to the operation of the operating means (black image). It may be configured so that it is possible to change from an image in which the flame effect image 901010 is superimposed and displayed on the 901001 to an image in which the lightning effect image 901020 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 901001). According to such a configuration, the player can expect a change in the mode of the special effect by the operation, and can enhance the interest of the special effect.

(Means A12) In any one of the means A1 to the means A7, the first motion (standing motion which is the movement from the tilting position to the standing position) and the second motion (the tilting motion which is the movement from the standing position to the tilting position). ) Is possible, and an effect executing means (CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of executing an effect (processing during effect symbol change (S9075), processing during big hit game (S9078), etc.) is provided. The effect executing means is the first pattern in which the special effect of the first aspect is executed in accordance with the first operation of the movable body (the flame effect effect is executed at the time of the first movable body operation effect, and the second movable body operation effect is not executed). Production pattern A1, the production pattern A2) in which the flame effect effect is executed during the first movable body movement production and the flame effect production is also executed during the second movable body movement production, and the first movement accompanying the first movement of the movable body. A second pattern (at the time of the first movable body movement effect) in which the special effect of the second aspect different from the first aspect is executed in accordance with the first operation after the second operation of the movable body after executing the special effect of the aspect. The effect can be executed with the effect pattern A3), in which the flame effect effect is executed and the lightning effect effect is executed at the time of the second movable body movement effect. When the effect is executed in the second pattern, the first It may be configured so that the ratio of the predetermined state (probability change state) is higher than that when the effect is executed by the pattern. According to such a configuration, by changing the mode of the special effect associated with the first operation of the movable body, the effect can be diversified, and thus the interest in the effect when the movable body operates can be improved.

(Means A13) In the means A12, the special effect is a specific effect (a challenge effect that is executed during the execution of the fifth round and notifies whether or not it is controlled to a probabilistic state after the end of the jackpot game state). It is an effect executed at a timing earlier than that (an effect of displaying an image in which a flame effect image 901010 or a lightning effect image 901020 is superimposed and displayed on a black image 901001 on the effect display device 905), and the first pattern and the second pattern Depending on which pattern the effect is executed in, the rate at which the predetermined notification is performed in the specific effect differs (when the effect pattern A3 is selected, the effect pattern A1 and A2 are selected as compared with the case where the effect patterns A1 and A2 are selected. It may be configured so that the probability variation jackpot is notified at a high rate). According to such a configuration, the player becomes interested in which of the first pattern and the second pattern the effect is executed, and the interest can be improved.

(Means A14) In the means A12 or the means A13, the effect executing means executes the special effect of the second aspect in accordance with the first operation of the movable body (the lightning effect effect is executed at the time of the first movable body operation effect). The second movable body movement effect is not executed. The effect pattern B1, the lightning effect effect is executed during the first movable body motion effect, and the lightning effect effect is executed during the second movable body motion effect B2). Even if the effect can be executed and the effect is executed in the third pattern, the ratio of the effect to the predetermined state (probability change state) is higher than that in the case where the effect is executed in the first pattern. Good. According to such a configuration, the player expects that the special effect of the second aspect is executed in association with the first operation of the movable body, but tentatively, the special effect of the first aspect is performed in association with the first operation. Even when the effect is executed, it is expected that the special effect of the second aspect will be executed along with the subsequent first operation, so that the interest in the special effect can be maintained.

(Means A15) In any one of the means A12 to the means A14, an operating means (push button 9031B) that can be operated by the player is further provided, and the mode of the special effect is changed according to the operation of the operating means (black image). It may be configured so that it is possible to change from an image in which the flame effect image 901010 is superimposed and displayed on the 901001 to an image in which the lightning effect image 901020 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 901001). According to such a configuration, the player can expect a change in the mode of the special effect by the operation, and can enhance the interest of the special effect.

(Means A16) In any of the means A1 to the means A15, different light emission data are set in each layer of the data setting area according to the game state (for example, as shown in FIG. 106, the game state is set. The combination of control data set in layers 1 to 5 is different depending on whether it is a low base state, a high base state, or a big hit game state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to control the light emission of the light emitting body according to the priority order according to the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Means A17) In means A16, light emission data for controlling light emission of a light emitting body according to an error notification is set in the layer in which the highest priority is set among the layers of the data setting area, regardless of the game state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 106, control data corresponding to the error notification is set in the layer 5 having the highest priority regardless of the gaming state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to control the light emission of the light emitting body by giving priority to error notification regardless of the gaming state.

(Means A18) In any one of the means A1 to the means A17, the output means (for example, the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c) includes the address information from the control means. Based on the control signal by the serial communication method, a specific signal by the parallel communication method (for example, the output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) is output to the electric component corresponding to the address information, and a plurality of signals are output. The address information is set discontinuously in a predetermined settable range for at least a part of the electric parts of the above (for example, as shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the light emitter drivers 90411a, 90411b, 90413a to Of the addresses that can be assigned to the 90413c and the motor drive driver 90412, the addresses [05] to [06] are unused addresses, and the addresses [04] to [07] are discontinuous. ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility of malfunction in the control of the electric component when the address information included in the control signal output from the control means is inadequate.

(Means A19) In any one of the means A1 to the means A17, the output means (for example, the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c) includes the address information from the control means. Based on the control signal by the serial communication method, a specific signal by the parallel communication method (for example, the output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) is output to the electric component corresponding to the address information, and a plurality of signals are output. The address information is set in the range of the predetermined value (for example, address [02]) or more, which exceeds the minimum value (for example, address [00]) among the values in the predetermined settable range for the electric component of. For example, as shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, among the addresses that can be assigned to the light emitter drivers 90411a, 90411b, 90413a to 90413c and the motor drive driver 90412, the addresses are immediately assigned from the minimum value (for example, address [00]). Instead of being configured as such, it is configured so that it is assigned from a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value (for example, address [02]) or more, and addresses from the minimum value to less than the predetermined value (for example, addresses [00] to [ 01]) may be configured to be an unused address). According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility of malfunction in the control of the electric component when the address information included in the control signal output from the control means is inadequate.

In addition, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include the inventions (1) to (4) shown below. The inventions according to the means A1 to A19 may further have the configurations (1) to (4).

(1) A display means (effect display device 905, etc.) capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects (reach effect, etc.), a movable body (movable member 90321, etc.), and a movable body effect for operating the movable body can be executed. A plurality of types of movable body effect means (CPU 90120 for effect control, movable body effect process in the effect symbol changing process of S9075 in the effect control process process of FIG. 104, etc.) are provided when the movable body effect is executed. Of the effect displays (battle reach effect, story reach effect, etc.), different forms of effect display (particle effect image 9071 according to the battle reach effect, depending on the story reach effect) depending on which effect display is performed. The flame effect image 9073, etc.) can be displayed by the display means (FIGS. 115, 116, etc.) (the effect display process, etc. in the effect symbol changing process of S9075 in the effect control process process of FIG. 104).

According to such a configuration, when the movable body effect is executed, it is possible to display different forms of the effect display depending on which of the plurality of types of effect display is performed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of linking the movement of the movable body and the effect display of the display means.

(2) In the game machine of (1), when a specific type of effect display (battle reach effect, etc.) is executed among the effect displays on which the movable body effect is executed, the effect display of the specific mode is displayed. It is possible to execute an effect of superimposing (the particle effect images 9071 and the like in FIGS. 115 (D) and (E)) on the specific type of effect display (display of the winning effect image) (FIGS. 115 (A) to (E). G) etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to link a specific type of effect display on which the movable body effect is executed and the effect display of the display means, and the movement of the movable body and the display means by the specific type of effect display can be used. It is possible to further enhance the effect of the effect linked with the effect display of.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2), when a predetermined type of effect display (story reach effect, etc.) is executed among the effect displays on which the movable body effect is executed, a predetermined mode is used. The effect display (flame effect image 9073 of FIGS. 116 (D) and (E)) is displayed as a predetermined image (black image 9072 of FIGS. 116 (D) and (E)) displayed in the entire display area of the display means. Etc.), it is possible to execute an effect of superimposing and displaying (FIGS. 116 (A) to (G), etc.).

According to such a configuration, in addition to being able to link a predetermined type of predetermined effect on which the movable body effect is executed and the effect display by the display means, the game emphasizes the movable body effect. Can improve the interest of.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3), the movable body (movable member 90321 or the like) has a standby position (first position or the like shown in FIGS. 95 and 96) and an advance position (FIG. It is possible to move to 95, the second position shown in FIG. 96, etc.), and when the game machine is started, a confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable body (initialization of the movable member in step S9051B in FIG. 103). Further includes a control means (CPU 90120 for effect control, etc.) for executing a break-in operation (step S9051A in FIG. 103, an operation in the movable member break-in process in FIG. 105, etc.) for moving the movable body (initial operation in the process). ..

According to such a configuration, a confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable body and a break-in operation for moving the movable body are executed. Therefore, since the movement of the movable body is not accustomed to it, it is possible to suppress the influence on the movement of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the movable body from not operating satisfactorily.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a front view of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the closed state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the open state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit configuration example of a relay board, an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the relationship between the random number for jackpot determination and the jackpot determination value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch passing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the hold storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the 1st special symbol change in the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for passing through the 1st gate. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big prize opening opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol process process. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of the special symbol display control processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the external output signal output by a game machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of the external output signal output by a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ordinary symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal design normal processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the ordinary symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric accessory operation process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the production control microcomputer. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving a confirmation command. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the instruction notification control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the demo display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the demo display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the background symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit middle processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of instruction notification in this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of instruction notification in this embodiment. It is a timing chart when the jackpot game state ends and is controlled to the first KT state. It is a flowchart which shows the hold storage display control processing in the modification. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol change start processing in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows the specific display control processing in the modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the screen layout in the modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display control such as the 2nd hold display in a modification. It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a figure which shows the structural example of the drive control board, and the structural example of the light emitting body control board for performing lighting control of a panel side LED. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the light emitting body control board for performing the lighting control of the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b, and the right frame LED909c. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each input / output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit shown in FIG. 69. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the slew rate setting of the through output of a clock signal and data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control data format. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the output timing of the signal from each drive output terminal in a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification at the time of branching the control signal output by one light emitting body driver mounted on a light emitting body control board on a board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the modification 3. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the modification 3. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the modification 4. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the modification 5. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the modification 6. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the modification 6. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the modification 6. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the modification 7. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the modification 7. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the modification 7. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the address given to each light emitter driver and the motor drive driver. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the address given to each light emitter driver and the motor drive driver. (A) is a front view showing the effect unit, and (B) is a rear view. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which the production unit was seen diagonally from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which the production unit was seen from diagonally behind. (A) is a front view showing a state in which the movable part is in an inclined position, and (B) is a front view showing a state in which the movable part is in an upright position. (A) is a rear view showing a pinion gear, and (B) is a rear view showing a rack gear. (A) is a schematic view showing a state in which a movable member is in a first position, and (B) is a schematic view showing a state in which a movable member is in a second position. (A) is a side view of a schematic view showing a state in which the movable member is in the first position, and (B) is a state in which the movable member is in the second position. (A) is a state in which the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, (B) is a state in which the rack gear is moved, and (C) is a schematic view showing a state in which the rack gear is regulated. (A) to (D) are enlarged views of the main part showing the state of the gear until the regulated state is reached. (A) is a regulated state, (B) is a state changed to a regulated state by rotating the pinion gear in the first operating direction, and (C) is a schematic view showing a drive initial state. (A) is a regulated state, (B) is a state changed to a regulated state by rotating the pinion gear in the second operating direction, and (C) is a schematic view showing a drive initial state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the moving member break-in process. It is a figure which shows an example of the control data area. It is a time chart which shows the LED control example. It is a time chart which shows the LED control example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect execution setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect execution setting process. (A) to (D) are explanatory views which show the situation which changes to the regulation state by the regulation means as the modification 1 of the movable part drive mechanism. (A) to (D) are explanatory views which show the situation which changes to the regulation state by the regulation means as the modification 2 of the movable part drive mechanism. (A) to (D) are explanatory views which show the situation which changes to the regulation state by the regulation means as the modification 3 of the movable part drive mechanism. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a regulation part as a modification 4 of the movable part drive mechanism, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a regulation part as a modification 5 of the movable part drive mechanism. It is a display screen view of the production display device when a battle reach production is executed. It is a display screen view of the effect display device when a story reach effect is executed. It is a timing chart which shows the control example of the effect effect and the movable body effect in a specific super reach effect. It is a timing chart which shows the control example of the effect effect and the movable body combination operation effect in a specific super reach effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect pattern of a movable body motion effect and an effect effect. It is a display screen diagram which shows the display example of the effect display device when a movable body motion effect and an effect effect are executed. It is a timing chart which shows the control example of a movable body motion effect and an effect effect. It is a display screen diagram which shows the other display example of the effect display device when a movable body motion effect and an effect effect are executed. It is a timing chart which shows other control examples of a movable body motion effect and an effect effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the output timing of the signal from each drive output terminal in a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is a figure for demonstrating the principle of light emission effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the light emission pattern table. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the light emitting effect distribution table. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the light emission control table. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of the light emission control generation data. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of the light emission control generation data. It is an example of a light emission pattern and the timing chart which shows the time change of the RGB value corresponding to each light emission pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of the gradation control data. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of the gradation control data. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of the gradation control data. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of light-emitting effect processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the light emission pattern table. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of the light emission control generation data. It is an example of a light emission pattern and the timing chart which shows the time change of the RGB value corresponding to each light emission pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of the light emission control generation data. It is an example of a light emission pattern and the timing chart which shows the time change of the RGB value corresponding to each light emission pattern. It is an example of a light emission pattern and the timing chart which shows the time change of the RGB value corresponding to each light emission pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of hold display notice effect decision processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the look-ahead mode determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the principle of light emission effect. It is explanatory drawing of the change of the emission color for each emission part.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine (ball game machine) 1 as viewed from the front. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown here as an example of a gaming machine, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and is, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like. May be good.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided in the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including (excluding board 6).

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 3, a surplus ball receiving plate 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 3 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 is formed in which the hit game ball (hit ball) can flow down.

An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition, which is the first execution condition (for example, the hit ball has won the first start winning opening 13). Satisfaction of the display area (hereinafter referred to as the first variable display unit 9a) for variably displaying the decorative symbol for production (first decorative symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result, and the second start condition which is the second execution condition. A display area in which a plurality of types of decorative symbols (second decorative symbols) that can be identified based on (for example, the hit ball has won the second start winning opening 14) are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. (Hereinafter referred to as a second variable display unit 9b) and a display area (hereinafter, a background symbol) in which it is easier for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents than the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b. There is a display unit 9c). Note that it is easy to visually recognize the displayed contents, for example, while the size of the display area is large and the displayed contents in the variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b are always monochromatic. The display color may change. Further, in this embodiment, the background symbol effect unit 9c is controlled to display identification information (hereinafter, also referred to as a background symbol) in three display areas of left, middle, and right. It should be noted that the winning is that the game ball enters the area defined in advance as the winning area such as the winning opening. Further, to derive and display the display result is to stop and display the symbol. In this embodiment, one background symbol effect unit 9c is provided for two variable display units (first variable display unit 9a and second variable display unit 9b), and the background symbol effect unit 9c has 2 Since the effect corresponding to any of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) that are variably displayed in the two variable display units is executed, whether the decorative symbol status (for example, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed) is executed. It is difficult to grasp (whether or not). In this embodiment, the background symbol is for displaying the symbol variation for the effect on the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device), and corresponds to the effect identification information, the decorative symbol, and the effect symbol. ..

A first special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8a and a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying a special symbol as identification information are provided on the upper part of the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, respectively. Has been done. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a may be referred to as a first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b may be referred to as a second special symbol. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol.

In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the number of first holding storages (holding storage is also referred to as starting storage or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage display 18a composed of four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one. Further, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 18b composed of four indicators for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered in the second start winning opening 14, that is, the number of hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

The first variable display unit 9a performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative (directing) symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a. Further, the second variable display unit 9b performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that perform variable display of the decorative symbol are controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display unit 9a may be referred to as a first decorative symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display unit 9b may be referred to as a second decorative symbol. Further, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol. The type of the first decorative symbol and the type of the second decorative symbol may be the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), or the types may be different. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative symbol includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the type of the second decorative symbol is the numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters and the first decorative symbol. It may include a character different from the character of.

On the display screen of the effect display device 9, the number of valid winning balls in the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the number of first reserved balls, and the number of valid winning balls in the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the number of second reserved storages. There is an area (hereinafter, referred to as a symbol hold storage display unit 18c) for displaying the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of and. As described above, in this embodiment, the total number of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 18c, which is relatively easy for the player to see, so that the player can see the total. It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol holding storage display 18a and the second special symbol holding storage display 18b are four indicators such as lamps and LEDs, which are smaller than the symbol holding storage display unit 18c, respectively. Although it is configured, in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, an indicator of another aspect may be used. As an example, if the first special symbol hold storage display 18a and the second special symbol hold storage display 18b are each composed of one display, the display color is different or the display density is different according to the number of hold storages. Let me do it.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the total number of pending storages that can be displayed, that is, the total number of reserved storages is 8. The symbol hold storage display unit 18c increases the number of lighting display areas by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighting display areas is reduced by one. Alternatively, out of the eight display areas in the symbol hold storage display unit 18c, the number of areas displayed in a color predetermined as a valid start prize is increased by one. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of areas displayed in the colors determined in advance as the effective start prize is reduced by one.

Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4. Therefore, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 when the first reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the first starting condition. When the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 13 when the first reserved memory number is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (first valid starting winning) that satisfies the first starting condition. Similarly, when the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14 when the second reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning in which the second starting condition is not satisfied. When the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14 when the number of second reserved memories is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (second valid starting winning) that satisfies the second starting condition. In this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory is set to 4, the upper limit of the second reserved memory is set to 4, and the upper limit of the total reserved memory is set to 8, but these values are examples. .. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 13a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

A gate 32 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 9. The game ball that has passed through the gate 32 is detected by the gate switch 32a. Further, an operating gate 17 is provided below the gate 32. The game ball that has passed through the operating gate 17 is detected by the operating gate switch 17a.

Below the operating gate 17, a special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 20 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. In the advantageous state (big hit game state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21, so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Below the special variable winning ball device 20, a special variable winning ball device 22 forming a special winning opening 24 for small hits and a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 are provided. As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 15 is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. Although the details will be described later, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom surface formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down. By moving the member forward and backward, the game ball wins in the open state (also called the open state) where the game ball can win in the special winning opening 24 and the second starting winning opening 14 located below the bottom member. Change to an impossible closed state (also called a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 22 moves the bottom member forward toward the front in the small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening 24, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 15 moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed by hitting the normal symbol display 10. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening 14 which is the winning area is executed.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are formed so as to have the same structure, but as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 The special variable winning ball device 22 is slightly larger than the above. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other, the game area 7 was dropped without winning the special variable winning ball device 20. The game ball first falls on the variable winning ball device 15, but at this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is moved backward and the second starting winning opening 14 is in the open state, The game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14, and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball device 22. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening 14 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom surface member of the variable winning ball device 15 and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 22. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 22 is moved backward and the special winning opening 24 is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening 24. Further, if the special winning opening 24 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom surface member of the special variable winning ball device 22 and falls toward the out opening 26 as it is.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 15 is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 22 and The bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 15 is used for a special variable winning. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward the ball device 22, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is on the downstream side. It can be said that it is provided.

In the special winning opening 24, a switch (second count switch 25a, see FIG. 5) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening 24 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 25a, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening 24 opened in the special variable winning ball device 22, the number of prize balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) through other prize openings such as the first start winning opening 13a and the second starting winning opening 13b. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is open-controlled and the special winning opening 24 is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening 24 is closed, the game ball cannot be passed (entered) through the special winning opening 24 to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage for the person.

Further, an S switch 14a capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening 14 is provided in the second starting winning opening 14. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 14a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this embodiment, the gate 32, the operating gate 17, the special variable winning ball device 20 (large winning opening), the variable winning ball device 15 (second starting winning opening 14), and the special variable winning ball device 22 (special). Since the winning opening 24) is provided on the right side of the game area 7, when the player is in a big hit game or in the KT state described later, the player aims at the right side of the game area 7 and launches (so-called right). Hitting operation) is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time required from the game ball passing through the gate 32 to reaching the variable winning ball device 15 is set to be 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the gate 32 and the variable winning ball device 32, and the nail group forming the flow path of the game ball. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the gate 32, and the game ball is the gate 32 in the first KT state described later. The time from passing through to the variable winning ball device 15 being controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when it reaches the variable winning ball device 15. Since it is shorter than the required time of 0.6 seconds, when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the first KT state, the one game ball is released. It is possible to win the variable winning ball device 15 as it is.

Below the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol “7”), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state in which the player is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14) when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. Changes to. In the vicinity of the ordinary symbol display 10, an ordinary symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1.

Decorative lamps 25 that blink during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 that captures a hit ball that has not won a prize is provided at the lower part. Further, two speakers 27 that emit sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right outside the game area 7. Top frame lamps 28a, left frame lamps 28b, and right frame lamps 28c provided on the front frame are provided on the upper outer circumference, the left outer circumference, and the right outer circumference of the game area 7. Further, a prize ball lamp 51 that lights up when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided near the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball burnout lamp 52 that lights up when the supply ball runs out is provided near the right frame lamp 28c. It is provided.

The game machine is a ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball striking handle 5 and launches the game ball into the game area 7 by using the rotational force of the drive motor. ) Is provided. When the player continuously operates the hitting ball operation handle 5, the game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds. The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display ends). Then, the first start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display unit 8a, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the variable display unit 9a. To be started. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved memory displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 18c (total number) on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1.

Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display). The second start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display unit 8b, and the second decorative symbol is started on the second variable display unit 9b. Variable display of is started. That is, the second special symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 14. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved memories displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 18c (total number) on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1. However, even if the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, if the total reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the total number displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 18c is incremented by one.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the first special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened until a certain time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening. One round in the big hit game state is from the time when the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened until a certain period of time elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hit balls wins the big winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening, or when a certain period of time has elapsed after the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened, the continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the right to continue is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, 16 rounds). In addition, a V winning area may be provided in the large winning opening, and the continuation right may be generated on condition that the hit ball wins the V winning area while the special variable winning ball device 20 is open. The number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, the types of jackpots are 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variable jackpot, and 16R probability variable jackpot. For example, if a 2R normal jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot occurs, a two-round jackpot game A state is given, and if a 6R normal jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 2-round jackpot gaming state is granted, and if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 16-round jackpot gaming state is granted.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display 8a is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also The probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b becomes a big hit symbol also increases. That is, not only the jackpot determination based on the first start winning prize but also the jackpot determination based on the second starting winning prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than the low probability state.

Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped in the second special symbol display 8b is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also The probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a becomes a big hit symbol also increases. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the second start winning prize, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the first starting winning prize, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

Further, when the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes the small hit symbol, the state shifts to the small hit game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened until a certain period of time has elapsed so that the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. As a result, the small hit game state is also open so that the player can get a ball, although it is less than the big hit game state.

In the probabilistic state, as described above, the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are jackpot symbols (specific display result: for example. , An odd number of 0-9) is higher than in the low probability state.

Here, the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, the gaming state in the present embodiment includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 22 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is extremely long, and small hits are made. There are very few cases in which a game ball wins a special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side. Easy to win.

The probability change state is a gaming state in which a big hit is more likely to occur than the low probability state. Specifically, since the number of jackpot judgment values in the jackpot determination table in the probability variation state is 10 times the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the low probability state, the probability variation state is more likely to be a jackpot than in the low probability state. It is in a game state that is easy to play.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability that the variable winning ball device 15 will be in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, since it is configured to be a small hit except when it is a big hit when the second special symbol fluctuates (however, except for the case of forced loss described later), the KT state is changed to a smaller hit than the normal state. It is in a game state where it is easy to become. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

The configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 15 will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is set to the normal state. It may be in a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

Next, the transition of the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, in this embodiment, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area 7. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening 13, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the normal state, it shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and after that, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

In this embodiment, the case where the first KT state is terminated when the fluctuation display of 100 times is uniformly completed when the probability is controlled to the low probability / first KT state is shown, but it is limited to such an embodiment. Absent. For example, a plurality of jackpot types that trigger a low probability / first KT state are provided, and the number of fluctuation displays in which the first KT state continues after the jackpot game ends differs depending on the jackpot type (for example, 20 times). Or 30 times, 50 times, 100 times).

In this embodiment, when the player has transitioned to the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the player moves to the right of the game area 7. Aim and perform a game ball launch operation (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening 14, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the KT state, it shifts to the low probability / first KT state, the high probability / first KT state, or the high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and after that, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 2R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

However, as will be described later, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed and the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained even though the jackpot was in the non-KT state before the start of the jackpot, the state shifts to the high probability state. However, it is controlled to shift to the first KT state instead of the second KT state (see steps S2208B and S2209B described later). That is, it is a case where a 16R probability variation big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol even though it is in the normal state, and in such a case, it shifts to the second KT state and a considerable number in the small hit game. If the prize ball is made to be obtained, some players may actively play the game by right-handed in the normal state, and the original playability is impaired. From this, even if you hit right in the normal state and a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, by imposing a penalty by shifting only to the first KT state, in the normal state It is possible to suppress aggressive right-handed games.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b are synchronized with each other. Here, synchronization means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 9a. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 9b.

Further, when the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 9a. When the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, a special decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 9b.

Further, in the background symbol display unit 9c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c. When performing the reach effect, for example, the left and right background symbols are stopped and displayed during the variable display. Then, although there are exceptions as described later, basically, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived on the background symbol display unit 9c. It is displayed (the background symbol is finally stopped in the three display areas). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is a background symbol that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (for example, left). (Three background patterns) with the middle right aligned. Hereinafter, such a background symbol is also referred to as a jackpot symbol.

When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c.

Further, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b at the same time, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. The effect corresponding to any of the variable displays is executed.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed independently, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is completed and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped. When is derived and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends, and the stopped symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed. Further, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, it is late. When the special symbol whose variable display ends is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends.

Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) of a background symbol that has not yet stopped when the stopped background symbol constitutes a part of the jackpot symbol among the three background symbols. ) Is performed, and all or part of the background symbols are displayed in a variable manner while forming all or part of the jackpot symbols.

For example, in the left, middle, and right display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") that becomes a part of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display areas. The display area inside is in a state where variable display is still performed, and a state in which all or part of the symbols in the display area are synchronously and variablely displayed while forming all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, background). The reach display mode or reach is a state in which variable display is performed in all of the left, middle, and right display areas of the symbol display unit 9c, and variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are always aligned.

In addition, at the time of reach, unusual effects are performed with lamps and sounds. The effect and the reach display mode in the background pattern display unit 9c are referred to as a reach effect. In addition, at the time of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the background symbol) can be displayed, or the background of the background symbol display unit 9c (the background color or pattern different from the symbol and the character) can be displayed. The display mode (for example, color, etc.) of (such as) may be changed.

Next, FIGS. 2 to 4 are views showing a special variable winning ball device 22. Hereinafter, the special variable winning ball device 22 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4. Regarding this embodiment, the structure of the special variable winning ball device 22 is described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, but the size is only slightly smaller than that of the special variable winning ball device 22, and the variable winning ball device 22 is used. The structure of the ball device 15 is the same as that of the special variable winning ball device 22.

As shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, the special variable winning ball device 22 includes a rectangular plate-shaped base plate portion 101 that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball device 22 is fixedly supported in the game area 7 by fixing the base plate portion 101 to the game area 7 with, for example, a screw. In the substantially central region of the base plate portion 101, a special winning opening 24 (second starting winning opening 14 in the case of the variable winning ball device 15) that opens toward the front is formed, and a special winning opening in the base plate portion 101 is formed. At a position above the mouth 24, a slit-shaped accommodating hole 102 that is long in the left-right direction is formed for accommodating the bottom surface member 23 on the back surface side (rear side) of the game area 7 when the bottom surface member 23 moves backward. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening 24 is specifically formed on the left side of the center of the base plate portion 101 in the left-right direction, but may be left or right.

The bottom member 23 is tilted downward to the left so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right flows down to the left, and the accommodation hole 102 is tilted downward to the left so as to follow the inclination of the bottom member 23. It is formed to do. The bottom surface member 23 is movable back and forth between the forward-moved state shown in FIG. 3 and the backward-moved state shown in FIG. 4, and the bottom surface member 23 is on the back surface side (rear) of the base plate portion 101. A drive device (not shown) is arranged to move the vehicle forward and backward.

Returning to FIGS. 2 to 4, a flow path forming base 112 projecting forward is formed on the front side of the base plate 101, and a forward movement is formed on the upper portion of the flow path forming base 112. The upstream region 23U, which is the upper end (right end) of the bottom member 23 in this state, and the upstream flow path portion 113, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 23 and forms a flow path for the game ball together with the bottom member 23, A downstream region 23L, which is a lower end (left end) of the bottom member 23, and a downstream flow path portion 114, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 23 and forms a flow path for a game ball together with the bottom member 23, are formed. There is.

Further, the upper part of the flow path forming base portion 112 is recessed downward from the end portion of the upstream side flow path portion 113 and the downstream side flow path portion 114 on the bottom surface member 23 side, and the special winning openings 24 are left and right and left and right in front view. A guide flow path portion 115 for guiding the game ball that has fallen below the bottom surface member 23 to the special winning opening 24 is formed so as to surround the bottom member 23 from below.

The upstream side flow path portion 113 and the downstream side flow path portion 114 are formed so as to incline downward to the left so that the game ball flows down to the left. Further, the bottom portion of the guide flow path portion 115 extends downward to the left toward the special winning opening 24 side and is recessed at a position in front of the special winning opening 24. Then, in the recessed space at the bottom of the guide flow path portion 115, a triangular guide portion 116 that guides the game ball rearward toward the special winning opening 24 side (the back side of the game area 7) is arranged. ing.

Furthermore, a covering portion 117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 113, the downstream side flow path portion 114, and the guide flow path portion 115 from the front is integrally formed on the front portion (player side) of the flow path forming base portion 112. Has been done. The covering portion 117 covers the upstream side flow path portion 113, the downstream side flow path portion 114, and the guide flow path portion 115 from the front, so that the game ball flowing down each of these flow paths portions bounces toward the glass door frame 4. It has a function to prevent it from being lost. In the present embodiment, the covering portion 117 is integrally formed with the flow path forming base portion 112, but it may be fixed separately.

In the special variable winning ball device 22, a flow of game balls continuous in the left-right direction, which is composed of an upstream side flow path portion 113, a bottom surface member 23, and a downstream side flow path portion 114, between the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. Road F is formed. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of regulation pieces 118 for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the flow path F are formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117.

In the present embodiment, the regulation piece 118 is integrally formed with the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117, and is formed in a rib shape protruding forward from the base plate portion 101 or protruding rearward from the covering portion 117, and is a game ball. By interfering with, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball that flows down to the left meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is reduced when there is no regulation piece 118. Delay than. These regulation pieces 118 are formed so as to be arranged at predetermined intervals in the flow direction of the game ball in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. Further, the regulation piece 118 is set to a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width in the front-rear direction of the bottom member 23, and is set to a width dimension in which a game ball can pass between adjacent members. There is. More specifically, in the present embodiment, one regulation piece 118 is formed at a portion of the covering portion 117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 113 from the front, and the downstream side flow path portion of the covering portion 117 is formed. One regulation piece 118 is formed at a portion that covers the 114 from the front. Further, in the portion of the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 that covers the bottom surface member 23, a total of five regulation pieces 118 formed alternately on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 are formed. The number of such regulation pieces 118 is not particularly limited. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the regulation piece 118 is covered by the covering portion 117 from the front (player side).

With the arrangement of the regulation piece 118 as described above, with reference to FIG. 3, the special variable winning ball device 22 (and the variable winning ball device 15 having the same configuration) of the present embodiment attempts to flow down the flow path F. The game ball P meanders down the flow path F. Then, when the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the game ball P is placed in the special winning opening 24 (or the second starting winning opening 14). Basically, it passes through the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) without winning a prize. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 4, when the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which the bottom surface member 23 is moved backward is opened, the game ball P guides the flow path forming base portion 112. It becomes possible to fall into the flow path portion 115, and it is possible to flow down the guide flow path portion 115 and win a prize in the special winning opening 24 (or the second starting winning opening 14).

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 5 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built into the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 56 and a RAM 55 built-in, and the ROM 54 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 57 may be externally attached.

Since the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) will execute (or process) the following. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

Further, the detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operation gate switch 17a are given to the game control microcomputer 560. The input driver circuit 58 is also mounted on the main board 31, and game control controls the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20, the solenoid 106 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 22, and the solenoid 206 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15. An output circuit 59 that is driven according to a command from the computer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31, and a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the game control computer 560 when the power is turned on and a big hit game state are generated. An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the above to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board 31 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting the test signal to the outside of the game machine.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 issues an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Display control is performed between the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that receive and variably display the decorative symbol, the background symbol display unit 9c that variably displays the background symbol, and the symbol hold storage display unit 18c.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 6, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 may not be provided, and only the effect control board 80 may be provided for the effect control.

The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 200 including an effect control CPU 201 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 201 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a capture signal (capture signal) from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 (not shown). The effect control command is received via the input driver 202 and the input port 203 in response to the effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control CPU 201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 209 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 202 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 202 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 77 allows the signal input from the main board 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 of the above is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 6 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 560). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port portion 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided on the outside of the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the input / output port 205. Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the input / output port 204.

In the lamp driver board 35, the signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input / output driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies the signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to the decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side. Further, in this embodiment, the special winning opening lamp 24a is provided in the special variable winning ball device 22, and the lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies it to the special winning opening lamp 24a.

In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input / output driver 702. The voice synthesis IC 703 generates voices and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. Control data corresponding to the sound number data is stored in the voice data ROM 704. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, the fluctuation period of the decorative symbol) in chronological order.

The signal and sound number data for driving the lamp are bidirectionally communicated between the effect control CPU 201, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70 (such as transmitting a response signal from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side). Communicated by communication).

The effect control CPU 201 reads necessary data from the character ROM (not shown) according to the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data that is frequently used among the images displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative symbols and background symbols). It is for keeping. The effect control CPU 201 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 209. The VDP 209 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 201.

In this embodiment, the VDP 209 that controls the display of the effect display device 9 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 209 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 200, and VRAM is mapped there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by VDP. Then, the VDP 209 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

In this embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. However, the circuit for controlling the effect device is 1. It may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, and a second effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27, etc.) is mounted. You may provide two boards with the effect control board of. Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but another board (for example, the audio output board 70 and the lamp shown in FIG. 6). It may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 on the effect control board 80 via the driver board 35 or the like). In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35, and the control means receives the command. Controls related to voice control and lamp control are executed, and the received command is changed to a simplified command as it is or, for example, a simplified command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 that controls the effect display device 9. You may. Further, when two boards, a first effect control board and a second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 is transmitted to the second effect control board. The command is transmitted from the second effect control board to the first effect control board as it is, or after processing (for example, changing the form or content of the command, simplifying, or selecting only the necessary command). It may be configured to be.

Next, the operation of the game machine will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the power is turned on to the game machine and the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether the program content is valid or not. After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, the built-in device is initialized (the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) are initialized, etc.) (step S4). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device determines the interrupt address. This is the mode shown.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port only once (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing in the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the game machine was stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing. In this example, if "55H" is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is backup (on state), and if a value other than "55H" is set, it means that there is no backup (off state).

After confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 56 performs a data check (parity check in this example) of the backup RAM area (step S8). In step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and saved by the same processing in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S91 and S92, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and the unpaid prize ball. This is the part where the data indicating the number is set.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and a control command (power) indicating that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 80 according to the contents. A recovery command as an initialization command at the time of supply recovery) is controlled to be transmitted (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is stored by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the counter count value for generating a random number for jackpot determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, a prize ball in-ball flag, a ball out flag, a payout stop flag, and the like are selectively processed according to a control state. The initial value is set in the flag for.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 in the pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub-board according to the contents to the sub-board. The process is executed (step S14). As the initialization command, there is a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9.

Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S16), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a random number generation counter for determining a big hit). Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the big hit judgment random number generation counter or the like is one round (the big hit judgment random number generation counter or the like). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power off signal is output when, for example, the voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a voltage drop of the power supply supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power supply cutoff detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power supply cutoff signal is output, it executes a power supply stop time process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operating gate switch 17a are input via the input driver circuit 58. , The state determination is performed (switch processing: step S21).

Next, the CPU 56 performs a display control process for controlling the display of the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the first special symbol hold storage display 18a, and the second special symbol hold storage display 18b. Execute (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S32.

Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for jackpot determination used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows. (1) Random 1: Determine whether to generate a big hit or whether to generate a small hit (for big hit judgment) (2) Random 2: Type of big hit, that is, 2R normal big hit, 2R probability variation big hit , 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot (for determining jackpot type) (3) Random 5: determining the variation pattern of the special symbol (for determining variation pattern) (4) Random 6: Determine whether to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for determining the normal symbol hit) (5) Random 7: Determine the initial value of random 1 (for determining the initial value of random 1) (6) Random 8: Determine the initial value of random 6 (for determining the initial value of random 6)

In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 8, the game control microcomputer 560 is used for (1) a random number for determining a jackpot, (2) a random number for determining a jackpot type, and (4) for determining a normal symbol hit. The counter for generating random numbers is counted up (1 addition). That is, they are random numbers for determination, and random numbers other than these are random numbers for display or initial value. In addition, random numbers other than the above-mentioned random numbers (1) to (6) are also used in order to enhance the game effect. Further, in the present embodiment, a common random number (random number 2) is provided as a random number for determining the type of big hit and a random number for determining the type of small hit, but different random numbers are provided for each. You may.

Further, the CPU 56 performs the first special symbol process process (step S26A). In the first special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball device 20 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Next, the CPU 56 performs the second special symbol process process (step S26B). In the second special symbol process process, according to the second special symbol process flag for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 in a predetermined order according to the game state. Execute the corresponding process. The CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Then, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol process process (step S26C). In the normal symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 10 and the variable winning ball device 15 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the game state.

Next, the CPU 56 performs the hold storage process (step S27a). In the hold storage process, the CPU 56 executes a process of calculating and managing the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number.

Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to display control of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and an effect control command related to the number of reserved memories (effect control command control process: step S28).

Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a. (Step S30). Specifically, the payout control board 37 responds to the winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a being turned on. A payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 informs the output port of the contents related to the on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port. Output (step S31: output processing).

Further, the CPU 56 sets the first special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the first special symbol according to the value of the first special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data. At the same time, the special symbol display for setting the second special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the second special symbol according to the value of the second special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data. Control processing is performed (step S32). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, so that the special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b can be variably displayed. To execute.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). Step S33). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 executes variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed by the two indicators, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, but the CPU 56 uses the CPU 56. Control is performed so that no big hit occurs at the same time on the two indicators.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot judgment table includes a jackpot judgment table at the time of non-probability change used in a low probability state (low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT state) and a probability change state (high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high). There is a jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change used in probability / second KT state)). Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 10 is set in the non-probability change jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 10 is set in the probability variation jackpot determination table. .. The numerical value shown in FIG. 10 is the jackpot determination value.

The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1). The jackpot determination random number value is any one shown in FIG. If it matches the jackpot judgment value, it is decided to make a jackpot for the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 10 indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

In this embodiment, if it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, all of them are unconditionally missed. In addition, if it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, all are unconditionally made a small hit (however, as will be described later, it is a forced loss after the fact). In some cases).

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table 131a stored in the ROM 54. The jackpot type determination table 131a sets the jackpot type to "2R normal jackpot" or "2R" based on a random number (random 2) for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining one of "probability variation jackpot", "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", or "16R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 11A, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 20%, and the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 45%. It is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", and it is determined as "6R normal jackpot" with a probability of 35%. Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 30%, and the probability of 30%. Is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", 5% probability is determined as "2R probability variation jackpot", and 35% probability is determined as "2R normal jackpot".

The "16R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 16 rounds and shifts to the high probability / second KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, it shifts to the second KT state. See steps S2207A, S2208A, S2207B, and S2210B described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the second KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

However, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if the non-KT state is set before the start of the big hit, the "16R probability variation big hit" is not the second KT state. It may shift to the first KT state (see steps S2208B and S2209B described later).

The "6R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 6 rounds and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the state is also shifted to the first KT state. See steps S2210A, S2211A, S2212B, and S2213B described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S2212A described later). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S2213A and S2010 to S2013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the state is also shifted to the first KT state. See steps S2212B and S2213B described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S2214B described later). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S2215B and S2010-S2013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The type of jackpot type is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in addition to the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation jackpot, and the 2R normal jackpot, the 3R probability variation jackpot to the 7R probability variation jackpot may be determinably configured, and various aspects can be considered. Be done.

12 to 14 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in this embodiment. The EXT shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. Eighteen types from # 01 to # 18 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 07 or 01 to 18) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 12A is displayed. It is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 12A, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the KT shown in FIG. 12B The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for time is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 12B, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 13 (C) is displayed. It is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 02. Specifically, when it is determined to be a small hit, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain period of 5 minutes.

In this embodiment, even in the non-KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, a certain prize ball can be expected by winning the game ball to the special prize opening 24. It will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is reduced. By doing so, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and the situation where a small hit is aimed at winning a prize ball is prevented even though the player is in a non-KT state. In this embodiment, the "frequency of small hits" is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. The rate of occurrence of is higher than the normal state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is set to 5 even in the case of a big hit. By making it relatively long, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning the special winning opening 24 during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 13 (D) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 13 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 03 to # 04. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 13D, when the small hit is determined as the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as the small hit. Pattern # 03 (variable pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening) is determined. In this embodiment, as described above, when the first KT state is controlled, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening 24 in the ball device 22 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 22 is controlled in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening 24. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 are used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 22 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 24. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the first KT state.

Further, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, FIG. 13 (E). The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 2nd to 99th fluctuations shown in is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 13 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation patterns # 05 to # 07, # 30 It is decided to be one of. Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (E), when a small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # 05 of the shortened fluctuation. Alternatively, the second fluctuation pattern # 030 of the shortened fluctuation with a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second may be determined. The second variation pattern # 05 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second variation pattern # 30 can be selected only when one or more second hold memories are stored. It is a fluctuation pattern. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. In this embodiment, when a small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state and the fluctuation display is executed based on the second fluctuation pattern # 06, the effect display device 9 In the variable display of the background symbol in the above, the effect of fanning the pattern is executed, such as reaching or sliding effect.

In addition, the 100th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 100th variation shown in FIG. 13 (F) is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 13 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 08 to # 09. Will be done.

In this embodiment, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as "during chance time" is displayed on the effect display device 9. As shown in FIG. 13 (F), when a small hit is determined as the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 9 displays a character such as "chance time ends !!" The second variation pattern # 08 is determined to be accompanied by. Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (F), when the big hit is determined as the 100th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 9 displays characters such as "chance time ends !!" The second variation pattern # 09 with a predetermined revival display after the display is determined.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, when a big hit is obtained in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is determined. It is configured as follows. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is set to a long fluctuation time, Since the change of the second special symbol executed during the big hit change of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced loss, the forced loss occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player makes a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from this. Therefore, in this embodiment, by setting the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, it is possible to shift to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol before the forced loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike the present embodiment, even when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first configuration). If the game machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped), the fluctuation time of the first special symbol jackpot in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that a small hit can occur at least a plurality of times. (For example, 1 minute) is configured to be secured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 14 (G) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 14 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 10 to # 12. Will be done.

As in the case of the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), the second start prize is also obtained when the small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state. The variation pattern for preparing to open the mouth (second variation pattern # 10) may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), when a big hit is determined as the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 12 including the effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 11 including the battle effect may be determined.

Further, in the case of executing the fluctuation display after the second fluctuation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state, FIG. 14 (H) shows. The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and for the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 14 (H), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation patterns # 13 to # 15, # 31 It is decided to be either.

As in the case of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the fluctuations It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 13 of the shortened fluctuation having a short time of 5 seconds or the second fluctuation pattern # 031 of the shortened fluctuation having a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second. The second variation pattern # 13 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second variation pattern # 31 can be selected only when one or more second hold memories are stored. It is a fluctuation pattern. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), when the big hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations of the high probability / first KT state, it is for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 15 including the battle effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), the second fluctuation pattern # 14 including the battle effect may be determined even when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state. ..

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 14 (I) is selected. The fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 16 to # 18.

As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when a small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the shortening fluctuation occurs in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). The second fluctuation pattern # 16 of the shortened fluctuation, which has a shorter fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds than when the fluctuation display is executed, may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (I), when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation including the continuation effect suggesting whether or not the high probability / second KT state continues. It may be determined by pattern # 17. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (I), when a big hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends after the continuous production. The second variation pattern # 18 including the effect is determined.

In this embodiment, when the variation pattern including the continuation effect and the battle effect is determined, the effect display device 9 executes the continuation effect and the battle effect in the variation display of the background symbol. When it becomes a big hit (16R probability change big hit, 6R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit), the production of the winning mode is executed in the battle production, and when it becomes a normal big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit), in the battle production. The effect of the defeat mode is executed, and in the case of a small hit, the effect of the draw mode is executed in the battle effect. Not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, even in the case of a 2R probability variation big hit in which the number of rounds during the big hit game is small, the effect of the defeat mode may be executed in the battle effect. ..

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the case of the second KT state. Cases are shown, but not limited to such aspects. For example, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 15 (1) shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state, and FIG. 15 (2) shows the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 15 in the second KT state. The opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 22 is shown.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (1). As shown in FIG. 15 (1), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 executes a variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hits. If it is determined that the symbol is out of line, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10, and if it is determined to be off, the out-of-order symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 0.1 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. It becomes. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds. The opening time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 24 (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is completed, the next variable winning ball device 15 can be opened only after the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol. After at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 0.1 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, has elapsed. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the first KT state, it is normal that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-opening processing time of 0.1 seconds, has passed, the game ball is gated. The time required from passing through 32 to reaching the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state is usually in the state where the normal symbol is not changed. Since it is shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 in a state where the symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 15 is already in the open state. The game ball will reach the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball that has passed through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 15.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (2). As shown in FIG. 15 (2), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 executes a variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hits. If it is determined that the symbol is out of line, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10, and if it is determined to be off, the out-of-order symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 second. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 2.6 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. It becomes.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is as short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol variation time 1.0 second + symbol confirmation time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, so that the downstream side is compared with the first KT state. It is easy for the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 22 of the above, and it is easy for the game ball to win the special winning opening 24.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the second KT state, it is normal that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After a total of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time before opening the second start winning opening of 2.6 seconds, has passed, and the game ball is gated. The time required from passing through 32 to reaching the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state is usually in the state where the normal symbol is not changed. Since the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 is longer than the time when the symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state. The game ball will reach the variable winning ball device 15 before it is played. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for the game ball that has passed through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed to win the variable winning ball device 15.

In this embodiment, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and opening control of the variable winning ball device 15 is the normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56). This is done by executing (see step S26C). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 also executes a process of determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol in the normal symbol process process of step S26C, depending on whether it is in the KT state or the normal state. Whether or not to hit the normal figure is determined by different probabilities (for example, 10/11 in the KT state and 1/11 in the normal state). The same probability regardless of whether the gaming state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state, or whether it is a jackpot gaming state. (For example, 10% or 100%) may be used to determine whether or not to make a normal figure.

In this embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same at 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 is made different by making it as short as 0.1 seconds in the 1 KT state and as long as 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after the variable winning ball device 15 is closed can be controlled, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closed period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 may be different depending on the device. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 in the first KT state is shortened by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening 24 in the first KT state. it can.

Further, for example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable winning is as shown in FIG. 15 (1). A second opening pattern (long opening) in which the ball device 15 is opened for a long time and the variable winning ball device 15 shown in FIG. 15 (2) is opened for a short time if a special flag is not set. It may be configured to be controlled by short opening). That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, out of the 100 times shortened fluctuation period of the special symbol in the low probability / first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 99th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort to the variable winning ball device 15 being long open when performing a left-handed notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 15 is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 15, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 15 may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 15 from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability / non-KT state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 15 is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 32 The variable winning ball device 15 is not opened by the time the game ball that has passed through the above reaches the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special winning opening 24 can be won.) On the other hand, in this embodiment, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened after the game ball passes through the gate 32 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 15. Since it is set to start, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

16 and 17 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 200. In the example shown in FIG. 16, the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8022 (H) correspond to the variable display of the special symbol and correspond to the first variable display unit 9a or the second variable display unit. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in 9b. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 200 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8022 (H), the first variable display unit 9a or the second variable display unit 9b Controls to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 16R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation received by the effect control microcomputer 200 immediately before the first fluctuation pattern command is specified. Since the command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the first decorative symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the second decorative symbol. The display result designation command can be used for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, but the display result designation command for the first decorative symbol and the display result designation command for the second decorative symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 does not send a display result specification command, but corresponds to each of 15R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control microcomputer 200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command (first decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the first decorative symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command (second decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the second decorative symbol.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) for designating the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big winning opening) for designating the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 13 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 14 in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the number of first reserved storages may be transmitted as the first valid start prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start prize designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / second KT state.

The effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, and the display state of the lamp is changed. Then, the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process process (step S26A) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the first special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball device 20 is executed.

When the CPU 56 performs the first special symbol process process, the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 provided in the game board 6 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the first starting winning opening 13 (step S311), the first starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S312). After that, the CPU 56 performs any of steps S300 to S307 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S300 to S307 are as follows.

First special symbol normal process (step S300): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending memory counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the first big hit flag. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S301 (1 in this example). The first jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

First variation pattern setting process (step S301): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S302 (2 in this example).

First display result designation command transmission process (step S302): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S303 (3 in this example).

First special symbol changing process (step S303): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the first fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 is notified. Controls the transmission of the symbol confirmation designation command, and updates the internal state (first special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 so that the decorative symbol is stopped when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

First special symbol stop process (step S304): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first jackpot flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S304A (8 in this example). If the first jackpot flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer in the display control process in step S22.

First gate passage waiting process (step S304A): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. In the first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 17. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 17 is detected, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example).

First big winning opening pre-opening process (step S305): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. In the first large winning opening opening preprocessing, the special variable winning ball device 20 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 20) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. In addition, the execution time of the process during opening of the first special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The first big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the first big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

First Grand Prize Opening Opening Process (Step S306): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20, and the like are performed. Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, the control is performed to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

First jackpot end process (step S307): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first reserved storage number). (Whether or not is 4) is confirmed (step S212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the first start port switch passing process is terminated as it is.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step S213), and at the same time, the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S214). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 20) (step S215). .. In the process of step S215, the software random numbers for jackpot determination (random 1), jackpot type determination random numbers (random 2), and fluctuation pattern determination random numbers (random 5) are extracted and stored in the storage area. .. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 5) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 directly extracts a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random number 5) in the first variation pattern setting process described later. You may.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the holding storage. As shown in FIG. 20, in the first hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first hold storage number is secured. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer store a random number for determining a jackpot (random 1), a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (random 5). Will be done. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

Further, the control is performed to transmit the first effective start winning command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S216). It should be noted that this first effective start winning command includes a preliminary determination result.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process (step S300) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300. The case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300 means that the first special symbol display 8a is not displaying the variation of the first special symbol, and This is the case even during the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined number of times).

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step S52A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed.

If the first hold storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S51A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55, and the RAM 55. (Step S53A), decrement the value of the first reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the 1st reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step S54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55 is set to the first reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiable and saved.

After that, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S60A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag, the first KT flag, and the second KT flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. If the 1KT flag is on, it is determined that it is in the low probability / first KT state, and the low probability / first KT background specification command is issued. If the probability variation flag is on and the first KT flag is on, the probability is high / first. High accuracy / 1st KT background specification command is determined to be in the 1KT state, and high probability / 2nd KT state is determined to be high accuracy / 2nd KT when the probability variation flag is on and the 2nd KT flag is on. Send the background specification command.

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step S64AA). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S68A without performing the processing after step S64A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the material is not limited to the above. For example, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step S64AA, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for jackpot determination (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S65A. Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the second special symbol is being changed in step S64AA, steps S64A to S161A A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a completely different random number) without performing the processing of. By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random number 1) from the first random number storage buffer (step S64A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step). S65A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S66A), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step S67A). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot based on random 2 (step S160A), the jackpot type is stored (step S161A), and the process proceeds to step S68A. .. Further, if the jackpot is not achieved in step S66A (that is, if it is missed), the process proceeds to step S68A.

In this embodiment, when the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it is unconditionally determined to be all out of order, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, even if the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it may be determined to be a small hit with a low probability.

Then, in step S68A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S68A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S68A is determined.

In step S65A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S302) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first selects any variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 12A to 12B according to the game state. (Step S201). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in step S201 and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5) stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Then, which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 12 is used is determined (step S1700). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 560 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1701).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S1700, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first special symbol process timer and fluctuates. At the same time as starting the time measurement (step S1702), the measurement execution flag described later is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is started (step S1703). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first display result designation command transmission process (step S1706).

In the first display result designation command transmission process (step S302), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) is based on the determination result of whether or not to make a big hit and the determination result of the big hit type. Control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 200.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol changing process (step S303) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step S1121A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step S1122A), the symbol is confirmed on the effect control microcomputer 200. Control to transmit the designated command (step S1123A). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1124A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (step S1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1123A and controls to transmit the symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1123A). , The value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S304) (step S1124A).

By executing the processes of steps S1125A to S1125A, in this embodiment, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol Is forcibly stopped so that a big hit does not occur at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control microcomputer 200 side, when the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the first variable display unit 9a in the first variable display unit 9a is based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command. 1 The stop display of the decorative symbol is stopped, and the display result 1 designated command transmitted in step S302 is used to control the stop display of the out-of-order symbol as a variable display result of the first decorative symbol.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 18 and the second special symbol process process shown in FIG. 28, the first start port switch passage process is performed for each timer interrupt (see step S312). And the second start port switch passing process (see step S322) is executed. Therefore, even if the stop display of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed, if a new start prize is generated, It is configured to store a new hold memory.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (N in step S1125A), the process ends as it is.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the KT count counter indicating the low probability / remaining number of times in the first KT state is “0” (step S2010), and in “0”. If there is, that is, if it is not in the low probability / first KT state, the process proceeds to step S2014. When the value of the KT count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the CPU 56 subtracts the value of the KT count counter by "1" (step S2011) to see if it becomes "0". (Step S2012). If the value of the KT count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step S2014. When the value of the KT count counter becomes "0", that is, when the 100th fluctuation of the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, the CPU 56 resets the 1st KT flag indicating the 1st KT state ( Step S2013) and step S2014. As a result, the first KT state ends (shifts to the low probability / non-KT state) when 100 fluctuations are completed in the low probability / first KT state.

In step S2014, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step S2014). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability change flag, the first KT flag, the second KT flag, and the KT count counter if they are set (step S2015).

Next, the CPU 56 controls to start external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 (see FIGS. 32 and 33) if they have not yet been output (step S2015X).

Next, the CPU 56 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step S2017), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step S2018), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". (Step S2019), and set the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (step S2020).

In this embodiment, by executing the process of step S2015X, with respect to the external outputs of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2, even before the game ball passes through the operating gate 17 and the jackpot game is started. , The external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 is started at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed.

Although details will be described later, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, a right-handed notification that urges the player to launch a game ball to the right of the game area 7 can be executed. .. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, as a right-handed notification, a firing promotion notification that urges the player to launch the game ball aiming at the operating gate 17 can be executed.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the gate 32 or the operating gate 17 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, low volume sound output or low volume). The screen display) may be configured to give a left-handed notification to the player to urge the player to launch the game ball to the left of the game area 7. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 or the special winning opening 24 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, a loud sound). It may be configured to perform left-handed notification by output or large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area 7 is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. Therefore, the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation may be configured to perform the left-handed notification in a manner in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the game machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, when the number of detected game balls at the gate 32, the operating gate 17, the second starting winning opening 14, and the special winning opening 24 reaches a certain number, a left-handed notification is performed. May be good. Further, at the gate 32 and the operating gate 17, when the game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and the second start winning opening 14 and the special winning opening 14 and the special winning opening In 24, when a specific number (for example, one) or more of game balls smaller than a predetermined number is detected, a left-handed notification may be performed.

Further, for example, the external signal is not output when the game ball is detected at the gate 32 or the operating gate 17, while the external signal is output when the game ball is detected at the second starting winning opening 14 or the special winning opening 24. It may be configured to do so.

In the present embodiment, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the gate 32, the operation gate 17, the second start winning opening 14 or the second start winning opening 14 or When the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24 is detected, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be given.

In this embodiment, since the external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 is executed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, for example, the low probability / first KT state is terminated before the amusement store is closed. If the hold memory of the 2nd special symbol remains afterwards, the fluctuation of the 2nd special symbol for a long time (5 minutes) in a situation where the player has finished the game due to the closing of the game store. Since the jackpot symbol can be output externally when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed through the display, it is possible to urge the clerk of the game store to initialize the game machine 1 between the closing of the game store and the next opening. At this time, the clerk will open the store after initializing (RAM clear).

In addition, not only before the amusement store is closed, but also when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed after the player leaves the seat (for example, the second hold memory generated in the KT state is digested in the normal state, and the second special There is a case where the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed after a long time (5 minutes) fluctuation display of the symbol), but even in such a case, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 is output at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. Since it is executed, it is possible to urge the clerk of the game store to initialize the game machine 1.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a first gate passage waiting process (step S304A) in the special symbol process process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the operating gate switch 17a has been input (step S2501). If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a is input, the CPU 56 transmits the first big hit start designation command (step S2502), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first big winning opening pre-opening process. Set to the corresponding value (step S2503).

In this embodiment, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol by executing the first gate passage waiting process, but the operating gate 17 The game ball passes through the game and is detected by the operation gate switch 17a, so that the game shifts to the big hit game.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the first large winning opening pre-opening process (step S305) in the special symbol process process. In the first large winning opening pre-opening process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the large winning opening pre-opening timer by -1 (step S1401). If it is before the start of round 1, the process of step S1401 is executed, so that the value of the timer before opening the large winning opening set in step S2017 of the first special symbol stop process is measured. , The jackpot display time (fanfare period) before the start of Round 1 will be measured. Further, in the case of round 1 or later, the process of step S1401 is executed, and the value of the timer before opening the large winning opening set in the processing during opening of the large winning opening is measured, so that after each round ( The interval period (except after the final round) will be measured.

In this embodiment, the jackpot display time (fanfare period) and the interval period are measured using a common time measurement timer, but the jackpot display time (fanfare period) and the interval period are separated. It may be configured to measure the time using the timer of.

Next, when the CPU 56 sets the current number of rounds in the EXT data of the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening when the timer before opening the large winning opening times out (the value of the time measurement timer is 0) (step S1411). , Control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1412).

Next, the CPU 56 initializes the winning number counter for counting the number of winning games balls to the large winning opening (step S1413). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to 0.

Next, the CPU 56 controls the large winning opening in the open state (step S1414). Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball device 20.

Next, the CPU 56 sets the opening time according to the jackpot type and the starting round in the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the winning opening (step S1415).

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S306) (step S1416).

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the first big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200A), and if the big hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step S2204A. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the first jackpot flag is reset (step S2201A), and control is performed to transmit the first jackpot end designation command (step S2202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time when the jackpot end display is being performed on the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer (step S2203A), and the process is terminated.

In step S2204A, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S2204A). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205A). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205A), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S2206A). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets a probability variation flag indicating that it is in the probability variation state and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207A), and at the same time, a second KT flag indicating that it is in the second KT state. Is set to shift to the second KT state (step S2208A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step S2209A). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability change jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step S2210A), and sets the first KT flag indicating the first KT state to the first KT state. (Step S2211A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot), the CPU 56 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S2212A). Further, the CPU 56 sets “100” in the KT number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the low probability / first KT state (step S2213A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S2214A).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process process (step S26B) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the second special symbol process process, a process for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is executed.

When the CPU 56 performs the second special symbol process process, the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 provided in the game board 6 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the second starting winning opening 14 (step S321), the second starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S322). If the "first" of the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 19 is read as "second", the second starting port switch passing process will be explained. After that, the CPU 56 performs any of steps S350 to S360 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S350 to S360 are as follows.

Second special symbol normal process (step S350): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending memory counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the second big hit flag. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S351 (1 in this example). The second jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. In addition, the small hit flag is reset when the small hit game ends.

Second variation pattern setting process (step S351): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S352 (2 in this example).

Second display result designation command transmission process (step S352): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S353 (3 in this example).

Second special symbol changing process (step S353): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the second fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S351 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 is notified. Controls the transmission of the symbol confirmation designation command, and updates the internal state (second special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 so that the decorative symbol is stopped when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

Second special symbol stop process (step S354): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 4. When the second jackpot flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S354A (11 in this example). When the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S358 (8 in this example). If neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (when forced to be missed), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S350 (0 in this example). Update. In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer in the display control process in step S22.

Second gate passage waiting process (step S354A): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 11. In the second gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 17. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 17 is detected, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S355 (5 in this example).

Second big winning opening pre-opening process (step S355): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 5. In the second large winning opening opening preprocessing, the special variable winning ball device 20 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 20) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the second special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S356 (6 in this example). The second big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the second big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

Second Grand Prize Opening Opening Process (Step S356): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20, and the like are performed. Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, the control is performed to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S355 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S357 (7 in this example).

Second jackpot end process (step S357): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

Second small hit release pre-processing (step S358): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. In the second small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the special variable winning ball device 22. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 24) is initialized, and the solenoid 106 is driven to control the special variable winning ball device 22 to open. Further, the execution time of the process during the opening of the second small hit is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S359 (9 in this example). The second small hit opening pre-processing is also a process for starting the small hit game.

Second small hit opening process (step S359): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9. A process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 22 is performed. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 has elapsed by 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 15). Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening and the game ball is detected by the second count switch 25a, a control is performed to transmit a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. When the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S360 (10 (decimal number) in this example).

Second small hit end process (step S360): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal process (step S350) in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S350. The case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is the value indicating step S350 means that the second special symbol display 8b is not displaying the variation of the second special symbol, and This is a case where neither the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened).

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step S52B). Specifically, the count value of the second hold storage counter is confirmed.

If the second hold storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S51B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55, and the RAM 55. In addition to storing in the second random number buffer area of (step S53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S54B). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second hold storage number buffer of the RAM 55 is set to the second hold storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S60B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step S60A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step S64BB). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S68B without performing the processing after step S64B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the material is not limited to the above. For example, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step S64BB, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for jackpot determination (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S65B. Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed in step S64BB, steps S64B to S161B A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a completely different random number) without performing the processing of. By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random number 1) from the second random number storage buffer (step S64B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step). S65B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S66B), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S67B). .. Then, based on random 2, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 2R probability variation jackpot (step S160B), the jackpot type is stored (step S161B), and the step Move to S68B.

If the big hit is not made in step S66B, the game control microcomputer 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step S164B), and decides to make the small hit as it is. Then, the process proceeds to step S68B.

In this embodiment, when the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it is unconditionally determined to be a small hit (forced loss). (Except for cases), but not limited to such aspects. For example, even if the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, a lottery process based on a random number may be performed to determine whether or not to make a small hit. In this case, although the lottery process is executed, it may be configured to determine a small hit with a 100% probability, or it may be configured to determine a deviation with a low probability.

Then, in step S68B, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S68B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S68B is determined.

In step S65B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process (step S351) is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S301) shown in FIG. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 22, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained.

In the second display result designation command transmission process (step S352), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit, and determines the big hit type. Based on this, control is performed to send one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 3 designation command, display result 5 designation command to display result 7 designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 200. ..

The second special symbol changing process (step S353) is the same as the first special symbol changing process (step S303) shown in FIG. 23. That is, in the first special symbol changing process shown in FIG. 23, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol changing process is explained.

The second gate passage waiting process (step S354A) is the same as the first gate passage waiting process (step S304A) shown in FIG. 25. That is, in the first gate passage waiting process shown in FIG. 25, if "first" is read as "second", the second gate passage waiting process is explained.

The second large winning opening pre-opening process (step S355) is the same as the first large winning opening opening pre-processing (step S304A) shown in FIG. 26. That is, in the first large winning opening pre-opening process shown in FIG. 26, if "first" is read as "second", the second large winning opening pre-opening process is explained.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the second big hit end process (step S357) in the special symbol process process. In the second big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200B), and if the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2204B. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the second jackpot flag is reset (step S2201B), and control is performed to transmit the second jackpot end designation command (step S2202B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is being performed on the effect display device 9 is set in the big hit end display timer (step S2203B), and the process is terminated.

In step S2204B, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S2204B). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205B). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205B), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S2206B). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207B). Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not it was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the jackpot this time (step S2208B). Whether or not the player was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the big hit is, for example, in the second special symbol stop process before starting the big hit game, the first KT state is set before the big hit starts. A first KT storage flag indicating that the situation has been set and a second KT storage flag indicating that the state has been in the second KT state are set, and in step S2208B, whether or not these the first KT storage flag or the second KT storage flag is set is set. You just have to check. If neither the first KT state nor the second KT state is set before the start of the big hit, the first KT flag is set and the state shifts to the first KT state (step S2209B). If it was in the first KT state or the second KT state before the start of the big hit, the second KT flag is set and the state shifts to the second KT state (step S2210B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

By executing the processes of steps S2208B to S2210B, in this embodiment, when a 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. Only the second KT state is set, and if the non-KT state is reached before the start of the big hit, the first KT state is set. That is, as described above, in this embodiment, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the left-handed operation is performed, and the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. It is configured on the assumption that. However, if the variation display of the 2nd special symbol is configured to unconditionally shift to the 2nd KT state when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the right-handed operation is intentionally performed even in the non-KT state. It becomes possible to shift to the 2KT state, which may impair the original playability and unnecessarily increase the gambling. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the second KT state is shifted only when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. In the non-KT state, the player is urged to perform a left-handed operation to prevent such a situation.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 confirms whether the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S2211B). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2212B), and sets the first KT flag to shift to the first KT state (step S2212B). Step S2213B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

If it is neither a 6R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 56 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S2214B). Further, the CPU 56 sets “100” in the KT count counter (step S2215B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S350) (step S2216B).

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, whether or not the process during special symbol change is being executed) (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the processing during special symbol change is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol change display for setting the special symbol display control data. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates the special symbol display control data for performing the variable display of the special symbol. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds. After that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, whether or not the special symbol stop process is being executed) (step S3203). ). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the process shifts to the special symbol stop processing), the CPU 56 stops and displays the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol. After that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. Since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is set in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol will continue to be stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. Further, if the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if it is either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol changing process), the special symbol variation display is used. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a discrepancy between the fluctuation time recognized by the game control microcomputer 560 and the fluctuation time recognized by the effect control microcomputer 200, the display result designation command transmission process also fluctuates. It may be configured to subtract 1 from the time timer.

In this embodiment, the case where the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag is shown, but in the special symbol process processing, the start flag is set at the start of the change of the special symbol. At the same time, the end flag may be set at the end of the change of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S36), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and is based on the fact that the end flag is set. It is also possible to set special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol.

Next, the external output signal output by the game machine 1 will be described. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) is in the information output process (step S29), the process of step S2015X in the first special symbol stop process, and the second special symbol stop process. By executing the same process as in step S2015X, an external output signal is output to an external device such as a hall management computer via the external output terminal plate provided in the game machine 1.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an external output signal output by the game machine 1. A prize ball signal is assigned to the terminal 01 of the external output terminal plate. The prize ball signal is a signal that is output externally every time a predetermined number of prize balls (10 in this example) are paid out. Further, a jackpot signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 05 of the external output terminal plate. The jackpot signal 1 is a signal that is continuously output to the outside during the entire jackpot game. Further, a jackpot signal 2 is assigned to the terminal 06 of the external output terminal plate. The jackpot signal 2 is a signal that is continuously output to the outside during all the jackpot games, during the probability variation state, and during the KT state (during the first KT state and the second KT state). Further, a special winning opening signal is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal slope. The special winning opening winning signal is a signal that is output externally based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24. Further, a prize ball planned number signal is assigned to the terminal 09 of the external output terminal plate. The planned number of prize balls signal is a signal that is output externally every time the planned number of prize balls to be paid out reaches a predetermined number (10 in this example).

In the example shown in FIG. 32, a case where a common special winning opening winning signal is output externally without distinguishing between the first KT state and the second KT state is shown. Not limited. For example, it may be configured to externally output different special winning openings winning signals depending on whether it is in the first KT state or the second KT state. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modification of the external output signal output by the game machine 1. In the modified example shown in FIG. 33, the special winning port signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal slope, and the special winning port signal 2 is assigned to the terminal 08 of the external output terminal slope. .. The special winning opening winning signal 1 is a signal that is output externally based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24 in the first KT state. Further, the special winning opening winning signal 2 is a signal output externally based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24 in the second KT state.

In addition, in FIG. 32 and FIG. 33, a signal dedicated to the small hit which is continuously output to the outside during the period of the small hit game may be provided.

Next, a normal symbol process process (step S26C) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol process process. In the normal symbol process processing, when the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a is turned on (step S5111), the gate The switch passage process (step S5112) is executed. Then, the CPU 56 executes any of the processes shown in steps S5100 to S5103 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

Gate switch passage processing (step S5112): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the count value (gate passage storage number) of the gate passage storage counter has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by +1. The LED of the normal symbol hold storage display 41 is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of extracting the value of the normal symbol hit determination random number (random 4) and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of stored gates.

Normal symbol normal processing (step S5100): When the CPU 56 is in a state where the fluctuation of the normal symbol can be started (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step S100, specifically, the normal symbol In the case where the display 10 does not display the variation of the normal symbol and the variable winning ball device 15 is not in the opening / closing operation based on the fact that the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10), the gate passage memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory counter is confirmed. If the number of memory passing through the gate is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol). Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S5101).

Normal symbol variation processing (step S5101): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "2") indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step S5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step S5102): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if so, confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a missing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the time before opening the normal electric accessory is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "5") indicating the normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step S5102A).

Pre-processing for opening the normal electric accessory (step S5102A): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol process timer to the normal electric accessory operating time and timers. Is started, and the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "3") indicating the normal electric accessory operation process (step S5103).

Normal electric accessory operation process (step S5103): The CPU 56 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S5100).

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process (step S5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the gate passing memory number is 0 by checking the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step S5121). If the number of gate passage memories is 0 (Y in step S5121), the process ends as it is. If the gate-passing memory number is not 0 (N in step S5121), the CPU 56 reads out the normal symbol hit determination random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate-passing memory number = 1 (step S5122). Then, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the gate passage storage counter by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S5123). That is, the random value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random values for normal symbol hit determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each gate passing memory number are always extracted is that the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is designed to match.

Next, the CPU 56 uses the normal symbol determination table to determine whether or not the normal symbol hits.

FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol judgment table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a normal symbol hit judgment value to be compared with a normal symbol hit judgment random number (random 4) is set, and is in a normal state. There is a normal symbol determination table for KT used in the KT state and a normal symbol determination table for KT used in the KT state.

As shown in FIG. 36, in this embodiment, it is determined that the probability of winning is 1/10 in the normal state and 10/11 in the KT state. In the present embodiment, since the probability of hitting a normal symbol differs between the normal state and the KT state, the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 is more likely to occur in the KT state than in the normal state. Although the configuration is such that small hits are likely to occur, the probability of hitting a normal symbol may be the same in the normal state and the KT state.

Specifically, if the CPU 56 is in the KT state (if the first KT flag or the second KT flag is set), the normal symbol determination table for KT is selected (Y, S5123B in steps S5123A), and if it is in the normal state. Normally, the normal symbol determination table is selected (unless the first KT flag or the second KT flag is set) (N, S5123C in step S5123A).

Then, in step S5124, if it is in the KT state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the normal symbol hit determination random number value read in step S5122 is within the range of [3 to 12], and in the normal state. If there is, it is determined whether or not the random value for determination of hitting the normal symbol read in step S5122 is [3]. If it is a hit, a hit symbol is set as a display result (step S5125), and the process proceeds to step S5130A.

Further, in step S5124, if the read normal symbol hit determination random value is not within the hit range, the CPU 56 sets the outlier symbol as the display result (step S5126), and proceeds to step S5130A.

In step S4130A, if the first KT flag is set, the CPU 56 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol fluctuation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y, S5130B in step S5130). If the first KT flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal symbol fluctuation time (N, S5130C in step S5130).

Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S5101) (step S5131).

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process (step S5101). In the normal symbol variation process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S5141). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S5141), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S5144).

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (Y in step S5141), the CPU 56 corresponds to 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol stop symbol display time on the normal symbol process timer. Set the value (step S5142). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S5102) (step S5143).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process (step S5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S3701). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3702), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step S3702), the CPU 56 determines whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (hits in step S5124). (Whether or not it was determined) is confirmed (step S3703). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol is confirmed by, for example, setting the normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step S5124, and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can be done.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a hit symbol but a missed symbol (N in step S3703), the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step S5100) (step S5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0") (step S3708).

In step S3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (Y in step S3703), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first KT flag is set (step S3704), and if it is set, That is, in the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step S3706). Further, when the first KT flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step S3705). ..

Next, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “5”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step S5102A) (step S5164).

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step S5102A). In the normal electric accessory release preprocessing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S3801). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3802), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before opening the normal electric accessory has elapsed (Y in step S3802), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first KT flag is set (step S3803). , That is, in the case of the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step S3805). When the first KT flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step S3804).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal electric accessory opening time is set to 5.5 seconds in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is in a state in which it is easier to win a start prize in the second start winning opening 14 than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, the first KT state is configured so that the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 22 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 15 than in the normal state or the second KT state.

The control method for facilitating the start winning of the second starting winning opening 14 when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, in the case of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened many times as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state (for example, the variable winning ball device in the normal state or the second KT state). The number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 may be set to 2 in the first KT state, whereas 1 is set as the number of times of opening of 15. By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, it is possible to facilitate the starting winning of the second starting winning opening 14.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, the control for lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 shown above and the variable winning ball device 15 as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state. It may be executed in combination with the control for increasing the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 56 controls the variable winning ball device 15 in the open state (step S3806). Specifically, the solenoid 16 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 15.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation process (step S5103) (step S3807).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory operation process (step S5103). In the normal electric accessory operation process, the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step S3901). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer becomes 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3902). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3901), the process ends as it is.

In step S3902, when the normal symbol process timer times out (Y in step S3902), the CPU 56 controls the variable winning ball device 15 to the closed state (step S3911). Specifically, the drive of the solenoid 16 is stopped to close the variable winning ball device 15.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S5100) (step S3912).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 201 starts executing the main process. In the main process, first, an initialization process is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control (step S701). After that, the effect control CPU 201 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 201 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 201 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 201 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 201 performs the first decorative symbol process process (step S705A). In the first decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display unit 9a is executed. .. In addition, the second decorative symbol process process is performed (step S705B). In the second decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display unit 9b is executed. .. Further, a background symbol process process for controlling the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c is executed (step S706). In addition, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is executed (step S707). In addition, a random number update process for updating the counter value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining the advance notice is executed (step S708). After that, the process proceeds to step S702.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte production control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is composed of a 12-byte area of the reception command buffers 1 to 12. Then, a command reception number counter is used to indicate in which area the received command is stored. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. It does not necessarily have to be in the ring buffer format.

The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIGS. 16 and 17) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

43 to 45 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 201 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 201 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 201 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) in the RAM. It is stored in the display result specification command storage area (step S618A).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 201 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation specification command has been normally received. After that, the effect control CPU 201 executes the process when the confirmation command is received (step S620A).

If the received effect control command is the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 201 has the first jackpot start designation command reception flag or the second jackpot start designation command reception flag. Is set (step S622). In this embodiment, the first jackpot start designation command reception flag and the second jackpot start designation command reception flag set in step S622 are also referred to as fanfare flags.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 ends the instruction notification (step S3804). The instruction notification is an effect of notifying how to hit the game ball, the first instruction notification for prompting the launch of the game ball to the substantially right side of the game area 7, and the second instruction notification for prompting the launch of the game ball to the operating gate 17. Instruction notification is provided. The first instruction notification includes the first normal instruction notification that displays an image including the characters "right-handed" on the entire surface of the effect display device 9, and "right-handed" on a part (upper right part) of the effect display device 9. A first reduction instruction notification for displaying an image containing the characters "" is provided, and as a second instruction notification, an image including the characters "Aim at the gate" is displayed on the entire surface of the effect display device 9. 2 A normal instruction notification and a second reduction instruction notification for displaying an image including the characters "Aim at the gate" are provided in a part (upper right part) of the effect display device 9.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the first instruction notification is started, and the passage of the game ball to the gate 32 is not detected by 10 seconds after the start of the first instruction notification. In this case, the image of the second instruction notification is superimposed on the image of the first instruction notification.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 resets the instruction notification timer for measuring the period until the instruction notification is switched from the first instruction notification to the second instruction notification (step S3805).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 201 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S624A). In this embodiment, the jackpot end designation command reception flag set in step S624A is also referred to as an ending flag.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 201 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step S626).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step S627), the effect control CPU 201 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step S628).

If the received effect control command is low accuracy / non-KT background designation (step S630), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example). , Background screen of blue display color) (step S631). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step S632).

If the received effect control command is low probability / first KT background designation (step S633), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 with a low probability / background screen according to the first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the green display color) (step S634). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first KT state flag (step S635). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the probability change state flag indicating that it is in the probability change state and the second KT state flag indicating that it is in the second KT state (step S636).

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / first KT background designation (step S637), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 with a high probability / background screen according to the first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the yellow display color) (step S638). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability change state flag and the first KT state flag (step S639). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the second KT state flag is reset (step S640).

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / second KT background designation (step S641), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 with a high probability / background screen according to the second KT state (for example). , The background screen of the red display color) (step S642). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability change state flag and the second KT state flag (step S643). Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is set, the first KT state flag is reset (step S644).

If the received effect control command is a large prize opening prize designation command (step S650), the effect control CPU 201 sets the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter to 15 each (one prize to the large prize opening). (Equivalent to the number of prize balls per prize) is added (step S651).

The first prize ball number counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas, and is used as a big prize opening in the big hit game that triggered the start of the consecutive villas and all the big hit games that occurred during the consecutive villas. The prize ball based on the winning of the game ball and the prize ball based on the special winning opening 24 in all the small hit games generated in the probabilistic state in the consecutive villa, the first KT state and the second KT state. It will be added at any time. The second prize ball number counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the second KT state, and is a jackpot game that triggered the start of the second KT state and all the jackpot games that occurred during the second KT state. A prize ball based on the game ball winning in the large winning opening and a prize ball based on the game ball winning in the special winning opening 24 in all the small hit games generated in the second KT state are added at any time.

Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is displaying the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas indicating the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas on the effect display device 9, it is based on the value of the first prize ball counter after the addition. If the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas is updated and the display of the number of prize balls in the special rush indicating the number of prize balls in the second KT state is being displayed on the effect display device 9, the second prize ball counter after addition is displayed. The display of the number of prize balls during the special rush is updated based on the value of (step S652).

If the received effect control command is a special prize opening prize designation command (step S653), the effect control CPU 201 sets the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter to 10 (1 to the special prize opening 24), respectively. Add (corresponding to the number of prize balls per winning) (step S654). Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is displaying the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas, the CPU 201 updates the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas based on the value of the first prize ball counter after the addition, and also performs a special rush. If the middle prize ball number display is being displayed, the special rush middle prize ball number display is updated based on the value of the second prize ball number counter after addition (step S655).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S656). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 displays the prize ball addition display (for example, character display such as "+10") on the effect display device 9. (Step S657). Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a predetermined winning sound from the speaker 27 (step S658), and lights and displays the special winning opening lamp 24a (step S659).

On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (if it is not the second KT state), the process returns to step S611 without executing the processes of steps S657 to S659.

By executing the processes of steps S656 to S656, in this embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening 24 during the second KT state, the prize ball addition display is displayed and the winning sound is output. , And the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit and displayed, while the special winning opening 24 is not in the second KT state even if the game ball wins, the winning ball addition display is displayed, the winning sound is output, and the special winning opening is displayed. The lighting display of the mouth lamp 24a is not performed.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to display the prize ball addition display, output the prize sound, and display the lighting of the special prize opening lamp 24a, and it is configured to execute only one or two of these. You may.

If the received effect control command is the first customer waiting demo display specification command (step S4301), the effect control CPU 201 sets the first demo command reception flag indicating that the first customer wait demo display specification command has been received. (Step S4302).

If the received effect control command is the second customer waiting demo display specification command (step S4303), the effect control CPU 201 sets the second demo command reception flag indicating that the second customer wait demo display specification command has been received. (Step S4304).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect CPU 201 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command or executes processing (step S670). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the processing at the time of receiving the confirmation command. The effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not any of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 6 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, so that the stop-displayed symbol is a jackpot symbol. Whether or not it is determined (step S4401). When any of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 6 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, that is, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the received symbol confirmation designation command is the second symbol confirmation designation. It is determined whether or not it is a command (step S4401A), and if it is the first symbol confirmation designation command, the process proceeds to step S4404.

If the received symbol confirmation designation command is the second symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the normal state (step S4401B), and if it is in the KT state (first KT flag and second KT). If any of the flags is set), the process proceeds to step S4404.

Under the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the preparatory display flag indicating that the jackpot preparing display indicating that the jackpot is fluctuating has already been executed is set (step S4402). If it is set, the preparing display flag is reset (step S4403), and the process proceeds to step S4404.

In step S4404, the effect control CPU 201 starts the first normal instruction notification (step S4404), and sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds in the instruction notification timer (step S4406).

If the preparing display flag indicating that the preparing display has been executed is not set in step S4402, the effect control CPU 201 starts the first reduction instruction notification (step S4405), and proceeds to step S4406. To do. The "preparing display" is an effect that is executed when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol in the normal state. Specifically, the characters "preparing for the jackpot" are displayed. This is an effect in which the included image is displayed on the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, a case where a still image including the characters "preparing for a big hit" is displayed is shown, but not limited to such a mode, for example, a big hit game is started as a display in preparation. The display may be configured to correspond to the period up to (the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed. Further, when the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed if it is in the KT state. In addition, when the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed only when the preparing display is executed in the normal state, and the preparing display is not executed. Performs the first reduction instruction notification.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the background symbol process process (step S706) shown in FIG. 41. First, the effect control CPU 201 performs an instruction notification control process for controlling the instruction notification (step S4501), and performs a demo display control process (step S4502) for controlling the demo display.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 performs any of steps S900 to S908 according to the value of the background symbol process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Background symbol change start waiting process (step S900): It is determined whether or not the background symbol change start condition is satisfied, and if the background symbol change start condition is satisfied, the background symbol display unit 9c starts the change. To control. The fluctuation start condition of the background symbol is satisfied when it is confirmed in the command analysis process that any fluctuation pattern command has been received. Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start processing (step S901).

Background symbol variation start processing (step S901): Control is performed so that the background symbol variation on the left, middle, and right is started. In addition, the stop symbol of the background symbol is determined according to the received display result command, and the fluctuation time of the background symbol is set. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S902).

Process during background symbol change (step S902): The end of the background symbol change time is monitored. When the fluctuation time ends, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol stop processing (step S903). In the process of changing the background symbol, the effect control CPU 201 may extend the fluctuation time of the background symbol.

Background symbol stop processing (step S903): Control is performed to finally stop the fluctuation of the background symbol and display the stopped symbol. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900), the big hit display process (step S904), or the small hit medium process (step S908). When updating to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S904), the jackpot display process (step S904) is performed on condition that the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command is received. Update to the value corresponding to. Further, when updating to a value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S908), the value corresponding to the small hit middle display processing (step S908) is set on the condition that the small hit start designation command is received. Update.

Big hit display process (step S904): Controls the big hit display. Then, when the big winning opening opening display command (the big winning opening opening display command related to the first round) that indicates that the big hit game has actually started is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is processed during the round ( Update to the value corresponding to step S905).

Process during round (step S905): Display control during round is performed. For example, when a large winning opening opening display command indicating that the large winning opening is open is received, the number of rounds is displayed and controlled.

Round post-processing (step S906): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the large winning opening is received, which indicates that the large winning opening is open (closed), interval display is performed.

Big hit end effect processing (step S907): Controls the big hit end display after the big hit game is finished. For example, when the ending designation command (first ending designation command, second ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot is received, the ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900).

Small hit middle processing (step S908): Display control during the small hit game is performed. Then, when the small hit end designation command is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900).

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the instruction notification control process. In the instruction notification control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first instruction notification is in progress (step S4601), and if the first instruction notification is in progress, the value of the instruction notification timer is decremented by 1 (step S4602). ), It is determined whether or not the instruction notification timer times out (step S4603). If the time-out has occurred (10 seconds have passed since the execution of the first instruction notification), the second normal instruction notification is started if the first normal instruction notification is being executed (Y, S4605 in step S3503), and the first 1 If the reduction instruction notification is being executed, the second reduction display notification is started (step S4506).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second instruction notification is executed 10 seconds after the start of the first instruction notification. Further, when the first normal instruction notification is executed, the second normal instruction notification is performed after 10 seconds, and when the first reduction instruction notification is executed, the second reduction instruction notification is performed after 10 seconds. It becomes.

When executing the second instruction notification image, the second instruction notification image may be superimposed and displayed on the first instruction notification image, or the first instruction notification image may be deleted and the second instruction notification image may be displayed. It may be displayed.

49 and 50 are flowcharts showing a demo display control process. In the demo display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first demo command reception flag is set (step S4701), and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step S4706. If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal state (step S4702), and if it is not in the normal state, the process proceeds to step S4705. Specifically, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag is set, the normal state is determined.

Under the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first demo standby timer for measuring the value corresponding to the time (for example, 30 seconds) until the first demo display is started (step S4703). The first demo waiting flag indicating that the first demo display is waiting is set (step S4704). Then, the first demo reception flag is reset (step S4705).

After that, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first demo waiting flag is set (step S4706), and if it is set, the first special symbol variation is started (step S4707). Y), or when the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (Y in step S4708), the process proceeds to step S4712. As a result, the first demo display is not executed when the first special symbol change is started or the jackpot game state is controlled based on the change of the second special symbol. Specifically, in step S4707, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the first decorative symbol is received, it is determined that the first special symbol variation has started. Further, in step S4708, when the second big hit start designation command is received, it is determined that the big hit game state is controlled based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol.

When the first demo waiting flag is set, the first special symbol change is not started (N in step S4707), and the jackpot game state is not controlled based on the change in the second special symbol (N in step S4708). , The value of the first demo standby timer is subtracted by 1 (step S4709), and when the first demo standby timer times out, the first demo display is started (step S4711) and the first demo standby flag is reset (step S4711). Step S4712).

After that, when the effect control CPU 201 is in the first demo display (Y in step S4713), the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started (Y in step S4714), or based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol. When the game is controlled to the jackpot game state (Y in step S4715), the first demo display is terminated (step S4716).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second demo command reception flag is set (step S4801), and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step S4806. If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is in the KT state (step S4802), and if it is not in the KT state, the process proceeds to step S4805. Specifically, if any of the first KT flag and the second KT flag is set, the KT state is determined.

In the KT state, the effect control CPU 201 sets a second demo standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to the time (for example, 30 seconds) until the second demo display is started (step S4803). The second demo waiting flag indicating that the second demo display is waiting is set (step S4804). Then, the second demo reception flag is reset (step S4805).

After that, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second demo waiting flag is set (step S4806), and if it is set, the second special symbol variation is started (step S4807). If it is not in the Y) or KT state (N in step S4808), the process proceeds to step S4812. As a result, the second demo display is not executed when the second special symbol change is started or the KT state ends. Specifically, in step S4807, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the second decorative symbol is received, it is determined that the second special symbol variation has started. Further, in step S4808, if either the first KT flag or the second KT flag is not set, it is determined that the KT state has ended.

If the 2nd demo waiting flag is set, the 2nd special symbol change is not started (N in step S4807), and the KT state is not completed (Y in step S4808), the value of the 2nd demo waiting timer Is subtracted by 1 (step S4809), and when the second demo standby timer times out, the second demo display is started (step S4811), and the second demo standby flag is reset (step S4812).

After that, the effect control CPU 201 is in the second demo display (Y in step S4813), the change of the second special symbol is started (Y in step S4814), or the KT state is finished (step). N) of S4815, the second demo display is terminated (step S4816).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the background symbol variation start processing (step S901). In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol (step S920). In this embodiment, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be out of alignment), only the outlier symbol or the left and right background symbols in which the left, middle, and right background symbols do not match completely match. Determine the combination of out-of-reach symbols. Further, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle, and right are odd-numbered is determined. In addition, when a display result 3 designation command or a display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot is determined), a combination of symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle, and right are even numbers. To determine. In addition, when the display result 4 designation command or the display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot is determined), the same combination as the reach-off symbol in which only the left and right background symbols match. To determine. Further, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the combination of the background symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table according to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command (step S921). Then, the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the selected process table is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S922). Next, the effect control CPU 201 executes control of the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step S923). For example, the background symbol display unit 9c outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP 209 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

When the execution of the continuous effect is specified in the fluctuation pattern (in the case of the second fluctuation patterns # 17 and # 18), the process in step S923 and the background symbol fluctuation processing described later is performed according to the process table selected in step S921. By executing the process of step S944, the continuous effect is executed during the variable display of the background symbol. Further, when the execution of the battle effect is specified in the fluctuation pattern (in the case of the second fluctuation pattern # 11, # 12, # 14, # 15, # 18), step S923 is performed according to the process table selected in step S921. By executing the process of step S944 of the background symbol changing process, which will be described later, the battle effect is executed during the background symbol changing display.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the background symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the background symbol fluctuation time timer (step S924). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S902) (step S925).

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the background symbol changing process (step S902) in the background symbol process process. In the background symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 201 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S940) and 1 subtracts the value of the normal symbol variation time timer (step S941). When the process timer times out (step S942), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step S943). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S944).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the continuous effect is executed during the variable display of the background symbol and it is the start timing of the continuous effect (step S945). It should be noted that whether or not the continuous effect is executed can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second variation patterns # 17 and # 18 are specified in the received variation pattern command. Further, whether or not it is the start timing of the continuous effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the background symbol fluctuation time timer set in step S924 of the background symbol variation start processing. If it is the start timing of the continuous effect, the effect control CPU 201 causes the effect display device 9 to display the prize ball number display during the consecutive villas based on the current value of the first prize ball number counter (step S946). .. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls displayed during the special rush is displayed when the player is in the second KT state (see step S9010 described later), but the start timing of the continuous effect during the second KT state is displayed. Then, by executing the process of step S946, the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas is displayed in addition to the display of the number of prize balls in the special rush.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the first KT transition effect is executed during the variable display of the background symbol and it is the start timing of the first effect (step S947). It should be noted that whether or not the first KT transition effect is executed can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second variation pattern # 18 is specified by the received variation pattern command. That is, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the background symbol is executed based on the second variation pattern # 18, whether the continuation effect is executed during the variation display of the background symbol and the second KT state continues. After suggesting whether or not, the first KT transition effect is executed, and the effect as if the second KT state has ended and the state has shifted to the first KT state is executed (however, at this stage, it is still the first internally. The 2KT state is not finished, and to be exact, the second KT state is finished at the start of the big hit), and then it develops into a battle production. Further, whether or not it is the start timing of the first KT transition effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the background symbol fluctuation time timer set in step S924 of the background symbol variation start processing.

If it is the start timing of the first KT transition effect, the effect control CPU 201 ends the sound output of the music for the second KT from the speaker 27 (step S948). That is, in this embodiment, when the second KT state is controlled, the sound output of the music for the second KT is started at the start of the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot that triggered the control (step described later). (See S982), but when the process of step S948 is executed, the sound output of the music for the second KT is terminated.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 erases the display of the number of prize balls during the consecutive villas and the display of the number of prize balls during the special rush in the effect display device 9 (step S949). Further, in this embodiment, the character display such as "during special rush" is displayed in the second KT state, but in step S949, the character display such as "during special rush" is also deleted.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 executes the background symbol variation time extension process (step S950). That is, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, or when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the first There is a possibility that the variable display of the special symbol may be started, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in parallel. Therefore, in this embodiment, the background symbol variation time extension process of step S950 is executed, so that when the background symbol variation display is executed in response to the variation display of one special symbol, the other special symbol is executed. When the variation display of the symbol is started, the variation pattern of the background symbol is replaced or the variation time is extended as necessary.

In step S950, for example, when the effect control CPU 201 is executing the variation display of the background symbol in response to the variation display of one special symbol that is out of alignment, the variation display of the other special symbol that becomes a big hit is displayed. When it is started, it is replaced with the fluctuation pattern of the background symbol corresponding to the special symbol of the big hit, and the fluctuation time is extended. Further, for example, when the variable display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variable display of one special symbol that becomes a big hit, and the variable display of the other special symbol that becomes an outlier is started, the background symbol The fluctuation display of the background symbol currently being executed is executed as it is without replacing the fluctuation pattern or extending the fluctuation time. Further, for example, when the variable display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variable display of one special symbol that becomes a big hit, and the variable display of the other special symbol that becomes a big hit is started, it has already been described. As described above, in this embodiment, since the variation display of the special symbol that is started later is forcibly removed in the middle, the variation pattern of the background symbol is not replaced or the variation time is not extended, and the background currently being executed is not performed. The variable display of the symbol is executed as it is.

Further, in the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 is undergoing a jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, and when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started (Y in step S5000, Y in S5001, Y in S5002), the jackpot is changed. The preparation display is executed (step S5003), and the preparation display flag is set (step S5004). In step S5000, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag is set, it is determined that the normal state is set. In step S5001, the process during the change of the second decorative symbol is executed in the second decorative symbol process process (step S705B), and any one of the display result 2 designated command to the display result 6 designated command for the second decorative symbol is executed. If it is stored, it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is changing. In step S5002, it is determined that the variation of the first special symbol has started when the variation pattern command for the first special symbol is received.

As described above, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started while the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is being performed in the normal state, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forcibly excluded. At that time, the game control microcomputer 560 may send a forced disconnection designation command indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forced to be missed to the effect control microcomputer 200. In that case, the effect control may be performed. The microcomputer 200 may execute the jackpot preparation display based on the reception of the forced loss designation command. Alternatively, only when the variation display result is determined to be forced out, the game control microcomputer 560 determines a special variation pattern in which the variation display result is determined only by forced error, and the variation pattern showing this special variation pattern. A command may be transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 200, and the effect control microcomputer 200 may execute the jackpot preparation display based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command. Good.

Then, if the background symbol variation time timer has timed out (step S951), the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation stop process (step S903) (step S952). ).

53 and 54 are flowcharts showing the background symbol fluctuation stop processing (step S903) in the background symbol process processing. In the background symbol fluctuation stop processing, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set (step S970A). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step S974. In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step S973. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S971 is executed. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step S974.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set. (Step S970B). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step S987. In this embodiment, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step S986. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the effect during the small hit game is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the small hit game has not yet been executed. Therefore, the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S971 is set. The process proceeds to step S987 without executing the display process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 201 uses the effect display device 9 to display the stop symbol of the left, middle, and right background symbols (missing symbol, jackpot symbol). , Small hit symbol) is controlled to be fixedly displayed (step S971).

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S972), the effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S973).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags (first jackpot start designation command reception flag, second jackpot start designation command reception flag) is set (step S974). .. When any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S975). The effect control CPU 201 also resets the set jackpot start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table according to the fanfare effect (step S976). Next, the effect control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S977), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (effect display device 9 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step S978).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the probability change state flag, the first KT state flag, or the second KT state flag is set (step S979). If none of the probability change state flag, the first KT state flag, and the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the low probability / non-KT state), the effect control CPU 201 resets the first prize ball counter. (Step S980). That is, since it is a case where a big hit occurs in a low probability / non-KT state, it is a case where a so-called first hit occurs, and the first prize ball number counter is reset.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the current jackpot is based on the 16R probability variation jackpot (step S981). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not a display result designation command (display result 2 designation command) for designating the 16R probability variation jackpot has been received. If it is a 16R probability variation big hit, it is a case where the big hit game that triggers the start of the second KT state is started. Therefore, the effect control CPU 201 controls to start the sound output of the music for the second KT from the speaker 27 ( Step S982).

On the other hand, if it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 201 resets the second prize ball number counter if it is set (step S983). That is, in this case, if the player is in the second KT state, a jackpot other than the 16R probability variation jackpot occurs and the second KT state ends, so the second prize ball number counter is reset.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S904) (step S984).

When the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S985), the effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S986).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S987). When the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit start designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S988). The effect control CPU 201 also resets the set small hit start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S989). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, during the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 selects the process table according to the small hit medium effect (step S990). Next, the effect control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S991), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (effect display device 9 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step S992).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a predetermined opening sound corresponding to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 22 from the speaker 27 (step S993), and lights and displays the special winning opening lamp 24a (step S994).

On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S995 without executing the processes of steps S990 to S994. By executing the determination process of step S989, in this embodiment, the effect during the small hit game is executed only when the small hit game is performed during the second KT state, and the special variable winning ball device 22 A predetermined opening sound corresponding to the opening is output, and the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit and displayed.

In this embodiment, a case where a predetermined opening sound is output and the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit and displayed when a small hit occurs during the second KT state is shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, it may be configured to execute only one of the output of a predetermined opening sound and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a. Further, for example, even during the second KT state, it may be configured so that neither the output of the predetermined opening sound nor the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a is executed, and the effect during the small hit game is produced in the first place. It may be configured not to execute the small hit medium processing itself.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S908) (step S995).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step S971 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S972 and N in step S985), the effect control CPU 201 is the background symbol. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S996).

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end effect process (step S907) in the background symbol process process. In the jackpot end effect process, the effect control CPU 201 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step S9000). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the completion of all rounds of the jackpot game in the round post-processing (see step S906). Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step S9001).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S9001), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S9002), and the effect device (effect display device 9) follows the contents of the process data n. , Speaker 27, etc.) (step S9003). For example, an effect of displaying the end of the jackpot or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S9004), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S9005). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S9006).

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S9001), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot (step S9007). ). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is determined by, for example, a display result specification command (display result 3 designation command) that specifies the 6R probability variation jackpot or a display result specification command (display result 5) that specifies the 2R probability variation jackpot. It can be determined by checking whether or not the specified command) has been received. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it becomes a high probability state / first KT state after the jackpot game ends), the effect control CPU 201 is displayed in the effect display device 9 if it is not displayed. Control is performed to start the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas based on the first prize ball number counter (step S9008). In step S9008, the effect control CPU 201 also controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying a character display such as "during normal rush".

If it is neither a 6R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is based on the 16R probability variation jackpot (step S9009). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not a display result designation command (display result 2 designation command) for designating the 16R probability variation jackpot has been received. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it becomes a high probability state / second KT state after the jackpot game ends), if the effect control CPU 201 is not displayed, the second prize ball is displayed in the effect display device 9. Control is performed to start the display of the number of prize balls during the special rush based on the number counter (step S9010). In step S9010, the effect control CPU 201 also controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying a character display such as "during special rush".

Although not shown in FIG. 55, if the jackpot game ending this time is based on a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot (that is, a low probability state / first KT state is reached after the jackpot game ends). If), the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying a character display such as "chance time".

Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S9011).

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a small hit medium process (step S908) in the background symbol process process. In the small hit middle process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (step S9201). When the small hit end designation command reception flag is not set (that is, when the small hit end designation command has not been received yet), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S9202). , The process of controlling the effect device (effect display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n is executed (step S9203). That is, the production corresponding to the small hit game is continuously performed.

However, as described above, in this embodiment, when the second KT state is not in progress, the process table corresponding to the small hit medium effect is not set in the first place (see step S989), so the small hit end designation command is received. Even if it is not done, the production corresponding to the small hit game is not executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S9204), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S9205). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S9206).

When the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit end designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 ends the effect corresponding to the small hit game, and step S9207. Move to. Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S9207).

57 and 58 are explanatory views showing a display example of instruction notification according to the present embodiment. In the display example shown in FIG. 57, a display example of the instruction notification when a big hit is obtained based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol is shown. For example, first, as shown in FIG. 57 (1), the background symbol corresponding to the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and as shown in FIG. 57 (2), the background symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (3), the first normal instruction notification 55A is performed. The first normal instruction notification 55A at this time is performed by displaying an image including the characters "right-handed" and a right arrow. Then, when 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 17, the second normal instruction notification 55B is performed as shown in FIG. 57 (4).

The second normal instruction notification 55B at this time is an image showing the characters "Aim at the gate" and the game ball passing through the operating gate 17 (the square area through which the game ball is passing indicates the operating gate 17. , The square area above it indicates the gate 32).

In the display example shown in FIG. 58, a display example of the instruction notification when a big hit is obtained based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the normal state is shown. For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (1), the first demo is displayed because the first special symbol is not changed even in the normal state, and the jackpot change of the second decorative symbol is performed. Is being done. Then, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 58 (2), the jackpot preparation display is performed and the preparation display flag is set, and then in FIG. 58 (3). As shown, the change of the second special symbol ends at the jackpot symbol. At this time, since the preparing display flag is set, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (4), and 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 17. The second normal instruction notification 56B is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (5). At this time, the first normal instruction notification 56A and the second normal instruction notification 56B may be displayed separately in parallel, or only the second normal instruction notification 56B is displayed without displaying the first normal instruction notification 56A. You may.

At this time, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed by displaying an image including the characters "right-handed" and a right arrow, and the second normal instruction notification 56B operates with the characters "aim at the gate". By displaying an image showing a game ball passing through the gate 17 (a square area through which the game ball passes indicates an operating gate 17, and a square area above it indicates a gate 32). Will be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (6), when the change of the second special symbol is completed in the jackpot symbol without the change of the first special symbol being performed, the first reduction is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (7). When the instruction notification 56C is performed and 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 17, the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (8).

At this time, the first reduction instruction notification 56C is performed by displaying only the image showing the characters "right-handed". Further, the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed by displaying only an image showing the characters "Aim at the gate".

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is performed, the jackpot preparation is displayed and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is performed. When is not performed, the execution of the jackpot preparation display is restricted (not executed).

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, the first normal instruction notification and the second normal instruction notification are performed when the first special symbol is changed. When the first special symbol is not changed, the first reduction instruction notification and the second reduction instruction notification, which are less visible than the first normal instruction notification and the second normal instruction notification, are performed.

FIG. 59 is a timing chart when the jackpot gaming state ends and is controlled to the first KT state. The timing chart shown in FIG. 59 shows the presence / absence of control of the jackpot game state, the presence / absence of the setting of the first KT flag, the presence / absence of execution of the normal symbol fluctuation, the presence / absence of the opening of the variable winning ball device 15, and the presence / absence of the fluctuation of the second special symbol. , And whether or not the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened is shown for each timing.

For example, while the jackpot game state is controlled (before timing T0 in FIG. 59), the normal symbol has a fluctuation time of 1.0 second, the normal symbol has a fluctuation stop time of 0.2 seconds, and the normal symbol hits. In this case, 2.6 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, and 0.2 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15. At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the jackpot game state is 1.0 second, which is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and 0.2 seconds, which is the symbol determination period of the normal symbol. It is 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of 2.6 seconds, which is the time before the opening of the variable winning ball device 15. While the jackpot game state is controlled, the special symbol is not changed and the opening control of the special variable winning ball device 22 is not performed.

Further, while being controlled to the first KT state (after timing T0 in FIG. 59), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, the fluctuation stop time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the normal symbol hits. In this case, 0.1 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, and 5.5 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15. At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the jackpot game state is 0.2 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and 0.2 seconds, which is the symbol determination period of the normal symbol. It is 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of 0.1 seconds, which is the time before the opening of the variable winning ball device 15. In addition, the first KT state is 7.0 seconds as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol for the first time after being controlled to the first KT state, and 0.8 seconds as the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 at the time of a small hit. 1.0 second (assuming that the number of second reserved storage ≥ 1) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol after the second time after being controlled to.

At this time, rather than the closing period (3.8 seconds) of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the jackpot game state, the fluctuation time (7) of the first second special symbol after being controlled to the first KT state. .0 seconds) is longer. This is because, for example, when the standby before opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is started immediately before the timing T0, it is assumed that the variable winning ball device 15 is closed for a maximum of 2.6 seconds. If the fluctuation time of the first second special symbol after being controlled to the first KT state is too short, the special variable winning ball device 22 will be controlled to the open state while the variable winning ball device 15 is closed. It is conceivable that a game ball wins a special variable winning ball device 22 in spite of being in the first KT state. Therefore, the variation time of the second special symbol is lengthened so that the special variable winning ball device 22 is not controlled to be open while the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and controlled.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the game machine is capable of performing a game using a game medium (in this example, a game ball), and is a predetermined path among the flow paths through which the game medium flows down. (In this example, a specific area (in this example, the operating gate 17) provided in the game area 7 on the right side) through which the game medium can pass, and predetermined conditions (in this example, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed). After the establishment of, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560. When it is Y in step S2501 (the part where steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 are executed), it is possible to control a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) which is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state. (In this example, the part where steps S358 to S360 are executed in the game control microcomputer 560), it is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is higher than that of the normal state. Yes (in this example, the part that executes steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560), and promotes the launch of the game medium to the predetermined route based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions. The predetermined promotion notification (first instruction notification in this example) is executed, and the launch of the game medium to the specific area is promoted after a predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the execution of the predetermined promotion notification. It is decided that the specific promotion notification (in this example, the second instruction notification) can be executed (in this example, the portion in which steps S4404, S4405, S4604, and S4605 in the effect control microcomputer 200 are executed). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-202287, it is possible to control a state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stopping and displaying a big hit symbol indicating a big hit) is satisfied. After that, a game machine that controls the advantageous state (big hit game state) when the game medium passes through the specific area is described, and the game machine appropriately notifies the opportunity to control the advantageous state. However, if a notification for prompting the launch of the game medium to a specific area is performed each time a predetermined condition is satisfied, the production may become complicated. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

For example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol after the KT state ends and the normal state is entered, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal state is long, so that the second special symbol is displayed. It is assumed that the player leaves the seat for reasons such as a break without waiting for the fluctuation of. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to control so as not to be in the big hit game state during the break by appropriately notifying the opportunity to control the big hit game state.

Further, unlike the game machine described above, there is a game machine having a configuration in which the jackpot game state is controlled on condition that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through the operating gate 17. , The player waits until the jackpot game state starts (until the jackpot is opened) after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed for the purpose of suppressing wasteful hitting of the game ball, and then launches the game ball. May be done. Similarly, in a game machine that shifts to the jackpot game state on the condition that the game ball passes through the operating gate 17, such a player also has a game ball from the time when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed until the jackpot game state is started. It may try to wait for launch, in which case the jackpot game state will not start. Therefore, by adopting the above-described configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify such a player of the opportunity to control the jackpot game state.

Further, specific examples of the predetermined promotion notification and the specific promotion notification are not limited to those described above. Specifically, the effect using an effect member other than the effect display device 9 (for example, a speaker 27, a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED) may be used as a predetermined promotion notification and a specific promotion notification. In addition, an effect using a plurality of effect members may be performed as a predetermined promotion notification and a specific promotion notification. Further, the effect members used for the predetermined promotion notification and the specific promotion notification may be different from each other. For example, the game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in the predetermined promotion notification, and the predetermined screen may be displayed on the effect display device 9 in the specific promotion notification.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to externally output an advantageous state signal (in this example, a big hit signal 1 and a big hit signal 2) that can be specified to be controlled in an advantageous state (in this example, game control). In step S2015X and the second special symbol stop process in the microcomputer 560, the same process as in step S2015X is executed), and the advantageous state signal can be output externally based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions (in this example,). The game control microcomputer 560 executes step S2015X before executing step S2501 in the first special symbol stop process and the second special symbol stop process). As a result, it is possible to notify the game clerk that the unmanned game machine without a player has become advantageous, and it is possible to promote the initialization of the game machine.

Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, if a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power of the game machine is turned on, it may be possible to notify that fact (in this example, the game control). When the power is turned off before the game ball passes through the operating gate 17 after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the microcomputer 560 waits for the current situation (passing the game ball to the operating gate 17). If the information related to (in this example, "8", which is the value of the special symbol process flag corresponding to the process of waiting for passage through the first gate) is backed up, and the information is backed up when the power is turned on. A predetermined command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200, and the effect control microcomputer 200 executes a first instruction notification, a second instruction notification, or an effect that can be executed only when the power is turned on when the predetermined command is received. By doing so, it may be notified that the predetermined condition is satisfied). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state.

Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, the specific promotion notification may be executed in different modes depending on the situation in which the predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200 is generated). The second instruction notification may be executed in a different manner depending on the type of jackpot to be played and the game state). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state according to the situation.

Specifically, when the fluctuation is performed using the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the jackpot, a battle production in which the ally character and the enemy character confront each other is performed as the effect during the fluctuation, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed before the victory or defeat of the confrontation is shown. At the same time, "Aim at the gate" is displayed, and in the subsequent big hit game state, the battle production is continued as a big hit production (that is, the variable production and the big hit production are a series of battle productions). Good. At that time, if the jackpot is of an advantageous type (for example, a jackpot with a large number of rounds, a jackpot with a long opening period of the jackpot, a jackpot that shifts to a probabilistic state, a jackpot that shifts to a KT state), the battle is won. If it is a big hit of a disadvantageous type (for example, a big hit with a small number of rounds, a big hit with a short opening period of the big winning opening, a big hit that does not shift to the probability change state, a big hit that does not shift to the KT state), you will lose the battle. May be good.

Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, the variable display of the first identification information (first special symbol in this example) and the variable display of the second identification information (second special symbol in this example) are executed. It is possible (in this example, the part that executes steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560), and the first effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (in this example, the first decorative symbol). The display result can be derived and displayed by executing the variable display of, and the second effect identification information (in this example, the second decoration) corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (the second special symbol in this example). It is possible to derive and display the display result by executing the variable display of the symbol) (in this example, the part where steps S705A and S705B in the effect control microcomputer 200 are executed), and in the normal state, the second effect identification information. The variable display may be difficult to see, and the display result of the variable display of the second effect identification information may be easily visible (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200 has the second special symbol in the normal state. The second decorative symbol may be erased during the fluctuation of, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed). As a result, attention can be paid to the variable display of the first identification information in the normal state.

Further, in the normal state, it may be difficult to visually recognize the display result of the fluctuation of the second decorative symbol and the display related to the second reserved storage number.

It should be noted that "difficult to see" is a concept including "not visible" and "difficult to see".

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the game machine is capable of performing a game using a game medium (in this example, a game ball), and is a specific area (a specific area through which the game medium can pass). In this example, the operation gate 17), the variable display of the first identification information (first special symbol in this example) and the variable display of the second identification information (second special symbol in this example) can be executed. At the same time, while the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is being executed, the other variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be executed (in this example, the game control microcomputer). By executing steps S26A and S26B in the computer 560, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel), predetermined conditions (in this example, the jackpot symbol is After the stop display) is established, it is possible to control the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (in this example, the game control). A predetermined state (a portion in which steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 are executed when step S2501 is Y in the microcomputer 560), which is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state (in this example, a small hit game state). (In this example, the part that executes steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560), and a special state in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is increased compared to the normal state (in this example, the KT state). ) (In this example, the part that executes steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560), and based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the specific area is set. It is possible to execute the specific promotion notification (in this example, the second instruction notification) that promotes the launch of the game medium (in this example, the part that executes steps S4604 and S4605 in the effect control microcomputer 200), and the player When the absence condition corresponding to the absence (in this example, the first special symbol is not changed even though it is in the normal state) is not satisfied, the predetermined condition is set by the variable display of the second identification information. Based on the establishment, the specific promotion notification is executed in a predetermined mode (in this example, the second normal instruction notification is performed), and when the absence condition is satisfied, the predetermined condition is set by the variable display of the second identification information. Based on the fact that it was established The specific promotion notification is executed in a special mode having lower visibility than the normal mode (in this example, the second reduction instruction notification is performed). As a result, in consideration of the fact that the absence condition is satisfied, the specific promotion notification for promoting the launch of the game medium to the specific area can be appropriately performed.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-202287, it is possible to control a state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stopping and displaying a big hit symbol indicating a big hit) is satisfied. A game machine that controls an advantageous state (big hit game state) when the game medium passes through the specific area is described, but the game machine promotes the launch of the game medium to the specific area. There was a risk that the specific promotion notification could not be properly performed. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately perform the specific promotion notification for promoting the launch of the game medium to the specific area in consideration of the fact that the absence condition is satisfied.

For example, in the case of a gaming machine that performs a second normal instruction notification (notification in the entire display area of the effect display device 9) even when the absence condition is satisfied (when there is no player), the game is finally played. When the final player who has been playing the game has already finished the game, but the other player is temporarily away from the seat and plays the game of the game machine. It is conceivable that a new player may be reluctant to play a game on the game machine because he thinks that it may lead to trouble. Therefore, as in the game machine shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the consciousness of avoidance by a new player by performing the specific promotion notification in a mode according to the situation, and promote the operation of the game machine. be able to.

In addition, there are those who try to enjoy the advantageous situation (big hit game state) generated based on the game by the player who has finished the game, and if such an act is performed, the fairness of the game is lacking. It becomes. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, when the absence condition is satisfied (when there is no player), the visibility is lower than when the absence condition is not satisfied (when there is a player). By executing the specific promotion notification in, it is difficult to recognize that the situation is before the advantageous situation, and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

In the present embodiment, it is set as an "absence condition" that the change of the first special symbol is not executed even though it is in the normal state (to be exact, the change of the first special symbol is started in the normal state). When, it is considered that the absence condition is no longer satisfied), but it is not limited to this. For example, the player does not touch the ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 5, or any area (operation gate 17, gate 32, first start winning opening 13, second starting winning opening 14, large winning opening, etc. The "absence condition" may be defined as not detecting the passage of the game ball through the special winning opening 24) for a predetermined period of time. Further, for example, it may be set as an "absence condition" that the start winning prize does not occur within a predetermined period (for example, 2 minutes) after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the absence condition is satisfied, the absence effect indicating that the absence condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the specific promotion notification is performed in the predetermined mode (in this example). , 1st demo display) is feasible (in this example, the part where step S4716 is executed in the effect control microcomputer 200). As a result, it is possible to appropriately encourage the player to play.

Although the description is omitted in the present embodiment, the power consumption is controlled to reduce the power consumption on condition that a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed since the demonstration display was started. It may be. In the power saving state, it is consumed in each effect member by reducing the volume output from the speaker 27, reducing the brightness of the image display device 5, and reducing the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. The power is reduced.

Further, according to this embodiment, the execution of the effect is controlled based on the game control means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game and the information transmitted from the game control means. The game control means is provided with the effect control means (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200), and the game control means is the first absence information (in this example) indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the first identification information. , 1st customer waiting demo display specification command) and 2nd absence information (in this example, 2nd customer waiting demo display specification command) indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the 2nd identification information. It is determined that transmission is possible (in this example, the portion where steps S51A and S51B in the game control microcomputer 560 are executed). As a result, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the situation.

In the present embodiment, the first customer waiting demo display designation command indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the first special symbol and the absence condition are satisfied based on the second special symbol. It was decided to separately provide a second customer waiting demo display designation command to indicate whether or not, but it is not limited to this, and a command to indicate whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the first special symbol, A common command may be provided as a command indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the second special symbol. For example, in the normal state, when the first special symbol is not changed in the state where the first reserved memory is not stored (regardless of whether the second special symbol is changed or the second reserved memory is present). When the common command is transmitted and the second special symbol is not changed in the KT state when the second reserved memory is not stored (whether or not the first special symbol is changed or the first reserved memory is stored). The common command may be sent (with or without).

Further, according to this embodiment, the game control means includes a game control means for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect based on the information transmitted from the game control means. Special state control information (in this example, a background specification command) indicating whether or not the device is controlled to a special state, and absence information indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied (in this example, the first customer waiting demo display). A designated command and a second customer waiting demo display designated command) can be transmitted (in this example, the part that executes steps S51A, S51B, S60A, and S60B in the game control microcomputer 560), and the effect control means is special. It is possible to execute an absentee effect indicating that the absentee condition is satisfied based on the state control information and the absentee information (in this example, in step S4502 of the effect control microcomputer 200, a background designation command and a customer waiting demo display are displayed. The part where the customer waiting demo display can be executed based on the specified command). As a result, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the situation.

Further, according to this embodiment, information indicating whether or not to control in an advantageous state based on the variable display of the second identification information can be stored as a hold storage (in this example, the second hold storage). A means (in this example, a second hold storage buffer) is provided, and an advantageous notification effect (in this example, a big hit effect) indicating control to an advantageous state can be executed (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200). Steps S904 to S907 in steps), the variable display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold storage indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state is started during the execution of the variable display of the first identification information controlled in the advantageous state. If this is done, the advantageous notification effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is not executed (in this example, when the game control microcomputer 560 is Y in step S64BB, the processing after step S65B is not performed. Even when the jackpot random number is stored as the second hold memory, the fluctuation with respect to the second hold memory is forcibly removed, and the effect control microcomputer 200 does not execute the jackpot effect regarding the second identification information). .. As a result, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the situation.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine is capable of executing the game, and the first identification information (in this example, the first special symbol) is variablely displayed and the second identification information. The variable display of (in this example, the second special symbol) can be executed, and the first identification information and the second identification information can be displayed during the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information. The other variable display can be executed (in this example, by executing steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel. The specific display result (in this example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information. It is possible to control to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player (in this example, a portion that executes steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the first It is advantageous and advantageous for the player based on the fact that the predetermined display result (in this example, the small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of either the variable display of the identification information or the variable display of the second identification information. It is possible to control to a predetermined state different from the normal state (in this example, the small hit game state) (in this example, the part where steps S358 to S360 are executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and the state is controlled to a predetermined state rather than the normal state. It is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) with increased frequency (in this example, a part that executes steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560). , It is possible to execute a notification effect (in this example, a jackpot preparation display) for notifying that a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, a part in which step S5003 is executed in the effect control microcomputer 200). When the absence condition corresponding to the absence of the person is not satisfied, the notification effect can be executed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information (in this example, for effect control). The microcomputer 200 executes S5003 when it is Y in step S5000, Y in S5001, and Y in S5002), and changes the second identification information when the absence condition is satisfied in the normal state. The execution of the notification effect is restricted based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the display (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200 executes S5003 when it is Y in step S5000, Y in S5001, and N in S5002. do not do). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify that the predetermined condition is satisfied in consideration of the fact that the absence condition is satisfied.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-20287, it is possible to control a state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stopping and displaying a big hit symbol indicating that a big hit is obtained) is satisfied. A game machine that controls an advantageous state (big hit game state) when the game medium passes through a specific area is described, but the game machine appropriately notifies that a predetermined condition is satisfied. There was a risk that it could not be done. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately notify that the predetermined condition is satisfied in consideration of the fact that the absence condition is satisfied.

In addition, "restricting execution" means not executing as in the present embodiment or executing in a mode that is difficult to recognize (for example, executing a notification effect using an image smaller than usual or an image having a low density). It is a concept that includes (execution of a notification effect that outputs sound at a volume lower than usual).

Further, the specific example of the notification effect is not limited to that described above. Specifically, an effect using an effect member other than the effect display device 9 (for example, a speaker 27, a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED) may be used as a notification effect. Further, as the notification effect, an effect using a plurality of effect members may be performed.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is a gaming medium (in this example, a gaming medium). A variable starting device (in this example, a variable starting device) that can be changed into an approach advantageous state (in this example, an open state) in which a game ball can enter and an approach disadvantageous state (in this example, a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. , A variable winning ball device 15) and a predetermined variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22) provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device and capable of changing between an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state. The variable starting device can be changed and controlled to an approach advantageous state or an approach disadvantageous state (in this example, a portion for executing step S5103 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the first identification information (in this example, the first special symbol). ) Can be variably displayed, and the second identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) can be variably displayed based on the entry of the game medium into the variable starting device (in this example). , The part that executes steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560), the hold storage means that can store the information related to the variable display of the second identification information as the hold storage (in this example, the second hold storage) (this example). The second holding storage buffer) is provided, and the display result of either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is a predetermined display result (in this example, a small hit symbol). Based on this, it is possible to control the predetermined variable device to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) that changes the predetermined variable device to an approach advantageous state (in this example, steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560 are executed. Part), it is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is higher than that of the normal state (in this example, steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B in the game control microcomputer 560). , S2210B, S2213B, S2214B) As special states, a first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and a second special state (book) having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. In the example, it can be controlled to a high probability / second KT state), and when it is controlled to the advantageous state, it is disadvantageous to enter the variable starting device for a specific period longer than when it is controlled to the first special state. It is possible to control the change to the state (in this example, step S26 in the game control microcomputer 560. By executing C, as shown in FIG. 59, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds in the jackpot game state, and the variable winning ball device 15 is operated for 0.5 seconds in the first KT state. As the first variable display of the second identification information controlled by the first special state (the part controlled to the closed state), the variable display of the first period is executed regardless of the number of reserved storages stored in the hold storage means. It is possible (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and in the first variation, the variation pattern is set using the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 13 (D) or FIG. 14 (G). By deciding, it is possible to change the second special symbol for 7.0 seconds regardless of the number of reserved memories), and it is controlled to the first special state as the second and subsequent variable display of the second identification information. , When the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means in the first special state is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, variable display in the second period shorter than the first period can be executed (in this example, for game control). The microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and in the second and subsequent fluctuations, the second reserved storage number is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 13 (E) or FIG. 14 (H). If it is 1 or more, the variation of the second special symbol can be executed for 1.0 second (the time is controlled to the first KT state and is shorter than the first variation time of 7.0 seconds). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the special situation.

For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952 includes a variable starting device (attacker) capable of changing between an approach advantageous state in which a game medium can enter and an approach disadvantageous state in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. It is a gaming machine that changes a predetermined variable device to an approach advantageous state in a state, can be controlled to a special state in which the frequency of being controlled to a small hit game state is increased, and the predetermined variable device is controlled to an approach disadvantageous state. Described is a game machine in which the game medium is made easier to enter the predetermined variable device in the small hit game state by delaying the game ball flowing down on the predetermined variable device, and the degree of advantage in the special state is enhanced. However, in the game machine, the playability in a special state is monotonous, and the interest is insufficient. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the special state by configuring it as in the present embodiment.

For example, in this embodiment, when controlled to the first KT state, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, the inside of the special variable winning ball device 22 is actually reached. The special winning opening 24 is set so that it rarely wins, but in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22 has a certain amount of prize. There is a possibility that the game balls of the above are accumulated, and if the special variable winning ball device 22 is immediately controlled to the open state, a considerable number of game balls may win the special winning opening 24. .. Therefore, in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 accumulate on the bottom surface member even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 22 to the open state after a sufficient time has passed until all the game balls are dropped, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 24, which is more than expected in the first KT state. It prevents the situation where the prize ball of is obtained.

Further, as a result, when a plurality of special states (first KT state, second KT state) are provided, a game ball to a predetermined variable device (special variable winning ball device 22) in some special states (first KT state). It is possible to suppress the invasion of. Therefore, a part of the special states (first KT state) can be set as a special state having a low degree of advantage, and it is possible to realize that the degrees of advantage of the plurality of special states are different.

Further, according to this embodiment, the first variable display of the second identification information controlled by the first special state is longer than the specific period regardless of the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means. Variable display for one period can be executed (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 13 (D) or FIG. 14 (G) is obtained in the first fluctuation. By determining the variation pattern using the table, the second special symbol is used for 7.0 seconds (the closing time of the variable winning ball device 15 in the jackpot game state is longer than 3.8 seconds) regardless of the number of reserved memories. (Fluctuation is feasible), and as the second and subsequent variable display of the second identification information controlled by the first special state, the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means in the first special state is a predetermined number or more. In the case of, it is possible to execute the variable display of the second period shorter than the specific period (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and in the second and subsequent fluctuations, FIG. 13 (E). ) Or by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 14 (H), if the second reserved memory number is 1 or more, 1.0 second (the variable winning ball device 15 is closed in the jackpot game state). It is possible to change the second special symbol over a time (less than 3.8 seconds)). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the special situation.

Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, when the control is performed in the second special state, the second identification information is held regardless of the number of times the second identification information is variably displayed after being controlled in the second special state. The variable display of the second identification information may be executed at different fluctuation times based on the number of reserved storages stored in the storage means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is the second KT state in the second KT state. 2 When the special symbol is changed, regardless of the number of fluctuations executed after being controlled to the second KT state, if the second reserved memory number is 1 or more, the second special symbol is changed for 1 second. If the number of second reserved memories is 0, the second special symbol may be changed over 3 seconds.) As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the special situation.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the identification information (in this example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is variably displayed, which is an advantageous state for the player (this example). Then, it is a game machine that can be controlled to a big hit game state), and has a special area (gate 32 in this example) through which the game medium (game ball in this example) can pass, and an approach advantage in which the game medium can enter. A variable starting device (variable winning ball device 15 in this example) that can change between a state (open state in this example) and a disadvantageous state (closed state in this example) in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. A predetermined variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22) provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device and capable of changing between an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state, and the game medium has passed through the special area. It is possible to execute the variable display of the ordinary identification information (in this example, the ordinary symbol) based on the ordinary identification information (in this example, the part where steps S5100 to S5102 are executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and the ordinary identification information is variablely displayed. Based on this, it is possible to change the variable starting device to an approach advantageous state (in this example, the part where step S5103 is executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and based on the fact that the game medium has entered the variable starting device. The variable display of the identification information can be executed (in this example, the part where step S26B is executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and the display result of the variable display of the identification information is a predetermined display result (in this example, a small hit). Based on the design), it is possible to control the predetermined variable device to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) in which the predetermined variable device is changed to an approach advantageous state (in this example, a step in the game control microcomputer 560). (Parts in which S358 to S360 are executed), and can be controlled to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is increased (in this example, steps S2208A and S2211A in the game control microcomputer 560). , S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B) As special states, the first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and the second special state having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. (In this example, it can be controlled to high probability / second KT state), and in the first special state, the game medium that has passed through the special area when the variable display of the normal identification information is not performed becomes the variable starting device. The variable starting device is controlled so that it can enter (in this example, a game ball). The minimum required time from passing through the gate 32 to reaching the variable winning ball device 15 is 0.6 seconds, and in the first KT state, variable winning is performed 0.5 seconds after the game ball passes through the gate 32. By controlling the ball device 15 in the open state, when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the first KT state and the winning ball device 15 is controlled in the open state, the one game ball is variable as it is. It is possible to win a prize in the winning ball device 15). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the special situation.

For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952 includes a variable starting device (attacker) capable of changing between an approach advantageous state in which a game medium can enter and an approach disadvantageous state in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. It is a gaming machine that changes a predetermined variable device to an approach advantageous state in a state, can be controlled to a special state in which the frequency of being controlled to a small hit game state is increased, and the predetermined variable device is controlled to an approach disadvantageous state. Described is a game machine in which the game medium is made easier to enter the predetermined variable device in the small hit game state by delaying the game ball flowing down on the predetermined variable device, and the degree of advantage in the special state is enhanced. However, in the game machine, the playability in a special state is monotonous, and the interest is insufficient. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the special state by configuring it as in the present embodiment.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, in the first KT state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 15 is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 32 The variable winning ball device 15 is not opened by the time the game ball that has passed through the above reaches the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special winning opening 24 can be won.) On the other hand, in this embodiment, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened after the game ball passes through the gate 32 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 15. Since it is set to start, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

Further, as a result, when a plurality of special states (first KT state, second KT state) are provided, a game ball to a predetermined variable device (special variable winning ball device 22) in some special states (first KT state). It is possible to suppress the invasion of. Therefore, a part of the special states (first KT state) can be set as a special state having a low degree of advantage, and it is possible to realize that the degrees of advantage of the plurality of special states are different.

Further, according to this embodiment, in the second special state, the variable starting device is controlled in an approach disadvantageous state for a longer period than in the first special state (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game control device. As shown in FIG. 15 (1), the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled in the second KT state as shown in FIG. 15 (2). (Controlled in a closed state for 3.8 seconds), the variable starting device is controlled so that the game medium that has passed through the special area cannot easily enter the variable starting device when the variable display of the identification information is not normally performed. (In this example, the shortest time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32 is 0.6 seconds, and the time for the game ball to flow down on the variable winning ball device 15. Is 0.5 seconds, and in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds. Therefore, when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the second KT state, a variable winning ball is won. When the ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, it is difficult for the one game ball to win the variable winning ball device 15 as it is). As a result, it is possible to easily give a profit to the player in the second special state.

In the present embodiment, the second KT state has a longer fluctuation time of the normal symbol than the first KT state, so that the second KT state has a variable prize over a longer period than the first KT state. It was decided to control the ball device 15 to the closed state, but the variable winning ball device 15 should be controlled to the closed state in the second KT state for a longer period than in the first KT state by other controls. May be realized.

For example, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed in the second KT state for a longer period than in the first KT state by configuring the second KT state to have a longer symbol confirmation time than the first KT state. It may be realized to control the state.

Further, for example, as shown in the present embodiment, in the second KT state than in the first KT state, the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit ( By making the configuration (the time before opening the ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. 38) longer, it is realized that the variable winning ball device 15 can be controlled to the closed state in the second KT state for a longer period than in the first KT state. You may.

In addition, the above-mentioned fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol, and the adjustment of a plurality of times of the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit are combined. By doing so, it may be realized that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the closed state in the second KT state for a longer period than in the first KT state.

Further, according to this embodiment, in the normal state, the variable starting device is controlled in an approach disadvantageous state for a longer period than in the first special state (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is shown in FIG. As shown in (1), in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 0.5 seconds, and in the normal state, the variable winning ball device 15 is operated for 3.8 seconds in the same manner as in the second KT state. The variable starter is controlled so that the game medium that has passed through the special area cannot easily enter the variable starter when the variable display of the identification information is not normally performed (in this example, the game is controlled). The minimum time required for the ball to reach the variable winning ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32 is 0.6 seconds, and the time for the game ball to flow down on the variable winning ball device 15 is 0.5 seconds. Since the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds in the normal state, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be open when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the normal state. If so, it is difficult for the one game ball to win the variable winning ball device 15 as it is). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being launched (right-handed) aiming at the special area in the normal state.

In the present embodiment, the normal symbol has a longer fluctuation time in the normal state than in the first KT state, so that the normal state has a variable winning ball device over a longer period than the first KT state. Although it was decided to control the 15 to the closed state, it was realized that the variable winning ball device 15 could be controlled to the closed state in the normal state for a longer period than in the first KT state by other controls. You may.

For example, by configuring the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol to be longer in the normal state than in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed in the normal state for a longer period than in the first KT state. It may be realized to control.

Further, for example, as shown in the present embodiment, in the normal state than in the first KT state, the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit (FIG. By making the configuration (the time before opening of the ordinary electric accessory shown in 38) longer, it is realized that the variable winning ball device 15 can be controlled to the closed state in the normal state for a longer period than in the first KT state. May be good.

In addition, the above-mentioned fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol, and the adjustment of a plurality of times of the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit are combined. By doing so, it may be realized that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the closed state in the normal state for a longer period than in the first KT state.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the small hit game state cannot be controlled based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the small hit symbol. Based on this, the configuration may be such that the small hit game state can be controlled. In that case, when the change of the second special symbol is started while the small hit variation of the first special symbol is being performed, the second special symbol may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the change of the second special symbol is executed, it is configured to be a big hit or a small hit (it does not become a normal loss) except when it is a forced loss. The present invention is not limited to the above, and even when the second special symbol is changed, it may be a normal deviation. For example, by setting the small hit ratio to 1/2, it is possible to make a loss, and when the small hits are continuous (the second small hit fluctuation without the big hit fluctuation or the missed fluctuation after the first small hit fluctuation). Is performed), a special effect that is not executed when the small hits are not continuous (when the next fluctuation of the small hits is a big hit or an outlier) (for example, an effect that notifies that the small hits are continuous) May be executed.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the approach advantageous state (in this example, the open state) in which the game medium (in this example, the game ball) can enter and the game medium cannot enter or are difficult to enter. A variable starting device (variable winning ball device 15 in this example) that can be changed to an approach disadvantageous state (closed state in this example) and an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device. A predetermined variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22) that can be changed to and is provided, and the variable starting device can be controlled by any one of a plurality of open patterns (see FIG. 15). .. Further, the variable display can be executed based on the entry of the game medium into the variable starting device, and the variable display is predetermined based on the predetermined display result (in this example, the small hit symbol). It is possible to control the variable device to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) that changes the variable device to an approach advantageous state, and it is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to the predetermined state is increased. Is. Further, as the special state, the first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and the second special state (high probability / second KT state in this example) having different degrees of advantage from the first special state. ) And can be controlled. Then, the variable starting device can be controlled by a specific opening pattern at different ratios depending on whether the control is performed in the first special state or the second special state (in this example, in the first KT state). , As shown in FIG. 15 (1), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for only 0.2 seconds. Open). Therefore, the monotonousness of the game playability in the special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game when the game is controlled in the special state can be improved.

In this embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 is always opened for 5.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the variable winning ball device 15 is always opened for 0.2 seconds in the second KT state. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variable winning ball device 15 may be opened for 0.2 seconds with a low probability even in the first KT state, or the variable winning ball device 15 may be opened with a low probability even in the second KT state. It may be configured to be open for 5 seconds. At least in the case of the second KT state, the ratio of short-opening the variable winning ball device 15 may be higher.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states (in this example, 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot), and a second special state. Has a higher advantage than the first special state (in this example, in the first KT state, it is rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 24 in a small hit game, whereas in the second KT state. Then, a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24 in a small hit game). In addition, it is possible to control the second special state according to the type of advantageous state (in this example, the high probability / second KT state is shifted to after the end of the big hit game based on the 16R probability variation big hit). Therefore, by associating the type of the advantageous state with the type of the special state, it is possible to pay attention to which type of the advantageous state is obtained.

Further, it may be configured to execute different effects during the jackpot game depending on the type of jackpot. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which effect is executed during the jackpot game.

Further, according to this embodiment, at least a part of the effects is taken over during the period controlled in the advantageous state (in this example, the jackpot game state) and the period controlled in the second special state. (In this example, the sound output of the music for the second KT is started at the start of the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot, and the sound output of the music for the second KT is continued until the end of the second KT state. ). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by giving the player a stronger impression that the player is controlled in the second special state.

In this embodiment, the case where the sound output of the music is inherited from the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot that triggers the second KT state to the subsequent second KT state is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the moving image may be inherited and displayed, the round number display may be inherited and displayed, or the prize ball number display may be inherited and displayed.

Further, according to this embodiment, a specific variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 20) provided on the upstream side of the variable starting device and capable of changing between an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state is provided. It is possible to control the specific variable device to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) that changes the approach advantageous state. In addition, it is determined whether or not the variable starting device is controlled to the approach advantageous state (in this example, whether or not it is a hit in the normal drawing), and the variable starting device is controlled to the approach advantageous state at the same ratio regardless of the state. Whether or not it is determined (in this example, in the normal symbol process process (step S26C), whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state). Regardless of which one is the jackpot game state or not, the same probability is used to determine whether or not the hit is a normal figure). Therefore, regarding the entry of the game medium into the specific variable device, it is possible to prevent the influence of the variable starting device that can control the approach advantageous state even during the advantageous state, so that the digestion period of the advantageous state can be shortened. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control to a special state (probability change state in this example) after controlling to an advantageous state, which is the same as the first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example). It is possible to control to the third special state (low probability / first KT state in this example) in which the open pattern is selected by the ratio and the variable starter is controlled and the variable display pattern is selected by a different ratio and the variable display is executed. Is. Then, when it is controlled to the advantageous state and then not controlled to the special state, it can be controlled to the third special state (in this example, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit is completed, the low probability / 1st KT Transition to state). Therefore, when it is controlled to the advantageous state and then not controlled to the special state, it is possible to give an opportunity to discourage the player from ending the game.

Further, according to this embodiment, the variable starting device and the predetermined variable device are provided with delay means (regulation piece 118 in this example) for delaying the flow of the game medium. Therefore, by providing the delay means, the flow speed of the game medium is delayed, the rate of entry of the game medium into the variable starting device can be further increased in the first special state, and the predetermined variable device in the second special state. The rate of entry of game media into the game can be further increased.

Further, according to this embodiment, variable display of the first identification information (first special symbol in this example) and variable display of the second identification information (second special symbol in this example) can be executed. At the same time, while the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is being executed, the other variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be executed (in this example, the first special symbol). The variable display of and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel). In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to control to a predetermined state (small hit game state in this example), and it is also possible to determine a variable display time (variable time in this example), and the second identification information is variable. When the display is executed, it can be determined that the predetermined state is controlled at a higher rate than the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed (in this example, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is possible to decide to make a small hit only in some cases). Then, when the control is performed in the special state, a shorter time can be determined as the variable display time of the variable display of the second identification information as compared with the case where the control is performed in the non-special state (in this example). As shown in FIGS. 13 (C), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 15 minutes or 5 minutes in the non-KT state, whereas as shown in FIGS. 13 (D) to 14 (I). , In the KT state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 1.5 seconds to 2 minutes and 20 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game in the game machine controlled to the special state.

In this embodiment, the case where the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may not be executed at the same time. In this case, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in the order of winning the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. It may be configured to give priority to the variable display of any of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol). In addition, when the variation display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the second special symbol may be out of order. , It is desirable not to be too gambling than necessary.

Further, according to this embodiment, a predetermined area (in this example, the operating gate 17) through which the game medium (in this example, the game ball) can pass is provided, and the player is in an advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state). It is controllable. Then, after the specific display result (in this example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium through the predetermined area. Therefore, when the player takes a break from the game after the end of the special state, it is possible to limit the control to the advantageous state from progressing during the break of the player. In particular, in this embodiment, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as long as 15 minutes or 5 minutes in the non-KT state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed immediately after the low probability / first KT state is completed. If the player has entered a break due to the long-time variable display, even if the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, the big hit game will proceed during the break. It can be limited and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the interests of the player are impaired.

In this embodiment, the case where the operating gate 17 is provided separately from the gate 32 is shown, but the gate 32 and the operating gate 17 may be configured as a common gate.

Further, it is not always necessary to provide the operation gate 17, and when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the game may be configured to shift to the big hit game as it is after the symbol confirmation display time elapses.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to externally output an advantageous state signal (in this example, a big hit signal 1 and a big hit signal 2) that can be specified to be controlled in an advantageous state. Further, when the specific display result (in this example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the variable display display result, the advantageous state signal can be output externally. Therefore, it is possible to notify the game clerk that the unmanned game machine without a player has become advantageous, and it is possible to promote the initialization of the game machine.

The external output of the advantageous state signal (in this example, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2) is not always indispensable, and the advantageous state signal may be configured not to be output externally.

Further, according to this embodiment, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (the big hit symbol in this example), the game medium is set in the first area (the big winning opening in this example). It is possible to control to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) in which the (game ball in this example) can enter, and the display result of the variable display becomes a predetermined display result (small hit symbol in this example). Based on this, it is possible to control a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) in which the game medium can enter the second region (in this example, the special winning opening 24). It is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is increased, and as the special state, the first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and the first It is possible to control to a second special state (high probability / second KT state in this example), which has a higher advantage than the first special state. Then, a special signal (in this example, a special winning opening winning signal) can be externally output in response to the entry of the game medium into the second region. Therefore, the state of entry of the game medium into the second region can be notified to the outside, and the game machine can be appropriately managed outside the game machine.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 32, when the jackpot signal 1 is not output, the prize ball rate (the number of prize balls obtained per 100 shots of game balls, BA) is BA> 100. There is a possibility that an act of illegally obtaining a prize ball was performed even though the jackpot game was not in progress, and the hall management computer can determine that it is abnormal. However, even in such a case, if the big hit signal 2 is output and the special winning opening winning signal is output, a prize ball may be obtained in the small hit game in the KT state. , BA> 100 is not determined to be abnormal, and appropriate management from outside the game machine can be performed.

Further, according to this embodiment, a common special signal can be output externally between the case where the first special state is controlled and the case where the second special state is controlled (in this example, FIG. 32). As shown in the above, a common special winning opening winning signal is output externally regardless of whether it is in the first KT state or the second KT state). Therefore, it is possible to simplify the external output processing on the game machine side.

As a modification shown in FIG. 33, as special signals, a first special signal (in this example, the special winning opening winning signal 1) and a second special signal different from the first special signal (in this example). , Special winning opening winning signal 2) can be output externally, the first special signal can be output externally when controlled to the first special state, and the second special signal can be output when controlled to the second special state. 2 The special signal can be output externally (as shown in FIG. 33, the special winning opening winning signal 1 is output externally during the first KT state, and the special winning opening winning signal 2 is output externally during the second KT state). It may be configured as. With such a configuration, the state of the game machine can be appropriately managed outside the game machine.

For example, in the modified example shown in FIG. 33, when the big hit signal 1 is not output and the big hit signal 2 is output, if the special winning opening winning signal 1 is output, the prize ball rate in the first KT state. It may be calculated as (BA1), and if the special winning opening winning signal 2 is output, it may be calculated as the winning ball rate (BA2) in the second KT state. Then, in the second KT state, a corresponding prize ball may be obtained in the small hit game, so even if BA2> 100, it is not judged as abnormal, and the prize ball is likely to be a small hit in the first KT state. Is rarely obtained. Therefore, if BA1> 100, it may be determined as abnormal. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform appropriate management from the outside of the game machine.

Further, for example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, even though the jackpot signal 2 is not output (that is, even though it is not in the KT state), the special winning opening winning signal (special winning opening winning signal 1). And the special winning opening winning signal 2) may be output as well, and the game clerk or the like may be notified of the abnormality. Further, even when the output frequency of the special winning opening winning signal is abnormally high, it may be determined to be abnormal and notified to a game clerk or the like.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, since the number of terminals provided on the external output terminal slope is limited (10 terminals in this example), the special winning opening 24 can be won. It is configured so that only the special winning opening winning signal indicating that it has been detected can be output, and the external output signal is not particularly output when the winning to the large winning opening is detected. Even with such a configuration, the abnormal state of the game machine 1 can be detected to some extent by notifying an external device such as a hall management computer of the winning status of the special winning opening 24.

The external output of the special signal (in this example, the special winning opening winning signal) is not always indispensable, and the special signal may be configured not to be output externally.

Further, according to this embodiment, the variable display display result is different from the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) based on the predetermined display result (in this example, the small hit symbol). It can be controlled to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state), and can be controlled to a special state (in this example, a KT state) in which the frequency of being controlled to the predetermined state is increased. It is provided with a specific area (special winning opening 24 in this example) into which a game medium (game ball in this example) can enter in a special state, and as a special state, a first special state (high probability / first in this example). It is possible to control a 1KT state) and a second special state (high probability / second KT state in this example), which has a higher advantage than the first special state. In addition, it is possible to execute an entry effect (in this example, display of prize ball addition display, output of prize sound, lighting display of special prize opening lamp 24a) based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the second special state. Therefore, when the game medium enters the specific area in the first special state, the entry effect is not executed (in this example, even if the game ball wins in the special winning opening 24 when it is not in the second KT state, the prize ball The addition display, the output of the winning sound, and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a are not executed). Therefore, by preventing the entry effect from being executed depending on the entry of the irregular game medium in the first special state (in this example, the special winning opening 24 is rarely won in the first KT state), the game state is set. In addition to being able to achieve consistency in the production of the above, it is possible to emphasize the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the second special state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect when controlling to a special state.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit gaming state), and the advantageous states are the first advantageous state (in this example, the 6R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation jackpot) and the first. It can be controlled to 2 advantageous states (in this example, 16R probability variation jackpot). Further, it is possible to control to the first special state after being controlled to the first advantageous state, and to control to the second special state after being controlled to the second advantageous state (in this example, 6R probability variation jackpot or 2R). After the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability / 1st KT state, and after the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability / second KT state), from the period controlled to the second advantageous state. 2 It is possible to execute a special effect (in this example, the sound output of the music for the second KT) over a period controlled by the special state. Therefore, the effect of the effect in the second special state can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, as the approach effect, an addition effect corresponding to the addition of the game value (in this example, the display of the prize ball addition display) and an effect by sound output corresponding to the entry of the game medium. (In this example, the output of the winning sound) and the effect of the light emitted from the light emitting body (in this example, the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a) are executed. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the second special state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, execution of entry effect (in this example, display of prize ball addition display, output of prize sound, lighting display of special prize opening lamp 24a), and special effect (in this example, sound output of music for the second KT). Is not always required, and may be configured so as not to perform one or both of these effects.

In this embodiment, on the effect control microcomputer 200 side, the variation display of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second variation display corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol The case where the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the background symbol are executed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variable display of the small symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the small symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be feasible. May be good. In this case, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be configured to be displayed in the display screen of the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device), or may be configured by a lamp or LED other than the effect display device 9. May be good.

[Modification Example] A modification of the above-described embodiment will be described below. In this modification, an example of a display screen (screen layout) displayed on the effect display device 9 mainly in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and the KT state (particularly low probability / first KT state), and An example of display control of the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage when shifting from the low probability / first KT state to the normal state will be described. In the following, the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage may be referred to as the first hold display, and the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage may be referred to as the second hold display.

The details will be clarified by the following description, but in this modified example, unlike the above-described embodiment, the effect display device 9 has a background symbol (first background shown in FIG. 63) according to the variable display of the special symbol. The symbol display unit 91a and the background symbol displayed on the second background symbol display unit 92a are displayed in a variable manner, and the small symbols smaller than the background symbol (first small symbol display unit 91b and second small symbol display shown in FIG. 63) are displayed in a variable manner. The small symbol displayed in the unit 92b) is displayed in a variable manner, and the first hold display (first hold display in the first hold display unit 61 shown in FIG. 63) or the second hold display (FIG. The second hold display in the second hold display unit 62 shown in 63) is displayed (that is, the first and second hold displays are not displayed in total as in the above-described embodiment), and depending on the gaming state. , The first specific display (first specific display in the first specific display unit 61a shown in FIG. 63) or the second specific display (second specific display in the second specific display unit 62a shown in FIG. 63) is displayed, and the first The hold number display (first hold storage number display 71 shown in FIG. 63) corresponding to the hold storage number is displayed. Further, in this modification, a part different from the above-described embodiment will be mainly described, and the other parts will be described as having the same configuration and processing as the above-described embodiment unless otherwise specified. Omit.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the hold storage display control process (step S707) in the modified example. In this hold storage display control process, display control of the first hold display, the second hold display, and the hold number display corresponding to the first hold storage number displayed on the effect display device 9 is performed.

In the hold storage display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first effective start winning command has been received (step S7071). Whether or not the first effective start winning command has been received depends on whether or not a flag corresponding to the type of the received command (effect control command) is set in the process of step S670 shown in FIG. 45, for example. It is recognizable.

When the effect control CPU 201 receives the first effective start winning command (Y in step S7071), the effect control CPU 201 updates the hold number display corresponding to the first hold storage number (step S7072). Specifically, when the effect control CPU 201 receives the first effective start winning command, the first reserved storage number is added by 1, and when the first variation pattern command is received, the first reserved storage number is subtracted by 1. 1 Hold storage number is stored in, for example, the first hold number storage buffer. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 201 receives the first effective start winning command, it updates and displays the hold number display (first hold storage number display 71) indicating the first hold storage number added by 1. The effect control CPU 201 is a hold number indicating the first hold storage number subtracted by 1 when the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the first hold storage is started (when the first fluctuation pattern command is received). The display (first hold storage number display 71) is updated and displayed.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the non-KT state (step S7073), and if it is not in the non-KT state (N in step S7073), it ends the process and is in the non-KT state. In (Y in step S7073), the hold notice determination process is executed (S7074). Whether or not it is in the non-KT state (or KT state) can be recognized by, for example, the type of background image currently displayed by the processing of steps S631, S634, S638, and S642 shown in FIG. 44.

In the hold notice determination process of step S7074, the display mode of the first hold display is any of a plurality of special modes (for example, “blue”, “green”, “red”) different from the normal mode (for example, “white”). Decide whether to give a hold notice to change to, and if so, what special mode and how to change (that is, the content of the change). Specifically, when the effect control CPU 201 receives the first effective start winning command from the game control microcomputer 560, it also receives the first winning determination result command. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 has a big hit determination random number (random 1) and a big hit, which are extracted based on a valid start winning prize and stored in the first hold storage buffer in the first start port switch passing process. Based on the type judgment random number (random 2) and the fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 5), it is judged whether or not it is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern is judged, and as a command indicating this judgment result, the judgment result at the time of the first prize is won. Send a command. Therefore, the effect control CPU 201 determines the hold notice based on the first winning determination result command received together with the first effective start winning command. For example, the effect control CPU 201 has a special mode (for example, “red”) that suggests that the jackpot expectation is high at a high rate when the fluctuation pattern indicated by the first winning determination result command is the jackpot fluctuation pattern. Decide to change to. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 201 determines that when the fluctuation pattern indicated by the first winning determination result command is an out-of-order fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern is not changed to the special mode (leaves the normal mode) at a high rate. .. Not limited to this, for example, in the effect control CPU 201, the fluctuation pattern indicated by the first winning determination result command has a high expectation of a big hit (that is, it is easy to be selected at the time of a big hit, and it is selected at the time of a loss. When it is a variation pattern that is difficult to be performed), it is decided to change it to a special mode (for example, “red”) that suggests that the jackpot expectation is high at a high rate, and the variation pattern indicated by the first winning judgment result command. However, when the jackpot expectation is low (that is, a fluctuation pattern that is difficult to be selected at the time of jackpot and easy to be selected at the time of loss), a high percentage is used to determine the normal mode that does not suggest the jackpot expectation. May be good. Further, instead of changing the display mode of the first hold display to a special mode at the time of starting prize (that is, when receiving the first valid start winning command), another timing (for example, the first hold display is shifted and displayed). It may be decided to change the command at a certain timing or a predetermined timing during the variable display of the special symbol. Further, in the hold notice determination process, the first specific display (first specific), which will be described later, is displayed when the first hold display is deleted and the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first hold display is started. The display mode of the first specific display) on the display unit 61a may be determined in advance.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 increases the first hold display in the first hold display unit 61 by 1 in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S7074 (step S7075).

On the other hand, when the first effective start winning command has not been received (N in step S7071), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second effective start winning command has been received (step S7076). When the effect control CPU 201 receives the second effective start winning command (Y in step S7076), it determines whether or not it is in the KT state (step S7077), and receives the second effective start winning command. If not (N in step S7076), the process proceeds to step S7083.

If the effect control CPU 201 is not in the KT state (N in step S7077), the process is completed, and if it is in the KT state (Y in step S7077), is the remaining 9 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time? Whether or not it is determined (step S7078). Here, the chance time is a low probability / first KT that is controlled until the special symbol is changed 100 times (that is, up to 100 rotations after the big hit game) after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. It refers to the state. The remaining number of fluctuations until the end of the chance time is, for example, the fluctuation after the effect control CPU 201 receives the low accuracy / first KT background designation command for the first time by the process of step S633 shown in FIG. 44 after the jackpot game ends. It can be recognized by storing the number of times and subtracting it from the specified number of times (100 times) of the chance time.

If the remaining 9 fluctuations or less (N in step S7078) is not reached until the end of the chance time, the effect control CPU 201 executes the hold notice determination process (step S7079). The hold notice determination process in step S7079 is the same as the hold notice decision process described in the process of step S7074, and can be explained by replacing "first" in the hold notice decision process in step S7074 with "second". .. After that, the effect control CPU 201 increases the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62 by 1 in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S7079 (step S7080).

When the remaining 9 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (Y in step S7088), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (step S7081). When the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (Y in step S7081), the effect control CPU 201 ends the process. At this time, if there is a second hold display that has already been displayed, the effect control CPU 201 may control all the second hold displays to be hidden. If the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (that is, the remaining 9 fluctuations to 6 fluctuations; N in step S7081), the effect control CPU 201 normally performs the second hold on the second hold display unit 62. The display is incremented by 1 (step S7082).

When neither the first effective start winning command nor the second starting winning command is received, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined state change has occurred (step S7083). Specifically, the effect control CPU 201 changes from the jackpot game state to the KT state as a predetermined state change based on the background designation command and the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560. It is determined whether or not there has been a change from the KT state to the non-KT state. When there is no predetermined state change (N in step S7083), the effect control CPU 201 ends the process, and when there is a predetermined state change (Y in step S7083), the effect control CPU 201 ends the process. The displayed first hold display or second hold display is hidden (step S7084). Specifically, when the game state changes from the jackpot game state to the KT state, the effect control CPU 201 hides the first hold display, and the game state changes from the KT state (to be exact, the first KT state) to the non-KT state. When the state changes, the second hold display is hidden. If the effect control CPU 201 has a second hold memory when the game state changes from the jackpot game state to the KT state, the effect control CPU 201 displays the second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory. , If the game state has the first hold memory when the game state changes from the KT state (to be exact, the first KT state) to the non-KT state, the first hold display corresponding to the first hold memory is displayed. To do.

Here, characteristic points in the above-described hold storage display control process will be described below.

When the first valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7071), the hold number display update (step S7072) is executed, whereas when the second valid start winning command is received (step S7076). In Y), the hold number display update is not executed. From this, it can be seen that the hold number corresponding to the first hold storage number is updated and displayed, while the hold number corresponding to the second hold storage number is not displayed. Further, the number of holds corresponding to the number of first hold storage is updated and displayed regardless of the gaming state (whether it is in the KT state or the non-KT state), whereas the number of hold corresponding to the second number of hold storage is displayed. It can also be seen that is not displayed regardless of the game status.

Further, when the first valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7071), the first hold display is not increased (N in step S7073) unless it is in the non-KT state (the process in step S7075 is not executed). ), When the second valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7076), the second hold display is not increased unless it is in the KT state (N in step S7077) (the processing in steps S7080 and S7082 is not executed). .. Further, when the state shifts to the KT state after the big hit, the first hold display is hidden, and when the state shifts from the KT state to the non-KT state, the second hold display is hidden (steps S7083 and S7084). From this, the first hold display is not displayed in the KT state and is displayed in the non-KT state (normal state), and the second hold display is not displayed in the non-KT state and is displayed in the KT state. You can see that.

Further, when the second valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7076), the hold notice is not executed if the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 times or less (S7079 is not executed by Y in step S7078). .. Further, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, the second hold display is not increased (S7082 is not executed by Y in step S7081). From this, in the second hold display, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time reaches 9 to 6 times, the execution of the hold notice is restricted (displayed in the normal mode), and the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5. It can be seen that when the number of times is less than or equal to the number of times, the execution of the hold notice is restricted and the addition of the second hold display is restricted (hidden) even in the KT state. As described above, regarding the second hold display, different display controls are performed according to the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time even in the same gaming state, and the reason for this will be described later with reference to FIG. 64.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the background symbol change start processing (step S901) in the modified example. In this background symbol variation start process, the same reference reference numerals are given to the same processes as those described with reference to FIG. 51, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 executes the specific display control process (step S920A). Here, the specific display control process will be described with reference to FIG. 62.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a specific display control process (step S920A) in the modified example. In this specific display control process, the first specific display (first specific display in the first specific display unit 61a shown in FIG. 63) and the second specific display (second specific display shown in FIG. 63) displayed on the effect display device 9 are displayed. The second specific display in the unit 62a) and the display control of the shielding effect are performed. Here, the first specific display is different from the first hold display unit 61 from the start to the end of the variation display in response to the variation display during the variation display of the first special symbol. 1 It is a display displayed on the specific display unit 61a to specify the execution of the variable display. Further, the second specific display is different from the second hold display unit 62 from the start to the end of the variation display corresponding to the variation display during the variation display of the second special symbol. It is displayed on the specific display unit 62a and is a display for specifying the execution of the variable display. Further, the first specific display (or the second specific display) has the same shape and size as the first hold display (or the second hold display) displayed on the first hold display unit 61 (or the second hold display unit 62). It is displayed by. However, the first specific display and the first hold display (or the second specific display and the second hold display) may have different shapes or different sizes, and are displayed in completely different modes. You may. For example, it is desirable that the first specific display and the first hold display (or the second specific display and the second hold display) are displayed in a manner in which a part of the shape and color is similar. Further, the shielding effect refers to an effect of shielding the second hold display and the second specific display from being difficult to see.

In the specific display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the received variation pattern command is the first variation pattern (that is, the variation pattern command for the first special symbol) (step S9301). In the case of the first fluctuation pattern (Y in step S9301), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the non-KT state (step S9302), and when it is not in the non-KT state (N in step S9302). In the case of the non-KT state (Y in step S9302), the specific notice determination process is executed (S9303). Whether or not it is in the non-KT state (or KT state) can be recognized by, for example, the type of background image currently displayed by the processing of steps S631, S634, S638, and S642 shown in FIG. 44.

In the specific notice determination process of step S9303, the display mode of the first specific display is any of a plurality of special modes (for example, "blue", "green", "red") different from the normal mode (for example, "white"). It is decided whether to give a specific notice to change the color, and if so, how to change it to which special mode (that is, the content of the change). Specifically, the effect control CPU 201 determines the specific advance notice based on the received first fluctuation pattern command. For example, the effect control CPU 201 determines that when the first fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern, it is changed to a special mode (for example, "red") suggesting that the jackpot expectation is high at a high rate. .. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 201 determines that when the first fluctuation pattern is an out-of-order fluctuation pattern, the first fluctuation pattern is not changed to a special mode (leaves the normal mode) at a high rate. Not limited to this, for example, in the effect control CPU 201, the first fluctuation pattern has a high expectation of a big hit (that is, a fluctuation pattern that is easy to be selected at the time of a big hit and difficult to be selected at the time of a miss). Occasionally, at a high rate, it is decided to change to a special mode (eg, "red") that suggests a high jackpot expectation, and the first variation pattern is one with a low jackpot expectation (ie, a jackpot). When it is a fluctuation pattern that is difficult to be selected and is easy to be selected at the time of deviation), it may be determined in a normal mode that does not suggest a jackpot expectation at a high rate. Further, instead of changing the display mode of the first specific display to a special mode at the start of fluctuation (that is, when the first fluctuation pattern command is received), another timing (for example, a predetermined timing during the fluctuation display of the special symbol) is performed. ) May be decided to change. Further, in the above-mentioned hold notice determination process (step S7074), if the display mode of the first specific display is determined in advance at the time of starting winning (that is, based on the look-ahead), the first specific display is determined based on the look-ahead. 1 The display mode of the first specific display in the specific notice determination process may be determined based on the display mode of the specific display. Specifically, for example, when the display mode of the first specific display is determined to be "green" based on pre-reading, a special mode suggesting that the jackpot expectation is higher than that of "green" (for example,). While it is possible to determine (“red”), it is prohibited to determine in a mode that suggests that the jackpot expectation is lower than “green” (for example, “green”) (that is, it is prohibited to lower the jackpot expectation. It may be). Further, for example, when the display mode of the first specific display is determined based on the look-ahead, the first specific display mode is displayed in the display mode determined based on the look-ahead, and in the specific notice determination process. The display mode may not be determined.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the first specific display in the first specific display unit 61a in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S9303 (step S9304).

On the other hand, when it is not the first fluctuation pattern (that is, when it is the fluctuation pattern command for the second special symbol; N in step S9301), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the KT state (that is, whether or not it is in the KT state). In step S9305), if it is not in the KT state (N in step S9305), the process is completed, and if it is in the KT state (Y in step S7077), whether or not there are 9 fluctuations or less remaining until the end of the chance time. Is determined (step S9306).

When the remaining 9 fluctuations or less (N in step S9306) are not reached until the end of the chance time, the effect control CPU 201 executes the specific advance notice determination process (step S9307). The specific notice determination process in step S9307 is the same as the specific notice determination process described in the process in step S9303, and can be explained by replacing "first" in the specific notice determination process in step S9303 with "second". .. After that, the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the second specific display in the second specific display unit 62a in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S9307 (step S9308).

When the remaining 9 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (Y in step S9306), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (step S9309). When the remaining 5 fluctuations or less (that is, the remaining 9 fluctuations to 6 fluctuations; N in step S9309) until the end of the chance time, the effect control CPU 201 is in the normal mode the second specification in the second specific display unit 62a. The display of the display is set (step S9310).

When the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (Y in step S9309), the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the shielding effect (step S9311). Here, the shielding effect is an effect that makes visibility of the second hold display and the second specific display difficult, and for example, the transparency of the screen displayed on the layer in front of the second hold display and the second specific display. Is a blackout effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the second hold display and the second specific display by gradually lowering the number of times remaining until the end of the chance time. The background symbol on the second background symbol display unit 92a, the small symbol on the second small symbol display unit 92b, and the first reserved storage number display 71 are displayed in a layer in front of the blackout effect. Even if the blackout effect is executed, it should be visible.

Although not described in the specific display control process described above, the display setting of the remaining number display 81 (see FIG. 63) indicating the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is performed during the chance time. Specifically, when the jackpot game is controlled to the low probability / first KT state (that is, the chance time is entered), the initial number of times (low probability / first KT state) is controlled as the number of times indicated by the remaining number display 81. The remaining number display 81 is controlled to the low probability / first KT state by displaying and setting the number of times that the special symbol is deducted by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is started. Indicates the number of remaining times (of chance time).

Here, characteristic points in the above-mentioned specific display control process will be described below.

When the first fluctuation pattern is received (Y in step S9301), the display of the first specific display is not set (N in step S9302) unless it is in the non-KT state (the process in step S9304 is not executed). When the second variation pattern is received (N in step S9301), the display of the second specific display is not set unless it is in the KT state (N in step S9305) (the processes in steps S9308 and S9310 are not executed). From this, the first specific display is not displayed in the KT state and is displayed in the non-KT state (normal state), and the second specific display is not displayed in the non-KT state and is displayed in the KT state. You can see that.

Further, when the second fluctuation pattern is received (N in step S9301), the specific notice is not executed if the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 times or less (S9307 is not executed by Y in step S9306). Further, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, the second specific display is not set to be displayed (S9310 is not executed by Y in step S9309). From this, in the second specific display, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time reaches 9 to 6 times, the execution of the specific notice is restricted (displayed in the normal mode), and the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5. It can be seen that when the number of times or less is reduced, the execution of the specific notice is restricted and the display of the second specific display is restricted (hidden) even in the KT state. As described above, regarding the second specific display, different display controls are performed according to the remaining number of chance times even in the same gaming state, and the reason for this will be described later with reference to FIG. 64.

The description returns to FIG. 61, and in the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the received variation pattern command is the first variation pattern (step S920B). In the case of the first fluctuation pattern (Y in step S920B), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the non-KT state (step S920C), and when it is not in the non-KT state (N in step S920C). Is set as the first non-display effect as the background symbol variation pattern (step S920F). On the other hand, in the non-KT state (Y in step S920C), the effect control CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol and the small symbol (step S920D), and one of the first variable effects as the background symbol pattern. Is set (step S920E). Here, the background symbol variation pattern is set according to the variation pattern, and the variation mode of the background symbol or the small symbol (for example, the reach symbol is temporarily stopped during the fluctuation, or the pseudo-ream symbol suggesting the pseudo-ream is temporarily stopped. It is an effect pattern that defines (variable modes such as letting). The first variation effect is set according to the first variation pattern, and is a plurality of effect patterns corresponding to the variation mode of the background symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a and the small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b. The first non-display effect is set according to the first variable pattern, and is an effect pattern in which the background symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a and the small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b are not variablely displayed (hidden). is there.

On the other hand, when it is not the first fluctuation pattern (that is, when it is the fluctuation pattern command for the second special symbol; N in step S920B), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the KT state (that is, whether or not it is in the KT state). In step S920G), if it is not in the KT state (N in step S920G), the second non-display effect is set as the background symbol variation pattern (step S920J). On the other hand, in the KT state (Y in step S920G), the effect control CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol and the small symbol (step S920H), and uses one of the second variable effects as the background symbol pattern. Set (step S920I). Here, the second variation effect is set according to the second variation pattern, and a plurality of effect patterns corresponding to the variation mode of the background symbol in the second background symbol display unit 92a and the small symbol in the second small symbol display unit 92b. The second non-display effect is set according to the second variation pattern, and the background symbol in the second background symbol display unit 92a and the small symbol in the second small symbol display unit 92b are not variablely displayed (non-display). It is a production pattern.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 uses the set background symbol variation pattern (see steps S920E, S920F, S920I, 920J), the set specific display (see steps S9304, S9308, S9310), and the set shielding effect (see steps S9304, S9308, S9310). Select the process table according to (see step S9311) and the like (step S920K). As a result, in the subsequent processing, various effects of the set contents are output from the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) along with the variable display of the special symbol.

Here, characteristic points in the background symbol change start processing described above will be described below.

When the first variation pattern is received (Y in step S920B), the first non-display effect is set as the background symbol variation pattern unless it is in the non-KT state (N in step S920C), so that the first background symbol is set. The background symbol is not displayed on the display unit 91a, and the small symbol is not displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b (step S920F). On the other hand, when the second variation pattern is received (N in step S920B), the second background is set as the background symbol variation pattern unless it is in the KT state (N in step S920G). The background symbol is not displayed on the symbol display unit 92a, and the small symbol is not displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b (step S920F). From this, in the non-KT state (normal state), when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the background symbol and the small symbol are variable display according to the variation display, but the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed. It can be seen that the background symbol and the small symbol are not displayed according to the variable display even if it is performed. Further, in the KT state, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed, the background symbol and the small symbol are variablely displayed according to the variable display, but even if the first special symbol is variablely displayed, the fluctuation is displayed. It can be seen that the background symbol and the small symbol are not displayed depending on the display.

Further, the background symbol and the small symbol are not variablely displayed corresponding to the variable display of different special symbols (for example, the background symbol corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the small symbol is the first. 2 It is not a separate variable display corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol). For this reason, the background symbol and the small symbol are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with each other, so that a natural effect is realized, and the target of the variable display of the small symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) depends on the game state. It turns out that it is specified.

[Screen Layout] Next, the screen layout (display screen) in the effect display device 9 displayed by the processes shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 60 to 62 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 (1) shows an example of the screen layout in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), and FIG. 63 (2) shows an example of the screen layout in the chance time (low probability / first KT state).

As shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) has the first hold display unit 61 at the lower left of the display screen. The hold display is displayed. Specifically, in the first hold display unit 61, a number of first hold displays corresponding to the maximum number of first hold storages (4 in this case) are arranged on the left and right. Further, the first specific display is displayed on the first specific display unit 61a provided adjacent to the right side of the first hold display unit 61 at the lower center of the display screen. Then, when the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first hold storage is started, the hold display corresponding to the started variation display among the first hold displays displayed on the first hold display unit 61 (1). The rightmost hold display) is erased and shifted (moved) to the first specific display unit 61a to be displayed as the first specific display, and the remaining first hold display is shifted to the right one by one (hold display). Will be moved). The first hold display unit 61 and the first specific display unit 61a may be arranged at any position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the first hold display and the first specific display may be shifted. Instead, the display may be erased once and then redisplayed at another position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the normal state, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) displays the number of holds corresponding to the first number of holds stored in the left center portion of the display screen. 1 Hold storage number display 71 is displayed. In addition, as the mode of the first reserved storage number display, the number itself indicating the first reserved storage number may be used, or the display lamp of the number corresponding to the first reserved storage number is lit and displayed. May be good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the normal state, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) has a variation of the first special symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a in the central portion of the display screen. The background symbol corresponding to the display is variablely displayed, and the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is variablely displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b at the upper right of the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 63 (2), in the chance time (low probability / first KT state), the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) has a second hold display unit 62 at the lower left of the display screen. The hold display is displayed. Specifically, in the second hold display unit 62, a number of second hold displays corresponding to the maximum number of second hold storages (4 in this case) are arranged on the left and right. Further, the second specific display is displayed on the second specific display unit 62a provided at the lower center of the display screen and adjacent to the right side of the second hold display unit 62. Then, when the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold storage is started, the hold display corresponding to the start variation display among the second hold displays displayed on the second hold display unit 62 (1). The rightmost hold display) is erased and shifted (moved) to the second specific display unit 62a to be displayed as the second specific display, and the remaining second hold display is shifted to the right one by one (hold display). Will be moved). The second hold display unit 62 and the second specific display unit 62a may be arranged at any position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the second hold display and the second specific display may be shifted. Instead, the display may be erased once and then redisplayed at another position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), even in the chance time, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) displays the number of holds corresponding to the first number of holds stored in the left center portion of the display screen. 1 Hold storage number display 71 is displayed. On the other hand, the hold number display corresponding to the second hold storage number is not displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), during the chance time, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) changes the second special symbol in the second background symbol display unit 92a in the center of the display screen. The background symbol corresponding to the display is variablely displayed, and the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is variablely displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b at the upper right of the display screen.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), in the chance time, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) displays the remaining number display 81 indicating the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time in the lower right corner of the display screen. Is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen to indicate that the chance time is currently in progress (for example, a character display such as "during chance time") is displayed, and in the upper part of the display screen, during chance time (in KT state). A right-handed display is performed to instruct the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed) aimed at the right side of the game area 7.

Here, although not shown, the screen layout in the high probability / first KT state and the high probability / second KT state will be briefly described. In the high probability / first KT state, the same screen layout as in the low probability / first KT state shown in FIG. 63 (2) is displayed, but the remaining number display 81 is not displayed and in the upper left corner of the display screen. The difference is that a display indicating that the state is in the high probability / first KT state (for example, a character display such as “during normal rush”) is performed. In the high probability / second KT state, the same screen layout as in the low probability / first KT state shown in FIG. 63 (2) is displayed, but the remaining number display 81 is not displayed and in the upper left corner of the display screen. The difference is that a display indicating that the state is in the high probability / second KT state (for example, a character display such as “during special rush”) is performed.

As described above, in the normal state, the effect display device 9 can display the first hold display and the first specific display, and the background symbol corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol. And small symbols are displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, in the normal state, the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed on the effect display device 9, and even if the second special symbol is variablely displayed, the background corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. No symbols or small symbols are displayed. Further, during the chance time (or KT state), the effect display device 9 can display the second hold display and the second specific display, and corresponds to the variable display of the second special symbol. The background symbol and the small symbol are displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, during the chance time (or KT state), the first hold display and the first specific display are not displayed on the effect display device 9, and even if the first special symbol is variablely displayed, the first special symbol is displayed. Background symbols and small symbols corresponding to the variable display are not displayed. As described above, in the normal state, the background symbol and the small symbol corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol are not displayed, and the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed. Therefore, the variation time in the normal state. Even if the variation display of the second special symbol is performed for a very long time (for example, 5 minutes or 15 minutes), the degree of recognition of the player for the variation display of the second special symbol can be reduced, which is appropriate. It is possible to perform production control. Further, in the KT state such as during the chance time, as a result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol whose fluctuation time is shorter than that in the normal state, the frequency of small hits per unit time is increased, so that the player is small. Pay attention to the variable display of the second special symbol that triggers the hit. Therefore, in the KT state, even if the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the variation display of the background symbol or the small symbol corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is not performed, and the first hold display or the first hold display is performed. By not performing the first specific display, the recognition degree of the variable display of the first special symbol can be lowered, and the variable display of the second special symbol can be paid more attention.

Further, as can be seen from FIGS. 63 (1) and 63 (2), in the normal state, the small symbol is variablely displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b according to the variable display of the first special symbol, and during the chance time ( Alternatively, in the KT state), the small symbol is variablely displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b according to the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, the background symbol on the first background symbol display unit 91a in the normal state and the variable display of the background symbol on the second background symbol display unit 92a during the chance time (or KT state) are displayed as a predetermined effect (for example, reach effect, etc.). ), Even if it is hidden (or difficult to see), the player can recognize the appropriate variable display of the special symbol according to the game state by checking the small symbol.

Further, as can be seen from FIGS. 63 (1) and 63 (2), the display indicating the number of the second reserved storage is not displayed regardless of the gaming state. This is due to the following reasons. That is, even though the second hold display is not displayed in the normal state, there is a possibility that the effect may be inconsistent if the display indicating the number of the second hold storage is performed. Further, during the chance time, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, the display of the second hold display is restricted (shielded by the shielding effect or controlled to be hidden). ). Therefore, for example, even though the display of the second hold display is restricted during the chance time, if the number of the second hold storages is displayed, there is a possibility that the effect may be inconsistent. Therefore, during the chance time, by not displaying the number of the second hold storage from the beginning, the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time becomes 5 times or less, and the display of the second hold display is restricted. I am trying to realize a natural production. For the above reasons, it is assumed that the number of second reserved memories is not displayed regardless of the game state, but for example, a KT state different from the chance time (a state in which the KT state is guaranteed until the next big hit). Then, since the second hold display is not limited, the number of second hold storages may be displayed.

Further, as can be seen from FIGS. 63 (1) and 63 (2), the first reserved memory number display 71 indicating the number of the first reserved memory is displayed regardless of the gaming state. This is due to the following reasons. That is, in the non-KT state (normal state), the display of the first hold display is not restricted, so that the player's recognizability is ensured by displaying the first hold storage number display 71 in the normal state. There is. Further, even in the KT state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is not long (for example, 10 seconds or less), so even if the first reserved memory remains when the KT state is started, it is immediately digested and the KT state is reached. In, the first hold memory is rarely newly generated because the right-handed hit is performed. Therefore, even if the first reserved memory number display 71 is displayed in the KT state, the number is almost always "0", and it is unlikely that the player feels uncomfortable. Further, rather, by making the player recognize that the first reserved memory number display 71 indicates "0", it is made to recognize that it is a right-handed game (that is, a game in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed). , It becomes possible to concentrate more on right-handed games. For the above reasons, the first reserved storage number display 71 is supposed to be displayed regardless of the game state, but it may be hidden in the KT state.

In the normal state, the fourth symbol is variablely displayed in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and in the KT state such as during the chance time, the variable display of the first special symbol is supported. The fourth symbol may be displayed in a variable manner. Here, the variable display of the fourth symbol is a predetermined display in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and smaller than the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b. This is achieved by continuing to turn on and off the color (for example, blue) at regular time intervals. The area in which the fourth symbol is variablely displayed (fourth symbol display area) may be an area different from the display screen of the effect display device 9, and for example, a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED may be used to display the fourth symbol. 4 The symbol display area may be realized. In this way, by performing the variable display of the fourth symbol, the background symbol or the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is not displayed in the normal state, or the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the KT state. Even when the corresponding background symbol or small symbol is not displayed, the fluctuation state of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be confirmed by the fourth symbol. Further, since the fourth symbol has lower visibility than the background symbol and the small symbol, the player can reduce the degree of recognition of the variation display of the second special symbol to the player under the normal state, and the KT. In the state, the player can reduce the degree of recognition of the variation display of the first special symbol.

Further, a hold display lamp (not shown) corresponding to the first hold display and the second hold display may be provided outside the frame of the effect display device 9, and the hold display lamp may be lit and displayed regardless of the gaming state. .. The display control of the hold display lamp may be controlled by the game control microcomputer 560, or may be controlled by the effect control microcomputer 200. In addition, a hold indicator lamp whose display is controlled by each of the two may be provided separately. By separately providing the hold display lamp in this way, even if the second hold display is not displayed in the normal state or the first hold display is not displayed in the KT state, the hold display lamp sets the first hold storage number and the second hold. You can check the number of memories. Further, since the hold display lamp is provided outside the frame of the effect display device 9, the visibility is lower than that of the hold display on the first hold display unit 61 and the second hold display unit 62, so that the player can see the hold display lamp in the normal state. On the other hand, the recognition degree of the second hold display can be lowered, and in the KT state, the recognition degree of the first hold display can be lowered for the player.

Further, in the above-described modification, the first hold display or the second hold display is displayed according to the game state, and the first specific display or the second specific display is displayed according to the game state, so that the first hold is displayed. It is assumed that the display positions of the display unit 61 and the second reserved display unit 62 are the same (lower left of the display screen), and the display positions of the first specific display unit 61a and the second specific display unit 62a are the same (lower center of the display screen). ), But these may be in different positions. Similarly, in the above, it is assumed that the display positions of the first background symbol display unit 91a and the second background symbol display unit 92a are the same (center portion of the display screen), and the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 91b. Although the display positions of 92b are the same (upper right part of the display screen), they may be different from each other. Further, for example, even if the display positions of the first background symbol display unit 91a and the second background symbol display unit 92a (or the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b) are the same, they are displayed separately. By changing the display mode of the background symbol (or small symbol) to be displayed, it is possible to distinguish between the one corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the one corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. May be good. Further, for example, when the display positions of the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b are set to different positions (particularly positions that do not overlap each other), the small symbols can be displayed at the respective display positions. Will be. In this case, in the normal state, the small symbol may be variablely displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b according to the variable display of the second special symbol. However, in this case, it is preferable that the small symbol in the second small symbol display unit 92b has lower visibility than the small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b. Similarly, in the KT state such as during the chance time, the small symbol may be variablely displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b according to the variable display of the first special symbol. However, in this case, it is preferable that the small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b has lower visibility than the small symbol in the second small symbol display unit 92b.

[Example of display control of the second hold display during the chance time] Next, the display control of the second hold display and the second specific display during the chance time displayed by the processing of the flowcharts of FIGS. 60 to 62 described above. An example will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 64 (1) shows an example of the display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 10 times or more during the chance time. As shown in FIG. 64 (1), at this time, the second hold display unit 62 displays the second hold display and the second specific display unit 62a displays the second specific display. Further, since the hold notice and the specific notice can be executed, the second hold display can be changed to a special mode, and the specific display can also be changed to a special mode. During the chance time, a right-handed display is performed so that the player can make a right-handed hit.

FIG. 64 (2) shows an example of the display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 to 6 times during the chance time. As shown in FIG. 64 (2), at this time, the second hold display unit 62 displays the second hold display and the second specific display unit 62a displays the second specific display. However, since the execution of the hold notice and the specific notice is prohibited, the second hold display is displayed in the normal mode, and the second specific display is also displayed in the normal mode.

FIG. 64 (3) shows an example of the display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less during the chance time. As shown in FIG. 64 (3), at this time, a shielding effect (blackout effect) that shields the display areas of the second reserved display unit 62 and the second specific display unit 62a from being difficult to see is executed. As a result, the second hold display on the second hold display unit 62 becomes difficult to see, and the second specific display on the second specific display unit 62a becomes difficult to see. In addition, this blackout effect gradually blacks out (the transparency decreases) as the number of remaining times until the end of the chance time decreases. For this reason, it is possible to make the second hold display and the second specific display difficult to see, and it is possible to impressively suggest that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is reduced.

By the way, as can be seen from the flowcharts of FIGS. 60 to 62, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, the additional display and the second specific display of the second hold display are controlled to be hidden. Therefore, even if the shielding effect (blackout effect) is not executed, the additional display of the second hold display on the second hold display unit 62 is difficult to see (non-display), and the second specific display unit 62a is second. The specific display can be made difficult to see (non-display). Further, when the shielding effect (blackout effect) is executed, the additional display and the second specific display of the second hold display are not controlled to be hidden, but are displayed and controlled in the same manner as in FIG. 64 (2). May be good. Even in this case, the second hold display and the second specific display are shielded by the blackout effect displayed on the upper layer thereof, which makes the second hold display and the second specific display difficult to see and makes it difficult to see. The flow of display control of the second hold display and the second specific display can be simplified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (3), since the second hold display and the second specific display are restricted to be difficult to see due to the shielding effect, the second hold display is shifted and displayed (second hold display). The effect of shifting the display to the right and the effect of shifting the second hold display to the second specific display) are also restricted (difficult to see). Even if the shielding effect is not executed, if the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less and there is a second hold display that has already been displayed, all the second hold displays are not displayed. The display may be controlled, and the effect of shifting the second hold display may be limited to non-display.

Further, in the above, it is assumed that the second hold display and the second specific display are blocked by the shielding effect (blackout effect) that shields the entire screen, which makes it difficult to see (or hides). By changing the layout of the display screen, the second hold display or the second specific display may be made difficult to see (or non-display). Here, "changing the layout of the display screen" is a concept including changing the display position and display size of various display items displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the display item is a concept. It is a concept including all displays displayed as effects on the effect display device 9, such as background symbols and hold displays. As a change in the layout of the display screen, for example, the display area of the remaining number display 81 may be expanded. Specifically, by expanding the display area of the remaining number display 81 to the left, the second hold display unit 62 in which the second hold display is displayed and the second specific display unit 62a in which the second specific display is displayed are displayed. The display area may be shielded. Further, as a change in the layout of the display screen, for example, the second background symbol display unit 92a may be expanded downward to shield the second hold display and the second specific display. Further, the shielding effect is not limited to the blackout effect, and may be an effect of shielding the second hold display and the second specific display by using another display effect or a movable body (movable effect character). .. In addition, the second hold display and the second specific display are not completely shielded, and may be difficult to see due to a decrease in their visibility. For example, in the effect display device 9, the display positions of the second hold display and the second specific display are changed (for example, changed to the upper right corner), or the display size is changed (for example, reduced display). It may be the one that reduces the sex.

Further, the above-mentioned blackout effect is started on the condition that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, and the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be difficult to see. However, the blackout effect is started on the condition that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is, for example, 10 times or less, and the transparency becomes lower as the remaining number of times decreases, and the remaining number of times is 10 times or more. At the time of 6 times, the 2nd hold display and the 2nd specific display can be visually recognized, while when the remaining number of times reaches 5 times, the 2nd hold display and the 2nd specific display may become difficult to see. By doing so, it is possible to make the display control that makes the second hold display and the second specific display difficult to see more comfortable. Further, the same effect can be applied when an effect other than the blackout effect is used as the shielding effect.

FIG. 64 (4) shows an example of the display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the variation display of the final variation of the chance time (100th rotation after the start of the chance time) is completed. As shown in FIG. 64 (4), when the final fluctuation of the chance time is completed, the background symbol (for example, the stop symbol indicating the loss (or small hit)) corresponding to the result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (for example) "3", "9", "4") are stopped, and similarly, the small symbols (for example, "3", "9", "4") corresponding to the result of the variation display of the second special symbol are stopped. The background symbol and the small symbol may be different from each other. Then, with the end of the chance time, the right-handed display ends (becomes hidden), and instead, a left-handed notification for urging the player to left-handed is executed. Although not shown, during the fluctuation of the final fluctuation, an end display (for example, a character display of "Chance time end!") Is displayed to notify that the chance time is over, and the first one is displayed. Based on the value of the prize ball counter, the prize ball number display is displayed during the consecutive villas. As a result, it is notified that the consecutive villas have ended and the total number of prize balls acquired during that period (total number of prize balls won). Further, at this time, the number of big hits (number of consecutive villas) in a series of period from the first hit to the end of the chance time may also be notified.

FIG. 64 (5) shows an example of the display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) in the normal state immediately after the chance time ends (that is, the 101st rotation after the chance time starts). As shown in FIG. 64 (5), when the gaming state is switched from the first KT state to the normal state, the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62 and the second specific display in the second specific display unit 62a are hidden. Even if it is controlled and a new second effective start winning command is generated (that is, even if a new valid starting winning entry 14 is generated), the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed. On the other hand, when a new first start winning command is generated by the player making a left hit based on the left-handed notification shown in FIG. 64 (4) (that is, a new effective prize is generated for the first start winning opening). The first specific display is displayed on the first specific display unit 61a, the background symbol is variablely displayed on the first background symbol display unit 91a according to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first small symbol is displayed. Small symbols are displayed in a variable manner in unit 91b. As a result, the player recognizes the start of the variation display of the 101st rotation after the end of the chance time. When the first start winning command is newly generated during the variable display of the first special symbol, the first reserved memory number is updated, so that the first reserved memory number display 71 is updated and displayed, and the first The first hold display in the hold display unit 61 is additionally displayed.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 64, the reason why the display control of the second hold display and the second specific display differs depending on the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 63, in this modified example, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is very long (for example, 5 minutes or 15 minutes) in the normal state (non-KT state), and the normal state. Since left-handed is recommended, the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be hidden so as not to recognize that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, if the control is performed in the normal state after the end of the chance time, the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed as described above with reference to FIG. 64 (5). Therefore, if the second hold display is displayed when the change display of the final change of the chance time (100th rotation after the start of the chance time) ends, this second hold display is displayed when the normal state is switched to. Is suddenly controlled to be hidden, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. Also, for example, if there is a second hold display that has changed to a special mode at the end of the final change in chance time, the player will be discouraged by hiding this, or there will be a second hold display. Nevertheless, in the normal state, the effect (background pattern, etc.) is not displayed, which may cause inconsistency in the effect. However, as described above, in this modification, the second hold display and the second specific display are displayed before the final fluctuation of the chance time ends (that is, after the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time reaches 5 times). Since the display is controlled so that it is difficult to see, the player's recognition level for the second hold display and the second specific display is lowered, and the second hold display and the second specific display are hidden when the normal gaming state is entered. Even if it is controlled, it can be prevented from giving a sense of discomfort. In addition, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be difficult to see, but the background symbol and the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are visually recognized. Since the display is controlled as much as possible, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the second special symbol is variablely displayed during the chance time.

By the way, in the above-described modification, the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be difficult to see on condition that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, but the remaining number of times is The reason why it is required to be 5 times or less is as follows. That is, in the above-described modification, since the maximum number of second hold storages is 4, a maximum of four second hold displays can be displayed, and the second specific display is also displayed during the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, by displaying the second hold display and the second specific display, it is possible for the player to recognize information for a maximum of 5 fluctuations. Therefore, by controlling the display of the second hold display and the second specific display to be difficult to see when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time reaches 5, the display was visually recognized during the chance time after the end of the chance time. It is possible to prevent the situation where the second specific display and the second hold display are hidden. It should be noted that the second hold display and the second specific display are displayed on the condition that the remaining number of times is 5 times or less, and the remaining number of times is more than 5 times (for example, 10 times) or less. The display may be controlled so that it is difficult to see. Further, after the chance time ends (after the transition to the normal state), the second hold display and the second specific display may be displayed and controlled so as to be difficult to see, that is, until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times, that is, the KT state. The second hold display and the second specific display may be displayed and controlled so as to be difficult to see for a period before and after the timing including the end of.

Further, in the above-described modification, the hold notice of the second hold display and the specific notice of the second specific display are restricted (not executed) on the condition that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 times or less. However, the reason why the remaining number of times is 9 times or less is as follows. That is, as described above, when the remaining number of times is 5 times or less, the second hold display and the second specific display are visually controlled to be difficult to see. Therefore, if the mode of the second hold display or the second specific display, which is controlled to be difficult to see, is changed to a special mode, the display becomes difficult to see while giving the player a sense of expectation. As a result, the player's expectation may be impaired, or the production may be inconsistent. For this reason, by limiting the hold notice of the second hold display on the condition that the remaining number of times is 9 times or less, the fourth second hold display, which is the maximum number of holds, shifts as the second specific display after 4 fluctuations. It is displayed, and even if it is controlled to be difficult to see because the remaining number of times is 5 times or less, the second specific display in the normal mode is only controlled to be difficult to see. It becomes possible to avoid it. Regarding the second hold display, it is necessary to limit the hold notice of the second hold display on the condition that the remaining number of times is 9 times or less in consideration of the possibility that the shift display is displayed by a maximum of 4 fluctuations. However, this does not apply to the second specific display. Therefore, regarding the second specific display, the specific notice may be restricted on condition that the remaining number of times that the display becomes difficult to see is 5 times or less. Further, without the condition that the remaining number of times is 9 times or less, the hold notice of the second hold display and the second hold condition that the remaining number of times is more than 9 times (for example, 20 times) or less. The specific notice of the specific display may be restricted.

By the way, in a gaming machine that can be controlled in a special state such as the KT state in which the frequency of small hits per unit time is increased, the player remains when the KT state ends and shifts to the normal state. In order to confirm the result of whether or not to make a big hit based on the second hold memory, the game machine may be intentionally occupied without firing the game ball after the end of the KT state. In such a case, it is not appropriate for the game store because the operation of the game machine is reduced. Further, if the player can recognize the second hold display related to the second hold memory remaining after the end of the KT state, all of them are hidden for a long time (for example, if there are four 15-minute long fluctuation holds). 60 minutes until it becomes) The KT state ends in an unnatural display state in which the second hold display is displayed. Furthermore, although it is not always a big hit based on the remaining second reserved memory, until the variation display based on the second reserved memory is completed and the pass / fail result is displayed (pending digestion). Since it takes a certain amount of time (for example, 15 minutes), the player may miss the opportunity to finish the game, and if the player continues the game, the player may be disadvantaged. However, as described above, according to this modification, the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed after the end of the KT state, and the second hold display is displayed during the chance time (before the end 5 change). And by controlling the second specific display to be difficult to see, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively recognizing that there is a remaining second reserved memory. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from intentionally occupying the game machine, thereby preventing a decrease in the operation of the game machine, and it is possible to realize a display that does not give a sense of discomfort at the end of the KT state. It is possible to prevent the player from missing the opportunity to end the game.

In the above-described modification, the second hold display and the second specific display are displayed in the KT state, but the second hold display and the second specific display are not always displayed (or are not displayed regardless of the game state). It may be difficult to see). This is suitable, for example, in the case of a gaming machine having the following KT hits and non-KT hits in a predetermined ratio. Here, the KT hit is a big hit that can be determined when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and is a big hit that is controlled in the KT state until the next big hit after the big hit game is completed. Further, the non-KT hit is a big hit that can be determined when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and is a big hit that is controlled in the normal gaming state immediately after the big hit ends. In such a gaming machine having a KT hit and a non-KT hit, it is conceivable to display a second hold display in order to improve the interest of the game in the KT state after winning the KT hit. Then, if a non-KT hit is won in such a gaming state, when the second special symbol indicating a non-KT hit stops (that is, when a big hit is confirmed), a right-handed hit is performed in the KT state. Therefore, it is highly possible that a maximum of four second hold displays are displayed. However, if a non-KT hit is won, the second hold display that was displayed before the jackpot is confirmed is controlled to be hidden by being controlled to the normal state after the jackpot game. Then, before the jackpot is confirmed, for example, the second hold display, which has changed to a special mode, is hidden, which discourages the player, or even though there is a second hold display, the effect (in the normal state). The background pattern, etc.) may not be displayed, which may cause inconsistency in the production. Therefore, in order to avoid such inconsistency in the effect, it is difficult to visually recognize the second hold display related to the second hold memory stored after the second hold memory indicating the non-KT hit in the KT state. It is preferable to control the display (for example, hide). Therefore, for example, based on the look-ahead at the time of the start winning (second prize determination result command), at the timing when the start winning indicating a non-KT hit occurs, the second hold display regarding the subsequent start prize (second hold memory) is displayed. It is conceivable to control the display so that it is difficult to see. However, if the display control based on such look-ahead is performed, it is confirmed in advance that it is a big hit, so that there is a risk of reducing the interest of the game. Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a non-KT hit, the second hold display may not always be displayed (or is difficult to see) even in the KT state (regardless of the gaming state). By doing so, even if a non-KT hit is won, the second hold display is not displayed without suggesting that a big hit is confirmed in advance in the KT state, so that the effect of the transition to the normal gaming state is not achieved. Consistency can also be avoided.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine having a non-KT hit, for example, at the timing when a start prize indicating a non-KT hit occurs based on the look-ahead at the time of the start prize, the second start prize (second hold memory) is related to the subsequent start prize. In addition to controlling the display of the hold display so that it is difficult to see, at the timing when the start prize that shows a deviation (or small hit) at a predetermined rate occurs based on the look-ahead at the start prize, the subsequent start prize (second) The second hold display regarding the hold memory) may be displayed and controlled so as to be difficult to see for a predetermined period (predetermined number of fluctuations). In this way, the second hold display may be difficult to see for a predetermined period even when it is not a big hit (there is a so-called ghost), so that the big hit is not confirmed and suggested in advance in the KT state. Since the second hold display is not displayed even if the player wins the KT, it is possible to avoid inconsistency in the effect when the game shifts to the normal game state.

Further, as described above, in the gaming machine having KT hit and non-KT hit, in addition to the display control that makes the second hold display difficult to see regardless of the game state, and the non-KT hit based on the look-ahead. By performing display control that makes the second hold display difficult to see for a predetermined period when there is a deviation (or a small hit) at a predetermined ratio, inconsistency in the effect can be avoided. These display controls (hereinafter referred to as specific display controls) are not limited to gaming machines having KT hits and non-KT hits, and are large hits according to KT hits and non-KT hits (hereinafter referred to as quasi-non-KT hits). It can also be applied to a game machine having a predetermined ratio. Here, the quasi-non-KT hit is a jackpot that can be determined when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and is from a predetermined number of times (for example, four times, which is the maximum number of the second reserved memory) after the jackpot ends. It is a big hit that shifts to the normal gaming state after controlling the KT state only a small number of times (for example, once). In a gaming machine having such a quasi-non-KT hit at a predetermined ratio, when a quasi-non-KT hit is won while being controlled in the KT state, the number of times controlled in the KT state after the big hit game is the second reserved memory number. Less than the maximum number of. Therefore, if the second hold display is displayed while being controlled in the KT state, the KT state after hitting the quasi-non-KT ends and is controlled to the normal game state, and the second hold display is hidden. When the second special symbol indicating a quasi-non-KT hit is stopped (that is, when the jackpot is confirmed), a part of a maximum of four second hold displays (remembered later) that may have been displayed. There is a risk that the second hold display) related to the hold memory will be hidden. Therefore, even in a gaming machine having a quasi-non-KT hit in place of (or in addition to) a non-KT hit at a predetermined ratio, it is possible to avoid inconsistency in production by performing the above-mentioned specific display control.

In the above, the KT hit is a big hit that is controlled in the KT state until the next big hit after the big hit game ends, but after the big hit ends, a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times, which is the maximum number of the second hold memory). It may be a jackpot controlled to the KT state more times (for example, 100 times). Even in this case, since there is a possibility of winning a non-KT hit or a quasi-non-KT hit in the KT state, the above-mentioned specific display control can be applied in the same manner.

Further, the above-mentioned modification is applied to a game machine (so-called loop machine) that is controlled in a high probability state until the next big hit at a predetermined ratio (65%), but any big hit is won. It may also be applied to a game machine (so-called ST machine) that is controlled in a high probability state until a predetermined number of fluctuation displays are completed after the big hit game. Further, in this case, when the control is performed in the high probability state, the KT state is controlled at the same time, and when the control is performed in the KT state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set shorter than the normal state. As a result, the frequency of small hits per unit time may be increased. In this case as well, the second hold display and the second specific display are displayed and controlled so as to be difficult to see from 5 changes before the final change controlled in a high probability state, and the second hold display is held before 9 changes of the final change. The notice and the specific notice of the second specific display may be restricted.

In addition, when controlled in a high-probability state, a game machine (so-called fall lottery type game machine) that draws a lottery (fall lottery) to determine whether to shift to a low-probability state for each fluctuation, or a predetermined number of fluctuation displays are displayed. In a game machine controlled in a high probability state (so-called ST type game machine) in a predetermined period (ST period) until the end, when controlled in a high probability state, it is controlled in the second KT state and in a low probability state. When it is controlled, it may be controlled in a non-KT state. In such a game machine, when shifting from the high probability state / second KT state to the low probability state / non-KT state (normal state), the final fluctuation controlled by the KT state (second KT state) (that is, fall). In the lottery type, the change in which the fall lottery is won, and in the ST type, the final change in the ST period), the second hold display may be controlled to be difficult to see, and the second specific display may be controlled to be difficult to see.

Further, in the above-described modification, as described above, even if the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 is detected in the normal state (non-KT state), the second hold display and the second specific display are displayed. It is not displayed, and the background symbol and the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are not displayed (that is, the display effect is restricted). However, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 is detected in the normal state, not only the display effect is limited, but also the right-handed hit aiming at winning the second starting winning opening 14 is not performed. A notification effect (for example, left-handed notification) may be performed. By doing so, the degree of recognition of the player that the second special symbol is changed and displayed in response to the event of winning the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 in the normal state is lowered. , It is possible to relatively increase the degree of recognition of the player that it is an opportunity for the left-handed notification to be performed (right-handed is prohibited). Therefore, it is possible to reduce right-handed hits aimed at illegal small hits.

Further, in the above-described modification, when the display positions of the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b are set to different positions (particularly positions that do not overlap each other), in the case of forced disconnection, in the normal state. Even if there is, the small symbol may be stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 62b, and the small symbol may be stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b even in the KT state. For example, in the normal state, the small symbol is variablely displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b according to the variable display of the first special symbol, but since the variable display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation, at the same time. When the variable display of the second special symbol that has been changed and displayed is forcibly removed, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating forced loss is stopped on the second small symbol display unit 92b. It may be displayed. Similarly, in the KT state, the small symbol is variablely displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b according to the variable display of the second special symbol, but the variable display of the second special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation. When the variable display of the first special symbol, which was displayed in a variable manner at the same time, is forcibly removed, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating the forced loss is displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b. It may be stopped and displayed.

Further, in the above-described modification, when the display positions of the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b are set to different positions (particularly positions that do not overlap each other), the normal state is obtained at the time of a big hit. However, the small symbol may be stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b. For example, in the normal state, the small symbol is variablely displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b according to the variable display of the first special symbol, but the variable display of the second special symbol, which is simultaneously variablely displayed, is a jackpot fluctuation. In some cases, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating the big hit may be stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b. Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started while the variation display of the second special symbol indicating the jackpot is being performed, the small symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b. Later, the first normal instruction notification 56A or the second normal instruction notification 56B may be performed to positively notify that the jackpot is a big hit. Further, at this time, even if the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, the effect related to the fluctuation of the first special symbol is restricted (for example, the variation display of the background symbol or the small symbol according to the fluctuation of the first special symbol is displayed. (Not executed), instead, an effect (a special effect indicating a big hit) may be performed according to the variable display of the second special symbol. On the other hand, when the variation display (big hit variation) of the second special symbol is completed without performing the variation display of the first special symbol, after the small symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b, It may be assumed that the first reduction instruction notification 56C is performed or the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed to passively notify that the jackpot is a big hit. If the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a deviation (or small hit) fluctuation in the normal state, the small symbol is not displayed on the second small symbol display 92b (that is, the deviation or small hit) as described above. In the case of a small hit, it may not be notified depending on the display effect).

Further, in the above-described modification, when the display positions of the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b are set to different positions (particularly positions that do not overlap each other), the KT state is obtained at the time of a big hit. However, the small symbol may be stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display unit 61b. For example, in the KT state, the small symbol is fluctuated and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b according to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, but the fluctuating display of the first special symbol that is fluctuated at the same time is a jackpot fluctuation. In some cases, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating the big hit may be stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b. In the KT state, since the player usually hits right, the variation display of the second special symbol may be started when the variation display of the first special symbol indicating the big hit is performed. Mostly. In such a case, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed or the second normal instruction notification 56B is performed after the small symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b. It suffices to be notified that it is a big hit. Further, at this time, even if the variation of the second special symbol is started, the effect related to the variation of the second special symbol is restricted (for example, the variation display of the background symbol or the small symbol according to the variation of the second special symbol is displayed. (Not executed), instead, an effect (a special effect indicating a big hit) may be performed according to the variable display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, although it is rare, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, for example, when the game ball is accidentally won in the first start winning opening 13 and the player leaves the seat when the KT state is controlled. When the variation display (big hit variation) of the first special symbol is completed, the first reduction instruction notification 56C is performed or the second reduction instruction notification 56C is performed after the small symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b. It may be assumed that the reduction instruction notification 56D is performed to passively notify that the jackpot is a big hit. Alternatively, in the KT state, since the player usually strikes right, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed or the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed when the game ball passes through, for example, the operating gate 17 by right strike. 2 It may be possible to positively notify that the jackpot is a big hit by performing the normal instruction notification 56B. If the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is out of alignment in the KT state, the small symbol is not displayed in the first small symbol display unit 91b (that is, it is displayed in the case of out of alignment) as described above. It may not be notified depending on the production).

Further, in the above-described modification, the hold notice determination process in step S7079 did not mention the difference between the KT states (first KT state or second KT state), but whether it is the first KT state or the second KT state. The hold notice determination process may be executed accordingly. Specifically, in the hold notice determination process, the display mode of the second hold display is more likely to be changed to a special mode (that is, the hold notice is more likely to be performed) in the first KT state than in the second KT state. Good. This is due to the following reasons. That is, in the first KT state of the KT state, although small hits are likely to occur, there are very few cases where the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 22 (that is, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball due to the small hit). On the other hand, in the second KT state of the KT state, a small hit is likely to occur, and a game ball is likely to win a prize in the special variable winning ball device 22 (that is, a prize ball is easily obtained by a small hit). It becomes easy to give a profit to. Therefore, in the second KT state, the player expects a small hit (that is, a miss), but does not expect to win a big hit that may end the second KT state (rather, do not make a big hit for a long period of time). expect). On the other hand, in the first KT state, it is difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball even if a small hit occurs, so he expects a big hit instead of a small hit. Therefore, in the first KT state, the hold notice is more likely to be given than in the second KT state, thereby increasing the expectation of the player who expects a big hit in the first KT state and expecting a small hit in the second KT state. It is possible not to impair the expectation of the player. For the same reason, in the specific notice determination process of step S9307, the display mode of the second specific display is more likely to be changed to a special mode in the first KT state than in the second KT state (that is, the specific notice is performed). (Easy) may be used. In addition, as a result of displaying the variation of the second special symbol, if there is a non-small hit (normal miss) other than the big hit at a predetermined ratio, the second hold display or the second specific display is a small hit. A hold notice or a specific notice that changes to a mode (for example, the character display of "small") that is expected to exist may be given.

Further, in the above-described modification, as described with reference to FIG. 60, the effect control microcomputer 200 grasps the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time, and the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 times or less. In that case, the execution of the hold notice was restricted. However, whether or not to limit the hold notice may be determined by the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 grasps the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time by counting the number of fluctuations after controlling to the low probability / first KT state after the big hit game, and the chance time ends. When the remaining number of times up to 9 times or less is reached, a command for prohibiting the hold notice may be transmitted as the second winning determination result command to be transmitted when the second valid start winning is generated. In this way, the effect control microcomputer 200 that receives the second winning judgment result command gives a hold notice based on the second winning judgment result command without grasping the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time. You can decide whether to execute or prohibit. Further, it is assumed that the effect control microcomputer 200 can execute the hold notice only when a predetermined hold notice command is received from the game control microcomputer 560, and the game control microcomputer 560 may execute the hold notice. When the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 times or less, the hold notice command may not be transmitted even if the second effective start prize is generated. Even in this way, the effect control microcomputer 200 can determine whether to execute or prohibit the hold notice based on the hold notice command without grasping the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time. Similarly, whether or not to limit the specific advance notice may be determined not by the effect control microcomputer 200 but by the game control microcomputer 560.

As described above, according to this modification, the game machine is capable of variablely displaying the identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit state) that is advantageous to the player, and is the first identification. Variable display execution means (in this example, game control) capable of executing variable display of information (first special symbol in this example) and variable display of second identification information (second special symbol in this example) in parallel. A predetermined state control means (this example) that can be controlled to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state (the portion that executes steps S26A and S26B) in the computer 560. Then, the execution time of the variable display of the second identification information is higher than that of the normal state (the non-KT state in this example) and the normal state (the part where steps S358 to S360 are executed in the game control microcomputer 560). A state control means (this example) that can be controlled to a special state (KT state in this example) that is frequently controlled to a predetermined state by selecting a short fluctuation time in proportion (see FIG. 13 in this example). In the example, the part that executes steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, and S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560) and the first hold that can store the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the first hold storage. A storage means (in this example, a first hold storage buffer) and a second hold storage means (in this example, a second hold storage buffer) that can store information related to the variable display of the second identification information as a second hold storage. , The first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage (in this example, the first hold display in the first hold display unit 61) and the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage (in this example, the second hold display). The hold display means (in this example, the part that executes step S707 in the effect control computer 200) that can display the hold display means (the second hold display on the display unit 62) is provided, and the hold display means ends in a special state. It is possible to make the second hold display difficult to see in a specific period including the timing (in this example, the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time) (see FIG. 64 in this example). And said. As a result, in a gaming machine that can be controlled in a special state, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display. More specifically, when the special state ends, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display. The specific period may be a period including the timing at which the special state (KT state in this example) ends, and is not limited to the period from before the end of the special state to the end (for example, 5 fluctuations before the end). It may include a predetermined period (for example, 5 fluctuations after the end) after the end of the special state (after the transition to the normal state).

Further, according to this modification, when the second identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed, the specific display corresponding to the second identification information (in this example, the second specific display) is performed. A specific display means (in this example, a portion for executing steps S9308 and S9310 in the effect control microcomputer 200) capable of displaying the second specific display in the unit 62a is further provided, and the specific period (in this example, the chance time) is further provided. In the period other than the period (the period in which the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end), the hold display means can display the second hold display and the specific display means can display the specific display, and in the specific period, the hold display means is the first. 2 It is possible to make the hold display difficult to see (in this example, step S7082 is not executed when it is Y in step S7081), and the specific display means makes the specific display difficult to see (in this example, step). If it is Y in S9309, step S9310 is not executed). As a result, when the special state ends, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the specific display corresponding to the second identification information.

Further, according to this modification, the predetermining means for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state based on the establishment of the start condition (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S65A and S65B). Part) and the specific determination means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an advantageous state is obtained based on the second reserved memory before the determination of the advance determination means) in steps S312, S215, and S216. , S322), and the hold display means sets the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage that is the judgment target of the specific judgment means according to the judgment result of the specific judgment means. 1 It is possible to execute the first aspect change effect (in this example, a hold notice) that changes to a special aspect, and the specific display means is a determination target of the advance determination means according to the determination result of the advance determination means. It is possible to execute the second mode change effect (specific notice in this example) that changes the specific display corresponding to the second identification information to the second special mode, and the predetermined period including the specific period (in this example, the chance time ends). In the remaining period of 9 fluctuations or less), the hold display means restricts the execution of the first aspect change effect (in this example, step S7079 is not executed when Y in step S7078), and the specific display means is the first. It was decided to limit the execution of the two-mode change effect (in this example, step S9307 is not executed when it is Y in step S9306). As a result, it is possible to avoid inconsistency in the production during a specific period in which the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage and the specific display corresponding to the second identification information are difficult to see.

Further, according to this modification, as a special state, the state control means has a first special state (in this example, the first KT state) and a second special state (this example) having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. Then, it was decided that it could be controlled to the second KT state). As a result, the monotonousness of the game playability in the special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game when the game is controlled in the special state can be improved.

Further, according to this modification, the effect symbol (in this example, the background symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a and the second background symbol display unit 92a) is variably displayed in response to the variable display of the identification information. An effect control means (in this example, effect control) capable of variably displaying a reduced symbol smaller than the effect symbol (in this example, a small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b). The microcomputer 200 includes S920D, S920E, S920H, S920I, and S920K), and the effect control means supports variable display of the first identification information in a normal state (non-KT state in this example). Variable display of the effect symbol (in this example, the background symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a) is executed, and the effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (in this example, the second background symbol display unit 92a) is displayed. The variable display of the background symbol) is not executed (in this example, step S920E is executed when it is Y in step S920C, and step S920J is executed when it is N in step S920G), and a special state (in this example, is executed). , KT state), the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is not executed (in this example, the step). Step S920I is executed when it is Y of S920G, and step S920F is executed when it is N of step S920C), the first identification information and the first identification information and the first identification information depending on whether it is controlled in a normal state or a special state. 2 Variable display of the reduced symbol corresponding to the variable display of any of the identification information (in this example, the small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b or the second small symbol display unit 92b) is executed (not in this example). Either step S920D or S920H is executed depending on whether it is in the KT state or the KT state). As a result, it is possible to realize appropriate display control corresponding to the state of the reduced symbol, and it is possible to reduce the degree of recognition of the second identification information to the variable display by the player in the normal state.

Further, according to this modification, the hold display means can display the first hold display in the normal state (non-KT state in this example), but cannot display the second hold display (this example). Then, step S7075 is executed when it is Y in step S7073, and steps S7080 and S7082 are not executed when it is N in step S7077). As a result, the visibility of the player with respect to the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage in the normal state can be reduced, and appropriate display control for the second hold display can be realized.

Further, according to this modification, the hold display means displays the first hold storage number corresponding to the number of the first hold storage regardless of whether it is controlled in the normal state or the special state (in this example, the hold display means). The first hold storage number display 71) is displayed, and the second hold number display corresponding to the number of the second hold storage is not displayed (in this example, step S7072 is executed when Y in step S7071 is executed, and step S7076 is performed. Even if it is Y, the process corresponding to step S7072 is not executed). As a result, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the player with respect to the number of second reserved memories while ensuring the player's recognizability with respect to the number of first reserved memories, and each of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory can be reduced. Appropriate display control can be realized for the number of reserved storages.

Further, according to this modification, the game medium (in this example, the game ball) is provided on a predetermined path (in this example, the right side of the game area 7) among the flow paths in which the game medium (game ball) flows down, and the game medium can pass through. After the specific area (operation gate 17 in this example) and the predetermined condition (in this example, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) are satisfied, an advantageous state is obtained based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area (this example). Then, the advantageous state control means (in this example, the portion where steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 are executed in the case of Y in step S2501 in the game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to the big hit game state). A predetermined promotion notification (in this example, the first instruction notification) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the predetermined route is executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and a predetermined period (in this example) from the execution of the predetermined promotion notification. After 10 seconds) has elapsed, the promotion notification means (in this example, the microcomputer 200 for effect control) capable of executing the specific promotion notification (in this example, the second instruction notification) for promoting the launch of the game medium into the specific area. Steps S4404, S4405, S4604, and S4605 in the above) are further provided. As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

Further, in this embodiment and the modified example, the case where the low probability / first KT state is configured to end based on the execution of the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) is shown. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the second KT state (high probability / second KT state in this example) may be configured to end based on the execution of the variation display a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Further, for example, it may be configured to shift from the first KT state to the second KT state based on the execution of the variation display a predetermined number of times, and conversely, the second KT may be configured based on the execution of the variation display a predetermined number of times. It may be configured to shift from the state to the first KT state.

Further, in this embodiment and the modified example, the case where a plurality of big hit types are provided only for the big hit is shown, but the small hit may also be configured to be provided with a plurality of small hit types. In this case, for example, the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 may be configured to be different depending on the small hit type, or the variable winning ball device to be released may be configured to be different depending on the small hit type. Therefore, the advantage may be different depending on the small hit type. When the variable winning ball device to be opened is configured to be different, for example, the special variable winning ball device 20 may be opened or the special variable winning ball device 22 may be opened depending on the small hit type. Alternatively, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices for small hits may be provided, and which special variable winning ball device may be opened may be configured differently depending on the small hit type.

Further, in this embodiment and the modified example, it mainly shifts to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state) in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot, and shifts to the high probability / first KT state in the case of 6R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot. The case of shifting to the low probability / first KT state in the case of a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot has been shown, but the mode is not limited to such a mode. For example, even if the jackpot type is the same, it may be configured so that there are both a case of shifting to the first KT state and a case of shifting to the second KT state. In this case, for example, even if the same 6R probability variation jackpot or 6R normal jackpot is used, it may be configured so that there are both a case of shifting to the first KT state and a case of shifting to the second KT state.

In this embodiment and modification, it is internally configured to control to the KT state, but when it is controlled to the first KT state, a small hit is likely to occur. Rarely, the special winning opening 24 is not won, and from the player's point of view, it looks as if it is controlled to a so-called high base state. Therefore, it is possible to realize the same playability as a game machine controlled to a so-called high base state, to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and to realize a plurality of types of KT states having different advantages. , The game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, "different ratios" are limited to those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. Not limited to this, the concept includes those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one having 100% allocation and the other having 0% allocation).

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols "1" to "9", a background symbol (directing symbol), and a normal symbol are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed is shown. However, the variable display is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol is derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted, but the effect device is controlled. The circuit to be used may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27, etc.) are mounted. Two boards may be provided with the effect control board of 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but the game control microcomputer 560 is used on another substrate (for example,). , The sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, etc. shown in FIG. 4 or the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35. ), The effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 on the effect control board 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. A microcomputer 200 for effect control that controls the effect display device 9 by executing control related to voice control or lamp control in response to the operation, and further changing the received command to the command as it is or, for example, a simplified command. It may be sent to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment, and similarly, the sound output board 70 and the lamp driver. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine, but in the present invention, a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and the player operates the operation lever. A slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when a combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when a plurality of types of symbols are rotated and the symbols are stopped in response to an operation of a stop button by the player. It is also possible to apply to.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, the game machine using the game medium as the game machine is taken as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to the game machine that pays out the game medium as a predetermined number of prizes. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses a game medium such as a game ball and gives a score when the conditions for giving a prize are satisfied.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, the jackpot type includes a probabilistic jackpot and a normal jackpot, and based on the determination that the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot, a gaming machine controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends. Although shown, it is not limited to such game machines. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation region inside (a probability variation region may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable winning balls provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in the above embodiment to the gaming machine controlled to the probabilistic state after the end.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above and below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of variably displaying identification information and controlling an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player, and is a first identification information (for example, a first identification information). Execution of steps S26A and S26B in the variable display execution means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) capable of executing the variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) in parallel. A predetermined state control means (for example, steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state is executed. (For example, a non-KT state) and a shorter fluctuation time at a higher rate are selected as the execution time for the variable display of the second identification information than in the normal state (see, for example, FIG. 13). The state control means (for example, steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state) that is frequently controlled to a predetermined state by The part to be executed), the first reserved storage means (for example, the first reserved storage buffer) that can store the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the first reserved storage, and the information related to the variable display of the second identification information. A second hold storage means that can be stored as a second hold storage (for example, a second hold storage buffer) and a first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage (for example, a first hold display in the first hold display unit 61). And the second hold display means (for example, the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62) corresponding to the second hold storage can be displayed (for example, step S707 in the effect control microcomputer 200 is executed. In the normal state (for example, non-KT state), the hold display means can display the first hold display, but cannot display the second hold display (for example, in step S7073). If it is Y, step S7075 is executed, and if it is N in step S7077, steps S7080 and S7082 are not executed), and further, a light emitting unit (LED9: left frame LED9b, top frame LED9a, right frame LED9c, accessory LED). , A board LED, a light guide plate, a seg display, a dot display, etc.), and a light emitting performance capable of executing a light emitting effect using the light emitting unit. A first emitting means (effect control board 12: CPU 120 for effect control, etc.) is further provided, and the light emitting effect means causes the light emitting unit to emit light in a light emitting mode in which a specific color (single color: blue, green, red, etc.) is blinked. From one specific pattern (light emission pattern table 1211: category: LP11 to LP13: light emission pattern LP11-1, LP12-1, LP13-1, etc. in FIG. 72) and any one of a plurality of colors including the specific color. The light emission effect can be executed by a second specific pattern (light emission pattern table 1211: category LP14: light emission pattern LP14-1 or the like in FIG. 72) that causes the light emitting portion to emit light according to a light emission mode that changes to another color. The first specific pattern and the second specific pattern have different expectations (big hit reliability, etc.) for the player and different light emission cycles of the specific color (FIG. 74: switching unit light emission time Δtn is blinking unit light emission). The time is shorter than Δto1 to Δto3, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the player with respect to the second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory in the normal state, and it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display. .. In addition, the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern have different expectations for the player and different light emission cycles of the specific colors to enhance the effect of the light emission effect and improve the game interest. Can be done.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the interest. Further, by making the second hold display invisible, it is possible to draw more attention to other effects and the light emitting unit. Further, the light emitting unit may be made to emit light in various light emitting patterns based on the fact that the light emitting unit is controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state) which is frequently controlled to a predetermined state. By doing so, it becomes possible to recognize that the special state is controlled by the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit.

In addition, as an example, when the hold display and the advance notice by the light emitting means are executed, it can be estimated that the player will be a big hit depending on the mode of the hold display and the light emitting means, and the interest can be improved. Further, even when the light emitting unit is controlled to the above special state after the big hit, the player can pay attention to the light emitting means for a long period from before the big hit to after the big hit.

In addition, the degree of expectation for the player in the light emission effect may be associated with the second hold display. For example, when the second hold display cannot be displayed in the normal state and the light emitting effect with high expectation is executed, the second hold display is intermittently performed, and the second hold display is displayed. Depending on the mode, the effect related to the degree of expectation is performed (for example, the longer the display time per time in the intermittent display, the higher the degree of expectation, the larger the number of times of display in the intermittent display, the higher the degree of expectation, and further. The jackpot is confirmed when the second hold display is completely displayed). Alternatively, in a gaming machine configured to end when the special state (for example, the KT state) executes the variation display for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the variation display for the predetermined number of times (for example, the 100th time) When a light emitting effect with a high degree of expectation is executed in, an effect related to the degree of expectation is also performed depending on the display mode of the second hold display (for example, the second hold display is intermittently performed and the second hold display must disappear. If it becomes a big hit, and if the second hold display disappears, it does not become a big hit but becomes a normal state and remains disappeared). In this way, it is possible to produce an effect related to the degree of expectation depending on the display mode of the second hold display, and the interest is improved.

Further, as an example of a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of light emission effect and improving the entertainment of the game, the light emitting unit (LED909: left frame LED909b, top frame LED909a, right frame LED909c, accessory LED, board LED, guide A game machine (pachinko game machine 901, etc.) equipped with a light plate, a seg display, a dot display, etc., which can perform a light emission effect using the light emitting unit (effect control board 9012: effect control). CPU 90120 etc.)
The light emitting effect means has a first specific pattern (light emitting pattern table 901211: category: LP11 to LP13: of FIG. 136) that causes the light emitting portion to emit light in a light emitting mode in which a specific color (single color: blue, green, red, etc.) is blinked. A second specification that causes the light emitting unit to emit light according to a light emission pattern (LP11-1, LP12-1, LP13-1, etc.) and a light emission mode in which one of a plurality of colors including the specific color is changed to another color. The light emission effect can be executed by the pattern (light emission pattern table 901211: category LP14: light emission pattern LP14-1 and the like in FIG. 136), and the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern are expected by the player. A gaming machine characterized in that the degree (big hit reliability, etc.) is different and the light emission cycle of the specific color is different (FIG. 138: switching unit light emission time Δtn is shorter than blinking unit light emission time Δto1 to Δto3, etc.). Can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this game machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, other form examples will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of the gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 65 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board. In the following, the front side of FIG. 65 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is viewed from the front side. It will be explained as a standard. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment is a facing surface facing the player playing the game on the pachinko gaming machine 901.

FIG. 65 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. Pachinko game machines (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as game machines) 901 are roughly classified into a game board (gauge board) 902 that constitutes the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) that supports and fixes the game board 902. It is composed of 903. The game board 902 is formed with a game area 9010 having a substantially circular shape in front view surrounded by a guide rail 902b. A game ball as a game medium is launched from a ball striking device (not shown) into the gaming area 9010. Further, the game machine frame 903 is provided with a glass door frame 9050 having a glass window 9050a so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area 9010 can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 9050. When the glass door frame 9050 is closed, the game area 9010 can be seen through the glass window 9050a.

As shown in FIG. 65, the game board 902 is formed of a translucent synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, and methacrylic resin in a substantially square shape on the front surface, and an obstacle nail (obstacle nail) is formed on the front surface of the game board. It is mainly composed of a board surface plate (not shown) provided with a guide rail 902b or the like (not shown), and a spacer member (not shown) integrally attached to the back surface side of the board surface plate. The game board 902 is formed of a non-transmissive member such as a veneer board in a substantially square shape in front, and is provided on a board surface board provided with obstacle nails (not shown), guide rails 902b, etc. on the front surface of the game board. May be configured.

A first special symbol display 904A and a second special symbol display 904B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 65, the lower right position of the game area 9010). The first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B are each composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode), and are identified in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special figure"), which is a plurality of types of possible identification information (special identification information), is displayed in a variable manner (also referred to as a variable display or a variable display). For example, the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B each variablely display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns having different combinations of those to be turned on and those to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be preset as a plurality of types of special symbols.

Hereinafter, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 904A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display 904B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". ..

An effect display device 905 as a display means is provided near the center of the game area 9010 on the game board 902. The effect display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 905, the variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 904A and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 904B in the special symbol game are supported. In the effect symbol display area, which is a plurality of variable display units such as three, the effect symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each, are variablely displayed. The variable display of this effect symbol is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the display area of the effect display device 905, "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged. When the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the effect is produced in the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the effect display device 905. The final stop symbol (final stop symbol), which is the result of the variation display of the symbol, is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in the display area of the effect display device 905, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 904A or the special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 904B. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified by each are displayed in a variable manner, and a definite effect symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “deriving”). It should be noted that, for example, to derive and display various display symbols such as a special symbol and an effect symbol means to display the identification information such as the effect symbol as a stop display (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and end the variable display. ..

There are eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese characters) that are variablely displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. It may be a number, an English character, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and a character image, and the character image may be, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, or an object other than these. , Characters and other symbols, or decorative images showing any other figure). Each of the production symbols is given a corresponding symbol number. For example, a symbol number of "1" to "8" is assigned to each of the alphanumeric characters indicating "1" to "8". The production symbols are not limited to eight types, and may be any number (for example, seven types, nine types, etc.) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination and a losing combination can be configured.

A first hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B are provided above the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B. In each of the first hold display 9025A and the second hold display 9025B, the hold storage number (special figure hold storage number) as the number of hold storage information of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is identifiablely displayed. Memory display is performed.

Here, the holding of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is such that the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B. It occurs based on the starting prize by (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the effect symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 901 is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Will be done.

In the first special symbol display 904A, it is possible to specify the number of reserved storage information (first reserved storage information) generated based on the first starting winning when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening. The first special figure hold storage number is displayed by lighting (the number of lighting) of the LED. In the second hold indicator 9025B, the number of hold storage information (second hold storage information) generated based on the second start prize caused by the game ball passing (entering) the second start prize opening can be specified. 2 The number of reserved special figures is displayed by lighting the LED (number of lights).

A first hold display area 905D and a second hold display area 905U are set at two lower left and right positions in the display area of the effect display device 905. In the first hold display area 905D, the number of first special figure hold storage that can specify the number of first hold storage information generated based on the first start winning is displayed by the number of images of the hold image H of the sphere (circle). Will be done. In the second hold display area 905U, the number of second special figure hold storages that can specify the number of second hold storage information generated based on the second start winning is displayed by the number of images of the hold image H of the sphere (circle). Will be done.

In the first hold display area 905D, the hold image H is displayed in a manner in which the hold image increases on the left side each time the first hold storage information is generated, and the variable display based on the first hold storage information is executed. The reserved image H at the right end corresponding to the first reserved stored information is erased each time, and the remaining reserved image H is displayed to be shifted to the right one by one. In the second hold display area 905U, the hold image is displayed in a manner in which the hold image H increases on the right side each time the second hold storage information is generated, and the variable display based on the second hold storage information is executed. Each time, the reserved image H at the left end corresponding to the second reserved storage information is erased, and the remaining reserved images are displayed to be shifted to the left one by one.

Shows the variation corresponding display corresponding to the variation display during execution of the variation display corresponding to the erased (moved, shifted) hold display from each of the first hold display area 905D and the second hold display area 905U. An active display area AHA for displaying an image (hereinafter referred to as an active image or an active display) AH is formed in a central portion of a hold display area. In the active display area AHA, the hold image H displayed in the first hold display area 905D or the second hold display area 905U is displayed so far, for example, moved (shifted) to the active display area. The active image AH is displayed in a manner that can be identified to correspond to the reserved image. The active display area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of the effect display device 905.

In the hold display area, the hold storage information may be displayed in a total display mode without distinguishing between the first hold display area 905D and the second hold display area 905U. By such a total hold storage display, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that do not satisfy the start condition of the variable display.

Regarding the hold image H displayed in each of the first hold display area 905D and the second hold display area 905U, the hold display mode that changes the hold display mode before the variable display of the target hold storage information is executed. A change effect may be executed. In the hold display mode change effect, the display mode such as the color or shape of the hold image H is changed.

For example, the color of the reserved image H can be changed to blue, green, and red. It is decided that the hold display mode change effect is executed at a predetermined ratio, and when the change display result based on the hold storage information of the effect target becomes the jackpot display result, the change is performed at a ratio of blue <green <red. The color of the reserved image H is selected and determined, while the color of the reserved image H after the change is selected and determined at a ratio of red <green <blue when the variable display result is an off-display result. As a result, the degree of expectation for the jackpot based on the color of the reserved image H after the change when the hold display mode change effect is executed is set so that the ratio of the relationship of blue <green <red. Therefore, when the hold display mode change effect is executed, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player for the big hit based on the color of the hold image after the change.

Further, as for the active image AH, the display mode change effect is executed in the same manner as the hold image H, and the display mode such as the color or shape of the hold image H is changed. Regarding the display mode change effect of such an active display, the display mode such as the color or shape after the change is determined in a mode in which the degree of expectation for the big hit can be specified by the same selection ratio as the hold display mode change effect. To. For active display, it is not necessary to execute the display mode change effect.

Below the effect display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 906B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9081 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is provided with a tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a second starting winning opening as a starting area (second starting area).

As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state. It becomes a difficult normal open state. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 9081 for the normal electric accessory is on. It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 66. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. 66. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "" 4 ”) If it is less than or equal to, the first starting condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "" 4 ”) If it is less than or equal to, the second starting condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B. May be the same number or different numbers from each other.

A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided at a position below the ordinary winning ball device 906A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball device 907 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 66, and a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form a big prize opening as.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door is in the closed state and the game ball passes through (entering) the large winning opening. I can't do it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big winning door is on, the big winning door opens the big winning door and the game ball passes through (entering) the big winning door. ) Make it easier. In this way, the big winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state where the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous for the player. To do. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the large winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the large winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the grand prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 9023 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 907, the game ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the large winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 907, the game ball can enter the large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the large winning opening. It becomes a disadvantageous second state.

An ordinary symbol display 9020 is provided above the second hold display 9025B. As an example, the ordinary symbol display 9020 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The normal pattern (also called "normal figure" or "normal figure") is variably displayed (variable display). Such a variable display of a normal pattern is called a normal figure game (also referred to as a "normal figure game").

Above the normal symbol display 9020, the normal symbol hold display 9025C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 9041.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls that have entered any of the general prize openings are detected by the predetermined general prize ball switch. At the lowermost part of the game area 9010, an out port is provided in which a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings is taken in.

Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 903, and a top frame LED 909a provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 9010. A left frame LED 909b and a right frame LED 909c are provided. In this embodiment, the top frame LED909a is provided above the front frame, the left frame LED909b is provided on the left side of the front frame, and the right frame LED909c is provided on the right side of the front frame. There is. Further, the game board 902 is also provided with board-side LEDs 909d and 909e. In this embodiment, the board-side LED 909d is provided on the left side of the game board 902, and the board-side LED 909e is provided on the right side of the game board 902. In addition, decorative LEDs are arranged around each structure (for example, ordinary winning ball device 906A, ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, special variable winning ball device 907, etc.) in the gaming area 9010 of the pachinko gaming machine 901. May be good.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 903, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area 9010 is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The ball striking operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the drive of the launch motor included in the ball striking device (not shown).

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 903 below the game area 9010, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine can be supplied to a launching device (not shown). An upper plate (ball hitting plate) for holding (storing) the ball is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903, a lower plate is provided to hold (store) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

A stick controller 9031A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is. The stick controller 9031A includes an operation stick held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator hangs when the player holds the operation stick). There is.

A controller sensor unit 9035A for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operation stick may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 9031A. For example, the controller sensor unit is two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged parallel to the board surface of the game board 902 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 901. A pair of) and two transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pair) arranged perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 902 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player's side. It may be configured to include a shape photo sensor.

The member forming the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 9031B capable of a player performing a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 9031A) on the upper surface of the upper plate body. It is provided. The push button 9031B may be configured so that the pressing operation from the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 9035B for detecting a player's pressing operation on the push button 9031B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 9031B.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described. In the pachinko game machine 901, the normal symbol display 9020 executes a variable display of the normal symbol, such that a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 9041 provided in the game area 9010 is detected by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. After the normal symbol start condition for starting the normal symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol display is based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, for example, the previous normal symbol game is finished. The 9020 pachinko game is started.

In this normal symbol game, when a predetermined time, which is the normal symbol fluctuation time, elapses after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific ordinary symbol (symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the confirmed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol loss". Become. In response to the fact that the variation display result of the normal symbol is "per normal figure", the expansion / opening control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 906B is in the tilt position. However, normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position after a predetermined time elapses.

After the first starting condition is satisfied, for example, after the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game by the first special symbol display 904A is started. Further, the second starting condition is satisfied because the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Later, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game by the second special symbol display 904B is started.

In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, when the fluctuation display time as the special symbol fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed. The final confirmed special symbol (special symbol display result) that is the result is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, " It becomes "missing". In addition, a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed, and when the predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) as a result of these predetermined display results is stopped and displayed. , It suffices to control the small hit game state as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it becomes a big hit game state (advantageous state) as a specific game state in which a round (also called "round game") advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times. Be controlled.

In the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to this embodiment, as an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers "3", "5", and "7" is used as a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is used as a lost symbol. .. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, the special symbol indicating the number "2" may be used as the small hit symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 904A may be a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display 904B. However, the special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

After the jackpot symbol indicating the numbers "3", "5", and "7" is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game and becomes the "big hit" as the specific display result, the special variable in the jackpot game state. During the period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated at the large winning opening door of the winning ball device 907. , Open the big prize opening. As a result, a round is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 907 is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

The large winning opening door that opens the large winning opening during the execution of the round catches the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 902, and then closes the large winning opening, so that the special variable winning ball device The 907 is changed to a second state (closed state) which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round, which is the opening cycle of the big winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "16"). Even before the number of rounds to be executed reaches the upper limit, the rounds may be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball has not won a prize in the large winning opening). ..

Among the rounds in the jackpot game state, the round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 907 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally open. Also called a round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 907 in the first state (open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

When the small hit symbols (for example, the number "2") are stopped and displayed, if these small hit symbols are derived as fixed special symbols and then controlled to the small hit gaming state as the special gaming state. good. Specifically, in the small hit game state, for example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, the big winning opening is used by the player as in the above-mentioned short-term open big hit game state in which the player cannot substantially obtain a ball (prize ball). A variable winning operation that changes to an advantageous first state (open state) may be executed.

In the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the effect display device 905, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 904A , Of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 904B, the variable display of the effect symbol is started corresponding to the start of any special figure game. Then, the period from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the final effect symbol in the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Then, the variable display state of the effect symbol may become a predetermined reach state.

Here, the reach state is an effect symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the effect symbol that has been stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 905 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (“reach variable symbol”). (Also referred to as) is a display state in which fluctuations are continuous, or a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are fluctuating in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, some of the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the "left" and "right" effect symbol display areas 905L, 905R, etc.) are preliminarily used. When the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol indicating alphanumeric characters of "7") that constitutes the specified jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, the remaining effect symbol display area (for example, "medium" effect) that has not yet been stopped is displayed. In the symbol display area 905C, etc.), the effect symbol is fluctuating, or the effect symbol is a big hit in all or part of the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". It is a display state that fluctuates synchronously while forming all or part of the combination.

In addition, in response to the reach state, the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the effect symbol is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 905. By changing the display mode of the background image, reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the effect symbol, or changing the variation mode of the effect symbol, a different effect operation than before the reach state is executed. May be done. Such an effect operation such as a character image display, a change in the display mode of the background image, a reproduction display of the moving image, and a change in the variation mode of the effect symbol is called a reach effect display (or simply a reach effect). The reach effect includes not only the display operation in the effect display device 905, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, and the light emitters such as the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b, the right frame LED909c, and the panel side LEDs 909d and 909e. It may be included that the lighting operation (blinking operation), the operation of the movable member 90321, and the like are set to an operation mode different from the operation mode before the reach state is reached.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as "reach patterns") having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, in each reach mode, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability", "big hit reliability", "expectation", or "big hit expectation") is different. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed.

When a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the effect symbol does not become the reach state after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. In some cases, a definite effect symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “missing”.

When a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed or the reach effect is not executed, the final effect symbol that is a predetermined reach loss combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "missing".

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the jackpot symbol indicating the number "3" is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that are the jackpot symbols, it corresponds to the fact that the variable display state of the effect symbol is in the reach state. Then, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the definite effect symbol which is the predetermined normal jackpot combination (also referred to as “non-probability variation jackpot combination”) among the plurality of types of jackpot combinations is stopped and displayed. In addition, the non-probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a finalized effect symbol without executing the reach effect.

The definite effect symbols that are usually the jackpot combination (non-probability variation jackpot combination) are variablely displayed in the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right" on the effect display device 905, for example. Among the effect symbols whose symbol numbers are "1" to "8", any one of the effect symbols whose symbol numbers are even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" is "left", "" It suffices that the production symbols display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "middle" and "right" are aligned on a predetermined effective line and stopped and displayed. The effect symbols whose symbol numbers constituting the normal jackpot combination are even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" are referred to as ordinary symbols (also referred to as "non-probability variation symbols").

In response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a normal jackpot symbol, the finalized effect symbol of the normal jackpot combination (non-probability variable jackpot combination) is stopped and displayed after the predetermined reach effect is executed. The variable display mode is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as "big hit type") of "non-probability variation" (also referred to as "normal big hit") when the variable display result is "big hit". It should be noted that the normal jackpot combination (non-probability variation jackpot combination) may be stopped and displayed as the finalized effect symbol without executing the reach effect. Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the big hit type of "non-probability change", it is controlled to the normal open big hit game state, and after the end, the time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed. By performing the time reduction control, the fluctuation display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving control, as will be described later, the so-called electric chew support is implemented in which the winning frequency of the normal symbol is increased and the winning frequency of the normal variable winning ball device 906B is increased. Here, the normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, after the power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed). The same control as the state in which the initialization process is executed) is performed. In the time saving control, one of the conditions that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit game state and that the variable display result becomes "big hit" is satisfied first. Sometimes you just have to quit.

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the probabilistic jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the numbers "5" and "7" is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that are the jackpot symbols, the variable display state of the effect symbol is displayed. In response to the fact that is in the reach state, after the same reach effect as in the case where the variation display mode of the effect symbol is "normal" is executed, among the plurality of types of jackpot combinations, the predetermined probability variation jackpot combination is used. The finalized effect symbol may be stopped and displayed. In addition, the probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a finalized effect symbol without executing the reach effect. The definite effect symbol that is a probabilistic jackpot combination is, for example, the symbol number that is variablely displayed in each effect symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R of "left", "middle", and "right" in the effect display device 905 is "1". ~ Of the "8" effect symbols, the effect symbols whose symbol numbers are "5" or "7" are in the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Anything may be used as long as it is aligned on a predetermined valid line and stopped and displayed. The effect symbols whose symbol numbers constituting the probability variation jackpot combination are "5" and "7" are referred to as probability variation symbols. When the probabilistic jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed effect symbol, which is usually a jackpot combination, may be stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the effect symbol.

Regardless of whether the finalized effect symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a probabilistic jackpot combination, the variable display mode in which the probabilistic jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the finalized special symbol in the special symbol game has a variable display result of "big hit". It is also referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as "big hit type") of "probability change" in the case. In this embodiment, among the jackpot types of "probability variation", the normal open jackpot game state is based on the fact that the variable display result of "5" and "7" is "big hit" as the confirmed special symbol. After that, probability fluctuation control (probability variation control) is performed together with time reduction control.

By performing these probability variation controls, the probability that the variable display result (special figure display result) becomes a "big hit" in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than in the normal state. The probability variation control may be terminated when the condition that the variation display result becomes "big hit" after the end of the big hit game state and the control is performed again in the big hit game state is satisfied. Similar to the time reduction control, the probability variation control is terminated when a predetermined number of special figure games (for example, 100 times, which is the same as the time reduction number, or 90 times, which is different from the time reduction number) are executed after the end of the jackpot game state. You may. In addition, even if the probability change control is terminated when the "probability change fall" decision to end the probability change control is made in the probability change fall lottery executed every time the special figure game is started after the jackpot game state ends. Good.

When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display 9020 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the fluctuation of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game. Control to improve the probability that the display result will be "per normal" compared to the normal state, tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on the variable display result being "per normal" The second is to make it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to make the tilt control time to be longer than in the normal state and control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control (electric chew support control) that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the starting condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening due to the time saving control, which is advantageous for the player, is also called a high opening control. As the high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the expanded open state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 904B becomes easy to be satisfied, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. The time until the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as the high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

The gaming state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also called a time saving state or a high base state. Further, the gaming state in which the probability change control is performed is also referred to as a probability change state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which time reduction control and high opening control are performed together with probability variation control is also called a high probability high base state. Although not set as the game state to be controlled in this embodiment, the probability change state in which only the probability change control is performed and the time saving control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. .. Further, only the gaming state in which the time reduction control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability change control is sometimes referred to as a "probability change state", and in order to distinguish it from the high probability low base state, it may be referred to as a time reduction probability change state. On the other hand, a probabilistic state (high-probability low-base state) in which only probabilistic control is performed and time-saving control or high-opening control is not performed may be a probable-change state without time-saving in order to distinguish it from a high-probability high-base state. The time saving state in which the time saving control or the high opening control is performed without the probability change control is also called the low probability high base state. The normal state in which the probability change control, the time reduction control, and the high opening control are not performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of the time saving control and the probability variation control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the probability that the special figure game can be executed frequently and that the variation display result in each special figure game becomes a "big hit". Is increased, which is advantageous for the player. A gaming state that is advantageous for a player different from the jackpot gaming state is also called a special gaming state.

When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the game state is not changed after the small hit game state is controlled as described above, and the game state is changed to the game state before the variable display result becomes "small hit". You can control it continuously.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 9011 and an effect control board 9012 as shown in FIG. 66, for example. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. Further, the drive control board 9016B and the illuminant control boards 9016C to 9016F are mounted as control boards connected to the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 902 of the pachinko game machine 901.

The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a function for setting a random number used in a special drawing game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 9011 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The fluctuation display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 9020, etc. It also has a control function.

On the main board 9011, for example, from the game control microcomputer 90100, the switch circuit 90110 that takes in the detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 90100, and the game control microcomputer 90100. A solenoid circuit 90111 or the like that transmits a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9081 and 9082 is mounted.

The effect control board 9012 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives the effect display device 905, speakers 908L, 908R. , Top frame LED909a, left frame LED909b, right frame LED909c, board side LEDs 909d, 909e, movable part 90302, movable member 90321, and various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 includes all or part of the display operation in the effect display device 905 and the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b, and the right frame provided on the game frame side. Prescribed for production electrical parts such as LED 909c, all or part of the lighting / extinguishing operation of the board side LEDs 909d, 909e provided on the game board 902 side, and all or part of the operation of the movable part 90302 and the movable member 90321. It has a function to determine the control content for executing the effect operation of.

Wiring for transmitting a video signal to the effect display device 905, wiring for transmitting an audio signal (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 9013, and the like are connected to the effect control board 9012. .. Further, wiring for transmitting various signals is also connected to the drive control board 9016B, the illuminant control board 9016C, and the illuminant control board 9016D via the effect control relay board 9016A.

The information signal transmitted to the drive control board 9016B is a drive control signal indicating commands and control data for operating the movable portion 90302 and the movable member 90321 by driving the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330. It may be included.

The information signal transmitted to the light emitting body control board 9016C may include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitting bodies provided as panel side LEDs 909d and 909e.

If the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016D includes a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters provided as a left frame LED 909b on the left side of the game machine frame 903, Good. Further, the information signal transmitted to the light emitting body control board 9016E includes a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitting bodies provided as a top frame LED 909a above the game machine frame 903. Just do it. Further, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016F includes a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters provided as a right frame LED 909c on the right side of the game machine frame 903. I just need to be there.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, the information signal transmitted to the light emitting body control board 9016D relays only the effect control relay board 9016A from the effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012. Is transmitted. Further, the information signal transmitted to the light emitting body control board 9016E is transmitted from the effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 by relaying the effect control board 9016D in addition to the effect control relay board 9016A. Further, the information signal transmitted to the illuminant control board 9016F is relayed from the effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 to the effect control relay board 9016A, the illuminant control board 9016D, and the illuminant control board 9016E. Is transmitted.

The audio control board 9013 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs audio from the speakers 908L and 908R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing for this purpose.

The effect control relay board 9016A is installed on a back pack or the like attached to the back surface of the game board 902, and is transmitted from the effect control board 9012 toward the drive control board 9016B, the illuminant control board 9016C, and the illuminant control board 9016D. Various signals are relayed. The back pack may be attached to a central portion on the back surface side of the game board 902, and an opening facing the effect display device 905 may be formed in the center thereof. The back pack may be provided so as to cover the main board 9011, the voice control board 9013, the drive control board 9016B, the illuminant control board 9016C, and the like from the rear. An effect control board box containing the effect control board 9012 may be attached to the rear surface side of the back pack.

The drive control board 9016B is a control board for drive control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is movable, such as rotation control of the movable portion 90302, based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. A driver IC or the like for controlling the movement of the member 90321 is mounted. The output signal from the drive control board 9016B is transmitted to the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330.

The illuminant control board 9016C is a control board for illuminant output mounted on the game board 902 and provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is a board based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. Various circuits for driving the light emitters for controlling lighting of a plurality of light emitters provided as the side LEDs 909d and 909e are mounted.

The light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F are control boards for light emitter output mounted on the game machine frame 903 and separately provided from the effect control board 9012, and commands and control data from the effect control board 9012 and the like. Based on this, various circuits for driving the light emitters for controlling lighting of a plurality of light emitters provided as the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b, and the right frame LED909c are mounted.

In addition to the light emitting body control boards 9016C to 9016F, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is also provided with, for example, a board for controlling the lighting of the light emitting unit 90321A provided on the movable member 90321, but the illustration is not shown. It is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 66, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 is connected to the main board 9011. The gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. Anything that has it will do. Further, on the main board 9011, the first special symbol display 904A, the second special symbol display 904B, the normal symbol display 9020, the first hold display 9025A, the second hold display 9025B, and the normal figure hold display 9025C Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, the variation time of the effect symbol, the type of reach effect, and the pseudo-ream (which is originally one variation corresponding to one hold memory, but is multiple times corresponding to a plurality of hold memories. It is an effect display that makes it appear that fluctuations are being performed continuously, and in order to make it appear as if the fluctuation display (variable display) of the symbol was executed multiple times for one start prize, one start A variation indicating a variation mode such as the presence / absence of a temporary stop and a re-variation for all the symbol strings (left, middle, right) within the fluctuation time determined for winning a predetermined number of times. Fluctuation pattern specification commands that indicate patterns, display control commands that are used to control image display operations in the effect display device 905, voice control commands that are used to control audio output from speakers 908L and 908R, and top frames. Includes a light emitter control command used to control the lighting operation of the LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, the panel side LEDs 909d, 909e, a drive control command used to control the operation of the movable member 90321, and the like. It has been.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes the game control program and performs the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 90103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 90104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 901 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 90101 by the CPU 90103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 90103 writes various variable data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102 by the CPU 90103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

As shown in FIG. 66, the effect control board 9012 provides an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the effect control CPU 90120. RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the effect display device 905, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 90120. The circuit 90124 and the I / O 90125 are mounted.

As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 90121 to execute the process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. At this time, the effect control CPU 90120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 90121, the effect control CPU 90120 writes various variation data to the RAM 90122 and temporarily stores the variation data, and the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the RAM 90122. Fluctuation data read operation for reading various temporarily stored fluctuation data, reception operation for the effect control CPU 90120 to receive input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 9012 via I / O 90125, and effect control CPU 90120 for I / A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via O90125 is also performed. The electric components involved in the execution of the effect control such as the effect control CPU 90120, ROM 90121, and RAM 90122 on the effect control board 9012 are also referred to as the effect control microcomputer.

Further, in this embodiment, the effect display device 905 is arranged on the back side of the game board 902 and can be visually recognized through the opening 902c formed in the game board 902. A frame-shaped center decorative frame 9051 is provided in the opening 902c of the game board 902. Further, an effect unit 90300 is provided between the back surface of the game board 902 and the effect display device 905, and various motors (first effect motor 90303, 1st effect motor 90303,) provided on the effect unit 90300 are provided on the effect control board 9012. A plurality of electronic components such as a second production motor 90330), a solenoid, a sensor, and a light emitting diode (LED) are connected. Note that, in FIG. 66, illustration of these electronic components other than the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330 is omitted.

On the side of the effect control board 9012, as in the case of the main board 9011, for example, a random number value (also referred to as an effect random number) for determining the type of various effects such as a notice effect is set.

The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 66 stores various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 90121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. There is.

As an example, in the ROM 90121, the effect control CPU 90120 includes various effect devices (for example, an effect display device 905, speakers 908L, 908R, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, panel side LEDs 909d, 909e, movable member 90321, and the like. An effect control pattern table that stores a plurality of types of effect control patterns used to control the effect operation by the effect model, etc.) is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the effect control pattern table may store an effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, a notice effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like.

The effect control pattern at the time of special symbol fluctuation corresponds to a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, and is in the period from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the derivation display of the definite special symbol which is the special symbol display result. , It is composed of data showing the control contents of various production operations such as the variation display operation of the effect symbol, the reach effect, the effect display operation in the re-lottery effect, or various effect display operations without the variation display of the effect symbol. Has been done. The advance notice effect control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control content of the effect operation that is the advance notice effect executed in response to the advance notice patterns in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents and the like corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The special figure variation time effect control pattern may include, for example, a plurality of types of reach effect control patterns in which the effect mode in each reach effect is different for each variation pattern for executing the reach effect.

Note that the advance notice effect executed during the variable display of the effect symbol includes, for example, a movable notice in which the movable member 90321 as a movable body (movable object) rises as described later, or a stick controller 9031A or a push button by the player. A big hit such as an operation notice executed on the condition that the 9031B is operated, a step-up notice in which a predetermined image is gradually switched, a dialogue notice in which a character appears and speaks a line, and a cut-in notice in which a predetermined image is interrupted and displayed. A jackpot notice that suggests the possibility of a game, a reach notice that suggests whether or not to reach, a pseudo-ream notice that announces whether or not to become a pseudo-ream, a stop symbol notice that announces a stop symbol, and a game state probability It includes a plurality of notices executed at the start of variable display and at the time of reach establishment, such as a latent notice for notifying whether or not the state is in a fluctuating state (whether or not it is hidden).

FIG. 67 (1) shows a configuration example of the drive control board 9016B. As shown in FIG. 67 (1), the motor drive driver 90412 is mounted on the drive control board 9016B. A control signal from the effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control board 9012 is input to the motor drive driver 90412 in the form of a serial signal via the effect control relay board 9016A. Then, the motor drive driver 90412 performs drive control of the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330 based on the drive control information indicated by the input control signal.

FIG. 67 (2) shows a configuration example of the light emitter control board 9016C for controlling the lighting of the panel side LEDs 909d and 909e. As shown in FIG. 67 (2), the light emitter control board 9016C is mounted with the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b. A control signal from the effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control board 9012 is input to the light emitting body driver 90411a in a serial signal format via the effect control relay board 9016A. Then, the light emitting body driver 90411a performs lighting control of the panel side LED 909d based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal. Further, the light emitting body driver 90411b is input with a control signal from the effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control board 9012 in a serial signal format via the effect control relay board 9016A and further via the light emitting body driver 90411a. .. Then, the light emitting body driver 90411b controls the lighting of the panel side LED 909e based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

As shown in FIG. 67 (2), in the illuminant control board 9016C, the control signals transmitted from the effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control board 9012 are sequentially transmitted between the illuminant drivers on the same illuminant control board 9016C. It is configured to be transmitted to each illuminant driver by being transmitted (in this example, it is transmitted from the illuminant driver 90411a to the illuminant driver 90411b).

FIG. 68 shows a configuration example of the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c. As shown in FIG. 68, the light emitter control board 9016D is equipped with a light emitter driver 90413b. A control signal from the effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control board 9012 is input to the light emitting body driver 90413b in the form of a serial signal via the effect control relay board 9016A. Then, the light emitting body driver 90413b performs lighting control of the left frame LED 909b based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal. In FIG. 68, the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F are connected to each other via wiring members such as a flexible cable and a wire harness, for example.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68, the illuminant driver 90413a is mounted on the illuminant control board 9016E. The control signal from the effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control board 9012 is input to the light emitter driver 90413a in a serial signal format via the effect control relay board 9016A and further via the light emitter control board 9016D. To. Then, the light emitting body driver 90413a controls the lighting of the top frame LED 909a based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68, the light emitting body driver 90413c is mounted on the light emitting body control board 9016F. In the illuminant driver 90413c, the control signal from the effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control board 9012 passes through the effect control relay board 9016A, and further via the illuminant control board 9016D and the illuminant control board 9016E. Input in serial signal format. Then, the light emitter driver 90413c controls the lighting of the right frame LED 909c based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

As shown in FIG. 68, in the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, the control signals transmitted from the effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control board 9012 are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, respectively. By sequentially transmitting between the drivers 90413a to 90413c, it is configured to be transmitted to each illuminant driver 90413a to 90413c, respectively.

Further, in this embodiment, each LED provided on the game board 902 is comprehensively expressed as a board side LED 909d and 909e, respectively. Specifically, specifically, the board side LED 909d is to the left of the game board 902. It is assumed that a plurality of light emitting bodies (color LED or single color LED) are provided, and a plurality of light emitting bodies (color LED or single color LED) are provided as board side LEDs 909e on the right side of the game board 902. Further, in this embodiment, each LED provided in the game frame is comprehensively expressed as a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, and a right frame LED 909c, respectively, but specifically, above the game frame. A plurality of light emitters (color LED or single color LED) are provided as the top frame LED909a, and a plurality of light emitters (color LED or single color LED) are provided as the left frame LED909b on the left side of the game frame, and on the right side of the game frame. It is assumed that a plurality of light emitters (color LED or single color LED) are provided as the right frame LED 909c.

Further, in this embodiment, in order to control the lighting of the motor drive driver 90412, the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b for controlling the lighting of the panel side LEDs 909d and 909e, and the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b and the right frame LED 909c. The light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are realized by using the same type of serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)). FIG. 69 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a serial-parallel conversion circuit used as a light emitter driver 90411a, 90411b, a motor drive driver 90412, and a light emitter driver 90413a to 90413c. Further, FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each input / output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit shown in FIG. 69.

The serial-parallel conversion circuit used as the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c converts the input serial signal format signal into a 24-channel parallel signal format signal. There are two types, one that outputs the signal in the form of a serial signal, and the other that converts the input serial signal format signal into a 12-channel parallel signal format signal and outputs it. However, the number of some circuit elements and terminals is limited. Since the same configurations and functions are provided only by being different, the serial-parallel conversion circuit for 24 channels will be described as a representative in the examples shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit for 12 channels will be described. Only the differences will be explained. In this embodiment, the illuminant drivers 90411a and 90411b are realized by a serial-parallel conversion circuit for 24 channels, and the motor drive driver 90412 and the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c are realized by a serial-parallel conversion circuit for 12 channels. It will be realized.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, CLK / I in which a clock signal from the effect control CPU 90120 is input to the serial-parallel conversion circuit via the effect control relay board 9016A and the light emitter control boards 9016D and 16E. A DATA / I terminal for inputting terminals and data is provided. In addition, a part of the input clock signal and data is branched in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, and can be output through from the serial-parallel conversion circuit as it is, and the CLK / O terminal and data that output the clock signal through can be output. A DATA / O terminal for through output is provided.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the light emitting body driver 90413b of the light emitting body control board 9016D emits a control signal (clock signal and data) input via the effect control relay board 9016A. Although the output is output to the illuminant driver 90413a of the control board 9016E, clock signals and data are output from the CLK / O terminal and the DATA / O terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit that realizes the illuminant driver 90413b, respectively. It is configured to be output to a serial-parallel conversion circuit that realizes. Further, for example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the light emitting body driver 90413a of the light emitting body control board 9016E receives a control signal () input via the effect control relay board 9016A and the light emitting body control board 9016D. The clock signal and data) are output to the illuminant driver 90413c of the illuminant control board 9016F, and the clocks are clocked from the CLK / O terminal and DATA / O terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit that realizes the illuminant driver 90413a, respectively. The signal and data are configured to be output to a serial-parallel conversion circuit that implements the light emitter driver 90413c.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the clock signal input from the CLK / I terminal and the other part of the data input from the DATA / I terminal are input to the decoder and 24 channels from the serial signal format. It is decoded into a signal of the parallel signal format of. Then, after being temporarily stored in each register provided in the register block, pulse width modulation (PWM) is performed using an internal clock signal (in this example, a 6 MHz internal clock signal) by an internal oscillation clock circuit, and each of them is subjected to pulse width modulation (PWM). It is output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. In the case of a 12-channel circuit, it is converted into a 12-channel parallel signal format signal and output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11. The output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are supplied to a light emitter such as an LED or to an operation motor.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is provided with terminals AD0 to AD4 for decoding address input (AD0 to AD5 in a 12-channel circuit), and terminals AD0 to AD4 are provided. By setting it to H (high) or L (low), respectively, it is possible to set the address for each serial-parallel conversion circuit. The data input from DATA / I also includes address information, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit decodes only the data whose address information contained in the input data matches the set address into a parallel signal format signal. Output from drive output terminals Q0 to Q23.

Since the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is provided with 5 terminals AD0 to AD4 for decoding address input, a maximum of 32 types of addresses can be set, and a maximum of 32 serial-parallel conversions can be set. It is possible to connect circuits. Further, since the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is provided with 6 terminals AD0 to AD5 for decoding address input, a maximum of 64 types of addresses can be set, and a maximum of 64 serial-parallel conversions can be set. It is possible to connect circuits.

The S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting the slew rate of the clock signal output from the CLK / O terminal and the slew rate of the data output from the DATA / O terminal. .. When the S terminal is set to L (low), the clock signal and data slew output is set to the normal slew rate output, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the clock signal and data slew output is set to a low slew rate. Set to output.

FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the slew rate setting of the through output of the clock signal and the data. As shown in FIG. 71 (1), when the S terminal is set to L (low) and the output is set to a normal slew rate, the rising and falling slopes of the clock signal and data waveforms (voltage change per unit time). Amount) is large to some extent. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (2), when the S terminal is set to H (high) and the output is set to a low slew rate, the clock signal and the clock signal are set as compared with the case of setting the normal slew rate. The slope of the rising and falling edges of the data waveform becomes gentle.

Generally, in order to suppress radio wave radiation from the substrate, it is better to keep the slew rate low, and it is better to set the output to the low slew rate shown in FIG. 71 (2). On the other hand, in order to secure resistance to noise, it is preferable that the slope of the rising and falling edges of the waveform is large, and it is better to set the output of the normal slew rate shown in FIG. 71 (1).

The setting of the S terminal is not only to set the clock signal output from the CLK / O terminal and the waveform of the through output of the data output from the DATA / O terminal, but also to set the clock signal and DATA input from the CLK / I terminal. It has a function to compensate the output waveform for the data input from the / I terminal. That is, in general, the clock signal and data output from the effect control CPU 90120 or the like are output as a square wave at the output stage, but reach the CLK / I terminal and the DATA / I terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. When the transmission loss due to the wiring is large, a clock signal or data having a waveform collapsed from the original square wave may be input. In this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion circuit does not simply output the input clock signal or data through as it is, but the clock signal or data input in a state of a waveform collapsed from the original square wave in this way. It has a function to compensate and output a waveform close to the original square wave. In this case, if the output is set to a normal slew rate by setting the S terminal, the waveform is compensated for and output with a large slope of rising and falling, so the output signal is closer to the original rectangular wave. Can be output, and the influence of external noise can be reduced. However, if the slopes of rising and falling are large, the amount of voltage change momentarily becomes large, so that the radio wave radiation to the outside of the substrate may become large. On the other hand, if the output is set to a low slew rate by setting the S terminal, the rising and falling slopes are compensated for a smaller waveform and output, so compared to the normal slew rate output, it is outpatient. Although it is vulnerable to the influence of noise, it is possible to reduce the amount of instantaneous voltage change and suppress the increase in radio wave radiation to the outside of the substrate.

It should be noted that it may be configured so that it is possible to set whether to enable or disable the function itself for compensating the output waveform, and to disable all the functions for compensating the output waveform. Further, the function of compensating the output waveform may be realized outside the serial-parallel conversion circuit by providing an amplifier circuit or the like outside the serial-parallel conversion circuit.

Further, in the above-mentioned normal slew rate output setting, compensation is made so that the rising and falling slopes of the output waveform are larger than the rising and falling slopes of the input waveform. The output setting of the above may be such that the input waveform is output as it is without compensating for the output waveform (that is, the output waveform has a rising edge equivalent to the rising edge of the input waveform as a predetermined mode). In this case, in the low slew rate output setting, it is sufficient to output a waveform whose slope is smaller than the rising edge of the input waveform.

The T terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting the timeout reset function of the signal output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23. When the T terminal is set to L (low), the timeout reset function is set to the disabled state, and when the terminal is set to H (high), the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state.

When the T terminal is set to H (high) and the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state, the clock signal and data are input from the CLK / I terminal and DATA / I terminal, and the signal output is output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23. When a predetermined period (1 second in this example) elapses after the start, the time-out is assumed, and the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are automatically reset (output stopped). Therefore, when the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state, if it is desired to continuously supply signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 to each LED and the operating motor, for example, from the effect control CPU 90120 for at least a predetermined period of time. It is necessary to repeatedly output the control signal every (1 second in this example).

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a process of rewriting the control signal every 10 ms, and when the output from each drive output terminal is continued, the effect control CPU 90120 is performed every 10 ms. By repeatedly outputting the control signal to the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the output from each drive output terminal is continued even if the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state.

The Q / S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting the drive method of the signal output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23. When the Q / S terminal is set to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current outputs. When the Q / S terminal is set to H (high), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be sink outputs.

The Q / I terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting whether or not to invert the output logic of the signal output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23. When the Q / I terminal is set to L (low), the output logic of the output signals from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23 is set to be normally output without being inverted. Further, when the Q / I terminal is set to H (high), the output logic of the output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23 is set to be inverted and output.

The R terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a current reference setting terminal. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69, the R terminal is connected to each drive output terminal A0 to A23 via a constant current circuit, and an arbitrary resistance value is outside between the R terminal and the ground (GND). By connecting a resistor, the drive current value of all the outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 can be set in a predetermined range (for example, 4 mA to 20 mA).

The VP terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is an electrostatic protection terminal for protection. The power supply voltage used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal. That is, if the power supply voltage used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal, an overvoltage equal to or higher than the power supply voltage can be released. When a plurality of types of power supply voltages are used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the power supply voltage having the higher voltage value may be connected to the VP terminal.

Next, the control data format of the data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit will be described. FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control data format. The basic control data format of the data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit is composed of the common format shown in FIG. 72 (1) and the basic format shown in FIG. 72 (2).

As shown in FIG. 72 (1), the common formats are 9-bit header (HD), 4-bit device ID (ID), 5-bit decode addresses AD0 to AD4 (see FIGS. 69 and 70), and 1. It is composed of EX data of bits. The EX data is for setting whether the control data format following the common format is the basic format or the extended format described later, and EX = 0 is set in the basic format.

As shown in FIG. 72 (2), the basic format is configured to include 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. For example, when transmitting data for LED lighting control, lighting control including LED gradation control is performed by setting 6-bit data in time series for each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23 and transmitting the data. It can be performed.

Further, as the control data format, an extended format can be used instead of the basic format shown in FIG. 72 (2). Specifically, if EX = 1 is set in the common format shown in FIG. 72 (1), the control data format following the common format becomes the extended format shown in FIG. 72 (3).

As shown in FIG. 72 (3), the extended format is configured to include 1-bit binary data for each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23. In the extended format, since the data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is composed of 1 bit, the control data format of the data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit can be reduced. For example, in the case of driving and controlling the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330 using a serial-parallel conversion circuit, gradation control and the like are performed unlike the case of controlling the lighting of a light emitter such as an LED. Since it is not necessary to do so, it is effective to use the extended format as shown in FIG. 72 (3).

Although the control data format used in the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit has been described in FIG. 72, the control data format used in the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is, for example, the common control data format shown in FIG. 72 (1). The difference is that the format includes 6-bit decode addresses AD0 to AD5. Further, for example, the basic format shown in FIG. 72 (2) is different in that it is shorter because it is composed of 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels. Further, for example, the extended format shown in FIG. 72 (3) is different in that it is shorter because it is configured to include 1-bit binary data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels.

Further, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is configured to disperse the output timings of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 to spread the spectrum, prevent the generation of radiation noise, and suppress radio wave radiation. .. FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 in the serial-parallel conversion circuit. In this embodiment, the internal oscillation clock circuit built in the serial-parallel conversion circuit outputs a 6 MHz clock signal. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 73, the 6 MHz internal clock signal is used as a 1 MHz 6-phase clock signal. The drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are grouped into 6 groups of 4 channels per group to distribute the signal output timing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, group 1 is composed of 4 channels of drive output terminals Q0 to Q3, group 2 is composed of 4 channels of drive output terminals Q4 to Q7, and drive output terminals Q8 to Q8 to Group 3 is composed of 4 channels of Q11, group 4 is composed of 4 channels of drive output terminals Q12 to Q15, group 5 is composed of 4 channels of drive output terminals Q16 to Q19, and drive output terminals Q20 to Q23. Group 6 is composed of 4 channels. Then, as shown in FIG. 73, the drive output terminals in the same group (for example, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q3 in the group 1) have the same signal output timing, but the drive output terminals in different groups (for example). For example, the output timing is distributed between the drive output terminal Q0 of group 1 and the drive output terminal Q4) of group 2.

In FIG. 73, the output timing of the signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23 in the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit has been described, but in the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, the internal clock signal of 6 MHz is converted to 1 MHz. The clock signals are separated into three phases, and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are grouped into three groups of four channels per group to distribute the signal output timing.

Next, a connection example will be described when the serial-parallel conversion circuit described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73 is used as the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c. 74 to 76 are explanatory views for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. Of these, FIG. 74 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b for controlling the lighting of the panel-side LEDs 909d and 909e. Further, FIG. 75 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a motor drive driver 90412 for performing drive control of the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330. Further, FIG. 76 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c.

First, a connection example will be described with reference to FIG. 74 when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b for controlling the lighting of the panel-side LEDs 909d and 909e. As shown in FIG. 74, in this embodiment, the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b for controlling the lighting of the panel-side LEDs 909d and 909e are realized by a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, the address [02] is assigned to the light emitter driver 90411a (see FIG. 88), and as shown in FIG. 74, the terminals AD0 to AD4 for inputting the decoded address Among them, the case where AD1 is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V), AD0, AD2 to AD4 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decoding address is set to 00010 (B) = [02] is shown. ..

Note that FIG. 74 shows how to set the decode address in the light emitter driver 90411a, but as will be described later, the address [03] is assigned to the light emitter driver 90411b (see FIG. 88). Of the decoding address input terminals AD0 to AD4, AD0 and AD1 are connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V), AD2 to AD4 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decoding address is 00011 (B) = [03]. Will be set to.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 74, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the slew output of the clock signal and data is set to a low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67 (2), the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b for controlling the lighting of the panel side LEDs 909d and 909e are all mounted on the same light emitter control board 9016C and are light emitters. Since the control signal is transmitted between the drivers on the same illuminant control board 9016C (transmission across the boards is not performed), it is not necessary to pay much attention to noise immunity. Therefore, by setting the slew output of the clock signal and data to a low slew rate output, the radio wave radiation from the substrate is rather suppressed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 74, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 74, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to L (low), the output signals from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current output, and the Q / I terminal is set to L (low). As a result, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be normally output without being inverted.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 74, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistor of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all the outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150 / 10kΩ = 15MA.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 74, a power supply voltage VCL (5V) is connected to the VP terminal and is protected so as to release an overvoltage of 5V or more.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 74, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are connected to the panel side LEDs 909d and 909e. In the example shown in FIG. 74, for convenience, one light emitting body is connected to each drive output terminal, but when a color LED is connected as the light emitting body, it is used for RGB. The three terminals may be configured to be connected to one color LED, or one terminal may be configured to be connected to one monochromatic LED if a monochromatic LED is used as the light emitter. .. Further, for example, a plurality of monochromatic LEDs may be connected in series to one terminal.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 74, the case where the light emitters are connected to all the terminals of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is shown, but the drive output terminals Q0 to Q0 depending on the number and arrangement of the light emitters. If it is not necessary to use all the terminals of Q23, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, a connection example will be described when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the motor drive driver 90412 for controlling the drive of the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330. As shown in FIG. 75, in this embodiment, the motor drive driver 90412 for controlling the drive of the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330 is realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. To.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, the address [04] is assigned to the motor drive driver 90412 (see FIG. 88), and as shown in FIG. 75, the terminals AD0 to AD5 for inputting the decoded address Among them, the case where AD2 is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V), AD0, AD1, AD3 to AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decoding address is set to 000100 (B) = [04] is shown. ing.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 75, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the slew output of the clock signal and data is set to a low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67 (1), the control signal is not transmitted between the motor drive driver 90412 and the other driver, so that the S terminal is set to ground (GND). It may be connected (set to L (low)) so that the through output of the clock signal and data becomes the output of the normal slew rate.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 75, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 75, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to H (high), the output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23 is set to be the sink output, and the Q / I terminal is set to H (high). The output logic of the output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23 is set to be inverted and output.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 75, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistor of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all the outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150 / 10kΩ = 15MA.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 75, a power supply voltage VCS (5V) is connected to the VP terminal and is protected so as to release an overvoltage of 5V or more.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 75, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the terminals of the four channels Q0 to Q3 of the group 1 having the same output timing are connected to the first first production motor 90303. .. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the terminals of the four channels Q4 to Q7 of the group 2 having the same output timing are connected to the second second effect motor 90330. In this embodiment, the two operation motors of the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330 are controlled, and the terminals Q8 to Q11 of the group 3 are unnecessary. Therefore, Q8 to Q8 to The terminal of Q11 is connected to the ground (GND).

As described above, in the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, the output timings of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are distributed by being divided into three groups, groups 1 to 3. If the output timings are different between the signals output to the same operation motor (in this example, the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330), the drive accuracy of the operation motor may not be maintained. There is. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, the signals input to the same operating motor are connected to the drive output terminals belonging to the same group, and the driving accuracy of the operating motor is increased. It prevents the situation that it becomes impossible to maintain.

On the contrary, for example, when connecting to the panel side LEDs 909d and 909e described with reference to FIG. 74, or when connecting to the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c of FIG. Since the above-mentioned problems of driving accuracy do not occur in the above, even if the output timings are different between the signals output to each light emitter, there is not much trouble. Therefore, when connecting the output signal from the drive output terminal to a light emitting body such as an LED, it is not necessary to pay much attention to the output timing.

Next, a connection example will be described with reference to FIG. 76 when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c. As shown in FIG. 76, in this embodiment, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. To.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, the address [07] is assigned to the light emitter driver 90413a (see FIG. 89), and as shown in FIG. 76, the terminals AD0 to AD5 for inputting the decoded address Among them, AD0 to AD2 are connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V), AD3 to AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decoding address is set to 000111 (B) = [07]. ..

Note that FIG. 76 shows how to set the decode address in the light emitter driver 90413a, but as will be described later, the address [08] is assigned to the light emitter driver 90413b (see FIG. 89). Of the decoding address input terminals AD0 to AD5, AD3 is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V), AD0 to AD2, AD4, and AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decoding address is 001000 (B) = [ 08] will be set. Further, as will be described later, since the address [09] is assigned to the light emitter driver 90413c (see FIG. 89), of the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD5, A0 and AD3 are the power supply voltage VCS. It is connected to (5V), AD1, AD2, AD4, and AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decoding address is set to 00101 (B) = [09].

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 76, the S terminal is connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the S terminal to L (low), the slew output of the clock signal and data is set to the output of a normal slew rate. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b, and the right frame LED909c are on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F. Since the control signal is transmitted between the light emitter drivers mounted on different substrates, the influence of noise is large. Therefore, by setting the through output of the clock signal and data to the output of a normal slew rate, the resistance to noise is ensured.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 76, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 76, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to L (low), the output signals from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11 are set to be constant current output, and the Q / I terminal is set to L (low). As a result, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is set to be normally output without being inverted.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 76, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistor of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all the outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150 / 10kΩ = 15MA.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 76, a power supply voltage VDC (12V) is connected to the VP terminal. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 76, since a 12V power supply voltage (VDL) and a 5V power supply voltage (VCL, VCS) are used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the voltage value of 12V, whichever is higher, The power supply voltage VDC is connected to the V terminal and is protected so as to allow an overvoltage of 12V or more to escape.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 76, each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11 is connected to a plurality of light emitters as a top frame LED909a, a left frame LED909b, and a right frame LED909c. In the example shown in FIG. 76, one light emitter is connected to each drive output terminal for convenience, or three light emitters (for example, a single color LED) that perform the same control are connected in series. Although the figure is shown, when a color LED is connected as a light emitting body, it may be configured so that three terminals for RGB are connected to one color LED.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 76, the case where the light emitters are connected to all the terminals of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is shown, but the drive output terminals Q0 to are depending on the number and arrangement of the light emitters. If it is not necessary to use all the terminals of Q11, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in this embodiment, the T terminals of the illuminant driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c are set to H (high), respectively, and the timeout function is effective. It is set to the state. In this embodiment, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the panel side LEDs 909d, 909e in the effect control process processing (see step S9055) described later. It outputs a signal or outputs a control signal for driving and controlling the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330, but since the timeout function is set to the enabled state, the control signal Is output only once, and after a predetermined period (1 second in this example) elapses, the output signal from each drive output terminal is automatically reset and lighting control and drive control cannot be continued. Therefore, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 repeatedly outputs a control signal at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example) in the effect control process process (see step S9055) described later. , The lighting control of the panel side LEDs 909d and 909e, the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b, and the right frame LED909c is continuously executed, and the drive control of the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330 is continuously executed. It is controlled to do.

In this embodiment, the timeout function is set to the enabled state as described above, and the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitting are emitted every predetermined period (1 second in this example). Since the output from the drive output terminals of the body drivers 90413a to 90413c is configured to be automatically stopped, for example, after performing drive control of the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330, Despite the control to stop the first production motor 90303 and the second production motor 90330, the drive of the first production motor 90303 and the second production motor 90330 did not stop due to signal omission or malfunction. , It is possible to prevent a situation in which the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330 are seized.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the case where the T terminal is uniformly set to H (high) and the timeout function is set to the enabled state is shown. Not limited to this, the setting of the enabled state and the disabled state of the timeout function may be used properly according to the application. For example, for the motor drive driver, the timeout function is set to the enabled state from the viewpoint of preventing seizure of the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330, while the panel side LEDs 909d and 909e, the top frame LED909a, and the left frame LED909b. As for the light emitters such as the right frame LED909c, unlike the first production motor 90303 and the second production motor 90330, problems such as burn-in do not occur. Therefore, the T terminal is set to L (low) and the timeout function is disabled. It may be configured to be set to a state.

Further, in this embodiment, in order to continuously execute the lighting control and the drive control, the effect control CPU 90120 repeatedly outputs a control signal at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example) (specifically). Indicates a case where the control signal is rewritten every 10 ms and the control signal is repeatedly output), but the control mode is not limited to that. For example, an output circuit (output IC) may be provided separately from the effect control CPU 90120 (may be provided on the effect control board 9012, or may be provided on another board such as the effect control relay board 9016A) to control the effect. When the CPU 90120 outputs a control signal once, the output circuit is configured to repeatedly output the control signal at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example) based on the once output control signal. You may.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V), and the T terminal is physically set to H (high) on the hardware to time out. It shows the case where the reset function is set to the enabled state, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, by connecting the T terminal to the register for setting the T terminal and changing the set value of the register by the setting signal from the effect control CPU 90120, whether to enable or disable the timeout function by software. May be configured so that

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value (10 kΩ in this example) is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND), and the drive output terminal Q0 The drive current values of all outputs of ~ Q23, Q0 to Q11 are set to 15MA. Here, since there is also a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) having an internal reference resistor, a serial-parallel conversion circuit having such an internal reference resistor can be used as a light emitter driver or a motor drive driver. Although it is conceivable to use an internal reference resistor, the built-in reference resistor provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit generally has a fixed drive current value (for example, fixed at 20 mA) or a large error (for example, 20 mA fixed). Error ± 30%). Therefore, in this embodiment, an appropriate drive current value (15MA in this example) is set by connecting an external resistor between the R terminal and the ground (GND) and using an external reference resistor. An error is also proposed (in this example, the error is ± 3%).

As a light emitter driver or a motor drive driver, a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) that can use both an internal reference resistor and an external reference resistor is used, and is configured to be used properly according to the application. You may. For example, when a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs are densely provided for the production, if the light emission is sparse, the production will be hindered. Therefore, an external reference resistor should be used to reduce the error. It may be configured. On the other hand, when controlling the lighting of the LED, which is used independently for error notification, etc., there is no such obstacle in the production and the error may be a little large. Therefore, the internal reference resistor is configured to be used. May be good.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the first for operating the electric parts (in this example, the panel side LEDs 909d, 909e, the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b, the right frame LED909c, and the movable portion 90302). The control means (in this example, the effect control CPU 90120) for controlling the effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330 for operating the movable member 90321, and the control signal from the control means by the serial communication method. Output means (in this example, light emitter drivers 90411a, 90411b, in this example, output signals from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving an electric component. It includes a motor drive driver 90412 and a light emitter driver 90413a to 90413c). Further, the output means is a first output state (in this example, a normal output state) in which the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means is changed according to a change mode equal to or higher than that of the input control signal. It is possible to set either an output state (slew rate output state) or a second output state (in this example, a low slew rate output state) in which the waveform rises according to a mode of change that is slower than the first output state. (In this example, setting the S terminal to L (low) sets it to a normal slew rate output, and setting the S terminal to H (high) sets it to a low slew rate output). Therefore, the setting can be changed according to the usage environment, and the radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed according to the setting, while the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be improved. Specifically, if the output state is set to a low slew rate, radio wave radiation from the board can be suppressed, and if the output state is set to a normal slew rate, the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be improved. ..

Further, according to this embodiment, another output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means (in this example, as shown in FIG. 67 (2), a plurality of output means are provided on the light emitting body control board 9016C. Light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b are mounted, and control signals are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b on the same light emitter control board 9016C). In this case, the output means is set to the second output state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 74, the S terminal is set in the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C. It is set to H (high) and is set to a low slew rate output state). Therefore, when other output means are provided in the same substrate, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed.

Further, according to this embodiment, another output means is provided on another board connected to the board on which the output means is provided via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable or a wire harness) (for example, a flexible cable or a wire harness). In this example, as shown in FIG. 68, the light emitting body drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different light emitting body control boards 9016D to 9016F, and the light emitting light is mounted on the light emitting body control boards 9016D to 9016F having different control signals. (Sequentially transmitted between the body drivers 90413a to 90413c). In this case, the output means is set to the first output state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 76, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F are S. The terminal is set to L (low) and is set to the normal slew rate output state). Therefore, when another output means is provided on another substrate connected via the wiring member, the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be enhanced.

As described above, in this embodiment, since the circuit board generally has high noise immunity, the suppression of radio radiation is prioritized in the connection relationship in the circuit board, and the output state is set to a low through rate to obtain a gentle signal waveform. On the contrary, the wiring members (for example, flexible cables and wire harnesses) connected between the boards have low noise immunity, so in the extinction relationship between the circuit boards, the noise immunity is prioritized and the output state of the normal through rate is a square wave. The signal waveform is close to. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to increase the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction while suppressing the radiation of radio waves to the outside of the game machine.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V) or the ground (GND), and the S terminal is physically H on the hardware. It shows the case where it is set to (high) and set to a low slew rate output state, or is set to L (low) and set to a normal slew rate output state. I can't be limited. For example, by connecting the S terminal to the register for setting the S terminal and changing the set value of the register by the setting signal from the effect control CPU 90120, the output state of the low slew rate is set by software or the normal slew rate. It may be configured so that it can be set whether to set the output state of.

Further, in this embodiment, control signals are transmitted between output means (in this example, a light emitter driver) mounted on the same board in a low slew rate output state, or output means mounted on different boards. A case is shown in which a substrate (in this example, illuminant control substrates 9016C to 9016F) in which only one of the control signals is transmitted according to the output state of the normal slew rate between the substrates is provided, and such an embodiment is provided. I can't be limited. For example, when a plurality of illuminant drivers are mounted on one illuminant control board, control signals are transmitted between the illuminant drivers on the same illuminant control board among those illuminant drivers. And a device that transmits a control signal to a light emitting body driver mounted on another light emitting body control board may be mixed. In this case, for example, even if the illuminant driver is mounted on the same illuminant control board, the one that transmits the control signal between the illuminant drivers is set to a low slew rate output state, and another illuminant is set. Those that output control signals to the illuminant driver mounted on the control board may be configured to be set to the normal slew rate output state.

Further, even when the control signal is transmitted between the illuminant drivers mounted on the same illuminant control board, the output state is not necessarily set to a low slew rate, for example, on the illuminant control board. When the control signal output by one mounted light emitter driver is branched on the substrate, it may be set to the output state of a normal slew rate. FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example in which a control signal output by one light emitter driver mounted on the light emitting body control board is branched on the board.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 77, the control signal (clock signal and data through output) output by one illuminant driver 90413d mounted on the illuminant control board 9016G is branched on the substrate, and one of the branches is branched. The case where the control signal is transmitted to the light emitting body driver 90413e on the same light emitting body control board 9016G and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the light emitting body driver 90413f on the same light emitting body control board 9016G is shown. As shown in the first modification, even on the same illuminant control board 9016G, when the control signal is branched and transmitted to the other illuminant drivers 90413e and 90413f, the control signal is attenuated by the branching. It becomes more susceptible to noise. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 77, the S terminal may be set to L (low) and set to a normal slew rate output state to enhance the noise immunity of the control signal.

That is, when a plurality of other output means provided in the same substrate as the output means are connected in parallel to the output means (in this example, as in the modified example 1 shown in FIG. 77, the light emitter control board. A control signal (clock signal and data through output) output by one illuminant driver 90413d mounted on the 9016G is branched on the substrate, and one of the branched control signals is the same illuminant control board 9016G. When transmitted to the driver 90413e and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the illuminant driver 90413f on the same illuminant control board 9016G), the output means is set to the first output state (in this example). In the light emitter driver 90413d mounted on the light emitter control board 9016G, the S terminal is set to L (low) and the output state is set to the normal through rate, as in the first modification shown in FIG. 77). It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be enhanced.

In the second modification shown in FIG. 77, the control signal (clock signal and data through output) output by one illuminant driver 90413g mounted on the illuminant control board 9016H is branched on the substrate, and one of the branches is branched. The control signal is transmitted to the illuminant driver 90413h on the same illuminant control board 9016H, and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the illuminant driver (not shown) on the external illuminant control board (not shown). Cases are shown. As shown in the second modification, even when the other branched control signal is transmitted to the external board, the control signal is attenuated by the branching and is easily affected by noise, as in the first modification. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 77, the S terminal may be set to L (low) and set to a normal slew rate output state to enhance the noise immunity of the control signal. With such a configuration, the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be enhanced.

That is, a plurality of other output means provided on each of the first board provided with the output means and the second board connected to the first board via the wiring member are connected in parallel to the output means. (In this example, as in the modified example 2 shown in FIG. 77, the control signal (clock signal and data through output) output by one illuminant driver 90413g mounted on the illuminant control board 9016H). Is branched on the substrate, one of the branched control signals is transmitted to the light emitter driver 90413h on the same light emitter control board 9016H, and the other branched control signal is transmitted on the external light emitter control board (not shown). The output means is set to the first output state (in this example, as in the second modification shown in FIG. 77), the light emitter control board 9016H is set to the first output state (when transmitted to the light emitter driver (not shown)). In the light emitter driver 90413g mounted above, the S terminal may be set to L (low) and set to a normal through rate output state). With such a configuration, the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be enhanced.

Further, according to this embodiment, the output means is specified by a parallel communication method from a specific signal output unit (in this example, each driver output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) grouped into a plurality of different groups. Output signals (in this example, output signals from each driver output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) (in this example, in the case of a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, one group as shown in FIG. 73. It is grouped into 6 groups of 4 channels per group. In the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, it is grouped into 3 groups of 4 channels per group). The output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit is different for each group (in this example, as shown in FIG. 73, the output timing of the output signals from the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11 is a group. It is distributed by each). Therefore, the output timings of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11 can be dispersed to spread the spectrum, the generation of radiation noise can be prevented, and the radio wave radiation from the substrate can be further suppressed. ..

Further, according to this embodiment, a movable member (movable portion 90302, movable member 90321 in this example) that performs an operation is provided. Further, the drive means for operating the movable member (in this example, the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330) is driven based on the specific signal output from the specific signal output unit of the same group of the output means. (In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the signals input to the same operating motor are connected to the drive output terminals belonging to the same group). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in driving accuracy of the driving means while suppressing radio wave radiation from the substrate.

Further, according to this embodiment, the output means has a stop function (time-out function in this example) for stopping the output of a specific signal after a predetermined period (1 second in this example) has elapsed since the control signal was input. (In this example, the timeout function is set to the enabled state by setting the T terminal to H (high). See FIG. 70). Therefore, it is possible to avoid operation malfunctions due to wiring defects and the like, and it is possible to stably control electrical components.

Further, according to this embodiment, the control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal is provided (in this example, the effect control CPU 90120 is used, for example, in the effect control process process (see step S9055). By repeatedly outputting control signals at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example), lighting control of the panel side LEDs 909d and 909e, the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b, and the right frame LED909c can be continuously executed. The drive control of the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330 is controlled so as to be continuously executed). Therefore, control corresponding to the stop function of the output means can be realized.

Further, according to this embodiment, the output means can be set to enable or disable the stop function (in this example, the timeout function is set to the disabled state by setting the T terminal to L (low). , The timeout function is set to the enabled state by setting the T terminal to H (high). See FIG. 70). Therefore, it is possible to change the setting of the stop function of the output means according to the application, and it is possible to reduce the cost by standardizing the parts.

In this embodiment, among the serial-parallel conversion circuits, the serial-parallel conversion circuits 90411a and 90411b in which the clock signal and the slew output of the data are connected to other serial-parallel conversion circuits in the same substrate, and the production For the serial-parallel conversion circuit 90412 to which the motors 90303 and 90330 are connected, the S terminal is set to H (high) and the slew output of the clock signal and data is set to a low slew rate output (FIGS. 74 and 75). For the serial-parallel conversion circuits 90413a, 90413b, 90413c in which the slew output of the clock signal and data is connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuit outside the board, the S terminal is set to L (low) for the clock signal and The case where the slew output of the data is set to the output of the normal slew rate (see FIG. 76) is shown, but is not limited to such a mode. For example, the slew output of all serial-parallel conversion circuits provided in the game machine may be set to the output of a normal slew rate. Hereinafter, a modification 3 in which the slew output of all the serial-parallel conversion circuits is set to the output of a normal slew rate will be described.

78 and 79 are explanatory views for explaining a connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the modification 3. As shown in FIG. 78, in the modification 3, the S terminal is also set to L (low) for the serial-parallel conversion circuits 90411a and 90411b in which the slew output is connected to another serial-parallel conversion circuit in the same substrate. The clock signal and data slew output is set to the normal slew rate output. Further, as shown in FIG. 79, in the modification 3, in the serial-parallel conversion circuit 90412 to which the effect motors 90303 and 90330 are connected, the S terminal is set to L (low) and the clock signal and data are slewed. The output is set to a normal slew rate output. In the third modification, the serial-parallel conversion circuits 90413a, 90413b, and 90413c in which the through output is connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuit outside the board are the same as the connection mode shown in FIG. 76, and the through output is normal. Is set to the output of the slew rate of. Therefore, in the modification 3 shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the slew output is set to the normal slew rate output for all the serial-parallel conversion circuits included in the gaming machine.

According to the modification 3 shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, all the serial-parallel conversion circuits are unified so that the slew output is set to the output of the normal slew rate, so that the circuit settings are standardized. Therefore, design mistakes can be suppressed.

On the contrary, for example, the through output of all the serial-parallel conversion circuits provided in the game machine may be set to a low slew rate output. Hereinafter, a modification 4 in which the slew output of all serial-parallel conversion circuits is set to a low slew rate output will be described.

FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the modified example 4. As shown in FIG. 80, in the modification 4, the S terminal is also set to H (high) for the serial-parallel conversion circuits 90413a, 90413b, 90413c in which the slew output is connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuit outside the board. The clock signal and data slew output is set to a low slew rate output. In the modified example 4, the serial-parallel conversion circuits 90411a and 90411b in which the through output is connected to another serial-parallel conversion circuit in the same substrate are the same as the connection mode shown in FIG. 74, and the through output is Set to low slew rate output. Further, in the modification 4, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 90412 to which the effect motors 90303 and 90330 are connected is the same as the connection mode shown in FIG. 75, and the slew output is set to a low slew rate output. Therefore, in the modification 3 shown in FIG. 80, the slew output is set to a low slew rate output for all the serial-parallel conversion circuits included in the game machine.

According to the modification 4 shown in FIG. 80, all the serial-parallel conversion circuits are unified so that the slew output is set to the low slew rate output, so that a design error can be made by standardizing the circuit settings. It can be suppressed.

If all outputs are set to low slew rate, it may be difficult to ensure resistance to noise when the output is through to a serial-parallel conversion circuit outside the board. For example, such In this case, a buffer circuit with a built-in amplifier may be provided between the output destination of the slew output. With such a configuration, the slew output is amplified by the amplifier built in the buffer circuit, and even if the output has a low slew rate, resistance to noise can be secured to some extent.

Further, in this embodiment, when the effect motors 90303 and 90330 are connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the drive output terminals of the groups having the same output timing are connected (see FIG. 75). However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when a full-color LED is used as the light emitter, the three terminals (RGB terminals) of the same full-color LED may be configured to connect drive output terminals of a group having the same output timing. Hereinafter, a modified example 5 in which drive output terminals of a group having the same output timing for the full-color LED are connected will be described.

FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the modified example 5. As shown in FIG. 81, in the modification 5, one of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is one of the three terminals of Q0 to Q2 among the terminals of the four channels of Q0 to Q3 of the group 1 having the same output timing. The R terminal, G terminal, and B terminal of the full-color LED of the eye are connected respectively. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the three terminals Q4 to Q6 among the terminals of the four channels Q4 to Q7 of the group 2 having the same output timing, and the R terminal and G terminal of the second full-color LED. And B terminal are connected respectively. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the three terminals Q8 to Q10 among the terminals of the four channels Q8 to Q11 of the group 3 having the same output timing, and the R terminal and G terminal of the third full-color LED. And B terminal are connected respectively.

According to the modification 5 shown in FIG. 81, the light emission accuracy of the full-color LED can be ensured by connecting the signal input to the same full-color LED to the drive output terminal belonging to the same group.

Since the number of terminals required for connecting a full-color LED is 3 terminals (R terminal, G terminal and B terminal), as shown in FIG. 81, each of the 4 terminals of Group 1, Group 2 and Group 3 One of the terminals is not required for connection (Q3 terminal, Q7 terminal and Q11 terminal in the example shown in FIG. 81). In this case, terminals unnecessary for connecting the full-color LED, such as the Q3 terminal and the Q7 terminal shown in FIG. 81, may be connected to the ground (GND).

Further, terminals unnecessary for connecting the full-color LED may be used for other purposes. For example, when the movable member for the effect (effect) is configured to operate by driving the solenoid, the solenoid for the effect can be connected with one terminal, so Q11 shown in FIG. 81. As shown in the above, the solenoid 90500 for the effecting object may be connected to a terminal unnecessary for connecting the full-color LED.

Further, for example, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of movable members (directing accessories) for producing, when the producing accessories provided symmetrically in the game area are operated in some manner in synchronization with each other. The solenoids for the effecting objects provided symmetrically may be configured to be connected to the drive output terminals of the same group. With such a configuration, it is possible to secure an operation system for movable members that are symmetrically operated, such as a symmetrically provided effecting object.

Further, for example, when a solenoid for the production accessory is provided, a predetermined power control IC may be connected between the drive terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit and the lock solenoid for the production accessory. .. In this case, the predetermined power control IC is a power switch (so-called high-side switch, which is a so-called high-side switch, and the input side is serial) that outputs power from the output terminal side only when a high voltage input of a predetermined value or more is input to the input terminal side. -Connected to the drive terminal of the parallel conversion circuit, the output side is connected to the lock solenoid for the effect, and, for example, when a plurality of solenoids for the effect are provided, the high for those effect. The input side of the side switch may be connected to the drive terminals of the same group, and the high side switch and the lock solenoid for those effects may be configured to be controlled by signals from the drive terminals of the same group. Further, for example, a high-side switch is connected to terminals (Q3 terminal, Q7 terminal and Q11 terminal in this example) that are unnecessary for connecting a full-color LED in the same group, and an effect is provided on the output side of the high-side switch. It may be configured to connect a lock solenoid for.

Further, for example, when the lighting control of the 7-segment LED or the dot display is performed, the input to the 7-segment LED or the dot display is configured to be connected to the drive terminal of the same group, and the lighting control signal is transmitted. It may be configured to match the output timing.

Also, if there are unused terminals in the drive output terminals of the serial-parallel conversion circuit and those unused terminals are disconnected, surge voltage is input to those unused terminals due to factors such as static electricity. , There is a risk of problems such as excessive heat generation and damage to the internal circuit. Therefore, it is conceivable to provide a protection circuit for surge voltage countermeasures inside the serial-parallel conversion circuit, but this is not preferable because the manufacturing cost of the serial-parallel conversion circuit increases. Therefore, these unused terminals are configured to be connected to a predetermined reference potential so that the surge voltage is released to the reference potential side of the predetermined power supply board (not shown), resulting in excessive heat generation or damage to the internal circuit. It may be configured to suppress the occurrence of such a problem. Hereinafter, a modification 6 in which the unused terminal of the drive output terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the ground (GND) with the reference potential as a reference potential will be described.

82 to 84 are explanatory views for explaining the connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the modification 6. Of these, FIG. 82 shows a modified example of a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b for controlling the lighting of the panel-side LEDs 909d and 909e. In the example shown in FIG. 82, the panel side LEDs are connected to 18 drive output terminals Q0 to Q17 out of 24 drive output terminals Q0 to Q24, but the 6 drive output terminals Q18 to Q23 are unused. It is a terminal, and six unused terminals of drive output terminals Q18 to Q23 are connected to the ground (GND).

Further, FIG. 83 shows a modified example of the connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the motor drive driver 90412 for performing the drive control of the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330. In the example shown in FIG. 83, the production motors are connected to eight drive output terminals Q0 to Q7 out of the twelve drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, but the four drive output terminals Q8 to Q11 are not yet connected. It is a used terminal, and the unused terminals of the four drive output terminals Q8 to Q11 are connected to the ground (GND).

Further, FIG. 84 shows a modified example of a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c. In the example shown in FIG. 84, LEDs for each frame are connected to 9 drive output terminals Q0 to Q8 out of 12 drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, but 3 drive output terminals Q9 to Q11 are connected. It is an unused terminal, and the unused terminals of the three drive output terminals Q9 to Q11 are connected to the ground (GND).

According to the modification 6 shown in FIGS. 82 to 84, even if a surge voltage is generated, the surge voltage can be released to the ground (GND) side, causing problems such as excessive heat generation and damage to the internal circuit. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the modification 6 shown in FIGS. 82 to 84, an external resistor of 3 kΩ is further connected to each of the VP terminals, which are electrostatic protection terminals for protection. By configuring the external resistor to be connected to the VP terminal in this way, even if a surge voltage is generated, it is possible to prevent a current exceeding the rated current from flowing to the VP terminal, resulting in excessive heat generation or damage to the internal circuit. It is possible to further suppress the occurrence of such problems.

Further, in the modified example 6 shown in FIGS. 82 to 84, the case where the unused terminal is connected to the ground (GND) as the reference potential is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode, and it is connected to another fixed potential. It may be configured as. Hereinafter, a modification 7 in which an unused terminal of the drive output terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to a fixed potential as a reference potential will be described.

85 to 87 are explanatory views for explaining a connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the modification 7. Of these, FIG. 85 shows a modified example of a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b for controlling the lighting of the panel-side LEDs 909d and 909e. In the example shown in FIG. 85, the panel side LEDs are connected to 18 drive output terminals Q0 to Q17 out of 24 drive output terminals Q0 to Q24, but the 6 drive output terminals Q18 to Q23 are unused. It is a terminal, and the unused terminals of the six drive output terminals Q18 to Q23 are connected to VCL (5V) as a fixed potential (connected to the same power supply voltage as the VP terminal).

Further, FIG. 86 shows a modified example of the connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the motor drive driver 90412 for controlling the drive of the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330. In the example shown in FIG. 86, the production motors are connected to eight drive output terminals Q0 to Q7 out of the twelve drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, but the four drive output terminals Q8 to Q11 are not yet connected. It is a used terminal, and the unused terminals of the four drive output terminals Q8 to Q11 are connected to the VCS (5V) as a fixed potential (connected to the same power supply voltage as the VP terminal).

Further, FIG. 87 shows a modified example of the connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c. In the example shown in FIG. 87, LEDs for each frame are connected to 9 drive output terminals Q0 to Q8 out of 12 drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, but 3 drive output terminals Q9 to Q11 are connected. It is an unused terminal, and the unused terminals of the three drive output terminals Q9 to Q11 are connected to the VLD (12V) as a fixed potential (connected to the same power supply voltage as the VP terminal).

According to the modification 7 shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, even if a surge voltage is generated, the surge voltage can be released to the fixed potential (VCL (5V), VCS (5V), VDC (12V)) side, respectively. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as excessive heat generation and damage to the internal circuit.

Further, also in the modified example 7 shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, an external resistor of 3 kΩ is connected to each of the VP terminals, which are electrostatic protection terminals for protection. By configuring the external resistor to be connected to the VP terminal in this way, even if a surge voltage is generated, it is possible to prevent a current exceeding the rated current from flowing to the VP terminal, resulting in excessive heat generation or damage to the internal circuit. It is possible to further suppress the occurrence of such problems.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, the case where the unused terminals are connected to the same power supply voltage as the VP terminals is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, regardless of the power supply voltage connected to the VP terminal, the unused terminal is uniformly connected to the VLL (12V) so that the surge voltage can be released by connecting to a sufficiently high power supply voltage. It may be configured. Further, for example, a power supply voltage for countermeasures against surge voltage may be provided, and unused terminals may be uniformly connected to the power supply voltage for countermeasures against surge voltage.

In this embodiment, addresses are assigned to the light emitter drivers 90411a, 90411b, 90413a to 90413c, and the motor drive driver 90412 in advance. 88 and 89 are explanatory views showing an example of addresses assigned to the light emitter drivers 90411a, 90411b, 90413a to 90413c, and the motor drive driver 90412.

In this embodiment, in the effect control board 9012, the addresses of the light emitter drivers 90411a, 90411b, 90413a to 90413c and the motor drive driver 90421 shown in FIGS. 88 and 89 are stored in the predetermined address storage area provided in the ROM 90121 in advance. The address management table in which is set is stored. Then, as described above, by setting the connection state of the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD4 (or AD0 to AD5) of the light emitter drivers 90411a, 90411b, 90413a to 90413c and the motor drive driver 90412 in advance, The assigned address is set, and the address managed by using the address management table on the effect control board 9012 side and the address actually set in each driver match.

In this embodiment, when the effect control CPU 90120 controls the light emission of the top frame LEDs 909a to 909c and the panel side LEDs 909d and 909e, the ROM 90121 is provided with the address of the light emitter driver corresponding to the LED to be light-emitting. Each light emitter driver reads from a predetermined address storage area, sets the read address in the set bit of the decode address of the control data format shown in FIG. 72 (see FIG. 72 (1)), and sets the control data in which the address is set. By outputting to 90411a, 90411b, 90413a to 90413c, light emission control of the top frame LEDs 909a to 909c and the panel side LEDs 909d, 909e is performed.

Further, when the effect control CPU 90120 performs drive control of the effect motors 90303 and 90330, the address of the motor drive driver 90412 corresponding to the effect motors 90303 and 90330 is set in a predetermined address storage area provided in the ROM 90121. By setting the read address to the set bit of the decode address of the control data format shown in FIG. 72 (see FIG. 72 (1)) and outputting the control data in which the address is set to the motor drive driver 90412. , Drive control of the effect motors 90303 and 90330.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 is used for addresses (in this example, addresses [00], [01], [05], [06], etc.) that are not set in the address management tables shown in FIGS. 88 and 89. Does not output control data (except in the case of malfunction due to garbled data).

In this embodiment, the addresses [00] and [01] are unused addresses. Further, the address [02] is assigned to the illuminant driver 90411a, and the address [03] is assigned to the illuminant driver 90411b. Further, the address [04] is assigned to the motor drive driver 90412.

Further, the addresses [05] and [06] are regarded as unused addresses. Then, the address [07] is assigned to the illuminant driver 90413a, the address [08] is assigned to the illuminant driver 90413b, and the address [09] is assigned to the illuminant driver 90413c.

Further, as already described, the illuminant driver 90411a having the address [02] and the illuminant driver 90411b having the address [03] are configured by a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit to generate serial data. It is converted into parallel data and supplied to the 24 board-side LEDs 909d and 909e of the game board 902, respectively.

Further, as already described, the motor drive driver 90412 having the address [04] is composed of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, converts serial data into parallel data, and drives the first production motor 90303. It is output from four output terminals (Q0 to Q3) as a drive signal for driving, and is output from four output terminals (Q4 to Q7) as a drive signal for driving the second production motor 90330. In this embodiment, the area of the output terminal numbers 08 to 23 in the area where the address of the predetermined address storage area corresponds to [04] is an unused area.

Further, as already described, the illuminant driver 90413a having the address [07], the illuminant driver 90413b having the address [08], and the illuminant driver 90413c having the address [09] have 12 channels. The serial-parallel conversion circuit is configured, and the serial data is converted into parallel data and supplied to the 12 top frame LEDs 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c of the game frame, respectively. In this embodiment, the areas of output terminal numbers 12 to 23 among the areas where the addresses of the predetermined address storage areas correspond to [07] to [09] are unused areas.

As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, in this embodiment, address information is set for a plurality of electric components in a range of a predetermined value or more exceeding the minimum value among the values in a predetermined settable range. .. Specifically, in this embodiment, the first effect for rotating a plurality of electric parts (in this example, the panel side LEDs 909d, 909e, the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b, the right frame LED909c, and the movable portion 90302). Of the addresses that can be assigned to each light emitter driver and motor drive driver that output control data to the motor 90303 and the second production motor 90330 for sliding the movable member 90321), the minimum value (in this example, the address [ It is not configured to be assigned immediately from 00]), but is configured to be assigned from a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value (address [02] in this example) or more, and an address from the minimum value to less than the predetermined value. (In this example, the addresses [00] to [01]) are configured to be unused addresses.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, in this embodiment, address information is discontinuously set in a predetermined settable range for at least a part of a plurality of electric components. Specifically, in this embodiment, the first effect for rotating a plurality of electric parts (in this example, the panel side LEDs 909d, 909e, the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b, the right frame LED909c, and the movable portion 90302). Of the addresses that can be assigned to each illuminant driver or motor drive driver that outputs control data to the motor 90303 and the second production motor 90330) for sliding the movable member 90321, each illuminant driver or motor drive is actually used. The address assigned to the driver is configured so that there is a discontinuous part (in this example, the addresses [05] to [06] are unused addresses, and the addresses [04] to the addresses [07] are used. ] Is discontinuous).

As described above, in this embodiment, since the addresses are assigned so as to be discontinuous, or the addresses are assigned from a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value, an unset address is included. Even if the control data is transmitted, as long as the address is not set for any driver, there is no risk of erroneously outputting a signal to any electrical component such as an LED or motor, and the transmitted control It is possible to reduce the possibility of malfunction in the control of electrical components when the address information of the data is incomplete.

In addition, in general, when the number of LEDs and production motors is changed during the development stage of a game machine, or when there is a change such as consolidation of boards to be used, each driver such as a light emitter driver or a motor drive driver is used. On the other hand, it is necessary to reassign the address, which may reduce the development efficiency of the game machine. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the address is assigned so as to be discontinuous, or the address is assigned from a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value, so that it is unnecessary at the development stage. Even if a new driver occurs, the address assigned to the unnecessary driver is treated as a missing number so that the address is not reassigned, or even if a new required driver occurs, it is originally unused. By assigning the addresses (for example, the addresses [00], [01], [05], [06] shown in FIGS. 88 and 89), it is possible to eliminate the need for reassignment of the addresses, which is in the development stage. The cost can be reduced and the development efficiency can be improved.

The method of allocating addresses to the light emitter drivers 90411a, 90411b, 90413a to 90413c and the motor drive driver 90412 is not limited to the modes shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, and various modes can be considered.

For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the case where the addresses [00] and [01] are assigned to each driver from the addresses [02] and above as unused addresses is shown, but only the address [00] is not yet assigned. It may be configured to be assigned to each driver from the address [01] or higher as the used address. Further, the number of unused addresses may be further increased so that, for example, addresses [00] to [02] are assigned to each driver from addresses [03] and above as unused addresses.

Further, for example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the case where the addresses [05] and [06] are unused and the addresses are discontinuous is shown, but only the address [05] is regarded as unused and the address is set. It may be configured to be discontinuous, or the number of unused addresses may be increased so that the addresses are discontinuous, for example, with addresses [05] to [07] as unused addresses. ..

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit (in this example, a motor drive driver 90412 and a light emitter driver 90413a to 90413c) and a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit (in this example). , Light emitter drivers 90411a, 90411b) and the address management using one table, but the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit and the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit use separate tables. It may be configured to manage addresses.

Further, in this embodiment, only with respect to the allocation of addresses, a case is shown in which the addresses are assigned so as to be discontinuous, or the addresses are assigned from a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value. The output terminal number of the driver may also be set so that the output terminal number is discontinuous, or the output terminal number may be set from a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value. For example, for the light emitter driver 90411a set at the address [02], the output terminal numbers [00] and [01] are set as unused terminal numbers, and the output terminal numbers [02] are set for each LED. , The output terminal numbers [05] and [06] in the middle may be set as unused terminal numbers, and the output terminal numbers set for each LED may be configured to be discontinuous.

[Operation of pachinko game machines]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment will be described. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 9011, the game control microcomputer 90100 is started, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, RAM 90102 is cleared. In addition, the register of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set. As a result, after that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, interrupts are permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko game machine 901 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 90103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 101. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 101 is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 90110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 9022B and the count switch 9023 is determined (S9011). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (S9012). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as jackpot information, starting information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901 is output (S9013). ).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number values MR1'to MR4' used on the main board 9011 side by software is executed (S9014). After that, the CPU 90103 executes a special symbol process process (S9015). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit (not shown) is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the first special symbol display 904A and the first 2 Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation on the special symbol display 904B and set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening on the special variable winning ball device 907 according to a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (S9016). By executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 90103 determines the variable display mode of the normal symbol using the random number value MR4'for determining the normal symbol display result, and displays the display operation on the normal symbol display 9020 (for example, the segment LED). By controlling lighting, extinguishing, etc.), it is possible to display fluctuations in the normal symbol and set the tilting motion of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B.

After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 90103 executes the command control process to transmit the control command from the main board 9011 to the control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 9012 (S9017). As an example of these, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 90105, the effect is produced in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the control board 9012, set the predetermined control data in the output port of the effect control INT signal and turn on the effect control INT signal for a predetermined time. It is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table by turning it off after that. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S9015 shown in FIG. 101 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (S9021). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 90103 selects and executes any of the processes S9022 to S9029 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit.

In the start winning prize determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a first start prize or a second start prize by the first start port switch 9022A or the second start port switch 9022B, and if there is a prize, a special figure is displayed. The random value MR1'for determining the result, the random value MR2'for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted, and in the case of the first start winning, the first special figure reservation storage unit. It is stored at the highest level of the empty entry in the above, and in the case of the second start winning, it is stored at the highest level of the empty entry in the second special figure reservation storage unit.

The special symbol normal processing of S9022 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display are based on the presence or absence of the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit and the second special symbol reservation storage unit. It is determined whether or not to start the special figure game by 904B. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'for determining the special symbol display result, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is set as a "big hit" is determined by the variable display result. Is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the definite special symbol (big hit symbol and the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B are used in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Any of the lost symbols) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variation display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is determined in advance.

The variation pattern setting process of S9023 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are set using numerical data indicating a random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the fluctuation display result is a "big hit". It includes processing to determine one of them. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2".

By the special symbol normal processing of S9022 and the variation pattern setting process of S9023, the variation pattern including the variation display time of the confirmed special symbol, the special symbol, and the effect symbol, which is the variation display result of the special symbol, is determined. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing use the random value MR1'for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2'for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3'for determining the variation pattern. And the process of determining the variable display mode of the effect symbol.

The special symbol variation process of S9024 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change process, the process of setting the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop processing of S9025 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, and the confirmed special symbol that is the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derivated). It includes a process to set the settings. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is turned on. Then, when the jackpot flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The jackpot release preprocessing of S9026 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this big hit pre-opening process, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., the process of starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting to open the big winning opening is performed. include. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The processing during the jackpot opening of S9027 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door. ..

The jackpot release post-processing of S9028 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening of the big hit, the process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, and the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening have been reached. In some cases, it includes processing to make settings for sending the jackpot end specification command. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the maximum number of open winning openings, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the maximum number of opening large winning openings is reached, the special figure The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

The jackpot end processing of S9029 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end processing, the jackpot game state is terminated by the effect display device 905, the speakers 908L, 908R, the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b, the right frame LED909c, the board side LEDs 909d, 909e, the movable member 90321, and the like. Various settings for waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect is executed as the effect effect to be notified elapses, and for starting the probability variation control and the time reduction control in response to the end of the jackpot game state ( It includes processing to perform (set of probability change flag and time saving flag). When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

In the jackpot end process, the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is read out to specify whether the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot". .. Then, when it is determined that the specified jackpot type is not "non-probability variation jackpot", a setting (set of probability variation flag) for starting probability variation control is performed. In addition, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the setting for starting the time reduction control (the set of the time reduction flag and the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed during the time reduction control are supported in advance. A predetermined count initial value (“100” in this embodiment) is set in the time reduction counter).

Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 starts executing the main process. In the main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 2 ms) of the effect control is performed (S9051).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a movable member break-in process for executing a break-in operation for moving the movable member 90321 (S9051A). The moving member break-in process will be described later in FIG. 105. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms the operation of a plurality of types of movement patterns of the movable member 90321 in the effect such as the advance notice effect, and the position detection sensor 90333 is used to confirm the initial position of the movable member 90321 (the first in this embodiment). The movable member initialization process for detecting the position) and moving the movable member 90321 to the initial position is executed (S9051B).

After that, the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S9052). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on) in the main process, the effect control CPU 90120 clears the flag (S9053) and executes the following process.

The effect control CPU 90120 first analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: S9054). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 9011 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an error notification process, which is one of the processes for executing the error effect (S9054A). In the error notification process of step S9054A, for example, the error image display operation in the display area of the effect display device 905 and the error sound from the speakers 908L and 908R correspond to the error designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100. Error notification is performed by output operation, error light emission operation in LEDs 909a to 909e, and the like.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs the effect control process process (S9055). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the effect display device 905 is executed.

Next, an effect random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating an effect random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number is executed (S9056), and then the process proceeds to S9052.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an effect control process process (S9055) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a hold display notice effect determination process (S9071) that determines the display pattern of the hold storage display together with the presence / absence of the hold display notice effect (S9071), and then the effect display device 905. The hold display update process for updating the hold storage display in the first hold display area 905D and the second hold display area 905U to the display corresponding to the storage contents of the start winning command buffer is executed (S9072).

After that, the effect control CPU 90120 performs any of the processes S9073 to S9078 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S9073): It is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 90100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S9074).

Effect symbol variation start process (S9074): Control is performed so that the effect symbol variation is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S9075). In this embodiment, in the effect symbol variation start process, an effect execution setting process for performing LED control, which will be described later, is also executed.

Processing during effect symbol change (S9075): Controls the switching timing of each change state (fluctuation speed) constituting the change pattern, and monitors the end of the change time. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S9076).

Effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (S9076): Control to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol) based on the reception of the effect control command (symbol confirmation command) instructing to stop all symbols. Do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S9077) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S9073).

Big hit display process (S9077): After the end of the fluctuation time, the effect display device 905 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot game in-game process (S9078).

Process during jackpot game (S9078): Control during jackpot game. For example, when a designated command during the opening of the large winning opening or a designated command after opening the large winning opening is received, the display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 905 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (S9079).

Big hit end effect processing (S9079): The effect display device 905 performs display control to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S9073).

[Structure of production unit]
Next, the effect unit 90300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 100. 90A is a front view showing an effect unit, and FIG. 90B is a rear view. FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the effect unit is viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the effect unit is viewed from diagonally behind. 93 is a front view showing a state in which the movable portion is in the tilted position and FIG. 93 is a front view showing the state in which the movable portion is in the upright position. 94 is a rear view showing a pinion gear in FIG. 94 and a rack gear in FIG. 94. 95 is a schematic view showing a state in which the movable member is in the first position and FIG. 95B is a state in which the movable member is in the second position. 97A and 97B are schematic views showing a state in which the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, a state in which the rack gear is being moved in FIG. 97, and a state in which the rack gear is regulated in FIG. 97. FIG. 98 is an enlarged view of a main part showing the state of the gear until the regulated state is reached in (A) to (D). 99A and 99B are schematic views showing a regulated state in FIG. 99, a state in which the pinion gear is changed to a deregulated state by rotating the pinion gear in the first operating direction, and a drive initial state in FIG. 99C. 100A and 100B are schematic views showing a regulated state in FIG. 100, a state in which the pinion gear is changed to a deregulated state by rotating the pinion gear in the second operating direction, and a drive initial state in FIG. 100C.

As shown in FIGS. 90 to 93, the effect unit 90300 is provided between the game board 902 and the effect display device 905 provided on the back side of the game board 902, and the base portion 90301 fixed at a predetermined position. A movable portion 90302 rotatably provided with respect to the base portion 90301, an inclined position in which the movable portion 90302 is tilted sideways (see FIG. 93 (A)), and an upright position in which the movable portion 90302 is vertically upright (FIG. 93 B)) and a first effect motor 90303 that is rotated between the above.

A bearing hole 90310 is formed through the base portion 90301, and a guide groove 90311 having an arc shape centered on the bearing hole 90310 is formed around the bearing hole 90310. At the lower right position of the bearing hole 90310 on the back surface of the base portion 90301, a first effect motor 90303 for rotating the movable portion 90302 is fixedly installed on the back surface, and a drive that penetrates the base portion 90301 and protrudes to the front side. A turntable 90312 is fixed to the tip of a shaft (not shown).

A shaft member 90313 facing in the front-rear direction is projected from a predetermined position on the peripheral edge of the turntable 90312, and the lower end of the link member 90314 is rotatably supported by the shaft member 90313. Further, a detection piece 90315 is projected on the opposite side of the shaft member 90313 on the peripheral edge of the turntable 90312, and the detection piece 90315 is detected by the position detection sensor 90316 provided below the turntable 90312. The effect control CPU 90120 can identify that the movable portion 90302 is located at the tilted position.

The movable portion 90302 includes a rotating member 90320, a movable member 90321 provided on the front side of the rotating member 90320 so as to be slidable with respect to the rotating member 90320, and a movable member on the back side of the rotating member 90320. It has a rack gear 90322 that moves integrally with the 90321. The movable member 90321 is reciprocally movable between the first position on the rotation shaft 90325 side and the second position farther from the rotation shaft 90325 from the first position with respect to the rotation member 90320.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a movable effect of moving the movable member 90321 between the first position and the second position when the movable portion 90302 is in the upright position. ing. Further, at least a part of the movable member 90321 is retracted below the display screen of the effect display device 905 when it is in the first position, and at least a part is superimposed on the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 905 at the second position. (See FIG. 65).

The rotating member 90320 is composed of a substantially plate-shaped member extending in the left-right direction, and is inserted into the bearing hole 90310 from the rear side on the right side of the front surface to project the rotating shaft 90325 and the left side of the rotating shaft 90325. A first guide shaft 90326 inserted into the guide groove 90311 from the rear side and a second guide shaft 90327 protruding from the upper right of the rotating shaft 90325 and inserted into the guide groove 90311 from the rear side are projected. There is.

The upper end of the link member 90314 is rotatably supported at the tip of the second guide shaft 90327 that protrudes toward the front surface side of the base portion 90301 through the guide groove 90311. That is, the rotating disk 90312 and the rotating member 90320 are connected via the link member 90314. Further, a coil spring 90328 that constantly urges the rotating member 90320 toward the upright position side is provided on the outer circumference of the rotating shaft 90325.

On the left side of the first guide shaft 90326, a linear slide groove 90329 that guides the movable member 90321 in the left-right direction is extended in the left-right direction. A second effect motor 90330 for sliding the movable member 90321 is fixed above the slide groove 90329 on the front surface of the rotating member 90320, and a drive shaft that penetrates the base portion 90301 and protrudes to the rear side. A pinion gear 90331 that operates the rack gear 90322 is fixed to the tip of the 90330a. In this embodiment, a stepping motor is applied as the second effect motor 90330.

On the left back surface of the rotating member 90320, a hook 90332 for locking the left end of the tension spring 90323 for urging the rack gear 90322 is projected backward. Further, on the back surface on the right side, a position detection sensor 90333 for detecting the detection piece 90334 formed at the right end of the rack gear 90322 is provided, and the detection piece 90334 is detected by the position detection sensor 90333 to control the effect. The CPU 90120 can identify that the movable member 90321 is located at the first position.

The movable member 90321 has a disk-shaped light emitting portion 90321A and a mounting portion 90321B extending to the right from the light emitting portion 90321A. The light emitting unit 90321A is provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) (not shown) inside, and is capable of emitting light forward. Further, two bosses 90334a and 90334b are projected on the back surface of the mounting portion 90321B, and the bosses 90334a and 90334b are inserted into the slide groove 90329 and are screwed from the back side of the rack gear 90322 to the rack gear. By fastening the 90322, the movable member 90321 arranged on the front side of the rotating member 90320 and the rack gear 90322 arranged on the rear side of the rotating member 90320 are integrated.

The integrated movable member 90321 and the rack gear 90322 are guided by the two bosses 90334a and 90334b being inserted into the slide groove 90329 so as to be slidably movable in the left-right direction with respect to the rotating member 90320. Further, on the right side of the rack gear 90322, a hook 90335 whose left end is locked to the hook 90332 of the rotating member 90320 and whose right end is locked to the hook 90332 of the rotating member 90320 is projected backward. That is, one end of the tension spring 90323 is locked to the hook 90332 of the rotating member 90320, and the other end is locked to the hook 90335 of the rack gear 90322, so that the movable member 90321 is always directed to the second position side. Encourage.

In the effect unit 90300 configured as described above, the movable portion 90302 is located at the tilted position as shown in FIG. 93 (A) in the initial driving state. Then, the rotary disk 90312 is rotated clockwise by the first effect motor 90303, and the second guide shaft 90327 is pulled downward by the link member 90314, so that the front view is centered on the rotation shaft 90325. It rotates about 90 degrees clockwise and rotates to the upright position shown in FIG. 93 (B). Since the urging force of the coil spring 90328 acts when rotating from the tilted position to the standing position, the load applied to the first effect motor 90303 is reduced. Further, by reversely driving the first effect motor 90303, the motor 90303 rotates from the standing position to the tilting position.

Next, the detailed structure of the pinion gear 90331 and the rack gear 90322 will be described. As shown in FIG. 94 (A), the pinion gear 90331 is a rotary gear in which a plurality of drive teeth are projected from a part of the peripheral surface of the disk member. The drive teeth have a tooth thickness dimension L2 in a pitch circle having a radius of a plurality of drive teeth 90340A projecting in the rotation direction and a position from the drive shaft 90330a to the position where the teeth mesh with each other, which is larger than the tooth thickness dimension L1 of the drive teeth 90340A. It has a large driving tooth 90340B and a driving tooth 90340C in which the tooth thickness dimension L3 in the pitch circle is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L1 and L2 of the driving teeth 90340A and 340B (tooth thickness dimension L1 <L2 <L3). ).

Further, since the tooth thickness dimensions L1, L2, and L3 of the drive teeth 90340A, 90340B, and 90340C are different, the tip surface 90342A of the drive tooth 90340A, the tip surface 90342B of the drive tooth 90340B, and the tip surface 90342C of the drive tooth 90340C are obtained. The length dimension in the circumferential direction in each is the same as the relationship between the tooth thickness dimensions L1, L2, and L3. That is, the circumferential length dimension of the tip surface 90342B is longer than the circumferential length dimension of the tip surface 90342A, and the circumferential length dimension of the tip surface 90342C is the circumferential length dimension of the tip surfaces 90342A and 90342B. It is said to be longer than the length of.

In this embodiment, the tip surfaces 90342A and 90342B are flat surfaces, and the tip surfaces 90342C constituting the regulation portion described later are curved surfaces along an arc centered on the drive shaft 90330a.

The tooth groove dimension L4 between each drive tooth 90340A and the drive tooth 90340A and the tooth groove dimension L5 between the drive tooth 90340A and the drive tooth 90340B are the same (tooth groove dimension L4 = L5), and the drive tooth 90340A. The tooth groove dimension L6 between the drive tooth 90340C and the drive tooth 90340C is longer than the tooth groove dimensions L4 and L5 (L4, L5 <L6). These drive teeth 90340A, 90340B, 90340C are formed over about one-third of the peripheral surface, and the remaining two-thirds of the peripheral surface is a missing portion 90341 in which the drive teeth are missing in the circumferential direction. There is. That is, the pinion gear 90331 has a meshing portion having drive teeth and meshing with the rack gear 90322, and a non-meshing portion having no drive teeth and not meshing with the rack gear 90322 on the peripheral surface.

In this embodiment, the pinion gear 90331 is counterclockwise because the clockwise direction in FIG. 94 (A) is the first operating direction for moving the rack gear 90322 from the second position to the first position, that is, in the first direction. The rotation is the second operating direction that moves the rack gear 90322 from the first position to the second position, that is, in the second direction.

As shown in FIG. 94 (B), the rack gear 90322 is a gear in which a plurality of driven teeth are projected on a part of a side surface of a rod-shaped member. The driven teeth are a plurality of driven teeth 90350A projecting along the side surface on the pinion gear 90331 side, a driven tooth 90350B whose tooth thickness dimension L12 at a position where the driving teeth mesh is larger than the tooth thickness dimension L11 of the driven tooth 90350A, and teeth. The thick dimension L13 has a driven tooth 90350C which is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L11 and L12 of the driven teeth 90350A and 90350B (tooth thickness dimension L11 <L12 <L13). Further, the tip surface of each of the driven teeth 90350A, 90350B, 90350C is a flat surface.

The tooth groove dimension L14 between each driven tooth 90350A and the driven tooth 90350A and the tooth groove dimension L15 between the driven tooth 90350A and the driven tooth 90350C are the same (tooth groove dimension L14 = L15), and the driven tooth 90350A. The tooth groove dimension L16 between the tooth groove and the driven tooth 90350B is longer than the tooth groove dimensions L14 and L15 (L14, L15 <L16).

The tooth groove dimensions L14 and L15 of the rack gear 90322 are dimensions corresponding to the tooth thickness dimension L1 of the drive tooth 90340A, and the tooth groove dimension L16 is a dimension corresponding to the tooth thickness dimension L2 of the drive tooth 90340B. .. Further, the tooth groove dimensions L4 and L5 in the pinion gear 90331 are dimensions corresponding to the tooth thickness dimension L11 of the driven tooth 90350A, and the tooth groove dimension L6 is a dimension corresponding to the tooth thickness dimension L13 of the driven tooth 90350C. ..

These driven teeth 90350A, 90350B, 90350C are formed from the lower portion in the longitudinal direction of the side surface to substantially the center in the vertical direction, and the missing portion 90351 in which the driven tooth is missing in the longitudinal direction is formed from the center to the upper side. That is, the rack gear 90322 has a meshing portion having driven teeth and meshing with the pinion gear 90331 and a non-meshing portion having no driven teeth and not meshing with the pinion gear 90331 on the side surface.

In this embodiment, the rack gear 90322 moves between the upper second position and the lower first position in FIG. 94 (B). That is, the pinion gear 90331 moves from the second position to the first position by rotating in the first operating direction, that is, moves in the first direction, and the pinion gear 90331 rotates in the second operating direction from the first position to the second position. It is designed to move to a position, that is, in a second direction.

Next, the operating modes of the pinion gear 90331 and the rack gear 90322 will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 100. In this embodiment, when the movable portion 90302 is in the upright position, the movable member 90321 reciprocates between the first position and the second position. Therefore, in the following, the movable portion 90302 is in the upright position. The explanation will be given with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions of the time.

In this embodiment, an example in which the movable member 90321 reciprocates between the first position and the second position when the movable portion 90302 is in the upright position will be described, but the movable portion 90302 is in the tilted position. The movable member 90321 may reciprocate between the first position and the second position at times or during rotation.

As shown in FIGS. 95 (A) and 95 (B), the movable member 90321 (rack gear 90322) has a lower first position where the boss 90334b is located at the lower end of the slide groove 90329 with respect to the rotating member 90320. The boss 90334a can reciprocate in the vertical direction between the upper second position located at the upper end of the slide groove 90329 and the boss 90334a.

As shown in FIG. 95 (A), the movable member 90321 is subjected to an upward urging force by the tension spring 90323 at the first position, but the pinion gear 90331 and the rack gear 90322 have the drive teeth 90340C as described later. When the tip of the driven tooth 90350C comes into contact with the tip surface 90342C of the above, it changes to a regulated state (locked state) that restricts the upward movement of the movable member 90321 by the urging force of the tension spring 90323, for the second production. The movable member 90321 is held in the first position even when the motor 90330 is off. The details of the regulated state (locked state) will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 95 (B), when the restricted state is released, the movable member 90321 is moved upward by the urging force of the tension spring 90323 and then held in the second position by the tension spring 90323. That is, the urging force of the tension spring 90323 exceeds the load of the movable member 90321.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the pinion gear 90331 rotates in the first operating direction in a state where the drive tooth 90340B meshes with the corresponding driven tooth 90350B from above, as shown in FIG. 97 (B). As a result, the drive tooth 90340A and the corresponding driven tooth 90350A mesh with each other, and the rack gear 90322 moves in the first direction (downward direction) against the upward urging force of the tension spring 90323. Then, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), the tip of the driven tooth 90350C comes into contact with the tip surface 90342C of the driving tooth 90340C, and the rack gear 90322, that is, the movable member 90321 is held in the first position. Tooth.

Here, the details when changing from the regulation release state to the regulation state (locked state) will be described. As shown in FIG. 97A, when the movable member 90321 is in the second position, the pinion gear 90331 rotates in the first operating direction, so that the driving teeth 90340A and 90340B mesh with the driven teeth 90350A and 90350B. As a result, the rack gear 90322 moves in the first direction against the upward urging force of the tension spring 90323, and the movable member 90321 descends toward the first position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (A), the driving tooth 90340C is before the engagement between the driving tooth 90340A adjacent to the driving tooth 90340C and the driven tooth 90350A adjacent to the driven tooth 90350C among the plurality is released. And the driven tooth 90350C are meshed with each other, and the meshing between the driving tooth 90340A and the driven tooth 90350A is released. Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), after the drive tooth 90340C faces the missing portion 90351 of the rack gear 90322, the tooth tip of the drive tooth 90340C moves from the tooth root to the tooth tip of the tooth surface of the driven tooth 90350C. I will do it.

Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), when the tooth tip of the driving tooth 90340C is separated from the tooth surface of the driven tooth 90350C by the rotation of the pinion gear 90331, the engagement between the driving tooth 90340C and the driven tooth 90350C is released. That is, the driving tooth 90340C is an adjacent driving tooth adjacent to the missing portion 90341, and the driven tooth 90350C is an adjacent driven tooth adjacent to the missing portion 90351 (the driving tooth 90340C is the rear of the plurality of driven teeth in the first direction. (It is a drive tooth that meshes with the driven tooth 90350C at the end on the side), so that the transmission of the power that moves the rack gear 90322 in the first direction is interrupted by the meshing of the subsequent drive tooth and the driven tooth, so that the pinion gear 90331 rotates. When the tooth tip of the driving tooth 90340C is separated from the tooth surface of the driven tooth 90350C and the engagement between the driving tooth 90340C and the driving tooth 90350C is released, the rack gear 90322 tries to move in the second direction by the urging force of the tension spring 90323. To do.

Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), when the pinion gear 90331 further rotates, the tip surface 90342C of the drive tooth 90340C intersects the tooth tip line T passing through the tooth tips of the driven teeth 90350A, 90350B, 90350C of the rack gear 90322. To do. At this time, as described above, the transmission of the power for moving the rack gear 90322 in the first direction is interrupted due to the engagement between the subsequent driving teeth and the driven teeth, so that the rack gear 90322 is urged by the tension spring 90323. In order to move in two directions, the tip of the driven tooth 90350C comes into contact with the tip surface 90342C of the driving tooth 90340C so as to be pressed against it.

In this way, the contact point S of the driven tooth 90350C with respect to the driving tooth 90340C moves from the tooth surface of the driving tooth 90340C (see FIG. 98 (A)) to the tooth tip of the driving tooth 90340C (see FIG. 98 (B)). ), Moves to the tip surface 90342C of the drive tooth 90340C (see FIG. 98 (C)). That is, the drive tooth 90340C is transferred to the tip surface 90342C so as to slide from the tooth surface toward the tooth tip while being in sliding contact.

After that, when the tip of the driven tooth 90350C reaches a substantially central position in the circumferential direction on the tip surface 90342C, the second effect motor 90330 is turned off and the rotation of the pinion gear 90331 is stopped (see FIG. 98 (D)). .. In this state, the tip surface 90342C is inclined toward the rack gear 90322 side in the second direction so as to intersect the tooth tip line T, and the rack gear 90322 is directed upward by the urging force of the tension spring 90323. By being urged, the tooth tip of the driven tooth 90350C is pressed against the tip surface 90342C, and the rack gear 90322 is in a regulated state (locked state) in which the movement in the second direction is restricted. That is, the driving tooth 90340C and the driven tooth 90350C constitute a regulating means for restricting the movement of the rack gear 90322 in the second direction (upward direction).

Further, the pinion gear 90331 is a gear rotated by the second effect motor 90330, and the tip surface 90342C constituting the regulating portion is composed of a curved surface along an arc centered on the drive shaft 90330a of the pinion gear 90331. As shown in FIG. 98 (C), after the contact point S of the driven tooth 90350C with respect to the driving tooth 90340C moves from the tooth surface of the driving tooth 90340C to the tip surface 90342C, the pinion gear 90331 reaches the position shown in FIG. 98 (D). Since the contact point S between the driven tooth 90350C and the tip surface 90342C does not displace in the second direction of the rack gear 90322 even if the driven tooth 90350C rotates, the rack gear 90322 moves slightly according to the rotation of the pinion gear 90331, that is, the movable member 90321. Can be prevented from slightly rising to give the player a sense of discomfort.

For example, when the tip surface 90342C constituting the regulating portion is a flat surface, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), the contact point S of the driven tooth 90350C with respect to the driving tooth 90340C is from the tooth surface of the driving tooth 90340C to the tip surface 90342C. When the pinion gear 90331 rotates to the position shown in FIG. 98 (D) after the movement, the contact point S'between the driven tooth 90350C and the tip surface 90342C is displaced in the second direction of the rack gear 90322. Further, when the pinion gear 90331 is rotated in the first operating direction to release the regulation state, the urging force due to the tension spring 90323 increases as compared with the case where the tip surface 90342C is a curved surface, so that it is used for the second production. The load applied to the motor 90330 becomes large. Therefore, it is preferable that the tip surface 90342C is formed by a curved surface along an arc centered on the drive shaft 90330a of the pinion gear 90331.

In this embodiment, since the second effect motor 90330 is a stepping motor, the drive teeth 90340C are stopped at the regulated position shown in FIG. 98 (D) depending on the number of steps (rotation angle) from the reference position. The rotation of the pinion gear 90331 can be stopped. For example, a sensor or the like for detecting that the drive tooth 90340C is in the regulated position shown in FIG. 98 (D) is provided, and the pinion gear 90331 is provided based on the detection status from the sensor. The rotation may be stopped.

Further, the stop positions for stopping the rotation of the pinion gear 90331 when changing to the regulated state are set at a plurality of places within the range where the driven teeth 90350C abut on the tip surface 90342C, and stop at different places at predetermined times. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the local portion of the tip surface 90342C from being deformed due to wear due to repeated stopping. In this case, for example, the tip surface 90342C may be extended in the circumferential direction of the missing portion 90341.

Next, a method of releasing the regulation state will be described. First, in the regulated state shown in FIG. 99 (A), by rotating the pinion gear 90331 in the first operating direction, the driving tooth 90340C moves, the tip of the driven tooth 90350C separates from the tip surface 90342C, and the missing portion 90341 When the intersection of the tip surface 90342C and the tooth tip line T is released facing the rack gear 90322, the regulation of the driven tooth 90350C by the tip surface 90342C is released, and the regulation state is changed to the regulation release state.

As shown in FIG. 99 (B), when the regulation is released, the rack gear 90322 rises in the second direction due to the tensile force of the tension spring 90323, so that the movable member 90321 moves from the first position to the second position. Move at high speed. Further, in this embodiment, since the first position is the initial drive position, as shown in FIG. 99C, the pinion gear 90331 is rotated in the first operation direction even after the regulation is released. When the driving tooth 90340B reaches the position where it meshes with the driven tooth 90350B, the second effect motor 90330 is turned off and the rotation of the pinion gear 90331 is stopped.

Therefore, when the movable member 90321 is moved from the second position to the first position, the pinion gear 90331 is further rotated in the first operating direction, and the rack gear is engaged with the driving teeth 90340B and 90340A and the driven teeth 90350B and 90350A. The 90322 can be moved in the first direction. In this way, the movable member 90321 can be moved from the first position to the second position and can also be moved from the second position to the first position simply by rotating the pinion gear 90331 in the first operating direction. , The control load of the effect control CPU 90120 that controls the second effect motor 90330 can be reduced.

FIG. 100 shows another example of how to lift the regulated state. In the regulated state shown in FIG. 100 (A), by rotating the pinion gear 90331 in the second operating direction opposite to the first operating direction, the driving tooth 90340C moves and the tip of the driven tooth 90350C moves from the tip surface 90342C. Separated, the intersection of the tip surface 90342C and the tooth tip line T is released, but the driven tooth 90350C enters the tooth groove between the driving tooth 90340C and the driving tooth 90340A, and is driven as shown in FIG. 98 (A). Since the tooth surface of the tooth 90350C is in a meshed state in which it abuts on the tooth surface of the drive tooth 90340C, the movement of the rack gear 90322 by the tension spring 90323 in the second direction is restricted by the contact with the drive tooth 90340C.

Therefore, by further rotating the pinion gear 90331 in the second operating direction, the rack gear 90322 can be raised by the rotation of the pinion gear 90331. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, when the regulated state is released by rotating the pinion gear 90331 in the first operating direction in the regulated state, the movable member 90321 is moved from the first position to the first position at a predetermined speed by the urging force of the tension spring 90323. It moves to two positions, but as shown in FIG. 100, when the regulated state is released by rotating the pinion gear 90331 in the second operating direction in the regulated state, the movable member 90321 is moved from the first position to the second position at an arbitrary speed. Can be moved to a position.

Specifically, if the pinion gear 90331 is rotated at a low speed, the movable member 90321 can be raised at a low speed, and if the pinion gear 90331 is rotated at a high speed, the movable member 90321 can be raised at a high speed. Further, it can be raised in various modes such as stopping in the middle of raising or moving it up and down.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 as the embodiment, the pinion gear 90331 as the drive gear rotated (operated) by the second effect motor 90330 as the drive source and the pinion gear 90331 are meshed with each other. A rack gear 90322 as a driven gear is provided, and the rack gear 90322 is urged by a tension spring 90323 in a second direction opposite to the first direction in which the pinion gear 90331 moves (operates), and the pinion gear 90331 has driving teeth. It has a missing portion 90341 in which 90340A, 90340B, and 90340C are partially missing, and a tip surface 90342C as a regulating portion provided at the tip of a driving tooth 90340C as an adjacent driving tooth adjacent to the missing portion 90341. After the meshing between the 90340C and the driven tooth 90350C of the rack gear 90322 is released, the driven tooth 90350C abuts on the tip surface 90342C to restrict the movement of the rack gear 90322 in the second direction.

That is, when the engagement between the driving tooth 90340C and the driven tooth 90350C is released and the missing portion 90341 faces the rack gear 90322, the driven tooth 90350C of the rack gear 90322 urged in the second direction comes into contact with the tip surface 90342C. Movement in the second direction is restricted. In this way, the movement of the rack gear 90322 in the second direction can be regulated by using the tip surface 90342C provided on the drive teeth 90340C of the pinion gear 90331, so that the rack gear 90322 and the movable member 90321 can be moved in the first direction. The operation of the rack gear 90322 can be stopped with a simple structure of the drive gear and the driven gear without increasing the number of parts by separately providing a regulating means for regulating the above.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rack gear 90322, which is a driven gear, is urged in the second direction by the tension spring 90323, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and the driven gear is other than the spring member. It may be urged in the second direction by the urging means of. Further, for example, when the movable portion 90302 is provided upside down, the rack gear 90322 is always urged downward (second direction) by the load of the movable member 90321, so that the rack gear 90322 is urged in the second direction by its own weight. It also includes things that are done.

Further, the pinion gear 90331 is a gear rotated by the second effect motor 90330, and the rack gear 90322 has a first position (position shown in FIG. 95A) and a second position different from the first position (FIG. 95 (FIG. 95)). It can be reciprocated from the position shown in C), and the pinion gear 90331 rotates in the first operating direction that operates the rack gear 90322 in the first direction, so that the driving teeth 90340A, 90340B, 90340C and the driven tooth 90350A, After moving from the second position to the first position by meshing with 90350B and 90350C, the missing portion 90341 faces each other and the meshing between the driving teeth 90340A, 90340B and 90340C and the driven teeth 90350A, 90350B and 90350C is released. It is urged in the second direction by the tension spring 90323 and operates from the first position to the second position.

In this way, the rack gear 90322 can be reciprocated simply by rotating the pinion gear 90331 in the first operating direction, so that the control load of the second effect motor 90330 can be reduced.

Further, in the regulated state in which the movement of the rack gear 90322 in the second direction is restricted by the contact of the driven tooth 90350C with the tip surface 90342C, the pinion gear 90331 is moved to the first direction of the rack gear 90322 as shown in FIG. It can be released by operating in the first operating direction to be operated or in the second operating direction opposite to the first operating direction as shown in FIG. 100.

By doing so, if the restricted state is not released even if the pinion gear 90331 is rotated in one of the first operating direction and the second operating direction, it is released by operating in the other direction. Therefore, the rack gear 90322 It becomes easy to avoid that the driven tooth 90350C of the above bites the tip surface 90342C and cannot move the rack gear 90322.

Further, in the regulated state, the operating mode of the rack gear 90322 differs depending on whether the pinion gear 90331 is rotated in the first operating direction or the second operating direction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 99 (B), when the pinion gear 90331 is rotated in the first operating direction, the rack gear 90322 rises due to the urging force of the tension spring 90323, and as shown in FIG. 100 (B). When the pinion gear 90331 is rotated in the second operating direction, the rack gear 90322 rises in accordance with the rotation of the pinion gear 90331, so that the operating mode of the movable member 90321 integrated with the rack gear 90322 can be diversified.

Further, the tooth thickness dimension L3 of the drive tooth 90340C is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L1 and L2 of the other drive teeth 90340A and 90340B (for example, the tooth thickness dimension L1 <L2 <L3). By doing so, it is possible to prevent damage due to a load applied to the driving teeth 90340C when the driven teeth 90350A, 90350B, 90350C are not meshed with each other and the driven teeth 90340C are changed from the non-engaged state to the meshed state. Further, as the tooth thickness dimension L3 becomes wider, the tip surface 90342C constituting the regulating portion also becomes wider, so that the driven tooth 90350C can be easily regulated.

The pinion gear 90331 is a gear rotated by the second production motor 90330, and the tip surface 90342C constituting the regulating portion is composed of a curved surface along an arc centered on the drive shaft 90330a of the pinion gear 90331. Even if the pinion gear 90331 rotates while the driven tooth 90350C is in contact with the tip surface 90342C, the contact point S between the driven tooth 90350C and the tip surface 90342C does not displace in the moving direction of the rack gear 90322, so that the pinion gear 90331 It is possible to prevent the rack gear 90322 from slightly moving in response to the rotation of the rack gear 90322.

Further, the tooth thickness dimension L13 of the driven tooth 90350C that meshes with the driving tooth 90340C in the driven tooth is made longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L11 and L12 of the other driven teeth 90350B and 90350C (tooth thickness dimension L11 <L12). <L13) By doing so, it is possible to prevent damage due to a load applied to the driven tooth 90350C when the driven tooth 90340C is not meshed with the driven tooth 90340C and is changed from the non-engaged state to the meshed state. Further, it is possible to prevent damage due to a load applied by a force urged in the second direction in a state of being in contact with the regulation portion.

[Cable of production unit]
With reference to FIGS. 90, 95 and 96, the effect unit 90300 is provided with a cable 90361 that supplies power to the LED of the light emitting unit 90321A of the movable member 90321.

96 (A) and 96 (B) schematically represent the sides of FIGS. 95 (A) and 95 (B), respectively. In FIG. 96, the distance between the movable member 90321 and the rotating member 90320 and the distance between the rotating member 90320 and the rack gear 90322 are drawn wide for easy viewing, but they are actually shown in the figure. Is narrower than.

As shown in FIG. 1, the cable 90361 passes from the connector 90363 provided on the relay board from the effect control board 9012 of the base portion 90301 to the movable member 90321 via the holding member 90364 of the cable 90361 provided on the rotating member 90320. It is connected to the connector 90362 provided on the LED substrate on which the LED of the light emitting unit 90321A is mounted.

As shown in FIG. 96 (A), when the movable member 90321 is in the standby state in the first position, the portion between the holding member 90364 of the cable 90361 and the connector 90362 is in a considerably bent state. ..

As shown in FIG. 96B, when the movable member 90321 is in the state of being advanced to the second position, the portion between the holding member 90364 of the cable 90361 and the connector 90362 is in a state of being stretched and there is not much margin. Become.

Therefore, a force is applied to the movable member 90321 by the cable 90361 in the direction from the second position to the first position. When the cable 90361 is stretched, the covering material of the cable 90361 is resin. Therefore, when the cable 90361 is cold, the force applied to the movable member 90321 by the cable 90361 is larger than when the cable 90361 is not cold. Become stronger.

The tension spring 90323 is pulled by the second effect motor 90330 until the movable member 90321 is in the second position. Therefore, the second effect motor 90330 can generate a force stronger than the tensile force (urging force) in the state where the tension spring 90323 is most pulled.

As described above, the urging force of the tension spring 90323 exceeds the load of the movable member 90321. However, when the urging force by the tension spring 90323 is increased, it is necessary to increase the output of the second effect motor 90330 that pulls the tension spring 90323. Since the manufacturing cost increases when a motor having a large output is used, it is preferable that the output of the motor is the minimum necessary.

As the tension spring 90323 in this embodiment, not only the load of the movable member 90321 but also the force of pulling the movable member 90321 in the extended state of the cable 90361 and the cost of the second production motor 90330 are taken into consideration. A spring that can obtain the minimum necessary urging force is used.

Therefore, in the unlikely event that a poor quality cable 90361 is used and becomes hard at a low temperature, it is conceivable that the urging force of the tension spring 90323 will be insufficient when the movable member 90321 is first moved. Normally, cables that are harder than expected at low temperatures are not used.

However, in this embodiment, in order to prevent a situation in which the urging force of the tension spring 90323 is insufficient, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 that has been left at night and cooled is started, the figure described later will be shown. As shown in step S90515 of 105, a break-in operation is performed to break in the movement of the movable member 90321. By performing the break-in operation of moving the movable member 90321 from the first position to the second position, the cable 90361 is bent and stretched, so that the cable 90361 can be flexibly break-in. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the urging force of the tension spring 90323 is insufficient.

Further, in this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated, the cable 90361 is a heat-generating object (effect display device 905, first effect motor 90303, and second effect motor 90330). Since it is provided in the vicinity, the cable 90361 is kept highly flexible by heat.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing a movable member break-in process (S9051A) in the effect control main process. With reference to FIG. 105, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the first effect motor 90303 so as to move the movable portion 90302 to the upright position (S90511).

Then, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not an abnormality has been detected in the movement of the movable portion 90302 (S90512). When it is determined that an abnormality is detected (YES90 in S90512), the effect control CPU 90120 notifies the abnormality of the movable portion 90302 (S90513). The notification is performed by the display on the effect display device 905 and the audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the operation of stopping the notification is performed by the clerk of the game store (S90514). When it is determined that the movement abnormality of the movable portion 90302 is not detected (NO in S90512), or when it is determined that the operation to stop the notification is performed (YES in S90514), the effect control CPU 90120 is movable. The second effect motor 90330 is controlled so as to move the member 90321 to the first position (S90515). Here, the movable member 90321 may be reciprocated between the second position and the first position.

In this way, since the movable member is moved by the second effect motor 90330, which has a stronger force than the tension spring 90323, the movable member 90321 can be moved more reliably. As a result, the movements of the cable 90361 and the movable member 90321 can be accustomed by changing the cable 90361 from the bent state to the extended state.

Then, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not an abnormality has been detected in the movement of the movable member 90321 (S90516). When it is determined that an abnormality has been detected (YES in S90516), the effect control CPU 90120 notifies the abnormality of the movable member 90321 (S90517). The notification is performed by the display on the effect display device 905 and the audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the operation of stopping the notification is performed by the clerk of the game store (S90518). When it is determined that the movement abnormality of the movable member 90321 is not detected (NO in S90516), or when it is determined that the operation to stop the notification is performed (YES in S90518), the effect control CPU 90120 executes. Returns the process to be performed to the caller of this process.

Next, the control of LEDs 909a to 909e will be described. The LEDs 909a to 909e are capable of emitting light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a plurality of types of light emission patterns corresponding to the effect to be executed. The effect control CPU 90120 can control the LEDs 909a to 909e to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a predetermined light emission pattern when control data is set in the control data area provided in the RAM 90122. ing.

Further, the control data set in the control data area is data for performing light emission (lighting, blinking, etc.) control on each light emitter control board 9016C to 9016F. Specifically, an identifier for uniquely identifying them is assigned to each light emission pattern, and the control data described above is data indicating this identifier. When the control data is set in the control data area, the effect control CPU 90120 reads the control data and outputs the control data to the light emitter control boards 9016C to 9016F. In each light emitter control board 9016C to 9016F, LEDs 909a to 909e are lit by controlling by each light emitter driver 90411a, 90411b, 90413a to 90413c or the like so as to emit light in a light emission pattern identified by an identifier indicated by control data. / Turns off. On the other hand, when the control data area is NULL, it is determined that the control data is not set in the control data area. Further, the timing at which the control data is set is a timing before the timing at which the control is started by the control data or the timing at which the control is started by the control data. In the following description, when the effect of any of the LEDs 909a to 909e is described, it may be simply expressed as an LED effect.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of a control data area. The control data area includes at least one control data area and another control data area. Specifically, in the case of this embodiment, five control data areas of layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5 are included. Then, each layer corresponds to a sound effect that outputs sound. For example, the "error" effect is an effect in which a screen showing an error is also displayed on the effect display device 905, and corresponds to an effect of outputting an error sound. It should be noted that the sound effect includes an effect that does not produce sound (silence effect), and there may be an LED effect corresponding to this silence effect. The LED effect corresponding to this silent effect is an effect of emitting light instead of turning off the LED.

In addition, priority is set for layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5, and layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5 (layer 1 is the most) in ascending order of priority. The priority is low, and layer 5 has the highest priority). Here, "priority is set" specifically means that when the effect control CPU 90120 controls the LEDs 909a to 909e, the order is layer 5, layer 4, layer 3, layer 2, and layer 1. Control that determines whether or not control data is set and outputs the control data set in the control data area determined to be set to each light emitter control board 9016C to 9016F. In order to perform the above, it is shown that priority is given in the order of layer 5, layer 4, layer 3, layer 2, and layer 1. The example of realizing the priority setting is not limited to this, and for example, a value indicating the priority may be assigned to each layer. In this case, the effect control CPU 90120 first refers to the values assigned to all the layers in which the control data is set, and among them (even when the control data is set in a plurality of layers). The control data set in the layer to which the highest priority value (for example, the maximum value) is assigned is output to each illuminant control board 9016C to 9016F.

In this way, since the priority is set for the layers, only one LED effect is performed in the LED effect, and a plurality of LED effects are not performed at the same time, but the sound effects corresponding to the LED effects are simultaneously performed. May be done. For example, when the control data of the BGM effect is set in the control data area of the layer 1, and the control data of another effect is not set in the control data area of the layer having a higher priority than the layer 1, the BGM BGM is performed as a sound production along with the LED production of the production. In this state, for example, if the control data of another effect is set in the control data area of the layer 3, in the LED effect, the LED effect of the BGM effect ends and the LED effect of the other effect is performed. In the sound production, the BGM and the sound production of other productions are performed at the same time.

When the control data is set in one of the control data areas, the effect control CPU 90120 emits (lights) LEDs 909a to 909e in a light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the control data is set. , Blinking, etc.). Specifically, for example, when the game state is a low base state, as shown in FIG. 106, when control data is set in layer 1, it corresponds to the BGM effect (normal variation, reach variation) of layer 1. The LEDs 909a to 909e are controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) according to the light emission pattern. Further, when the control data is set in the layer 2, the LEDs 909a to 909e are controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the notice B effect of the layer 2. Further, when the control data is set in the layer 3, the LEDs 909a to 909e are controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the notice A effect of the layer 3. When control data is set in the layer 4, the LEDs 909a to 909e are controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the final notification effect of the layer 4. Further, when the control data is set in the layer 5, the LEDs 909a to 909e are controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the error effect of the layer 5.

Further, in the high base state of the game, as shown in FIG. 106, when the control data is set in the layer 1, the LED 909a has a light emitting pattern corresponding to the BGM effect (normal variation) of the layer 1. ~ 909e is controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.). Further, when the control data is set in the layer 2, the LEDs 909a to 909e are controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the BGM effect (reach fluctuation) of the layer 2. Further, when the control data is set in the layer 3, the LEDs 909a to 909e are controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the notice effect (all) of the layer 3. When control data is set in the layer 4, the LEDs 909a to 909e are controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the final notification effect of the layer 4. Further, when the control data is set in the layer 5, the LEDs 909a to 909e are controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the error effect of the layer 5.

Further, when the game state is the big hit game state, as shown in FIG. 106, when the control data is set in the layer 1, the LED 909a to the LED 909a have a light emitting pattern corresponding to the BGM effect (big hit) of the layer 1. Control so that the 909e emits light (lights, blinks, etc.). Further, when control data is set in layer 2, it is controlled so that LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the advance notice effect (holding sequence, promotion) of layer 2. To do. Further, when the control data is set in the layer 3, the LEDs 909a to 909e are controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the large winning opening winning effect of the layer 3. When control data is set in the layer 4, the LEDs 909a to 909e are controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the probability variation winning effect of the layer 4. Further, when the control data is set in the layer 5, the LEDs 909a to 909e are controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the error effect of the layer 5.

When the control data is set in both control data areas, the effect control CPU 90120 emits (lights up, lights up, LEDs 909a to 909e) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area set with a high priority. It can be controlled to blink (blinking, etc.). Specifically, for example, when control data is set in both the control data areas of layer 2 and layer 3, the light emission pattern corresponding to layer 3 which is the control data area in which the priority is set is set high. The LEDs 909a to 909e can be controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.). Further, when the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 2, the layer 3, and the layer 4, the LED 909a has a light emitting pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the priority is set high. ~ 909e can be controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.).

Further, in this embodiment, a light emission pattern when control data is set in one control data area during the first game state and one control during a second game state different from the first game state. The light emission pattern when control data is set in the data area is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106, the control data area is provided for each game state (low base state, high base state, big hit game state). Then, for example, in the low base state, for example, the light emission pattern when the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 2 (light emission pattern corresponding to the notice A effect) and the high base state different from the low base state, for example. The light emission pattern (light emission pattern corresponding to the BGM effect) when the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 2 is different.

In principle, the setting for the control data area shown in FIG. 106 is reset every time one game is completed. "One game" indicates a game that starts from the start of the variable display and ends by the stop display of the variable display when the game state is the low base state or the high base state, and the game state is the jackpot game state. In the case, the game from the start to the end of the jackpot game state is shown.

Therefore, when the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state, the control data is set at the start timing of the variable display or the start timing of the effect during the variable display, and is determined for the stop display of the variable display or each effect. It is reset when the time has passed. Even if the timing for which the time specified for each effect has elapsed does not arrive, the variable display is reset when the display is stopped.

Further, when the game state is the big hit game state, the control data is set by the special figure hit waiting process of S90173 or the big hit in-game process of S90176, and when the big hit ends, when the round ends, or each It is reset when the time set for each production elapses.

Exceptionally, the setting of the control data of the LED effect by the LEDs 909a to 909e corresponding to the effect performed over a plurality of games (for example, the effect including the lookahead notice effect and the effect including multiple big hits) is reset at the end of the game. Will not be done. It should be noted that, as for the LED effect performed over a plurality of games, a combination of one game different depending on the above-mentioned game state is regarded as one game again, and even if the effect over a plurality of the one game is also an LED effect. Good.

Next, each effect shown in FIG. 106 will be described. As described above, the LED control in this embodiment corresponds to the sound effect in each effect shown in FIG. 106. In the following explanation, LEDs that emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) are described in each effect, but there are cases where only the described LEDs emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) and other LEDs also emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.). (Blinking, etc.) may occur.

In FIG. 106, the error effect corresponds to an error designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100, an error image display operation in the display area of the effect display device 905, and an error audio output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R. , This is an effect in which an error notification or the like is performed by an error light emitting operation or the like in the LEDs 909a to 909e. The error effect in this embodiment is an effect in which all of the LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.). Then, as shown in FIG. 106, the effect control CPU 90120 does not depend on the gaming state when the control data is set in the control data area (layer 5) where the highest priority is set. It is controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emission pattern indicating an error effect.

The definite notification effect is an effect in which LEDs arranged in a V shape blink or a V-shaped pattern is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 905, and a big hit performed during the change of the effect symbol is performed. It is a production (notice) that shows confirmation.

For the probability variation prize production, for example, a V probability variation type gaming machine in which the state after the big hit is determined depending on whether or not the probability variation winning opening (or a predetermined area provided in the probability variation winning opening; hereinafter, the probability variation winning opening, etc.) is won. In, it is a production performed when a prize is won in a probabilistic winning opening or the like. When a prize is won in a probabilistic winning opening or the like, the state after the big hit is generally set as a probabilistic state, and when a prize is not won in the probabilistic winning opening or the like, the state after the big hit is generally set as a non-probable changing state. In this case, an effect is provided in which the player aims to win a prize in the probability change winning opening or the like, and this effect is referred to as a probability change challenge effect in this embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine 901 shown in FIG. 1 is not provided with a probability variation winning opening, but in order to explain an example of LED control, the probability variation winning effect in this embodiment is, for example, in the special variable winning ball device 907. The predetermined area is provided in the above-mentioned area, and when a prize is won in the predetermined area, an LED (for example, an LED provided in the special variable winning ball device 907) emits light (lights, blinks, etc.). Further, in this embodiment, the probability change challenge effect is an effect in which an LED (for example, an LED provided in the special variable winning ball device 907) emits light (lights, blinks, etc.). In addition, this probability change winning opening is also called a probability change attacker.

In this embodiment, the notice A effect and the notice B effect are effects in the display area of the effect display device 905 while the LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.). The character A is an effect displayed in the display area of the effect display device 905, and the notice B effect is an effect in which the character B is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 905. Further, "notice (all)" indicates the notice A production and the notice B production. In addition, among the "notices (holding reams, promotion)", the notices (holding reams) have a hold that becomes a big hit when there is a hold that becomes a big hit in the hold held before or during the big hit. It is a production that announces that during the big hit. The notice (promotion) is the above-mentioned big hit medium promotion effect, or, for example, the round number promotion effect in which the number of big hit rounds increases from 8 rounds to 16 rounds. This "notice (holding ream, promotion)" is an effect in the display area of the effect display device 905 while the LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.).

The grand prize opening winning effect is an effect performed when a prize is won in the special variable winning ball device 907. The large winning opening winning effect in this embodiment is an effect in which the LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lights, blinks, etc.) each time the special variable winning ball device 907 is won. In this grand prize opening prize production, a production that is particularly conspicuous at the time of so-called over prize may be performed.

In each of the effects described above, not only the LED effect but also the effects other than the LED effect (for example, the sound effect by sound, the display effect by the effect display device 905, or the effect combining the sound effect and the display effect, etc.) Although it may be performed, in the following description, unless otherwise specified, the "effect" shall indicate only the LED effect in the effect. When indicating the entire effect including the LED effect and the effect other than the LED, it is expressed as "effect (all)". Further, when indicating an effect other than LED, it is expressed as "effect (other than LED)". For example, "BGM effect" indicates only LED effect, and "BGM effect (all)" indicates the entire effect including sound effect and other effects other than LED, and "BGM effect (other than LED)". "" Indicates an effect other than LED, such as a sound effect.

Further, in each of the above-described effects, the priority of the BGM effect is set to be the lowest in any of the gaming states due to the nature of the BGM. In the low base state, the notice A effect has a higher priority than the notice B effect, because the notice A effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the notice B effect. Further, in the low base state, the definite notification effect has a higher priority than the notice A effect, because the definite notification effect is an effect indicating that the jackpot is confirmed.

In the high base state, the BGM (reach fluctuation) production has a higher priority than the BGM (normal) production, because the BGM (reach fluctuation) production has a higher expectation of a big hit than the BGM (normal) production. Is. In the high base state, the notice (all) production has a higher priority than the BGM (reach fluctuation) production, because the notice (all) production has a higher expectation of a big hit than the BGM (reach fluctuation) production. Is. In the high base state, the definite notification effect has a higher priority than the notice (all) effect, because the definite notification effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the notice (all) effect.

In the jackpot game state, the notice (holding ream, promotion) production has a higher priority than the BGM (big hit) production, but this is because the notice (holding ream, promotion) is more important for the player than the BGM (big hit) production. Because there is. In the jackpot game state, the big prize opening winning production has a higher priority than the advance notice (holding ream, promotion) production, but this is because the big winning opening winning production is performed every time a prize is won, and the notice (holding ream, promotion) production is performed. The promotion) production (other than LED) is generally performed in the display area of the production display device 905 for a relatively longer period of time than the large prize opening prize production, but the large prize opening prize production is announced (holding ream, promotion) production. If the priority is higher, any effect can be notified to the player, but if the notice (holding ream, promotion) effect is given a higher priority than the big prize opening prize effect, the notice (notice) This is because only the production (holding ream, promotion) is performed, and the large prize opening prize production is not performed. In addition, as described above, in the large prize opening prize production, the production at the time of over winning is generally performed, and the over winning is a benefit that the player cannot normally obtain, so the importance of the production is important. It is also because it is expensive.

The setting of the control data of each effect is reset when the time specified for each effect elapses, except for the BGM effect and the control data of the effect performed across the plurality of games. In addition, as a production (all) in a general pachinko gaming machine, there is a production (all) that branches into two or more productions (all). When branching to a plurality of such effects (all), the control data of the corresponding effect is reset when branching.

The control data set in each of the control data areas described above is an example, and is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 106, and is appropriately set according to the effect of the pachinko gaming machine or the like.

107 and 108 are time charts showing LED control examples. First, in the time chart shown in FIG. 107, there is a start prize at time T1 in a state where error notification is not executed, the game state is a low base state, variable display is not performed, and there is no hold. , The time chart is shown when the effect symbol starts to fluctuate, the notice B effect occurs at time T2, and the notice A effect occurs at time T3. The BGM effect (other than LED) is performed from time T1 to the end, the notice B effect (other than LED) is performed from time T2 to the end, and the notice A effect (other than LED) is performed from time T3 to the end. It has been. The controlled target LEDs are, for example, LEDs 909a to 909e.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 107, the vertical axis shows the LED control corresponding to each layer, and the horizontal axis shows the time.

Further, in FIG. 107, the control data set in the control data area of the layer 5 is used as the control data for the error effect, and the control data set in the control data area of the layer 4 is used for the control of the definite notification effect. The control data set in the control data area of the layer 3 is used as the control data of the notice A effect, and the control data set in the control data area of the layer 2 is used as the control data of the notice B effect. , The control data set in the control data area of layer 1 is used as the control data for the BGM effect.

The LEDs 909a to 909e emit light in color A (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the error effect, emit light in color B (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the final notification effect, and emit light in color C (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the notice A effect. However, in the notice B effect, the color D emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.), and in the BGM effect, the color E emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.).

Further, in the time chart shown in FIG. 107, a display mode showing the emission colors of the LEDs 909a to 909e and the like is shown. In this display mode, "turn off" indicates that the LEDs 909a to 909e are extinguished, and the alphabet indicates that they are emitting light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the corresponding color. "Erase" and alphabetical expressions are also used in other time charts described below.

Further, in the time chart shown in FIG. 107, it is also shown whether or not the effect (other than the LED) corresponding to each layer is executed. For example, since the BGM effect (all) is an effect that executes the sound effect together with the LED effect, the sound effect can be executed even when the priority is low and the LED effect is not executed.

Further, in the case of FIG. 107, each effect (other than LED) can be executed at the same time. For example, the notice A effect (other than the LED) and the notice B effect (other than the LED) can be executed at the same time.

Based on the above, the time chart of FIG. 107 will be described. First, since the control data is not set in each control data area, the LEDs 909a to 909e are turned off as shown in the LED display mode.

There is a start prize at time T1, and the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 1, so that the BGM LED control is turned on. As a result, the LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in color E as shown in the LED display mode.

Next, at time T2, the advance notice BLED control is turned on and the BGMLED control is turned off by setting the control data in the control data area of the layer 2 having a higher priority than the layer 1. As a result, the LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in color D as shown in the LED display mode.

Next, at time T3, the advance notice ALED control is turned on and the notice BLED control is turned off by setting the control data in the control data area of the layer 3 having a higher priority than the layer 2. As a result, the LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in color C as shown in the LED display mode. According to the control shown in FIG. 107, the notice B effect, which is important for the player, is prioritized over the BGM effect, and the notice A effect, which is important for the player, is prioritized over the notice B effect. Since the visual effect can be appropriately given, the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, in the time chart shown in FIG. 108, in a state where the game state is a low base state, the variable display is not performed, and there is no hold, there is a start prize at time T1, and the effect symbol starts to fluctuate. It is the same as in FIG. 107 that the notice B effect is generated at the time T2 and the notice A effect is further generated at the time T3, but the time chart when the error notification is being executed is shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 108, since the error notification is being executed, the error effect (other than the LED) is being executed, and the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 5, so that the LED display mode is displayed. As shown in, LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in color A. Since the control data for error notification set in the layer 5 has the highest priority, the time T1, the time T2, and the time T3 are set to generate the BGM effect, the advance notice B effect, and the advance notice A effect. However, the error LED control is continued and the execution of the error effect (other than the LED) is also continued.

As shown in FIG. 108, the BGM effect (other than the LED), the notice B effect (other than the LED), and the notice A effect (other than the LED) can be executed at the same time even while the error notification is being executed.

Further, in FIGS. 107 and 108, an example of LED control when the gaming state is in the low base state is shown as an example, but the case where the gaming state is in the high base state or the jackpot gaming state is also shown in FIG. LED control is performed according to the priority of the layers shown in 106.

FIGS. 109 and 110 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect execution setting process executed in the effect symbol variation start process (step S9074). In this flowchart, the control data area shown in FIG. 106 will be used as an example. Further, in the explanation of this flowchart, "setting the control data of the effect Y in the control data area of the layer N and setting the LED control data of the effect control pattern according to the start timing of the effect Y" is simply "effect". The control data of Y is set in the layer N. " For example, the description "setting the control data of the advance notice effect to layer 2" states that "the control data of the advance notice effect is set in the control data area of layer 2 and the effect control pattern is set according to the start timing of the advance notice effect. It means "to set LED control data".

In the effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 109, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the error LED is emitting light (for example, whether or not the LEDs 909a to 909e are emitting light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in color A). (Step S90901). The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the error notification process in step S9054A has been executed.

When the error LED is emitting light (step S99001; Yes), the error effect has the highest priority, so that the effect control CPU 90120 proceeds to step S90915 without setting control data in the lower layer.

When the error LED is emitting light (step S90901; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the gaming state is a high base state (step S90902). When the gaming state is in the high base state (step S90902; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a reach fluctuation pattern (step S90903). When the variation pattern is the reach variation pattern (step S90903; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the control data for the BGM (reach variation) effect on the layer 2 (step S90904), and proceeds to step S90906. When the variation pattern is not the reach variation pattern (step S90903; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the control data for the BGM (normal variation) effect on the layer 1 (step S90905), and proceeds to step S90906.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a notice determination process for determining whether to execute the advance notice effect (step S90906). Here, it is determined by using a lottery process based on a fluctuation pattern or a random number. For example, when the fluctuation pattern indicates super reach α and β, it is determined by using a lottery process based on random numbers. The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the advance notice effect from the decision result of the advance notice determination process (step S90907). If the advance notice effect is not executed (step S90907; No), the process proceeds to step S90909. When executing the advance notice effect (step S90907; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the control data of the advance notice effect on the layer 3 (step S90908).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a definite notification determination process for determining whether to execute the definite notification effect (step S90909). Here, it is determined by using a lottery process based on a fluctuation pattern or a random number. For example, when the fluctuation pattern indicates a big hit, it is determined by using a lottery process based on a random number. The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the definite notification effect from the decision result of the definite notification determination process (step S90910). If the final notification effect is not executed (step S90910; No), the process proceeds to step S90912. When executing the final notification effect (step S90910; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the control data for the final notification effect on the layer 4 (step S90911). Next, the effect control CPU 90120 selects each effect control pattern determined in each determination process (step S90912). Then, the effect execution setting process is terminated.

Returning to the process of step S90902, if the gaming state is in the low base state (step S90902; No), the process proceeds to step S90913 in FIG. 110. The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a reach fluctuation pattern (step S90913). When the variation pattern is the reach variation pattern (step S90913; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the control data for the BGM (reach variation) effect on the layer 1 (step S90914), and proceeds to step S90916. When the variation pattern is not the reach variation pattern (step S90913; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the control data for the BGM (normal variation) effect on the layer 1 (step S90915), and proceeds to step S90916.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs the advance notice B determination process for determining whether to execute the advance notice B effect (step S90916). Here, it is determined by using a lottery process based on a fluctuation pattern or a random number. For example, when the fluctuation pattern indicates super reach α and β, it is determined by using a lottery process based on random numbers. The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the advance notice B effect based on the decision result of the advance notice B determination process (step S90917). If the notice B effect is not executed (step S90917; No), the process proceeds to step S90919. When executing the notice B effect (step S90917; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the control data for the notice B effect on the layer 2 (step S90918).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs the advance notice A determination process for determining whether to execute the advance notice A effect (step S90919). Here, it is determined by using a lottery process based on a fluctuation pattern or a random number. For example, when the fluctuation pattern indicates super reach α and β, it is determined by using a lottery process based on random numbers. The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the advance notice A effect based on the decision result of the advance notice A determination process (step S90920). If the notice A effect is not executed (step S90920; No), the process proceeds to step S90922. When executing the notice A effect (step S90920; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the control data for the notice A effect on the layer 3 (step S90921).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a definite notification determination process for determining whether to execute the definite notification effect (step S90922). Here, it is determined by using a lottery process based on a fluctuation pattern or a random number. For example, when the fluctuation pattern indicates a big hit, it is determined by using a lottery process based on a random number. The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the definite notification effect from the decision result of the definite notification determination process (step S90923). If the final notification effect is not executed (step S90923; No), the process proceeds to step S90912. When executing the final notification effect (step S90923; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the control data for the final notification effect on the layer 4 (step S90924).

In addition to the control of the LEDs 909a to 909e in the effect symbol variation start processing described above, the LEDs 909a to 909e are also controlled in the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect symbol variation process, the jackpot game process, and the like. For example, in the variation pattern command reception waiting process, when a customer waiting demo designation command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 immediately displays LEDs 909a to 909e in the LED mode in the customer waiting demo effect. .. On the other hand, when the BGM effect repeats a certain pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the LEDs 909a to 909e in the LED mode in the customer waiting demo effect several seconds after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command. In this way, even when the same customer waiting demo designation command is received, the control content differs depending on the situation.

Further, in the effect symbol change processing, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the LEDs 909a to 909e based on the start timing set in the effect symbol change start process, and whether the time determined for each effect elapses. When the variable display ends, the setting of the control data for the effect is reset. Further, in the effect symbol changing processing, the effect control CPU 90120 may control the LEDs 909a to 909e according to the operation of the player. As an operation example of the player, for example, there is an operation of pressing the trigger button of the stick controller 9031A. In response to such a pressing operation, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the LEDs 909a to 909e in the effect symbol changing process. Further, in the processing during the big hit game, the effect control CPU 90120 sets each control data shown in FIG. 106 in the control data area to control the LEDs 909a to 909e, and the time set for each effect elapses. Then, the setting of the control data of the effect is reset. Further, even in the process during the big hit game, the LEDs 909a to 909e may be controlled according to the operation of the player, so that the effect control CPU 90120 controls the LEDs 909a to 909e according to the pressing operation.

As described above, in this embodiment, the data setting area having a plurality of layers (layers 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 106 in this example) in which priorities are set (in this example, for control shown in FIG. 106). Data area). In addition, light emission data for controlling light emission of at least the light emitting bodies (LEDs 909a to 909e in this example) of the electric components can be set in each layer of the data setting area. Then, the control means (in this example, the effect control CPU 90120) can control the light emission of the light emitting body based on the light emission data, and the light emission data is set in a plurality of layers of the data setting area. In addition, the light emission control of the light emitting body is performed based on the light emission data set in the layer having a high priority. Therefore, it is possible to control the light emission of the illuminant by easily switching the priority order by switching the layers.

Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of light emission patterns (for example, BGM effect, advance notice effect, final notification effect, large winning opening winning effect, probability variation winning effect, error effect, etc.) corresponding to the effect to be executed (for example, BGM effect, advance notice effect, final notification effect, large prize opening effect, error effect, etc.) A light emitting device capable of emitting light by a color pattern, a blinking pattern, etc. (for example, LEDs 909a to 909e, etc.) and a control means capable of controlling the light emitting device (for example, a production control CPU 90120, etc.) are provided, and the control means controls. When the data for control is set in the data area for control, the light emitting device can be controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern, and the control data area is one control data area (for example, the layer of FIG. 106). 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5 control data area, etc.) and other control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5 control data area) Of these, at least one control data area (such as a control data area different from one control data area) is included, and one of the control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5 for control) is included. When control data is set in any of the control data areas of the data areas, a light emission pattern (for example, BGM effect, advance notice effect) corresponding to the control data area in which the control data is set is set. , A fixed notification effect, a large winning opening winning effect, a probability variation winning effect, a light emitting pattern corresponding to an error effect, etc.) to control the light emitting device to emit light, and both control data areas (for example, layer 1 and layer 2). When control data is set in two control data areas of the control data areas of layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5, the priority (for example, layer 1 in ascending order of priority) is set. , Layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5, etc.) can be controlled to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the light emitting device is set high, and during the first gaming state (for example, In one control data area (for example, the control data area of layer 2 in the low base state of FIG. 106) in the low base state of FIG. 106), control data (for example, layer 2 of the low base state of FIG. 106) During the second game state (for example, the high base state of FIG. 106), which is different from the first game state, and the light emission pattern when the notice B effect control data set in the control data area is set. Control data (for example, BG set in the control data area of layer 2 in the high base state of FIG. 106) in one control data area. It is different from the light emission pattern when the control data of the M effect) is set. Therefore, the lamp effect can be performed in the order of priority according to the game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of light emission patterns (for example, BGM effect, advance notice effect, final notification effect, large winning opening winning effect, probability variation winning effect, error effect, etc.) corresponding to the effect to be executed (for example, BGM effect, advance notice effect, final notification effect, large prize opening effect, error effect, etc.) A light emitting device capable of emitting light by a color pattern, a blinking pattern, etc. (for example, LEDs 909a to 909e, etc.) and a control means capable of controlling the light emitting device (for example, a production control CPU 90120, etc.) are provided, and the control means controls. When the data for control is set in the data area for control, the light emitting device can be controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern, and the control data area is one control data area (for example, the layer of FIG. 106). 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5 control data area, etc.) and other control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5 control data area) Of these, at least one control data area (such as a control data area different from one control data area) is included, and one of the control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5 for control) is included. When control data is set in any of the control data areas of the data areas, a light emission pattern (for example, BGM effect, advance notice effect) corresponding to the control data area in which the control data is set is set. , A fixed notification effect, a large winning opening winning effect, a probability variation winning effect, a light emitting pattern corresponding to an error effect, etc.) to control the light emitting device to emit light, and both control data areas (for example, layer 1 and layer 2). When control data is set in two control data areas of the control data areas of layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5, the priority (for example, layer 1 in ascending order of priority) is set. , Layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5, etc.) can be controlled to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the control data area is set high, and priority is given to the control data area. First data area (for example, control data area of layer 1), second data area (for example, control data area of layer 2), third data area (for example, control of layer 3) in ascending order of rank. A data area, etc.) is provided, and as control data set in the second data area, control data for controlling the light emitting device to emit light (for example, an LED provided in the special variable winning ball device 907) is provided. There are control data that controls to emit light, etc.) and extinguishing control data that controls to turn off the light emitting device. Therefore, when control data (for example, control data for BGM effect) is set in the first data area, the turn-off control data is set in the second data area, and the turn-off control data is set. At this time, control data (for example, control data for a large winning opening winning effect) can be set in the third data area. Therefore, it is possible to make the light emission pattern having a high priority stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The effect description shown in FIGS. 107 to 110 is an example, and the effect shown in this embodiment may be applied to a game state other than the gaming states shown in FIGS. 107 to 110. Specifically, for example, the gaming state shown in FIG. 107 is a low base state, but it may be applied to the jackpot gaming state.

Further, although the effect in the control of the LEDs 909a to 909e described above is a sound effect, the effect is not limited to the sound effect, and may be an effect executed by the effect display device 905, an effect of operating an accessory, or the like. Further, although the number of layers is 5, the number of layers may be 2 or more. Further, the setting data area is provided for each of the low base state, the high base state, and the big hit game state, but is not limited to this, and is provided for each of various states such as the low accuracy high base state and the high accuracy high base state. You may do so.

As the control data set in the control data area described above, the control data output to the lamp control board 9014 is taken as an example, but the address of the data indicating the light emission pattern or the 1-bit data indicating on / off etc. It may be.

When an address of data indicating a light emission pattern is set in the control data area, the effect control CPU 90120 refers to the address set in the control data area and lamps the control data stored in the address. It is output to the control board 9014, and when the control data area is NULL, it is determined that the control data is not set.

When 1-bit data indicating on / off is set in the control data area, the effect control CPU 90120 corresponds to the control data area when "1" indicating on is set in the control data area. The control data indicating the light emission pattern of the effect to be produced is output to the lamp control board 9014, and when “0” indicating off is set in the control data area, it is determined that the control data is not set. Therefore, when "0" is set, the control data indicating the light emission pattern of the effect corresponding to the control data area is not output to the lamp control board 9014, so that the lamp 9 does not emit light in the light emission pattern. It becomes.

Further, as the light emitting pattern of the lamp, the embodiment based on the difference in color has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a blinking pattern or the like having different light emitting intervals may be used. Further, specific examples of the colors A, B, C, D, and E include blue, yellow, green, red, gold, and rainbow, but they may emit light in a plurality of colors.

Further, in this embodiment, the control means sets the control data in the control data area (for example, the control data area of layer 5 of FIG. 106) in which the highest priority is set. Controls to emit light in a light emission pattern indicating an error regardless of the game state. Therefore, the error can be appropriately notified.

Further, in this embodiment, the first control data (for example, the control data of the notice A effect of FIG. 106) that causes the light emitting device to emit light in the first light emission pattern when set in the control data area There is second control data that causes the light emitting device to emit light in the second light emission pattern when it is set in the control data area, and in one gaming state (for example, the low base state of FIG. 106), the first 1 The control data (for example, the control data of the notice A effect set in the layer 3 of FIG. 106) is the second control data (for example, the control data of the notice B effect set in the layer 2 of FIG. 106). In a game state (for example, the high base state of FIG. 106 (B)) that is set in the control data area having a higher priority than that of one game state and is different from one game state, the first control data (for example, FIG. 106 (for example) The notice A effect control data set in layer 2 of B) has a higher priority than the second control data (for example, the notice B effect control data set in layer 3 of FIG. 106 (B)). Is set in the low control data area. Therefore, the lamp effect can be performed in the order of priority according to the game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example of moving part drive mechanism]
Next, a modified example of the movable part drive mechanism will be described. 11A to 111 are explanatory views showing a situation in which (A) to (D) are changed to a regulated state by a regulating means as a modification 1 of the movable portion driving mechanism. 112 (A) to 112 (D) are explanatory views showing a situation in which the movable portion drive mechanism is changed to the regulated state by the regulating means as the second modification. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing a situation in which (A) to (D) are changed to a regulated state by a regulating means as a modification 3 of the movable portion driving mechanism. FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram showing (A) a regulating portion as a modified example 4 of the movable portion driving mechanism, and (B) a regulating portion as a modified example 5 of the movable portion driving mechanism.

In the above embodiment, the pinion gear 90331 is applied as an example of the drive gear, and the rack gear 90322 is applied as an example of the driven gear. However, the movable part drive mechanism is not limited to this, and the drive gear and the driven gear are not limited to this. The type of can be changed in various ways.

For example, as in the first modification shown in FIG. 111, both the drive gear G1 and the driven gear G2 are set as rotary gears, and as shown in FIGS. 111 (A) to 111 (D), the drive gear G1 is moved in the first operating direction. By rotating, the driven tooth 90410 is brought into contact with the tip surface 90402 of the driving tooth 90400 adjacent to the missing portion 90401 among the plurality of driving teeth, and the movement of the driven gear G2 in the second direction is restricted. can do.

In this way, the rotary gear may be applied as the driven gear. Further, in the above embodiment, the tooth thickness dimension L13 of the driven tooth 90350C meshing with the driving tooth 90340C as the adjacent driving tooth is made longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L11 and L12 of the other driven teeth 90350B and 90350C. However, the movable part drive mechanism is not limited to this, and the tooth thickness dimension L13 of the driven tooth 90410 that meshes with the drive tooth 90400 as the adjacent drive tooth is larger than the tooth thickness dimensions L11 and 12 of the other driven teeth. Does not have to be long.

Further, as in the modified example 2 shown in FIG. 112, the drive gear G3 is a rack gear, the driven gear G4 is a rotary gear, and as shown in FIGS. 112 (A) to 112 (D), the drive gear G3 is moved in the first operating direction. By moving, the driven tooth 90410 comes into contact with the tip surface 90402 of the driving tooth 90400 adjacent to the missing portion 90401 among the plurality of driving teeth, and the driven gear G4 is restricted from moving in the second direction. be able to. In this way, the rack gear may be applied as the drive gear.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the tooth thickness dimension L3 of the drive tooth 90340C as the adjacent drive tooth having the tip surface 90342C as the regulating portion is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L1 and L2 of the other drive teeth 90340A and 90340B. However, the movable part drive mechanism is not limited to this, and the tooth thickness dimension L3 of the drive tooth 90340C is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L1 and L2 of the other drive teeth 90340A and 90340B. It does not have to be.

Specifically, as in the modified example 3 shown in FIG. 113, the drive gear G5 is a rotary gear, the driven gear G6 is a rack gear, and as shown in FIGS. 113 (A) to 113 (D), the drive gear G5 is the first. By moving in the operating direction, the driven tooth 90410 comes into contact with the tip surface 90402 of the driving tooth 90400 adjacent to the missing portion 90401 among the plurality of driving teeth, and the movement of the driven gear G6 in the second direction is restricted. It can be in a regulated state. As described above, the circumferential length dimension of the tip surface 90402 of the drive tooth 90400 as the adjacent drive tooth does not necessarily have to be longer than the circumferential length dimension of the tip surface of the other drive teeth. , As shown in FIG. 113 (D), if the tip surface 90402 intersects the tooth tip line T, the length dimension in the circumferential direction of the tip surface of the other driving teeth is substantially the same or shorter. May be good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the tip surface 90342C as the regulating portion is a curved surface along an arc centered on the drive shaft 90330a, but the movable portion driving mechanism is not limited to this, for example. , A flat surface, a spherical surface, a concave surface, or the like. Further, as shown in the modified example 4 of FIG. 114 (A), the driven tooth 90350C is formed by forming a locking recess 90420 or the like in which the driven tooth 90350C can be locked in a part of the tip surface or the entire tip surface. Even if it slides on the tip surface 90342C, the tip of the driven tooth 90350C is locked in the locking recess 90420, which makes it easier to bite. Therefore, the driven tooth 90350C slides on the tip surface 90342C as a regulating portion and is in a regulated state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to change.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the tip surface 90342C of the drive tooth 90340C adjacent to the missing portion 90341 is applied as an example of the regulation portion, but the movable portion drive mechanism is not limited to this, and the regulation portion is not limited to this. Is not limited to the one composed of the tip surface of the drive tooth, and as shown in the modified example 5 of FIG. 114 (B), the tip surface 90342C of the drive tooth 90340C and the missing portion from the tip surface 90342C. It may be a regulation surface composed of an extension surface 90430 extending to the 90341 side. That is, the regulating portion is not only formed by only the tip surface of the drive tooth, but is also composed of a portion that does not function as the drive tooth, such as an extension surface extending from the tip surface to the missing portion side. Good.

Further, the length dimension of the regulation surface including the tip surface 90342C and the extension surface 90430 constituting the regulation portion in the operating direction is not limited to that described in the above-described embodiment or modification, and is, for example, extension. A regulatory surface such as the installation surface 90430 may extend in the longitudinal direction of the missing portion 90341.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 4, the drive gear has a missing portion in which the drive tooth is missing on the rear side in the first operating direction of the adjacent drive tooth, but the missing portion is the drive tooth. Is not present, for example, a gear in which drive teeth are formed only in the arc of the fan-shaped gear, a rack gear in which adjacent drive teeth are formed at the rear end in the first operating direction, and the like are also missing parts. Will have.

Further, the driven gear also has a missing portion in which the driven tooth is missing on the rear side in the first direction. For example, a gear in which the driven tooth is formed only in the arc of the fan-shaped gear, or an adjacent driving tooth. A rack gear or the like in which the driven tooth meshing with the tooth is formed at the rear end portion in the first direction also has a missing portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rack gear and the pinion gear are applied as the types of the drive gear and the driven gear, but the movable part drive mechanism is not limited to this, and the spur gear, the bevel gear, the helical gear, etc. May be applied.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pinion gear 90331 fixed to the drive shaft 90330a of the second production motor 90330 is used as the drive gear, and the rack gear 90322 integrated with the movable member 90321 is used as the driven gear. The partial drive mechanism is not limited to this, and two gears that mesh with each other among a plurality of gears driven by the drive source may be a drive gear and a driven gear. For example, a gear that directly or indirectly meshes with the pinion gear 90331 may be a drive gear, and a gear that meshes with the drive gear may be a driven gear. Further, the movable member 90321 may not be directly provided on the rack gear 90322 which is a driven gear. For example, the movable member 90321 may be provided as a part of a power transmission mechanism for transmitting the power of the rack gear 90322.

Further, in the above embodiment, a drive gear and a driven gear are applied as a drive mechanism for moving the movable member 90321 between the first position and the second position with respect to the rotating member 90320. The drive gear and the driven gear of this embodiment may be applied as a drive mechanism for driving the movable portion 90302 between the tilted position and the standing position, for example, without limitation, or other It may be applied as a drive mechanism of the movable effect unit. Further, not only the one applied to the drive mechanism for driving the movable part for production, but also the drive mechanism for opening and closing the door for the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 907, etc., is movable for games. It may be applied as a drive mechanism of the unit.

[Example of production using movable members]
Next, an production example using the movable member 90321 will be described. FIG. 115 is a display screen view of the effect display device 905 when the battle reach effect is executed. FIG. 116 is a display screen view of the effect display device 905 when the story reach effect is executed.

The battle reach effect and the story reach effect are executed by the effect control CPU 90120. Of the reach effects, the battle reach effect and the story reach effect are multiple types of special reach effects (super) in which the percentage selected when the jackpot display result is obtained is higher than the normal reach effect called normal reach. It is a specific super reach production included in the reach production). Further, in these super reach productions, the jackpot expectation is set to, for example, the relationship of battle reach production <story reach production. The jackpot expectation between the battle reach production and the story reach production may be in the opposite relationship.

Each of the battle reach effect and the story reach effect is an effect in which the effect display by the image display of the effect display device 905 and the effect operation of the movable member 90321 are combined.

The battle reach effect shown in FIG. 115 will be described. In the variable display of the effect symbol, the variable display of the effect symbol is started all at once in each of the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", for example, "left" and "right". In accordance with a predetermined stop order such as "," and "medium", the variable display of the effect symbols is sequentially stopped in the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905R, and 905C, and finally the effect symbols are stopped in all the effect symbol display areas. Then, when the display result is derived and displayed, the variable display ends.

After the variable display of the effect symbols is started all at once, when the same symbol is stopped at the stage where the effect symbol display areas 905L and 905R of "left" and "right" are stopped as shown in FIG. 115 (A), the reach is reached. It becomes a state. The variable display up to the timing of reaching the reach state is executed in the normal variable display effect mode, which is not different between the normal reach and the super reach. The normal reach and the super reach are different in the production mode after the reach state is reached.

When the battle reach effect is executed as the reach effect, the effect symbols in the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are reduced as shown in FIG. 115 (B). The message image 9053, which is displayed in a small pattern display format and is moved and displayed in the upper right corner of the screen and has the characters "Battle Reach", is displayed in the center of the screen. As a result, it is notified that the battle reach effect is executed.

In the battle reach production, as shown in FIGS. 115 (C) to (E), a video in which a friendly character 9061 (player's ally side) and an enemy character 9062 (player's enemy side) battle (battle). A battle production that displays an image (a production that includes the output of the sound effect during the battle and the music sound during the battle) is executed.

In the battle reach effect, when the variable display result becomes a big hit display result, a victory effect image is displayed in which the ally character 9061 wins as shown in FIG. 115 (E), and further, in FIGS. 115 (D) and (E). As shown, an image in which the particle effect image 9071 is superimposed and displayed is displayed on the victory effect image, and the movable member 90321 operates in the upright position to execute the victory effect that appears in front of the display area of the effect display device 905. Will be done.

On the other hand, in the battle reach effect, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the defeat effect is performed to display an image in which the ally character 9061 is defeated, and the particle effect image 9071 as shown in FIGS. 115 (D) and (E) is performed. And the effect using the movable member 90321 is not executed.

Specifically, in the battle production, after the display that the ally character 9061 and the enemy character 9062 appear as shown in FIG. 115 (C) is displayed, the ally character 9061 and the enemy character are displayed as shown in FIG. 115 (D). A moving image of a battle with 9062 is displayed. For example, FIG. 115 (D) shows a scene in which a friendly character 9061 attacks an enemy character 9062. As shown in FIG. 115 (D), in the battle production, in the scene where the ally character 9061 attacks (the scene suggesting victory), the particle effect image as the production effect display is in the lower center area of the screen of the production display device 905. A particle effect effect is produced in which 9071 appears and is superimposed on the victory effect display. When the ally character 9061 wins, as shown in FIG. 115 (E), a victory effect is executed in which an image that can identify that the ally character 9061 defeats the enemy character 9062 and the ally character 9061 has won is displayed. Will be done. In the victory effect, as shown in FIG. 115 (E), when the movable member 90321 moves to the upright position, the movable body motion effect that appears in the central region of the display area of the effect display device 905 is generated. Will be done. Then, the movable member 90321 that appears is made to emit light.

As shown in FIG. 115 (E), when the movable member 90321 appears and moves to the upright position due to the movement effect of the movable body, the number of appearances of the particle effect image 9071 to be superimposed and displayed increases around the movable member 90321. A moving image showing a display mode in which the display range of the particle effect image 9071 is expanded is displayed. The moving image is an effect executed by using the particle effect image 9071 in order to enhance the effect based on the operation of the movable member 90321, and is called an operation effect effect. By such an operation effect effect, an effect related to the operation mode of the movable member 90321 and the display mode of the particle effect image 9071 is executed. By executing such an effect, it is possible to produce an effect in which the movement of the movable body and the effect display of the display means are linked.

Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), the jackpot display result (same symbol stopped) is derived and displayed in the effect symbol displayed in the small symbol format, and the message image 9055 showing the characters "Congratulations" is displayed. , It is displayed in the center of the screen as a reach result effect, which is an effect indicating the result of the reach state. As a result, it is notified that the player has won the battle reach production (it became a big hit). After that, as shown in FIG. 115 (G), the effect symbol in which the jackpot display result was displayed in the small symbol format is returned to the original size and the original position as shown in FIG. 116 (A) and displayed. A stop symbol effect is performed in which the message image 9074 with the characters "big hit" is displayed below the effect symbol.

On the other hand, in the battle reach effect, when the variable display result becomes an out-of-order display result, the above-mentioned defeat effect is executed, and the out-of-order display result is derived and displayed in the effect symbol displayed in the small symbol format, and the effect symbol is displayed. It will be displayed after returning to the original size and original position.

Next, the story reach effect shown in FIG. 116 will be described. After the variable display of the effect symbols is started all at once, as shown in FIG. 116 (A), the effect symbol display areas 905L and 905R of "left" and "right" are stopped to reach the reach state, and then the reach effect is produced. When the story reach effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 116 (B), the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are reduced. The message image 9054A, which is displayed in a small pattern display format and is moved and displayed in the upper right corner of the screen and has the characters "first half of the story", is displayed in the center of the screen. As a result, it is notified that the story reach effect is executed.

The story reach effect is an effect in which a moving image (story moving image) having a story like a specific story is displayed. In this example, the story reach production is composed of two parts, the first half and the second half. In the story reach production, there are cases where the production is not completed and the production ends in the middle and the display result is derived and displayed, and when the story continues to the end and the production is completed and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed. There is.

When the variable display result is an out-of-order display result, the effect that the story reach effect ends in the first half is executed, and when the variable display result becomes a big hit display result, the story reach effect continues from the first half to the second half and ends. The production that continues until is may be executed.

Further, the story reach effect may be set so that the effect is selected so that the effect is higher when the effect is executed to the end than when the effect is completed in the first half. .. Further, the story reach production may be composed of one part which is not divided into the first half part and the second half part.

After the message image 9054A is displayed, a moving image developed according to the story corresponding to the "first half of the story" is displayed. When the "first half of the story" ends and the "second half of the story" is subsequently executed, a message image 9054B showing the characters "second half of the story" is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 116 (C). To. As a result, it is notified that the story reach effect is continuously executed. In the story reach effect, images that notify the story reach effect, such as the message images 9054A and 9054B, may not be displayed.

After the message image 9054B is displayed, a moving image developed according to the story corresponding to the "second half of the story" is displayed. In the story reach production, when the variable display result becomes a big hit display result, the flame effect image 9073 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 9072 as shown in FIG. 116 (D) as an image display that can identify that the story is completed. The image to be displayed is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 116 (E), the movable member 90321 operates in the upright position, and the story completion effect that appears in front of the display area of the effect display device 905 is executed.

On the other hand, in the story reach effect, when the variable display result is an out-of-order display result, a story incomplete effect that can identify that the story is not completed is performed, and a black image 9072 as shown in FIGS. 116 (D) and (E) is performed. , The flame effect image 9073 and the effect using the movable member 90321 are not executed.

Specifically, in the story completion effect, as shown in FIG. 116 (D), the entire display area of the effect display device 905 is changed to a black black image 9072, and the area at the lower center of the screen of the effect display device 905 is used. The flame effect image 9073 as the effect effect display is made to appear, and the effect is superimposed on the black image 9072. Further, in the story completion effect, as shown in FIG. 116 (E), the movable body motion effect appears in the central region of the display area of the effect display device 905 by moving the movable member 90321 to the upright position. Will be done. Then, the movable member 90321 that appears is made to emit light.

As shown in FIG. 116 (E), when the movable member 90321 appears and moves to the upright position due to the movement effect of the movable body, the flame of the flame effect image 9073 to be superimposed and displayed becomes large and flames around the movable member 90321. A moving image showing a display mode in which the display range of the effect image 9073 is expanded is displayed. The moving image is an effect executed by using the flame effect image 9073 in order to enhance the effect based on the operation of the movable member 90321, and is called an operation effect effect as in the case of FIG. 115. By such an operation effect effect, an effect related to the operation mode of the movable member 90321 and the display mode of the flame effect image 9073 is executed. By executing such an effect, it is possible to produce an effect in which the movement of the movable body and the effect display of the display means are linked.

Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (F), the jackpot display result (same symbol stopped) is derived and displayed in the effect symbol displayed in the small symbol format, and the message image 9055 showing the characters "Congratulations" is displayed. , It is displayed in the center of the screen as a reach result effect, which is an effect indicating the result of the reach state. As a result, it is notified that the story reach production has been completed. After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (G), the effect symbol in which the jackpot display result was displayed in the small symbol format is returned to the original size and the original position as shown in FIG. 116 (A) and displayed. A stop symbol effect is performed in which the message image 9074 with the characters "big hit" is displayed below the effect symbol.

In the story reach effect, the effect image is displayed in the same manner as the battle reach effect, but unlike the battle reach effect, the entire display area of the effect display device 905 is set as a black image, and the effect image is superimposed and displayed on the black image. As a result, the effect image can be displayed with even greater emphasis, and an image display having a higher effect than the battle reach effect can be executed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the valuableness (premier feeling) of the story reach production, which is set with a higher expectation for a big hit than the battle reach production.

On the other hand, in the story reach effect, when the variable display result becomes a misaligned display result, the above-mentioned story incomplete effect is executed, and the misaligned display result is derived and displayed in the effect symbol displayed in the small symbol format, and the effect symbol is derived and displayed. Will be displayed after returning to the original size and original position.

The movable member 90321 may be configured such that the disk-shaped portion can be rotated by a driving means such as a motor that is driven and controlled by the effect control CPU 90120. When the disk-shaped portion of the movable member 90321 is configured to be rotatable-controllable, the movable member 90321 operates in the upright position as shown in FIGS. 115 (E) or 116 (E) to display the effect. You may control the rotation of the disk-shaped portion when it appears or when it appears in front of the display area of the device 905. In that case, the effect display device 905 produces an image that operates an effect image such as the particle effect image 9071 of FIG. 115 (E) and the flame effect image 9073 of FIG. 116 (E) in accordance with the rotation operation of the movable member 90321. You may execute the effect control to be displayed in. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the effect obtained by using the movable member 90321 and the effect image.

Further, the movable member 90321 is not limited to a rotational operation, and a part or all of its constituent members are configured to perform a deforming operation such as opening / closing or contracting by a driving means such as a solenoid driven and controlled by the effect control CPU 90120. In a specific effect scene, the movable member may be displayed on the effect display device 905 in accordance with the deformation operation of the movable member located in front of the display area of the effect display device 905. You may execute the effect control to display the image which operates the effect image.

Next, a control example of the effect effect and the movable body effect in a specific super reach effect such as the battle reach effect and the story reach effect will be described using a timing chart.

FIG. 117 is a timing chart showing a control example of an effect effect and a movable body effect in a specific super reach effect. FIG. 117 (A) shows a control example of the effect effect and the movable body effect in the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 115. FIG. 117 (B) shows a control example of the effect effect and the movable body effect in the story reach effect as shown in FIG. 116.

First, with reference to FIG. 117 (A), a control example of the effect effect and the movable body effect in the battle reach effect executed by the effect control CPU 90120 will be described. When the battle reach effect is executed, the effect symbol is displayed in the normal variable display mode as shown in FIG. 115 (A) between the start of the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) and the occurrence of the reach state. The variation display of is executed in the effect display device 905.

In the effect display device 905, when a reach state occurs, a message image 9053 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 115 (B) and 115 (C), and a moving image such as a battle effect corresponding to the battle reach effect is displayed. Will be done. The timing at which the image display of the battle effect changes to the image display of the victory effect as shown in FIGS. 115 (D) and 115 (E) in the effect display device 905 is the turning point of the first change of the image related to the battle reach effect. It is the time when the video cut breaks). At the timing (first video change turning point) that is the turning point of the first video change related to such a battle reach production, the particle effect image is displayed on the battle production image as shown in FIGS. 115 (D) and 115 (E). The particle effect effect of displaying the image on which the 9071 is superimposed and displayed on the effect display device 905 and the movable body operation effect of operating the movable member 90321 are executed in a coordinated manner.

In the effect display device 905, the timing at which the movable member 90321 moves to the standing position and changes from the image display of the victory effect to the image display of the reach result effect as shown in FIGS. 115 (E) and 115 (F) is the battle reach. This is the time when it will be the turning point of the second change of the image related to the production (the break of the image cut). At the timing (second video change turning point) that is the turning point of the second video change related to such a battle reach effect, the particle effect image 9071 is superimposed on the winning effect image as shown in FIG. 115 (E). An operation effect effect such as an image to be displayed is executed in the effect display device 905.

Then, when the motion effect effect and the movable body motion effect are completed, the reach result is notified by executing the image display of the reach result effect as shown in FIG. 115 (F) on the effect display device 905. After that, when the reach result effect is completed, the effect display device 905 executes the stop symbol effect as shown in FIG. 115 (G), so that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is fixed and the variable display is displayed. finish.

As described above, in the battle reach effect, the effect effect display such that the particle effect image 9071 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 9072 is executed at the timing of the change of the image related to the reach effect. Further, in the battle reach effect, an effect in which the movable body effect such as the movable member 90321 and the effect effect display are linked is executed at the timing of the change of the image related to the reach effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117 (B), a control example of the effect effect and the movable body effect in the story reach effect executed by the effect control CPU 90120 will be described. When the story reach effect is executed, the effect symbol is displayed in the normal variable display mode as shown in FIG. 116 (A) between the start of the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) and the occurrence of the reach state. The variable display of is executed in the effect display device 905.

In the effect display device 905, when a reach state occurs, message images 9054A and 54B are displayed as shown in FIGS. 116 (B) and 116 (C), and a moving image such as a story moving image corresponding to the story reach effect is displayed. The image is displayed. The timing at which the image display of the story effect changes to the image display of the story complete effect as shown in FIGS. 116 (D) and 116 (E) in the effect display device 905 is the turning point of the first change of the image related to the story reach effect. It is the time when (the break of the image cut). At the timing (first video change turning point) that is the turning point of the first video change related to such story reach production, the flame effect image is displayed on the black image 9072 as shown in FIGS. 116 (D) and (E). The flame effect effect of displaying the image on which the 9073 is superimposed and displayed on the effect display device 905 and the movable body operation effect of operating the movable member 90321 are executed in a coordinated manner.

In the effect display device 905, as shown in FIGS. 116 (E) and 116 (F), the timing at which the movable member 90321 moves to the upright position and the image display of the story completion effect changes to the image display of the reach result effect is the story. This is the time when it will be the turning point (break of the video cut) of the second change of the video related to the reach production. At the timing (second video change turning point) that is the second turning point of the image change related to the story reach effect, the flame effect image 9073 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 9072 as shown in FIG. 116 (E). An operation effect effect such as an image to be produced is executed in the effect display device 905.

Then, when the motion effect effect and the movable body motion effect are completed, the reach result is notified by executing the image display of the reach result effect as shown in FIG. 116 (F) on the effect display device 905. After that, when the reach result effect is completed, the effect display device 905 executes the stop symbol effect as shown in FIG. 116 (G), so that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is fixed and the variable display is displayed. finish.

As described above, in the story reach effect, the effect effect display such that the flame effect image 9073 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 9072 is executed at the timing of the change of the image related to the reach effect. Further, in the story reach effect, an effect in which the movable body effect such as the movable member 90321 and the effect effect display are linked is executed at the timing of the change of the image related to the reach effect.

Specifically, in the battle reach effect shown in FIGS. 115 and 117 (A) and the story reach effect shown in FIGS. 116 and 117 (B), the following processes are executed in the effect control CPU 90120. It is realized by.

As a variation pattern command (variation pattern specification command), when a variation pattern command in which a variation pattern of the type of super reach that executes a battle reach effect is specified among the variation pattern commands of the super reach is received by the effect control board 9012. In the effect symbol variation start process (S9074), the effect control CPU 90120 controls the image display of the effect display device 905 and the operation control of the movable member 90321 as shown in FIGS. 115 and 117 (A). The effect control data (process data, etc.) for performing the above is selected from a plurality of types of effect control data stored in advance and set (stored) in the RAM 90122. Since the battle reach effect is partially different depending on whether the variable display result is the jackpot display result or the off display result, when the variable pattern command or the display result specification command that can specify the variable display result is received. In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 recognizes the variation display result by analyzing the received command content, and selects the effect control data according to the variation display result. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the variable display of the effect symbol, and in the effect symbol change process (S9075), the movable body effect process and the effect are performed by using the effect control data set to execute the battle reach effect. By executing the effect display process or the like, the image display control of the effect display device 905 and the operation control of the movable member 90321 are performed, and the battle reach effect as shown in FIGS. 115 and 117 (A) is executed.

As a variation pattern command (variation pattern specification command), when a variation pattern command in which a variation pattern of the type of super reach that executes the story reach effect is specified among the variation pattern commands of the super reach is received by the effect control board 9012. In the effect symbol variation start process (S9074), the effect control CPU 90120 controls the image display of the effect display device 905 and the operation control of the movable member 90321 as shown in FIGS. 116 and 117 (B). The effect control data (process data, etc.) for performing the above is selected from a plurality of types of effect control data stored in advance and set (stored) in the RAM 90122. Since the story reach effect is partially different depending on whether the variable display result is the jackpot display result or the off display result, when the variable pattern command or the display result specification command that can specify the variable display result is received. In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 recognizes the variation display result by analyzing the received command content, and selects the effect control data according to the variation display result. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the variable display of the effect symbol, and in the effect symbol change process (S9075), the movable body effect process and the effect are performed by using the effect control data set to execute the story reach effect. By executing the effect display process or the like, the image display control of the effect display device 905 and the operation control of the movable member 90321 are performed, and the story reach effect as shown in FIGS. 116 and 117 (B) is executed.

When the movable body effect can be executed in a plurality of types of effect displays, such as the battle reach effect shown in FIGS. 115 and 117 (A) and the story reach effect shown in FIGS. 116 and 117 (B). , An effect display in which the effect image is superimposed and displayed on the black image, and an effect display in which the effect image is superimposed and displayed on the effect image, depending on which type of effect display is performed. Since it is possible to display different forms of effect display, it is possible to enhance the effect of linking the movement of the movable body and the effect display of the display means.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 115 (E) and 117 (A), a specific type of effect display such as a battle reach effect in which a movable body effect for operating a movable body such as the movable member 90321 is executed is executed. At this time, it is possible to execute an effect of superimposing the effect display of a specific mode as shown in the particle effect images 9071 of FIGS. Therefore, it is possible to link a specific type of effect display on which the movable body effect is executed and an effect effect display by a display means such as the effect display device 905, and the operation of the movable body by the specific type of effect display. And the effect display of the display means can be linked to further enhance the effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 116 (E) and 117 (B), a specific type of effect display such as a story reach effect in which a movable body effect for operating a movable body such as the movable member 90321 is executed is executed. At that time, the effect display of a specific mode such as the flame effect images 9073 of FIGS. 116 (D) and (E) is displayed on a predetermined image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 905 such as the black image 9072. Since the effect of superimposing display can be executed, in addition to being able to link a predetermined type of predetermined effect on which the movable body effect is executed and the effect display by a display means such as the effect display device 905. Therefore, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by emphasizing the movable body production.

In addition, the production that links (links) the movable body and the production effect display like the battle reach production and the story reach production described above may be executed in the reach production other than the super reach, and is executed in the production other than the reach production. You may.

In addition, as in the battle reach production and story reach production described above, the production in which the movable body and the production effect display are linked (linked) is performed at a timing that is a turning point of the change in the image related to the production. However, the operation may be performed at a timing other than the timing that is a turning point of the change of the image related to the production, such as the timing after the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the execution of the production.

In addition, the particle effect image and the flame effect image have been described as an example as the effect display in the effect in which the movable body and the effect display are linked (linked) as in the battle reach effect and the story reach effect described above. Not limited to this, as the effect display, other types of effect display such as an effect image in which light is emitted may be used.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 115 and 116, it is possible to display different modes of effect display depending on which of the two types of effect display, the battle reach effect and the story reach effect, is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and different types of effect display may be displayed depending on which of the three or more types of effect display is performed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 115 and 116, different types of effect display are displayed depending on which of the plurality of effect displays such as the battle reach effect and the story reach effect is displayed. An example is shown in which the mode of displaying the effect effect is different depending on whether or not the black image 9072 is displayed when it is possible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as an example in which the mode of the effect effect display is different, the black image is displayed in any type of effect display, but the type of effect effect display such as the effect image may be different. In that case, the type of effect display is different as long as any of the components of the effect display such as the shape, color, display range, and brightness of the image of the effect display is different.

Further, as an effect of linking (linking) the movable body and the effect effect display as in the battle reach effect and the story reach effect described above, the images of the effect effect display as shown in FIGS. 115 and 116 are displayed first. Not limited to the effect of operating the movable body later, an effect of executing the image display of the effect effect display and the operation of the movable body at the same timing may be used, and the image of the effect display after the movable body is operated first. You may use the effect of displaying.

Further, as an effect using the black image 9072 as in the story reach effect described above, an example of displaying the black image 9072 in the entire display area of the effect display device 905 is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the black image 9072 may be controlled to be displayed in a part of the display area of the effect display device 905 such as the area for displaying the effect image.

Further, as an effect of linking a movable body such as the movable member described above and an effect effect display such as an effect image, the movable body is operated in each of a plurality of types of effect displays having different conditions of the effect display. In the case of directing, depending on the situation of the directing display that operates the movable body, the effect image display as a different type of directing effect display may be executed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body. Good. For example, different types of effect image display may be executed in the following effects display situations. (A) When the effect image display is displayed in response to the operation of the movable body before the reach state is reached during the variable display of the effect symbol. (B) When displaying the effect image display corresponding to operating the movable body at the time of temporary stop in the pseudo-ream. (C) When displaying the effect image display corresponding to the movement of the movable body during the execution of normal reach. (D) When the effect image display is displayed in response to the movement of the movable body during the execution of the super reach effect. (E) Development in which the content of the effect is developed When the effect image display is displayed in response to the movement of the movable body during the development of the effect during the execution of the super reach of the effect type. (F) Corresponding to the operation of the movable body when the lottery effect (for example, the effect of drawing a lottery for a probabilistic jackpot or a non-probabilistic jackpot) is performed again after notifying that the jackpot display result has been obtained. When displaying the effect image display. (G) When the effect image display is displayed in response to the movement of the movable body during the production of the jackpot game state. (H) When displaying the effect image display in response to operating the movable body during the customer waiting demo display that is executed when the game is not being performed. It is sufficient that at least two of the effect image displays to be executed in the above-described plurality of types of effect display situations are different.

[Other production examples using movable members]
Next, other production examples using a movable body such as the movable member 90321 will be described. The effect described below is executed by the effect control CPU 90120. FIG. 118 is a timing chart showing a control example of the effect effect and the movable united motion effect in a specific super reach effect.

The movable body such as the movable member 90321 described above includes a plurality of movable members, is in a separated state in a normal state, and can be controlled to operate in a combined state in a specific state. May be good. The movable member that can be combined may be one in which a plurality of movable members are interlocked by drive means (motor, solenoid, etc.) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of movable members, and the plurality of movable members are one. It may be interlocked by a driving means (motor, solenoid, etc.).

Regarding the control example of FIG. 118, the description overlapping with the control example of FIG. 117 will be omitted, and the parts different from the control example of FIG. 117 will be mainly described. FIG. 118 (A) shows a control example of the effect effect and the movable united combination effect in the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 115. FIG. 117 (B) shows a control example of the effect effect and the movable united combination effect in the story reach effect as shown in FIG. 116.

The control example of FIG. 118 is different from the control example of FIG. 117 in that the movable body united motion effect is executed instead of the movable body motion effect of FIG. 117.

In the battle reach effect shown in FIG. 118 (A), instead of the movable body movement effect by the movable member 90321 shown in FIG. 115 (E) in the battle effect as shown in FIG. 115, the movable members that can be combined are in the combined state from the separated state. The movable body uniting effect that operates in is executed.

In the story reach effect shown in FIG. 118 (B), instead of the movable body movement effect by the movable member 90321 shown in FIG. 116 (E) in the story reach effect as shown in FIG. 116, the movable members that can be combined are combined from the separated state. A movable united effect that operates in a state is executed.

Further, in the story reach effect shown in FIG. 118 (B), for example, immediately before the end of the latter half of the story reach effect executed after the message image 9054B of the “second half of the story” in FIG. 116 (C) is displayed, for example, the effect. In a specific display area of the display device 909, an operation promotion effect of performing an operation promotion display for promoting the operation of the push button 9031B such as "press the button" is executed. Then, when the push button 9031B is operated by the player within a predetermined period from the start of the operation promotion effect, or when the predetermined period elapses without the operation within the predetermined period, the above-mentioned movable unit combination The production is executed.

The control for executing the movable body uniting effect in response to the operation promotion effect may be executed immediately before the end of the battle reach image display in the battle reach effect of FIG. 118 (A). As described above, the control for executing the movable body uniting effect in response to the operation promotion effect may be executed at the first image change turning point in the specific super reach effect. Further, the control for executing the movable body uniting effect in response to the operation promotion effect may be executed at other image change nodes such as the second image change node in the specific super reach effect. In addition to the push button 9031B, other operating means such as the stick controller 9031A may be used as the operating means for executing the movable uniting effect in response to the operation of the operating means. Further, not limited to the operating means, the movable body uniting effect may be executed in response to the detection of a specific motion of the player by the detecting means for detecting the motion of the player such as a motion sensor. That is, any effect control may be executed as long as it is an effect control that executes the movable body united effect according to the movement of the player.

Further, the control for executing the movable body uniting effect in response to the operation promotion effect may not be executed. The control for executing the movable united effect in response to such an operation promotion effect is selected by selecting whether or not to execute at a predetermined ratio by a predetermined lottery process executed by the effect control CPU 90120, and it is selected to execute. You may want to do it from time to time.

When the movable uniting effect using the movable members that can be combined as described above is executed, the same effect as the case of executing the movable uniting effect using the movable member 90321 described above can be obtained. Furthermore, the fun of the production can be improved by the union operation.

[Movable body movement production during round execution]
As described above, when the probabilistic jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed effect symbol which is the normal jackpot combination (non-probability jackpot combination) is stopped and displayed as the variable display result of the effect symbol. You may make it happen. Specifically, when the normal jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed effect symbol that is the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed at a rate of 100% as the variable display result of the effect symbol. , When the probabilistic jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the definite special symbol in the special symbol game, the definite effect symbol that is the probabilistic jackpot combination is stopped and displayed at the first ratio (for example, 60%) as the variable display result of the effect symbol. Then, at the second ratio (for example, 40%), the finalized effect symbol, which is usually a big hit combination, is stopped and displayed.

In such a configuration, the effect control CPU 90120 performs probability variation control after the end of the jackpot game state when the finalized effect symbol, which is a normal jackpot combination (non-probability variation jackpot combination), is stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the effect symbol. An effect suggesting whether or not to be performed is executed in the jackpot display process (S9077), the jackpot game in progress process (S9078), the jackpot end effect process (S9079), or the like. In this embodiment, in the jackpot game in-process (S9078), when a predetermined round (for example, the fifth round) is being executed, a round suggesting whether or not probability variation control is performed after the end of the jackpot game state. Medium suggestion production shall be performed. This predetermined round is a normal open round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 907 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is relatively long among the rounds in the big hit game state. ..

In this round suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 120 (b) and 120 (d), an effect effect in which the flame effect image 901010 or the lightning effect image 901020 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 901001 and the movable member 90321 are operated. The movable body motion effect is executed in a coordinated manner, and then, as shown in FIGS. 120 (f) to 120 (h), the character 901060 performs an action of breaking the rock 901062 with the hammer 901061, and as a result, the rock 901062 is broken. Depending on whether or not the jackpot game state ends, a challenge effect is executed to notify whether or not the probability change control is performed.

In the suggestion effect during the round, as shown in FIG. 119, the effect effect and the movable body motion effect are executed in a manner in which the effect effect and the movable body motion effect are linked by any of the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2. As an effect effect, as shown in FIG. 120 (b), a flame effect image 901010 superimposed on the black image 901001 is referred to as a flame effect effect, and as shown in FIG. 120 (d), it is displayed on the black image 901001. The one in which the lightning effect image 901020 is superimposed and displayed is called a lightning effect effect.

When the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot, that is, when the probabilistic jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a definite special symbol in the special figure game, it becomes a successful mode of notifying the probabilistic control in the challenge effect (FIG. 120 (g)). , It is notified that the probability change control is performed after the end of the jackpot game state. When the jackpot type is a non-probability variation jackpot, that is, when the normal jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a definite special symbol in the special symbol game, the probability variation control is not notified in the challenge effect (FIG. 120 (h)). ), It is notified that the probability change control is not performed (becomes a low probability state) after the end of the jackpot game state.

In the effect pattern A1, the first movable body motion effect is executed and the flame effect effect is executed as the first effect effect, and the second movable body motion effect and the second effect effect are not executed, and the challenge effect is produced. It is a production pattern that shifts to. The effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect pattern A1 at a rate of 2% when the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, and selects the effect pattern A1 at a rate of 50% when the jackpot type is a non-probability variation jackpot. ..

In the effect pattern A2, the first movable body motion effect is executed, the flame effect effect is executed as the first effect effect, the second movable body motion effect is executed, and the flame effect effect is executed as the second effect effect. It is a production pattern that shifts to a challenge production after execution. The effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect pattern A2 at a rate of 8% when the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, and selects the effect pattern A2 at a rate of 25% when the jackpot type is a non-probability variation jackpot. ..

In the effect pattern A3, the first movable body motion effect is executed, the flame effect effect is executed as the first effect effect, the second movable body motion effect is executed, and the lightning effect effect is executed as the second effect effect. It is a production pattern that shifts to a challenge production after execution. The effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect pattern A3 at a rate of 25% when the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, and selects the effect pattern A3 at a rate of 1% when the jackpot type is a non-probability variation jackpot. ..

In the effect pattern B1, the first movable body motion effect is executed, the lightning effect effect is executed as the first effect effect, and the second movable body motion effect and the second effect effect are not executed, and the challenge effect is produced. It is a production pattern that shifts to. The effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect pattern B1 at a rate of 25% when the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, and selects the effect pattern B1 at a rate of 16% when the jackpot type is a non-probability variation jackpot. ..

In the effect pattern B2, the first movable body motion effect is executed, the lightning effect effect is executed as the first effect effect, the second movable body motion effect is executed, and the lightning effect effect is executed as the second effect effect. It is a production pattern that shifts to a challenge production after execution. The effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect pattern B2 at a rate of 40% when the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, and selects the effect pattern B2 at a rate of 8% when the jackpot type is a non-probability variation jackpot. ..

When the movable body movement effect and the effect effect are executed in each of the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2, the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot, in order of increasing expectation, A3, B2, B1, It becomes A2 and A1. The degree of expectation referred to here is calculated by, for example, [ratio of probable variation jackpot + (ratio of probabilistic jackpot + proportion of non-probability variation jackpot)] when the effect is executed in the effect pattern. The effect pattern (A2, A3, B2) in which the movable body motion effect and effect effect are executed twice is expected rather than the effect pattern (A1, B1) in which the movable body motion effect and effect effect are executed only once. The degree is high.

Then, when the effect is executed by the effect pattern (A3, B1, or B2) including the lightning effect effect, it is more expected than when the effect is executed by the effect pattern (A1 or A2) not including the lightning effect effect. The degree is high. Further, when the first effect effect is a lightning effect effect (B1 or B2), the degree of expectation is higher than when the first effect effect is a flame effect effect (A1, A2, or A3). However, if the first effect effect is a flame effect effect and the second effect effect is a lightning effect effect, that is, if it is an upstart effect, both the first and second effect effects are lightning effects. Expectations are higher than when it is a production.

It should be noted that there is no so-called downfall effect pattern in which the first effect effect is a lightning effect effect and the second effect effect is a flame effect effect. By limiting such an effect (prohibiting such an effect or making the execution ratio lower than A3), the interest of the effect effect is not lowered.

Next, with reference to FIG. 120, an example in which the movable body motion effect and the effect effect are executed in the effect pattern of A1 or A3 will be described. When the above-mentioned reach result effect is completed, the effect display device 905 executes the stop symbol effect as shown in FIG. 120A, so that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is fixed and the variable display is displayed. finish. In this example, when the normal jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed effect symbol that is the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the variable display result of the effect symbol, or in the special symbol game. When the probabilistic jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is assumed that the confirmed effect symbol, which is a normal jackpot combination, is stopped and displayed as the variable display result of the effect symbol.

In the example of FIG. 120 (a), the effect symbols whose symbol number is "4", which is not a probabilistic symbol, are designated in the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 905L, 905R, and 905C. It is displayed as a stop on the valid line of. In addition, a stop symbol effect is performed in which the message image 9074 showing the characters "big hit" is displayed below the effect symbol. The effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect according to the execution of each round in accordance with the control to the jackpot game state. For example, the display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 905 is performed, and the image 901000 in which the characters "Round XX" (XX indicates the number of rounds in the jackpot game state) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen is displayed. To do. Then, as an effect corresponding to the execution of the fifth round, a suggestion effect is executed during the round.

In the first movable body motion effect shown in FIG. 120 (b), the effect control CPU 90120 moves the movable member 90321 from the tilted position to the standing position (first standing position). Then, at the timing when the movable member 90321 reaches the upright position (the timing when the movable member 90321 is in the upright state), the background image of the image 901000 is changed from the normal background image to the black image 901001, and at the same time, the flame effect image is displayed on the black image 901001. A flame effect effect that superimposes 901010 is executed.

When the flame effect effect is continued for a predetermined period while the movable member 90321 is in the upright position, the effect control CPU 90120 changes the background image of the image 901000 from the black image 901001 to the normal background image as shown in FIG. 120 (c). At the same time as returning to, the flame effect effect is terminated by erasing the flame effect image 901010. Then, at the timing when the flame effect effect is completed, the movable member 90321 is moved from the standing position to the tilting position (first tilting).

When A1 is selected as the effect pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to the challenge effect after the movable member 90321 moves to the tilt position (after the first tilt). On the other hand, when A3 is selected as the effect pattern, after the movable member 90321 has moved to the tilted position (after the first tilt), the second movable body motion effect shown in FIG. 120 (d) is used for the effect. The control CPU 90120 moves the movable member 90321 again from the tilted position to the standing position (second standing). Then, at the timing when the movable member 90321 reaches the upright position (the timing when the movable member 90321 is in the upright state), the background image of the image 901000 is changed from the normal background image to the black image 901001, and at the same time, the lightning effect image is displayed on the black image 901001. A lightning effect effect that superimposes 901020 is executed.

When the lightning effect effect is continued for a predetermined period while the movable member 90321 is in the upright position, the effect control CPU 90120 changes the background image of the image 901000 from the black image 901001 to the normal background image as shown in FIG. 120 (e). At the same time as returning to, the lightning effect image 901020 is erased to end the lightning effect effect. Then, at the timing when the lightning effect effect is completed, the movable member 90321 is moved again from the standing position to the tilting position (second tilting). Then, after the movable member 90321 moves to the tilted position, the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to the challenge effect.

When A2 is selected as the effect pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 superimposes and displays the flame effect image 901010 on the black image 901001 in the second movable body operation effect shown in FIG. 120 (d). The flame effect effect is executed again, the second flame effect effect is completed in FIG. 120 (e), and the process proceeds to the challenge effect.

As shown in FIG. 120 (f), in the challenge effect, the effect control CPU 90120 first displays a common effect image regardless of whether the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot or a non-probability variation jackpot.

This production image includes an image 901050 showing the characters "challenge time", a message image 1051 displaying the characters "probable change promotion when a rock breaks !!" displayed below it, and a character 901060. , Hammer 901061, and rock 901062. This reminds the player that "character 901060 is an effect of trying to break the rock 901062 by the hammer 901061", and further, "when the rock is broken, the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot regardless of the stop symbol effect". Let the player recognize that.

When the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 90120 displays an image of a successful mode in which the character 901060 succeeds in breaking the rock 901062 with the hammer 901061 as shown in FIG. 120 (g). , A message image 901070 showing the characters "probability change promotion !!" is displayed. As a result, the player understands that the definite effect symbol, which is usually a jackpot combination, is stopped and displayed in the stop symbol effect, but the probabilistic jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the definite special symbol in the special symbol game. ..

When the jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 90120 fails to break the rock 901062 by the hammer 901061 and the hammer 901061 is broken, as shown in FIG. 120 (h). Along with displaying the image of the aspect, the message image 901080 showing the characters "Failure!" Is displayed. As a result, the player grasps that the normal jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the finalized special symbol in the special symbol game, as the finalized effect symbol which is the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed in the stopped symbol effect.

FIGS. 121 (A) to 121 (C) are timing charts showing the execution timing and execution period of the movable body motion effect, the effect effect, and the challenge effect when each of the effect patterns A1 to A3 is selected.

In any case of the effect patterns A1 to A3, when the stop symbol effect in which the effect symbols having the symbol numbers other than the probabilistic variation symbols are aligned on the predetermined effective line and stopped and displayed is executed at the timing (1), After the jackpot display process (S9077) is executed at the timing (2), the process shifts to the jackpot in-game process (S9078). Further, in the big hit in-game process (S9078), the effect corresponding to each round is executed, and the above-mentioned suggestion effect during the round is executed as the effect corresponding to the fifth round. When the fifth round is started, the flame effect effect is executed when the first standing motion of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (3), and the first tilting motion of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (4). The flame effect effect ends when is performed.

As described above, in the execution period of the first movable body motion effect, the effect effect of the common mode is executed in any of the effect patterns A1 to A3. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp which effect pattern is used during the execution period of the first movable body motion effect.

In the case of the effect pattern A1, the challenge effect is shifted to at the timing (7) without the second movable body motion effect being performed thereafter. In the case of the effect pattern A2, the second flame effect effect is executed when the second standing motion of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (5), and the second tilt of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (6). The second flame effect effect ends when the action is performed. Then, at the timing (7), the challenge production is started. In the case of the effect pattern A3, the lightning effect effect is executed when the second standing motion of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (5), and the second tilting motion of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (6). The thunder effect production ends when it is struck. Then, at the timing (7), the challenge production is started.

In any of the production patterns A1 to A3, the result is notified at the timing of (8) in the challenge production, and it is notified that the success mode is reached and the high accuracy state is reached after the jackpot game state is completed. Alternatively, it is notified that the failure mode will occur and the probability state will be low after the jackpot game state ends.

In this way, when the effect pattern A3 is selected, different forms of effect effect can be produced depending on whether the first movable body motion effect is executed or the second movable body motion effect is executed. Since it is executed, it is possible to diversify the mode of the effect in which the movable body motion effect and the effect effect are linked, and to improve the interest.

Further, when the effect pattern A3 is selected, the degree of expectation, that is, later, is compared with the case where the effect patterns A1 and A2 in which the flame effect effect is executed in the first movable body motion effect as in A3 are selected. There is a high rate of success in the challenge production that is performed. Therefore, the player decides whether or not the second movable body motion effect is executed, and if the second movable body motion effect is executed, the flame effect effect effect and the lightning effect effect are performed accordingly. By paying attention to which one is executed, it is possible to further improve the interest of the production in which the movable body movement production and the effect production are linked.

In addition, the effect pattern in which the lightning effect effect is executed has a higher degree of expectation than the effect pattern in which only the flame effect effect is executed, but like the effect pattern A3, the flame effect is produced in the first movable body motion effect. Even if the effect is executed, if the effect pattern is provided so that the lightning effect effect is executed in the second movable body motion effect, the flame effect effect is executed in the first movable body motion effect. Even so, it is possible to expect the lightning effect effect to be executed in the second movable body motion effect without discouraging the player. Furthermore, even when compared with the effect pattern in which the lightning effect effect is executed in the first movable body movement effect, the effect pattern A3 has a higher degree of expectation, so that the flame effect effect is produced in the first movable body operation effect. The player's interest can be sustained when executed.

(Modification example 1)
During the execution of the effect effect, the operation promotion effect that promotes the operation of the push button 9031B may be executed in the specific display area of the effect display device 909. Then, when the push button 9031B is operated by the player within a predetermined period from the start of the operation promotion effect, the effect control CPU 90120 may change the mode of the effect effect.

A specific example is shown in FIG. 122. The description of FIGS. 122 (a) to 122 (c) is the same as that of FIGS. 120 (a) to 120 (c), and the description thereof will be omitted. After the movable member 90321 has moved to the tilted position (after the first tilted position), in the second movable body operation effect shown in FIG. 120 (i), the effect control CPU 90120 moves the movable member 90321 from the tilted position to the standing position. Move it again (second standing). Then, at the timing when the movable member 90321 reaches the upright position (the timing when the movable member 90321 is in the upright state), the background image of the image 901000 is changed to the black image 901001, and at the same time, the flame effect image 901020 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 901001. Re-execute the flame effect effect.

When the flame effect effect is continued for a predetermined period while the movable member 90321 is in the upright position, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the push button 9031B on the black image 901001 and the flame effect image 901010 as shown in FIG. 120 (j). An operation promotion effect is executed in which an operation promotion image consisting of an image 901090 imitating the image 901090 and a message image 1091 showing the characters "press!" Is superimposed and displayed.

This operation promotion image is erased (the operation promotion effect ends) when a predetermined predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses without the push button 9031B being operated from the start of display. If the bush button 9031B is operated within the period in which the operation promotion image is displayed, the operation promotion image is deleted (the operation promotion effect ends). Then, when the bush button 9031B is operated, the effect control CPU 90120 selects an effect pattern that can change the mode of the effect effect according to the operation of the player, as shown in FIG. 120 (k). ), The effect image superimposed on the black image 901001 is changed from the flame effect image 901010 to the lightning effect image 901020. On the other hand, when an effect pattern that does not change the mode of the effect effect according to the operation of the player is selected as the effect pattern, the effect image superimposed on the black image 901001 is displayed as shown in FIG. 120 (l). The flame effect image 901010 remains unchanged.

FIG. 123 (A) shows the execution timing and execution period of the movable body motion effect, the effect effect, and the challenge effect when an effect pattern capable of changing the mode of the effect effect according to the operation of the player is selected. It is a timing chart.

The description of the timings (1) to (4) is the same as that in FIG. 121, and the description thereof will be omitted. When the second standing operation of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (5), the second flame effect effect is executed. Then, the operation promotion image is displayed at the timing (X) within the second flame effect production period. When the operation promotion image is displayed, the effect image superimposed on the black image 901001 is changed from the flame effect image 901010 to the lightning effect image 901020 according to the operation of the push button 32B at the timing (Y). Let me. At the timing (6), the lightning effect effect ends when the movable member 90321 is tilted for the second time. Then, at the timing (7), the challenge production is started.

In this way, by making it possible to change the mode of the effect effect according to the operation of the player, it is possible to further improve the interest of the effect effect. Further, by changing the flame effect image 901010 having a low expectation to the lightning effect image 901020 having a high expectation according to the operation of the player, it is possible to give the effect unexpectedness.

For example, in the effect pattern A2 described above, the operation promotion image is superimposed and displayed on the black image 901001 and the flame effect image 901010 within the period during which the second flame effect effect is executed. Then, when the push button 9031B is operated, the operation promotion image is erased (the operation promotion effect ends), but the effect image superimposed on the black image 901001 remains unchanged as the flame effect image 901010. The production shall be controlled. As a result, "an effect pattern that does not change the mode of the effect effect according to the operation of the player" may be configured.

Further, in the effect pattern A3 described above, when the second movable body motion effect is executed, the flame effect image 901010 is superimposed on the black image 901001 instead of the lightning effect image 901020 as the effect effect. During the period in which the flame effect image 901010 is displayed, the operation promotion image is superimposed and displayed on the black image 901001 and the flame effect image 901010. Then, when the push button 9031B is operated, the operation promotion image is erased (the operation promotion effect ends), and the effect image superimposed on the black image 901001 changes from the flame effect image 901010 to the lightning effect image 901020. The production is controlled so as to be performed. As a result, "an effect pattern that changes the mode of the effect effect according to the operation of the player" may be configured.

In the example shown in FIG. 123 (A), when the flame effect effect is changed to the lightning effect effect in response to the operation of the push button 9031B, the display of the black image 901001 that has already been started is continued without being terminated. Therefore, only the effect image superimposed on the black image 901001 is changed from the flame effect image 901010 to the lightning effect image 901020. That is, assuming that the effect effect is composed of the black image 901001 which is the first effect and the effect image which is the second effect, only the mode of the second effect is changed without changing the mode of the first effect. As a result, it is possible to give the impression that the mode has changed according to the operation of the player during the execution of the series of effects.

(Modification 2)
In the above-mentioned example, the movable body motion effect, the effect effect, and the challenge effect are the effects executed during the execution of the round, and suggest whether or not the probability variation control is performed after the end of the jackpot game state. , Not limited to such a form, corresponding to each of the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 904A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 904B in the special symbol game. , As a reach effect executed when the effect symbol is variablely displayed, a movable body motion effect, an effect effect, and a challenge effect are executed, and whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled by these effect patterns and effect modes. You may suggest that.

The above-mentioned effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2 are applied as effect patterns for the movable body motion effect and the effect effect executed in the reach state. That is, when the movable body movement effect and the effect effect are executed as the reach effect in each of the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2, A3, in descending order of the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state. It becomes B2, B1, A2, A1.

FIG. 123 (B) shows a control example of the effect effect, the movable body effect, and the challenge effect as the reach effect. From the start (11) of the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) to the occurrence of the reach state (12), the variable display of the effect symbol is performed in the effect mode of the normal variable display as shown in FIG. 115 (A). Is executed in the effect display device 905.

When the reach state occurs at the timing (12) in the effect display device 905, the effect shifts to the reach effect. In the reach effect, the flame effect effect is executed when the first standing motion of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (13), and the flame is executed when the first tilting motion of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (14). The effect effect ends (examples of effect patterns A1 to A3).

In the case of the effect pattern A1, the challenge effect shifts to the challenge effect at the timing (17) without the second movable body motion effect being performed thereafter. In the case of the effect pattern A2, the second flame effect effect is executed when the second standing motion of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (15), and the second tilt of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (16). The second flame effect effect ends when the action is performed. Then, at the timing (17), the challenge production is started. In the case of the effect pattern A3 illustrated in FIG. 123 (B), the lightning effect effect is executed when the second standing motion of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (15), and the movable member 90321 is executed at the timing (16). The lightning effect effect ends when the second tilting motion of. Then, at the timing (17), the challenge production is started.

Then, when it is determined that the finalized effect symbol, which is a jackpot combination, is stopped and displayed as the variable display result of the effect symbol, the success mode is reached at the timing (18) in the challenge effect, and as a result of the variable display. It is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled. If it is determined that the final production symbol, which is a combination of reach loss, is stopped and displayed as a result of the variation display of the production symbol, the challenge production may fail at the timing (18) and may not be controlled to the jackpot game state. Be notified. In this way, the reach result is notified by executing the image display of the reach result effect on the effect display device 905 at the timing (18). After that, when the reach result effect is completed, the effect display device 905 executes the stop symbol effect as shown in FIG. 115 (G) at the timing (19), so that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed. At the same time, the fluctuation display ends.

(Other variants)
In the above embodiment, the movable body motion effect related to the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2 is an effect of moving the movable member 90321 from the tilted position (first position) to the standing position (second position). As described above, not limited to such a form, the gaming machine has a plurality of movable members, and by moving each movable member from the first position to the second position corresponding to each movable member, each movable member can be moved. The movable united operation effect in which a specific form (combined form) is formed by gathering each movable member in the state of being present at each second position may be executed. With the end of the movable body movement effect, each movable member moves from the second position corresponding to the first position to the first position, so that the specific form (combined form) is released. The movable body uniting motion effect will be described in detail in FIG. 118, which will be described later.

Further, the movable body motion effect may be an effect of changing the form of the movable member, or may be an effect of performing a predetermined operation, for example, an operation of a rotation mode without changing the position of the movable member. For example, the movable body movement effect is an effect in which the movable member changes in an expansion / contraction mode, an effect in which the movable member changes in an open / closed mode, an effect in which the movable member changes in an extension / contraction mode, or the movable member is another accessory (for example, It may be an effect that is combined with a non-moving character that is fixed to the game board surface.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the effect linked with the movable body motion effect is an effect effect in which the effect image is superimposed and displayed on the black image 901001 in the effect display device 905 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. The effect linked with the movable body operation effect may be an effect of causing the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, the panel side LEDs 909d, 909e, or the light emitting unit 90321A of the movable member 90321 to emit light in a specific mode. For example, in the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2, instead of the "flame effect effect", the "top frame LED909a, left frame LED909b, right frame LED909c, panel side LEDs 909d, 909e or light emitting unit 90321A are set to the first emission color (for example). The effect of emitting light with (blue) is executed, and instead of the "lightning effect effect", the "top frame LED909a, left frame LED909b, right frame LED909c, panel side LEDs 909d, 909e or light emitting unit 90321A" is set to the second emission color (for example, red). It is good to execute "the effect of making it emit light with."

Further, the effect linked with the movable body motion effect may be an effect of outputting a specific sound (a specific sound effect or a specific musical piece) from the speakers 908L and 908R. For example, in the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2, instead of the "flame effect effect", the "effect of outputting the first specific sound (for example, the low-pitched sound effect) from the speakers 908L and 908R" is executed. Instead of the "thunder effect effect", it is preferable to execute the "effect of outputting the second specific sound (for example, a high-pitched sound effect) from the speakers 908L and 908R".

Further, in the above embodiment, after the movable body motion effect and the effect effect executed in cooperation with the movable body motion effect, a challenge effect is executed on the effect display device 905 to obtain a predetermined state (probability change state or jackpot game state). However, the notification effect for notifying whether or not a predetermined state is reached is not limited to such a form, and the notification effect for notifying whether or not the state is controlled is operated in the previously executed movable body motion effect. It may be an effect of notifying whether or not a predetermined state is reached depending on whether or not the movable member 90321 or a movable member different from the movable member 90321 is operated.

For example, when notifying that a predetermined state (probability change state or big hit game state) is reached after the effects of the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2 are completed, the movable member 90321 is moved from the tilted position to the standing position. At the same time, a special image different from the flame effect image 901010 and the lightning effect image 901020 may be superimposed and displayed on the black image 901001.

In the above embodiment, when the movable body motion effect is executed a plurality of times as in the effect patterns A2, A3, and B2, it is the first effect when the first movable body motion effect is completed. Although an example has been described in which both the black image 901001 and the effect image which is the second effect are erased and temporarily returned to the normal background image, the present invention is not limited to such a form. For example, when the first movable body motion effect is completed, the first effect image is erased, while the black image 901001 does not continue to return to the normal background image, and the second movable body motion effect is performed. Is executed, the second effect image may be superimposed and displayed on the continuous black image 901001. With such a form, the player expects that the second movable body movement effect is executed because the black image 901001 continues even after the first movable body movement effect is completed. can do.

Further, in such a form, in the effect pattern (A1 and B1) in which the movable body motion effect is executed only once, the first movable body motion effect is completed and displayed superimposed on the black image 901001. Even after the effect image has been erased, the black image 901001 may be continued for a predetermined period (for example, until the transition to the challenge effect). By doing so, the player's interest can be maintained for a predetermined period even after the end of the first movable body motion effect.

Further, before the first movable body movement effect is executed, the black image 901001 as the first effect is displayed in advance, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the movable member 90321 is in the upright state). In addition, the first effect image may be superimposed and displayed on the black image 901001. As described above, the effect image may be displayed within the display period of the black image 901001 (the second effect is executed within the execution period of the first effect).

Further, when the first movable body motion effect is completed, both the black image 901001 and the first effect image are not continuously returned to the normal background image, and the second movable body motion effect is executed. At that time, the effect image superimposed on the continuous black image 901001 may be changed from the first effect image to the second effect image.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the period in which the movable member 90321 is in the upright state and the period in which the effect image is displayed coincide with each other has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and the movable member 90321 is tilted. The display of the effect image may be started within the moving period of moving from the position to the standing position or before the moving period, and the movable member 90321 is moved from the standing position to the tilted position within the moving period or its movement. The display of the effect image may end after the period. "The effect effect is executed according to the operation of the movable member 90321" means that [the movable member 90321 starts moving from the tilted position to the standing position, then becomes the standing state, and further moves from the standing position to the tilted position. It is sufficient that at least a part of [the period until the end of] and at least a part of [the period during which the effect image is displayed] overlap.

In the above embodiment, it is suggested whether or not the probability change control is performed after the end of the big hit game state by the effect in which the movable body motion effect and the effect effect are linked, or the variation display of the effect symbol is completed. It was suggested whether or not the display result is controlled to the big hit game state after being derived and displayed, but it is not limited to such a form and suggests whether or not a special reach effect is executed. It may be a game, and suggests whether or not the variable display (pending special figure game) in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is controlled to the jackpot game state ( It may be a so-called look-ahead notice production).

Next, the main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) Movable body effects can be executed in a plurality of types of effect displays, such as the battle reach effect shown in FIGS. 115 and 117 (A) and the story reach effect shown in FIGS. 116 and 117 (B). An effect display in which the effect image is superimposed on the black image and an effect display in which the effect image is superimposed on the effect image, depending on which type of effect display is performed at a certain time. Since it is possible to display different modes of effect display, it is possible to enhance the effect of linking the movement of the movable body and the effect display of the display means.

(2) As shown in FIGS. 115 (E) and 117 (A), a specific type of effect display such as a battle reach effect is executed, in which a movable body effect for operating a movable body such as the movable member 90321 is executed. At that time, an effect of superimposing the effect display of a specific mode as shown in the particle effect images 9071 of FIGS. 115 (D) and (E) on a specific type of effect display such as the display of a winning effect image is executed. Since it is possible, it is possible to link a specific type of effect display on which the movable body effect is executed and an effect effect display by a display means such as the effect display device 905, and the movable body by the specific type of effect display can be linked. It is possible to further enhance the effect of the effect of linking the operation and the effect display of the display means.

(3) As shown in FIGS. 116 (E) and 117 (B), a specific type of effect display such as a story reach effect is executed in which a movable body effect for operating a movable body such as the movable member 90321 is executed. At that time, a predetermined image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 905 such as the black image 9072 is displayed in a specific mode as the effect effect display as shown in the flame effect images 9073 of FIGS. 116 (D) and (E). Since the effect of superimposing the display on the image can be executed, it is possible to link a predetermined type of predetermined effect on which the movable body effect is executed and the effect display by a display means such as the effect display device 905. In addition, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by emphasizing the movable body production.

(4) When the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, a confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable body and a confirmation operation in step S9051A of FIG. 103, as in the initial operation in the movable member initialization process of step S9051B in FIG. , The break-in operation for moving the movable body is executed as in the break-in operation for the movable member shown in FIG. 105. Therefore, since the movement of the movable body is not accustomed to it, it is possible to suppress the influence on the movement of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to prevent the movable body from not operating well.

The gaming machine described above also has the following characteristic configurations.
(1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, a slot machine).
Movable objects (eg, movable member 90321) that can be moved to the standby position (for example, the first position shown in FIGS. 95 and 96) and the advance position (for example, the second position shown in FIGS. 95 and 96).
When the game machine is started, a confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable object (for example, an initial operation in the movable member initialization process in step S9051B of FIG. 103, also referred to as an initial operation) and the movable object. It is provided with a control means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120) for executing a break-in operation (for example, an operation in step S9051A of FIG. 103, an operation in the movable member break-in process of FIG. 105, also referred to as a short initial operation).

According to such a configuration, a confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable object and a break-in operation for moving the movable object are executed. Therefore, since the movement of the moving object is not accustomed to it, it is possible to suppress the influence on the movement of the moving object. As a result, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the movable object from operating satisfactorily.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above
When an abnormality is detected in the operation of the moving object in the break-in operation, an error processing means (for example, step S90513, step S90517 in FIG. 105) for executing error processing (for example, notification of the abnormality) is further provided.

According to such a configuration, when an abnormality is detected in the operation of the moving object in the break-in operation, error processing is executed. As a result, it is possible to execute a process corresponding to a state in which the movable object does not operate normally.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The control means executes the break-in operation before the confirmation operation (see, for example, FIG. 103).

According to such a configuration, the break-in operation is executed before the confirmation operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the movable object from not operating well in the confirmation operation.

(4) In the game machine of (3) above
When an abnormality is detected in the operation of the moving object in the break-in operation, the control means prohibits the execution of the confirmation operation (for example, until the notification stop operation is performed in step S90514 and step S90518 of FIG. 105). , The movable member initialization process of step S9051B in FIG. 103 is not executed).

According to such a configuration, when an abnormality is detected in the operation of the moving object in the break-in operation, the execution of the confirmation operation is prohibited. As a result, it is possible to prevent the confirmation operation from being executed while the movable object is not operating normally.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above
The movable object is moved to the advance position by different power sources during the game and during the running-in operation.

According to such a configuration, the movable object is moved to the advance position by different power sources during the game and during the break-in operation. As a result, the break-in operation can be performed with a suitable power source.

(6) In the game machine of (5) above
The movable object is an elastic body (for example, a tension spring 90323, which may be another elastic body such as a spiral spring, a leaf spring, or rubber) during the game, and the elastic body during the running-in operation. A powerful motor (for example, a second effect motor 90330) is used as a power source to move the motor to the advance position.

According to such a configuration, a motor having a stronger force than an elastic body is used as a power source for the moving object in the break-in operation. As a result, the movable object can be moved to the advanced position more reliably in the break-in operation.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
The movable object includes an electric cable (for example, cable 90361) that bends and stretches as the movable object moves.
The break-in operation is an operation of bending and stretching the electric cable by moving the movable object to break-in.

According to such a configuration, a confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable object and a break-in operation for bending and stretching the electric cable by moving the movable object are performed. Therefore, since the movement of the electric cable is not accustomed to it, it is possible to suppress the influence on the movement of the moving object. As a result, it is possible to prevent the movable object from not operating well.

(8) In the game machine of (7) above
The electric cable is provided in the vicinity of an object that generates heat (for example, the LCD of the effect display device 905, the first effect motor 90303, and the second effect motor 90330).

With such a configuration, the electrical cable becomes more flexible due to heat. As a result, the movable object can be moved more reliably.

(9) In the above-described embodiment, the break-in operation is an operation of bending and stretching the electric cable by moving the movable object to break-in. However, the present invention is not limited to this, when the movable object is configured to move along the rail, when the movable object is configured to move by a ball screw or a linear guide, and when the movable object is a plain bearing. When the bearings such as metal bearings and resin bearings are configured to perform operations such as rotation, the operation may be performed by moving the lubricant such as oil or grease so as to be familiar with the operation. Further, when the movable object has a sliding portion such as a rotating or linear motion, the sliding portion may be fixed to be smoothed and acclimatized.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, the break-in operation is performed at the time of startup. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the break-in operation may be performed periodically during a demonstration in which the game after activation is not performed. Even in this way, it is possible to prevent the movable object from operating satisfactorily during the game.

(11) The cable 90361 of the above-described embodiment is to supply electric power to the LED. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and supplies electric power or control signals to other electric parts (for example, actuators such as motors and solenoids that move moving objects and display devices such as LCDs (Liquid Crystal Display) that display images). It may be.

(12) The cable 90361 may be a flexible flat cable, a flat cable in which a plurality of covered wires are arranged and fused, a single single wire, a stranded wire, or a twisted wire. It may be a pair of lines.

(13) In the above-described embodiment, the break-in operation and the confirmation operation are performed separately. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the break-in operation and the confirmation operation may be executed as a series of operations.

(14) In the above-described embodiment, the initial position of the moving object is detected in the confirmation operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initial position of the moving object may be detected in the break-in operation. Further, the initial position of the moving object may be detected separately from the break-in operation and the confirmation operation.

Although the embodiments of this embodiment have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of this embodiment. Included in this embodiment.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 901 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and for example, a game ball having a predetermined number of balls is used for the game. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside the machine and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is added. This embodiment can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed game machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value. It can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B each changely display a plurality of types of special symbols including the final stop symbol which is a variable display result, and then display the final stop symbol. Although it is designed to stop and display, this embodiment is not limited to this, and after displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner without including the final stop symbol that is a variable display result, the final stop symbol is displayed. It may be a stop display. That is, the final stop symbol that is the variable display result may be a symbol different from the special symbol used for the variable display.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer of the variation time and the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the type of reach effect and the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, one when starting the variation. Although the example of transmitting the variation pattern command is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90100 uses the first command to indicate the presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of a slip effect, etc. before reaching the reach (so-called when the reach is not reached). A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop is sent, and the second command indicates the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. after reaching the reach (if it does not reach the so-called first). 2 After the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform the effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. In addition, the game control microcomputer 90100 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. You may. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has passed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

Further, in the above embodiment, "different ratios" are not limited to those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. It is a concept that includes those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one having 100% allocation and the other having 0% allocation).

Further, in the above embodiment, as the substrate on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted, the effect control board 9012, the voice control board 9013, the drive control board 9016B, the illuminant control board 9016C to 9016F, and the like are provided. However, a circuit for controlling the effect device may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 905 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (movable body, light emitting body, speaker, etc.) are mounted. You may provide two boards with the second effect control board.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90100 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer, but the game control microcomputer 90100 transmits an effect control command to another board. Then, it may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer on the effect control board 9012 via another substrate. In that case, the command may be simply passed on another board, control related to a movable body, a light emitting body, a speaker, etc. is executed, and the received command is converted into a command as it is or, for example, a simplified command. It may be changed so that it may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer that controls the effect display device 905. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer performs display control according to the received command in the same manner as performing display control according to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 90100 in the above embodiment. It can be performed.

Further, in the above embodiment, a gaming machine is shown in which the jackpot type includes a probabilistic jackpot and a normal jackpot, and the jackpot type is determined to be a probabilistic jackpot, and is controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends. , Not limited to such gaming machines. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation region inside (a probability variation region may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable winning balls provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in the above embodiment to the gaming machine controlled to the probabilistic state after the end.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90100 side performs a display result (whether or not it is a big hit) and a winning judgment (look-ahead judgment) of the fluctuation pattern type, and a command (design) indicating the winning judgment result. The case where the pre-reading notice effect is executed based on the command indicating the winning judgment result on the effect control microcomputer side by transmitting the specified command (variable category command) is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the effect control microcomputer may be configured to perform a winning determination (look-ahead determination). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 sends a command that specifies only the value of the random number extracted when the start winning is generated, and the random number specified by those commands on the effect control microcomputer side. It may be configured to perform a winning determination (look-ahead determination) based on the value of.

It should be noted that the embodiments disclosed this time are examples in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of this embodiment is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

[2. Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment to which this embodiment is applied will be described.
In the second embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 901 executes a light emitting effect that causes the LED 909 to emit light. Needless to say, the embodiment to which this embodiment can be applied is not limited to the embodiment described below.

In this embodiment, the effect control board 9012 of the pachinko gaming machine 901 controls the left frame LED 909b, the top frame LED 909a, and the right frame LED 909c via the serial-parallel conversion circuit described in the first embodiment, and these LEDs 909. By turning on / off the light emission effect.

FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the output timing of the signal from each drive output terminal in the serial-parallel conversion circuit in this embodiment.
In this embodiment, 12-channel drive output terminals are applied to the light emitter drivers 90413a, 90413a, and 90413c corresponding to the left frame LED 909b, the top frame LED 909a, and the right frame LED 909c, respectively. These serial-parallel conversion circuits are configured to disperse the output timing of signals from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11 to spread the spectrum, prevent the generation of radiation noise, and suppress radio wave radiation. ..

In this embodiment, the internal oscillation clock circuit built in the serial-parallel conversion circuit outputs a 6 MHz clock signal as in the above-described embodiment. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 124, the 6 MHz internal clock signal is separated into a 1 MHz three-phase clock signal, and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are grouped into three groups of four channels per group. Disperse the signal output timing.

Specifically, group 1 is composed of 4 channels of drive output terminals Q0 to Q3, group 2 is composed of 4 channels of drive output terminals Q4 to Q7, and group 3 is composed of 4 channels of drive output terminals Q8 to Q11. It is composed. Then, although the signal output timings are the same between the drive output terminals in the same group (for example, drive output terminals Q0 to Q3 in group 1), the drive output terminals in different groups (for example, drive output in group 1) The output timing is distributed between the terminal Q0 and the drive output terminal Q4) of the group 2.

Further, in this embodiment, the configuration shown in FIG. 81 will be described as being applied to the serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to each of the light emitter drivers 90413a, 90413a and 90413c.

In this embodiment, a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is applied, and the drive output terminals are divided into 3 groups of 4 channels per group. However, a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit will be described. May be applied to group the drive output terminals into 6 groups of 4 channels per group.

It is also possible to configure a serial-parallel conversion circuit having more than 24 channels in the same manner so that the drive output terminals are grouped into a plurality of groups for each specified number of channels per group. is there.

In the following, the term "time" indicates the time width (length of time). In addition, the term "period" indicates a continuous time range from one timing to another. Further, the term "cycle" indicates the constant time when the same phenomenon is repeated at regular intervals.

FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the principle of light emission effect in this embodiment.
The effect control CPU 90120 executes a light emission effect by performing an effect lottery using the light emission effect distribution table 901212 described later.

In this embodiment, at the timing when the reach state occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (hereinafter, referred to as “reach state generation timing”), the effect control CPU 90120 uses the effect control relay board 9016A, the light emitter control board 9016D, 16E. , 9016F, the left frame LED 909b, the top frame LED 909a, and the right frame LED 909c are made to emit light, respectively, and the light emission effect is executed.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 emits light by a light emitting pattern (first pattern) that emits LED 909 in a single color (specific color) and a light emitting pattern (second pattern) that emits LED 909 in a plurality of colors. Is feasible, and the first pattern and the second pattern are characterized in that the jackpot reliability is different and the effect period is different. Here, for the sake of simplicity, the jackpot reliability is defined as "low" indicating low reliability, "medium" indicating medium reliability, and "high" indicating high reliability. The principle will be explained by dividing into four types: "highest", which indicates the highest reliability.

FIG. 125 is a diagram showing an example of a light emitting effect in this embodiment.
This figure shows a timing chart showing a control example of the light emission effect in a specific super reach effect, and shows a control example of the light emission effect in the battle reach effect.

In the following description, the timing at which the light emitting effect starts is referred to as "light emitting effect start timing", and the timing at which the light emitting effect ends is referred to as "light emitting effect end timing". Further, in this embodiment, the emission colors of "blue" and "red" which are monochromatic emission colors and the emission color of "rainbow color" which is an emission color expressed by a plurality of colors are exemplified.

When the battle reach effect is executed, the effect symbol is displayed in the normal variable display mode as shown in FIG. 115 (A) between the start of the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) and the occurrence of the reach state. The variation display of is executed in the effect display device 905.

In the effect display device 905, when a reach state occurs at the time "tm1", a message image 9053 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 115 (B) and 115 (C), and a battle effect corresponding to the battle reach effect is displayed. The moving image of is displayed. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 starts executing the light emission effect in response to the occurrence of this reach state. That is, in this embodiment, the light emission effect start timing is set to the timing when the reach state occurs (time “tm1”).

As described above, in the variable display of the effect symbol, the variable display of the effect symbol is started all at once in the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, for example, "left". , "Right", "Middle", etc., in order to stop the variable display of the effect symbols in the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905R, 905C, and finally to produce in all the effect symbol display areas. When the symbol stops and the display result is derived and displayed, the variable display ends.

After the variable display of the effect symbols is started all at once, when the same symbol is stopped at the stage where the effect symbol display areas 905L and 905R of "left" and "right" are stopped as shown in FIG. 115 (A), the reach is reached. It becomes a state. The effect control CPU 90120 clocks the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation by a timer or the like, and starts the light emitting effect when the elapsed time reaches the time from the start of the fluctuation predetermined for the fluctuation pattern to the occurrence of the reach state. The timing is determined, and the execution of the light emission effect is started.

FIG. 125 (A) shows an example in which the jackpot reliability is lower than in the cases of (B) and (C), and the variation display result is “missing”. In this example, the case where the execution of the light emission effect is terminated at the time “tn1” during the battle reach effect is shown. That is, the light emission effect end timing is the time "tn1", and the light emission effect period is the period from the time "tm1" to "tun1". Further, in this case, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the LED 909 to emit light with the emission color A. The emission color A in this case may be a single emission color and may be an emission color (for example, blue) indicating that the jackpot reliability is low.

Here, the light emission effect period is determined based on the jackpot reliability in the fluctuation. Specifically, the higher the jackpot reliability, the longer the light emission effect period is controlled. The light emitting effect period indicates a continuous time range from the light emitting effect start timing to the light emitting effect end timing.

FIG. 125 (B) shows an example in which the jackpot reliability is higher than that in the case of (A) but lower than that in the case of (C), and the variation display result is “missing”. In this example, the case where the execution of the light emission effect is terminated at the time “tn2 (> tn1)” during the battle reach effect is shown. That is, the light emission effect end timing is the time "tn2", and the light emission effect period is the period from the time "tm1" to "tun2". Further, in this case, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the LED 909 to emit light with the emission color B. The emission color B in this case may be a single emission color and may be an emission color (for example, green) indicating that the jackpot reliability is medium.

FIG. 125 (C) shows an example in which the jackpot reliability is higher than in the cases (A) and (B), but lower than in the case of (D), and the variation display result is “missing”. There is. In this example, the execution of the light emission effect is terminated at the time “tn3 (> tun2)” during the reach result effect executed after the battle reach effect. That is, the light emission effect end timing is the time "tn3", and the light emission effect period is the period from the time "tm1" to "tt3". Further, in this case, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the LED 909 to emit light with the emission color C. The emission color C in this case may be an emission color (for example, red) indicating that the jackpot reliability is high.

FIG. 125 (D) shows an example in which the jackpot reliability is the highest and the variable display result is “big hit”. In this example, after the reach result effect after the battle reach effect is performed, the execution of the light emission effect is terminated at the time "tn4 (> tun3)" at which the variation display of the special symbol ends in the last stop symbol effect. Shown. That is, the light emission effect end timing is the time "tn4", and the light emission effect period is the period from the time "tm1" to "tun4". Further, in this case, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the LED 909 to emit light with a special emission color. The special emission color in this case may be a special color (for example, rainbow color) indicating that the jackpot reliability is "highest".

As described above, in this embodiment, in the light emission effect, the timing at which the LED 909 starts light emission (light emission effect start timing) is the same (for example, when a reach state occurs), but the timing at which the light emission ends (light emission effect end timing). By making the difference, the player can have a sense of expectation. That is, the higher the expectation of a big hit, the longer the time for the light emission to continue, so that the player can expect a big hit and have an uplifting feeling.

In addition, when the variable display result of the special symbol is the display result corresponding to the big hit, the player can have a special expectation by executing the light emission effect by the light emission pattern that makes the LED 909 emit light with the special light emission color. Can be done.

In this embodiment, the left frame LED 909b, the top frame LED 909a, and the right frame LED 909c are targeted to emit light to realize a light emitting effect, but all of these plurality of LEDs 909 emit light with the same light emitting color. Or the plurality of LEDs 909 may be caused to emit light in different colors. In the following, a case where light emission is performed with different emission colors will be illustrated.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an example of a table configuration of a light emitting pattern table 901211, which is a table stored in ROM 90121 of the effect control board 9012 and defining a light emitting pattern of the LED 909 for realizing a light emitting effect in this embodiment. ..

In the light emission pattern table 901211, for example, a category, a light emission pattern, an electric component, a light emission type, a light emission color, and a light emission effect time (millisecond ms) are defined in association with each other.

In the category, a category in which the light emission pattern is classified is defined. In this embodiment, the emission patterns having the same emission color of the top frame LED909 (hereinafter referred to as "top frame emission color") are set as the same category, and the head numbers of the emission patterns (LP1, LP2, LP3, LP4, ...) to distinguish.
In the light emission pattern, the number of the light emission pattern of the LED 909 applied in the light emission effect is determined according to the category.
In the light emitting pattern, the type of LED 909 to be light-emitting (in this embodiment, the left frame LED 909b, the top frame LED 909a, and the right frame LED 909c) is defined for the electric component.

In the light emission type, the type of light emission in which mode each electric component is made to emit light is defined in the light emission pattern. This light emission type includes "continuous" indicating that continuous light emission (hereinafter, "continuous light emission") is performed in the same color, and "switching" indicating that multiple colors are switched (changed) to perform light emission. , "Blinking" indicating that blinking is performed by turning on / off one color. Continuous light emission means that the lighting is continuously (continuously) performed without a break.

As the emission color, a color that causes each electric component to emit light is defined in the emission pattern. This emission color includes colors such as "blue", "green", "red", and "rainbow".

The light emission effect time is defined as a time width (length of time) for executing the light emission effect by applying the light emission pattern. Specifically, for the light emission patterns belonging to the same category, an appropriate light emission effect time is determined according to the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to each fluctuation pattern described with reference to FIG. 127. The light emission effect time is a time for the LED 909 to emit light starting from the above-mentioned light emission effect start timing, and since the light emission effect time differs for each light emission pattern, the light emission effect end timing changes according to the light emission pattern.

Further, as can be seen from FIG. 126, in the light emission pattern table 901211, for the light emission patterns of the same category, each LED 909 emits light in the same mode, and each LED 909 emits light in a different mode. The light emission pattern to be turned on is defined. By doing so, it is possible to realize a plurality of variations of the light emitting effect, enhance the effect of the light emitting effect, and improve the game entertainment.

FIG. 127 is a light emitting effect distribution table 901212 which is stored in the ROM 90121 of the effect control board 9012 in this embodiment and is allocated for the effect control CPU 90120 to select the light emission pattern defined in the light emission pattern table 901211. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of.

FIG. 127 (A) shows a sorting table 901212A, which is a sorting table at the time of dropping, and FIG. 127 (B) shows a sorting table 901212B, which is a sorting table at the time of a normal jackpot. , FIG. 127 (C) shows a normal jackpot light emission effect sorting table 901212C, which is a sorting table at the time of probabilistic jackpot, and these tables show the fluctuation pattern type, the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern allocation. , The light emission pattern allocation is defined in association with each other.

As the variation pattern type, the variation pattern type specified by the variation pattern type specification command transmitted from the main board 9011 is defined.
The variation pattern is defined as a variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern type and specified by a variation pattern command transmitted from the main board 9011. In the figure, the contents of the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation display time are shown in parentheses.
In the fluctuation pattern distribution, the ratio at which the fluctuation pattern is selected is defined.
In the light emission pattern allocation, the ratio at which the light emission patterns of the categories (LP1, LP2, LP3, LP4, ...) Corresponding to the top frame emission color are selected from the light emission patterns defined in the light emission pattern table 901211 is determined. Has been done.

This will be described in detail.
In the light-emitting effect distribution table 901212A at the time of deviation in FIG. 127 (A), "normal fluctuation deviation", "normal reach deviation", and "super reach deviation" are defined as fluctuation pattern types.
In the fluctuation pattern type "normal fluctuation deviation", "normal fluctuation deviation (7 seconds)" and "normal fluctuation deviation (15 seconds)" are defined as fluctuation patterns.
In the fluctuation pattern type "normal reach loss", "normal reach loss (20 seconds)" and "normal reach loss (30 seconds)" are defined as fluctuation patterns.
In the fluctuation pattern type "Super Reach Off", "1st Super Reach (Battle Production) Off (40 seconds)" and "2nd Super Reach (Story Production) Off (50 seconds)" are defined as fluctuation patterns. There is.

For the fluctuation pattern allocation, "60%" is used for the fluctuation pattern "normal fluctuation (7 seconds)", "20%" is used for the fluctuation pattern "normal fluctuation (15 seconds)", and the fluctuation pattern "normal reach" is used. "9%" for "off (20 seconds)", "6%" for the fluctuation pattern "normal reach off (30 seconds)", and "1st super reach (battle production) off (40 seconds)" Is set to "3%", and the fluctuation pattern "2nd super reach (story production) off (50 seconds)" is set to "2%", and the sum of these ratios is "100%".

In the light emission pattern allocation, "0%" is set for all the fluctuation patterns included in the fluctuation pattern types "normal fluctuation deviation" and "normal reach deviation", respectively. On the other hand, regarding the fluctuation patterns included in the fluctuation pattern type "super reach out", the fluctuation pattern "1st super reach (battle production) out of (40 seconds)) has blue "70%" and green "20%". However, red "10%" and rainbow "0%" are set respectively, and in the fluctuation pattern "second super reach (story production) off (50 seconds))", blue "65%" is green. "25%", red "10%", and rainbow "0%" are defined respectively.

In the light emission effect distribution table 901212A at the time of deviation, the light emission pattern allocation is set to "0%" for the fluctuation pattern types "normal fluctuation deviation" and "normal reach deviation". Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the light emission effect in the case of deviation due to normal fluctuation and deviation from normal reach. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern type "super reach out", the value is set so that the light emission pattern allocation is relatively blue> green> red, and the ratio of blue accounts for the majority. ing. For this reason, the ratio of executing the light emission effect of causing the LED 909 to emit blue light is the highest. In addition, "rainbow" is set to "0%". Therefore, the light emitting effect of causing the LED 909 to emit light in rainbow colors is not executed.

In the normal jackpot light emitting effect distribution table 901212B of FIG. 127 (B), "normal reach jackpot" and "super reach jackpot" are defined as fluctuation pattern types.
In the fluctuation pattern type "normal reach jackpot", "normal reach jackpot (20 seconds)" and "normal reach jackpot (30 seconds)" are defined as fluctuation patterns.
The variable pattern types "1st super reach (battle production) jackpot (40 seconds)" and "2nd super reach (story production) jackpot (50 seconds)" are defined.

For the fluctuation pattern allocation, "5%" is used for the fluctuation pattern "normal reach jackpot (20 seconds)", "10%" is used for the fluctuation pattern "normal reach jackpot (30 seconds)", and the fluctuation pattern "1st super reach (1st super reach)". "40%" is set for "Battle production) jackpot (40 seconds)", and "45%" is defined for the fluctuation pattern "2nd super reach (story production) jackpot (50 seconds)". Is added up to be "100%".

In the light emission pattern allocation, "0%" is set for all the fluctuation patterns included in the fluctuation pattern type "normal reach jackpot". On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern "1st super reach (battle production) jackpot (40 seconds)" included in the fluctuation pattern type "1st super reach (battle production) jackpot (40 seconds)", blue "20%" is added. Green "30%", red "30%", and rainbow "20%" are set respectively, and the fluctuation pattern "2nd super reach (story production) jackpot (50 seconds)) is blue" 15 ". % ”, Green“ 35% ”, red“ 30% ”, and rainbow“ 20% ”are defined respectively.

In this normal jackpot emission effect distribution table 901212B, the emission pattern allocation is all "0%" for the variable pattern type "normal reach jackpot". Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the light emission effect in the case of a normal reach jackpot. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern type "super reach jackpot", the value is set so that the ratio of green and red is relatively high in the light emission pattern allocation. Therefore, the ratio of executing the light emission effect of causing the LED 909 to emit green or red light is relatively high.

In the probability variation jackpot light emitting effect distribution table 901212C of FIG. 127 (C), "normal reach jackpot" and "super reach jackpot" are defined as fluctuation pattern types.
In the fluctuation pattern type "normal reach jackpot", "normal reach jackpot (20 seconds)" and "normal reach jackpot (30 seconds)" are defined as fluctuation patterns.
The variable pattern types "1st super reach (battle production) jackpot (40 seconds)" and "2nd super reach (story production) jackpot (50 seconds)" are defined.

For the fluctuation pattern allocation, the fluctuation pattern "normal reach jackpot (20 seconds)" has "1%", the fluctuation pattern "normal reach jackpot (30 seconds)" has "4%", and the fluctuation pattern "first super reach (1st super reach)". "40%" is set for "Battle production) jackpot (40 seconds)", and "55%" is defined for the fluctuation pattern "2nd super reach (story production) jackpot (50 seconds)". Is added up to be "100%".

In the light emission pattern allocation, "0%" is set for all the fluctuation patterns included in the fluctuation pattern type "normal reach jackpot". On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern "1st super reach (battle production) jackpot (40 seconds)" included in the fluctuation pattern type "1st super reach (battle production) jackpot (40 seconds)", blue "5%" is added. Green "25%", red "40%", and rainbow "30%" are set respectively, and the fluctuation pattern "2nd super reach (story production) jackpot (50 seconds))" is blue "1". % ”, Green“ 29% ”, red“ 40% ”, and rainbow“ 30% ”are defined respectively.

In this probability variation jackpot light emission effect distribution table 901212C, the light emission pattern allocation is all set to "0%" for the variable pattern type "normal reach jackpot". Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the light emission effect in the case of a normal reach jackpot. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern type "super reach jackpot", the values are set so that the proportions of red and rainbow colors are relatively high in the emission pattern allocation. Therefore, the ratio of executing the light emission effect of causing the LED 909 to emit light in red or rainbow color is relatively high.

The effect control CPU 90120 emits light from the top frame based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main board 9011 and according to the allocation defined in the corresponding variation pattern in the above-mentioned emission effect distribution table 901212. Select a color. Then, from the light emission patterns defined in the light emission pattern table 901211 of FIG. 126 and included in the selected top frame emission color category, a light emission pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is selected. Determine the light emission pattern used for the light emission effect.

Here, the jackpot reliability is defined as "the occupancy rate in the jackpot fluctuation in the overall appearance rate including both the jackpot fluctuation and the missed fluctuation" for a plurality of light emission patterns. From the light emission pattern allocation defined in the above light emission effect distribution table 901212, the occupancy rate corresponding to the light emission color "blue" is generally the jackpot reliability "low", and the occupancy rate corresponding to the light emission color "green" is the jackpot reliability. The occupancy rate corresponding to "medium" and the emission color "red" corresponds to the jackpot reliability "high", and the occupancy rate corresponding to the emission color "rainbow" corresponds to the jackpot reliability "highest".

Although the explanation is given here that the category of the light emission pattern is selected based on the light emission color of the top frame, this is only an example, and the light emission color of the left frame LED909b (left frame light emission color) and the light emission of the right frame LED909c The light emission pattern table 901211 and the light emission effect distribution table 901212 may be defined so as to select the light emission pattern category based on the color (right frame emission color).

Further, in the above-mentioned light emission effect distribution table 901212, the light emission pattern allocation is set to "0%" for the fluctuation pattern types of the normal reach deviation, the normal reach deviation, and the normal reach jackpot, but the emission color is the same as the fluctuation pattern type of the super reach. The allocation may be set for each.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an example of the table configuration of the light emission control table 901213 stored in the ROM 90121 of the effect control board 9012 and used by the effect control CPU 90120 to control the light emission of the LED 909 in this embodiment.
In the light emission control table 901213, for example, a light emission pattern, a driver ID, an output terminal number, an electric component, and light emission control generation data are defined in association with each other.

Each light emission pattern defined in the light emission pattern table 901211 is stored in the light emission pattern.
In the driver ID, IDs as identification information for identifying each of the light emitter drivers 90413a, 90413b, and 90413c (in this embodiment, "D1", "D2", and "D3" in order) are stored.
In the output terminal number, the number of the output terminal of the light emitter driver 90413 (00 to 11 in this embodiment) is stored.
In the electric component, the light emitter driver 90413 and the electric component corresponding to the output terminal number (in this embodiment, "left frame", "top frame", and "right frame" in this order) are stored.
The light emission control generation data is data for controlling the serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to the light emitter driver, and is used for generating light emission control data based on the control data format described with reference to FIG. 72. Data is stored.

129 and 130 are diagrams showing an example of the data structure of the light emission control generation data included in the light emission control table 901213.
Each emission control generation data includes, for example, a data name, a format type, an address, a data transmission cycle, a unit emission time, a emission control cycle, and format data.

In the data name, the data name of the format generation data corresponding to the light emission pattern of the light emission control table 901213 is stored.
In the format type, identification information (“basic” or “extended”) of which of the basic format (EX = 0) and the extended format (EX = 1) shown in FIG. 72 is applied is stored. To.

The address set in the serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to the illuminant driver is stored in the address.
In the data transmission cycle, a cycle of transmitting light emission control data from the effect control board 9012 to the light emitting body driver 90413 of each light emitting body control board is stored via the effect control relay board 9016A. In this embodiment, the data transmission cycle will be described as 10 ms (milliseconds).
In the unit light emitting time, the unit time for causing the LED 909 corresponding to the light emitting body driver to emit light is stored.

In the light emission control cycle, a time (hereinafter, this cycle is referred to as a “light emission control cycle”) as a control unit for light emission for one cycle is stored. This light emission control cycle differs depending on the light emission type. Specifically, when the light emission type is "continuous" or "blinking", a time such as "100 ms" can be set, and the light emission type is "switching" (special emission color accompanying change of multiple colors (special emission color due to change of multiple colors) In the case of (rainbow-colored) light emission, etc.), a time such as "1800 ms" can be set. Details will be described later.

In the format data, time-series Q data to be included in the light emission control data by applying the format of the format type is stored. Specifically, in the format data, the light emission order and the Q data corresponding to the RGB values corresponding to the light emission order are defined in association with each other.

In this embodiment, the light emission of the LED 909 is controlled by Q data (color hexadecimal number, RGB color value) expressed in hexadecimal. In the color hexadecimal number, "16 x 16 = 256 gradations" is expressed by expressing each of RGB by a total of 6 digits of hexadecimal number (0 to F) by 2 digits, but in the present specification, 2 digits of each of RGB are expressed. The numerical values of are the same, and each of RGB is illustrated and explained as a notation in which one digit is abbreviated to a total of three digits. Further, for the sake of simplicity, the notation of "0x" representing a hexadecimal number will be omitted for illustration and explanation.

Further, the Q data includes Q data for group 1 and Q data for group 2 as Q data to be output to the serial-parallel conversion circuit constituting the light emitter driver 90413 corresponding to the address. Q data for group 3 is included. In the Q data corresponding to each group, RGB values to be output from the four output terminals Q included in the group are stored.

Specifically, regarding the RGB value as output data, in group 1, Q0 corresponds to the R value (R), Q1 corresponds to the G value (G), and Q2 corresponds to the B value (B). Since Q3 is connected to the ground, it is set to none (-). Further, in group 2, Q4 corresponds to the R value (R), Q5 corresponds to the G value (G), and Q6 corresponds to the B value (B). Since Q7 is connected to the ground, it is set to none (-). Further, in group 3, Q8 corresponds to the R value (R), Q9 corresponds to the G value (G), and Q10 corresponds to the B value (B). Q11 is not (-) because it is connected to the solenoid 90500.

This will be described in detail.
The light emission control generation data shown at the top of FIG. 129 is data having a data name of "dat1-1-1-a".
The format type is "basic", and it is stipulated that the basic format shown in FIG. 72 (2) is applied.
The address is "08", and it is stipulated that the address is applied to the light emitter driver 90413b corresponding to the left frame LED 909b.
The data transmission cycle is "10 ms", and it is defined that data is transmitted from the effect control board 9012 to the illuminant driver 90413b every 10 ms.
The unit light emission time is "100 ms", and it is defined that the left frame LED 909b emits light in a unit light emission time of 100 ms.
The light emission control cycle is "100 ms". The light emission type of the light emission pattern is "continuous", and the same time as the unit light emission time is set as the light emission control cycle in order to perform continuous light emission of a specific color.

In the format data, the order of light emission is defined from "1" to "N". Further, for each of the light emission orders "1" to "N", "0, 0, F" is defined as Q data (RGB values) of each group. Since the R value and G value of the Q data are set to "0" and the B value is set to "F" for all the light emission sequences, continuous blue light emission is realized.

FIG. 130 is a diagram showing another example of data for generating light emission control.
This light emission control generation data is data whose data name is "dat4-1-a".
The format type is "basic", and it is stipulated that the basic format shown in FIG. 72 (2) is applied.
The address is "08", and it is stipulated that the address is applied to the light emitter driver 90413b corresponding to the left frame LED 909b.
The data transmission cycle is "10 ms", and it is defined that the effect control board 9012 repeatedly transmits data to the illuminant driver 90413b at a cycle of 10 ms.
The unit light emission time is "40 ms", and it is defined that the left frame LED 909b emits light in a unit light emission time of 40 ms.
The light emission control cycle is "120 ms". The emission type of the emission pattern is "switching", and in order to emit rainbow colors by switching (changing) three colors of red, green, and blue, the emission control cycle is three times the unit emission time of 40 ms. It has been decided.

In the format data, the order of light emission is defined from "1" to "M". In the light emission order "1", "F, 0, 0" is defined as the Q data (RGB value) of each group, and in the light emission order "2", "0, 0," is defined as the Q data (RGB value) of each group. "F, 0" is defined, "0, 0, F" is defined as the Q data (RGB value) of each group in the light emission order "3", and the Q data of each group is defined in the light emission order "4". "F, 0, 0" is defined as (RGB value). The same applies hereinafter. As a result, red light emission, green light emission, and blue light emission are performed every 40 ms unit light emission time. As a result, the player can visually visually recognize the rainbow-colored light emission.

FIG. 131 is an example of a light emission pattern in this embodiment and a timing chart showing a time change of RGB values corresponding to each light emission pattern.
FIG. 131 (1) shows an example in which the LED 909 continuously emits light in a single color blue, corresponding to the jackpot reliability “low” as the light emission pattern A. In this example, by setting the R value and the G value to "0" and the B value to "F", continuous light emission of a single color blue is realized. Δts in the figure is the above-mentioned data transmission cycle, for example, 10 ms. Further, Δtm in the figure is the unit emission time described above, for example, 100 ms. Here, in order to realize continuous light emission with the light emission type set to "continuous", it is shown as "continuous unit light emission time".

FIG. 131 (2) shows an example in which the LED 909 continuously emits light in a single color green, corresponding to the jackpot reliability "medium" as the light emission pattern B. In this example, by setting the R value and the B value to "0" and the G value to "F", continuous light emission of a single color green is realized. Δts in the figure is the above-mentioned data transmission cycle, for example, 10 ms. Further, Δtm in the figure is the unit emission time described above, for example, 100 ms. Here, in order to realize continuous light emission with the light emission type set to "continuous", it is shown as "continuous unit light emission time".

FIG. 131 (3) shows an example in which the LED 909 continuously emits light in a single color green, corresponding to the jackpot reliability “high” as the light emission pattern C. In this example, by setting the G value and the B value to "0" and the R value to "F", continuous light emission of a single color red is realized. Δts in the figure is the above-mentioned data transmission cycle, for example, 10 ms. Further, Δtm in the figure is the unit emission time described above, for example, 100 ms. Here, in order to realize continuous light emission with the light emission type set to "continuous", it is shown as "continuous unit light emission time".

FIG. 131 (4) shows an example in which the LED 909 emits light in rainbow colors as the light emission pattern D, which corresponds to the jackpot reliability “highest”. In this example, each of the RGB values is changed in the order of "F"-> "0"-> "F"-> "0", ... With the switching unit emission time Δtn, thereby emitting rainbow colors. Has been realized. Δts in the figure is the above-mentioned data transmission cycle, for example, 10 ms. Further, Δts in the figure is the unit emission time described above, for example, 40 ms. Here, in order to realize switching light emission by setting the light emission type to "switching", it is shown as "switching unit light emitting time".

In the light emission patterns A to C, single colors of blue, green, and red are continuously emitted, whereas in the light emission pattern D, the rainbow color is expressed by changing the order of red → green → blue. Therefore, the continuous light emission time as a single color is shorter than the light emission patterns A to C. Further, paying attention to the unit emission time, the switching unit emission time Δtn in the emission pattern D is shorter than the continuous unit emission time Δtm corresponding to the emission patterns A to C.

In the above light emission pattern, for example, the light emission pattern A may be continuously emitted in white instead of blue by maximizing the RGB values.

Next, control data for controlling the gradation of the LED to realize light emission by mixing colors will be described. The Q data (RGB value) in the gradation control data described here can be directly applied to the Q data of the format data included in the above-mentioned emission control generation data.

FIG. 132 illustrates an example of gradation control data, which is control data for performing gradation control for realizing rainbow-colored light emission.
In this gradation control data, the change in emission color is shown in the leftmost column. Further, the right column shows the switching unit emission time Δtn / data transmission cycle Δts, and the right column shows Q data (RGB values) corresponding to each group (group 1, group 2, ...). It is expressed in hexadecimal and the order of light emission is shown in the rightmost column. In this example, the switching unit emission time Δtn is 40 ms, and the data transmission cycle Δts is 10 ms (Δtn = 40, Δts = 10).

In the light emission order 01 to 03, white light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to "F, F, F". In the light emission order 04 to 09, red light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to "F, 0, 0". In the light emission order 10 to 15, orange light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to "F, A, 0".

In the light emission order 16 to 21, yellow light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to "F, F, 0". In the light emission order 22 to 27, green light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to "0, F, 0". In the light emission order 28 to 33, light blue light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to "0, F, F".

In the light emission order 34 to 39, blue light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to "0, 0, F". In the light emission order 40 to 45, purple light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to "8, 0, 8".

The light emission sequences 01 to 45 can be configured as Q data for, for example, one cycle. The time corresponding to this one cycle corresponds to the above-mentioned light emission control cycle. Here, the light emission control cycle is set to "1800 ms". That is, 01 to 45 are set as one set, and the LED 909 is controlled to emit light in order with the emission color according to the emission order in the emission control cycle of 1800 ms.

As described above, by controlling the emission colors to be emitted by the LED 909 to be switched in order with a plurality of colors with a short switching unit emission time Δts, it is as if the rainbow color is emitted visually by human beings. It can be visually recognized.

FIG. 133 illustrates an example of gradation control data for realizing continuous light emission of red.
In this gradation control data, the leftmost column shows the continuous unit emission time Δtm / data transmission cycle Δts, and the right column shows the Q data corresponding to each group (group 1, group 2, ...). (RGB value) is expressed in hexadecimal, and the light emission order is shown in the rightmost column. In this example, the continuous unit emission time Δtm is 100 ms, and the data transmission cycle Δts is 10 ms (Δtm = 100, Δts = 10).

In the light emission order 01, red light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to "F, 0, 0". The light emission in the light emission order 01 can be configured as, for example, Q data of the light emission control cycle. Here, the light emission control cycle is set to "100 ms". That is, the emission color of 01 may be controlled so as to emit light in a emission control cycle of 100 ms.

FIG. 134 illustrates an example of gradation control data for realizing blinking red.
In this gradation control data, the leftmost column shows the switching unit light emission time Δtn / data transmission cycle Δts, and the right column shows the Q data corresponding to each group (group 1, group 2, ...). (RGB value) is expressed in hexadecimal, and the light emission order is shown in the rightmost column. In this example, the switching unit emission time Δtn is 50 ms, and the data transmission cycle Δts is 10 ms (Δtn = 50, Δts = 10).

In the light emission order 01, red light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to "F, 0, 0". The light emission order 02 realizes extinguishing by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to "0, 0, 0".

The light emission sequences 01 and 02 can be configured as Q data of the light emission control cycle. Here, the light emission control cycle is set to "100 ms". That is, 01 and 02 may be set as one set, and the LED 909 may be controlled to emit light in order with the emission color according to the emission order in the emission control cycle of 100 ms.

The period corresponding to the light emission control cycle (1800 ms in FIG. 132, 100 ms in FIGS. 133 and 134) described in the above gradation control data is the effect of the special symbol variation period (special symbol variation period). It does not necessarily correspond to the period of execution (production period). That is, the light emission control cycle is a control cycle indicating one cycle of a set of control data as shown in FIGS. 132 to 134, and this has nothing to do with the effect period.

Here, when the above-mentioned light emission effect by changing a plurality of colors (rainbow color light emission effect when a big hit is confirmed) is executed, the timing at which the period corresponding to an integral multiple of the light emission control cycle elapses is the change of the special symbol. There is no problem if it matches the timing when the special symbol ends, but if the timing is later than the timing when the special symbol fluctuation ends, the LED 909 will continue to emit light even after the special symbol fluctuation ends. , Problems arise.

As one of the methods for solving this, the effect control CPU 90120 generates light emission control data including the light emission stop command in the header (HD) at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol ends, and the light emitting body. It can be made to transmit to the driver 90413 (serial-parallel conversion circuit).

In this case, in the serial-parallel change circuit, after receiving the light emission control data including the light emission stop command in the header (HD), the light emission control data transmitted from the effect control CPU 90120 is paralleled from the serial signal in the decoder. Stop conversion to signal. As a result, no data is output to the LED 909, and as a result, the light emission of the LED 909 is stopped.

As another method, the effect control CPU 90120 transmits blank data (for example, data in which all Q values are set to "0") to the light emitter driver 90413 after the change of the special symbol is completed. May be good.

In this case, the serial-parallel change circuit continuously executes the conversion from the serial signal to the parallel signal, but since it is blank data, the LED 909 is completely turned off, and as a result, the light emission of the LED 909 is stopped.

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of a flow of light emission effect processing executed by the effect control CPU 90120 in this embodiment.
First, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the light emission effect execution condition, which is a condition for executing the light emission effect, is satisfied (A1). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the main board 9011.

If it is determined that it is satisfied (A1; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the light emission pattern (A3). Specifically, based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the received fluctuation pattern command, the light emission pattern is selected and determined from the light emission pattern table 901211 by the method described above using the light emission effect distribution table 901212.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is the light emission effect start timing (A5). Specifically, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation display of the effect symbol reaches a predetermined time as the time from the start of the variation to the occurrence of the reach state for the variation pattern, the light emitting effect is produced. Judged as the start timing.

If it is determined that it is the light emission effect start timing (A5; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is the data transmission timing (A7). The data transmission timing is the timing at which the time corresponding to the above-mentioned data transmission cycle elapses.

If it is determined that it is the data transmission timing (A7; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 executes the loop A process for each electric component (LED909) (A9 to A21).

In the loop A process, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a light emission control data generation process for generating light emission control data for the electric component (A11). Specifically, the light emission control data 901213 is referred to, and the light emission control generation data corresponding to the light emission pattern determined in A3 is read out. Then, using the read light emission control generation data, light emission control data in a format (basic format or extended format) corresponding to the common format and format type shown in FIG. 72 is generated for the electric component.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a light emission control data transmission process of transmitting the light emission control data generated in A9 to each light emitter control board 16 (A13).

As shown in FIG. 68, the light emission control data transmitted from the effect control CPU 90120 is a serial-parallel conversion circuit that first constitutes the light emitting body driver 90413b of the light emitter control board 9016D via the effect control relay board 9016A. It is input to the data input terminal (DATA / I) of. The input light emission control data is from the data through terminal (DATA / O) of the serial-parallel conversion circuit to the data input terminal (DATA / I) of the serial-parallel conversion circuit constituting the light emitting body driver 90413a of the light emitter control board 9016E. ) Is entered. The input light emission control data is from the data through terminal (DATA / O) of the serial-parallel conversion circuit to the data input terminal (DATA / I) of the serial-parallel conversion circuit constituting the light emitter driver 90413c of the light emitter control board 9016F. ) Is entered.

In the serial-parallel conversion circuit that constitutes each of the light emitter drivers 90413 (90413a, 90413b, 90413c), the address information (AD1 to AD5 in 12 channels) included in the common format of the input light emission control data is input to the decoded address. It is determined whether or not the address information matches the address information set from the terminals (AD0 to AD5 for 12 channels), and only when they match, the input serial format clock signal and light emission control data are converted into parallel format signals. Will be converted. That is, only the light emission control data in which the address information included in the input light emission control data and the address information set from the decoded address input terminal (AD0 to AD5 in channel 12) match is parallel in the corresponding light emitter driver 90413. Since it is converted into a signal, the light emission control data for the light emitter driver 90413 having a different address is passed through as it is.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 increments the group number (group No.) by "1" (A15). After that, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the above processing is completed for all the groups corresponding to the electric components (A17), and if it is determined that the processing is not completed (A17; No), A9. Return the process to. If it is determined that the process is completed (A17; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 resets the group No. to “0” (A19). Then, the effect control CPU 90120 shifts the processing to the next electric component (LED909).

When the loop A processing for all the electric components (LED909) is executed (A21), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the light emission effect (A23). If it is determined that it is not the end timing (A23; No), the effect control CPU 90120 returns the process to A7.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the light emission effect (A23; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to end the process (A25). If it is determined that the processing is to be continued (A25; No), the effect control CPU 90120 returns the processing to A1. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process is finished (A25; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the light emission effect process.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 can execute a light emission effect using the LED 909. The effect control CPU 90120 produces a light emitting effect by a first pattern of emitting LED 909 in a specific color such as blue, green, or red, and a second pattern of emitting LED 909 in a plurality of colors (blue, green, red, etc.). It is feasible. Then, the jackpot reliability is different between the first pattern and the second pattern, and the light emission effect period is different.
According to this, by making the jackpot reliability different and the light emitting effect period different between the first pattern and the second pattern, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light emitting effect and improve the game entertainment.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 can execute a light emission effect by a plurality of light emission patterns having different light emission modes (for example, light emission colors), and the plurality of light emission patterns are all specified as blue, green, red, or the like. It is a light emission mode including color emission, and the jackpot reliability is different and the emission unit time for a specific color is different in these plurality of emission patterns.
According to this, it is possible to pay attention to the difference in the period during which the specific color is emitted, enhance the effect of the emission effect, and improve the game entertainment.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, an embodiment in which a light emitting pattern for blinking the LED 909 in a specific color is applied as a light emitting pattern will be described. In this embodiment, the LED 909 is made to emit light by a plurality of light emission patterns based on a light emission mode in which a specific color is blinked, the jackpot reliability is different in the plurality of light emission patterns, and the light emission cycle of the specific color (hereinafter, "light emission"). The feature is that the period is different.

FIG. 136 is a diagram showing an example of the table configuration of the light emission pattern table 901211 according to the third embodiment.
The table configuration of the light emission pattern table 901211 is the same as that of the light emission pattern table 901211 described with reference to FIG. 126, but the contents thereof are different.

In this light emission pattern table, for each category, the light emission pattern includes a light emission pattern in which the light emission type is "blinking" and the light emission color is "red". That is, a light emission pattern that causes the LED 909 to emit red blinking light is defined. In addition, the light emission pattern of blinking red is determined according to the reliability of the jackpot. This embodiment is characterized in that the unit emission time of the red blinking emission pattern is changed according to the jackpot reliability.

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of the light emission control generation data in this case.
The data structure of the light emission control generation data is the same as that of the light emission control generation data described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130, but the contents of the data are different.

Specifically, the light emission control generation data shown in FIG. 137 is the data whose data name is "dat11-1-a".
The format type is "basic", and it is stipulated that the basic format shown in FIG. 72 (2) is applied.
The address is "08", and it is stipulated that the address is applied to the light emitter driver 90413b corresponding to the left frame LED 909b.
The data transmission cycle is "10 ms", and it is defined that data is transmitted from the effect control board 9012 to the illuminant driver 90413b every 10 ms.
The unit light emission time is "100 ms", and it is defined that the left frame LED 909b emits light in a unit light emission time of 200 ms.
The light emission control cycle is "200 ms". The light emission type of the light emission pattern is "blinking", and in order to cause blinking by turning on / off red, a time twice as long as the unit light emission time of 10 ms is set as the light emission control cycle.

In the format data, the order of light emission is defined from "1" to "P". In the light emission order "1", "F, 0, 0" is defined as the Q data (RGB value) of each group, and in the light emission order "2", "0, 0," is defined as the Q data (RGB value) of each group. "0,0" is defined, "F, 0, 0" is defined as the Q data (RGB value) of each group in the light emission order "3", and the Q data of each group is defined in the light emission order "4". "0, 0, 0" is defined as (RGB value). The same applies hereinafter. As a result, red lighting and extinguishing are performed every 50 ms unit emission time. As a result, blinking red is realized.

FIG. 138 is an example of a light emission pattern in this embodiment and a timing chart showing a time change of RGB values corresponding to each light emission pattern.
FIG. 138 (1) shows an example in which the LED 909 blinks in red corresponding to the jackpot reliability “low” as the light emission pattern E. In this example, the red lighting with the R value set to "F" and the G value and the B value set to "0" and the red turning off with the RGB values set to "0" are switched by blinking unit emission time Δtо1. , Realizes blinking red.

FIG. 138 (2) shows an example in which the LED 909 blinks in red as the light emission pattern F, corresponding to the jackpot reliability “medium”. In this example, the red lighting with the R value set to "F" and the G value and the B value set to "0" and the red turning off with the RGB values set to "0" are switched by blinking unit emission time Δtо2. , Realizes blinking red. Here, the blinking unit emission time Δto2 can be set to be shorter than the blinking unit emission time Δtо1 in FIG. 138 (1) (Δtо2 <Δtо1).

FIG. 138 (3) shows an example in which the LED 909 blinks in red as the light emitting pattern G, corresponding to the jackpot reliability “high”. In this example, the red lighting with the R value of "F" and the G and B values of "0" and the red extinguishing with the RGB values of "0" are switched by the blinking unit emission time Δtо3. , Realizes blinking red. Here, the blinking unit emission time Δto3 can be set to be shorter than the blinking unit emission time Δtо2 in FIG. 138 (2) (Δtо3 <Δtо2).

In FIG. 138 (4), the light emission pattern H corresponds to the jackpot reliability “highest”.
An example of emitting LEP9 in rainbow colors is shown. In this example, each RGB value is changed in the order of "F"->"0"->"F"->"0"->, ... Realizes light emission. Here, the switching unit emission time Δtn can be set to be shorter than the blinking unit emission time Δtо3 in FIG. 138 (3) (Δtn <Δtо3).

The above-mentioned light emission patterns E, F, and G are light emission patterns that cause the LED 909 to emit light in a light emission mode in which red is blinked, and these light emission patterns correspond to the first specific pattern. Further, the light emission pattern H is a light emission pattern that causes the LED 909 to emit light according to a light emission mode that changes from red to another color among a plurality of colors (red, green, blue), and this light emission pattern corresponds to the second specific pattern. To do.

The light emission patterns E, F, G (first specific pattern) and the light emission pattern H (second specific pattern) are controlled so that the jackpot reliability is different and the red light emission cycle is different. Specifically, the light emission pattern H having the highest jackpot reliability is controlled so that the red light emission cycle is the shortest.

Further, even in the same first specific pattern, the emission patterns E, F, and G, the jackpot reliability is different and the red emission cycle is controlled to be different. Specifically, the light emission pattern G having the highest jackpot reliability is controlled so that the red light emission cycle, that is, the red blinking cycle is the shortest.

In the above example, since the blinking and lighting of red are switched by the blinking unit emission time Δtо, “2 × Δto”, which is twice the blinking unit emission time Δto, is the red emission cycle.

Although red is taken as an example as a specific color for blinking the LED 909, it may be used as another color such as blue or green. Further, the lighting and blinking times do not necessarily have to be the same, and one of the times may be longer than the other.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 has a first specific pattern in which the LED 909 emits light in a light emitting mode in which a specific color such as blue, green, or red is blinked, or a color of any one of a plurality of colors including the specific color. It is possible to execute a light emission effect by a second specific pattern that causes the LED 909 to emit light according to a light emission mode that changes from to another color, and the jackpot reliability is different between the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern, and the specific color. The light emission cycle is different.
According to this, it is possible to pay attention to the difference in the emission cycle of the specific color by making the jackpot reliability different and the emission cycle of the specific color different between the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern. , It is possible to enhance the effect of the light emission effect and improve the game entertainment.

Regarding the light emission effect based on the light emission pattern described in the third embodiment, the principle of the light emission effect including the timing of starting / ending the light emission effect, the data configuration for realizing the light emission effect, and the control method are described in the second embodiment. A method similar to the form can be applied.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, an embodiment in which a light emission pattern having a common mode of color change including a specific color is applied as a light emission pattern will be described. This embodiment is characterized in that the LED 909 is made to emit light by a common pattern having a common mode of color change, the jackpot reliability is different, and the light emission cycle of a specific color is different by a plurality of common patterns.

FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of the light emission control generation data in this case.
The data structure of the light emission control generation data is the same as that of the light emission control generation data described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130, but the contents of the data are different.

Specifically, the light emission control generation data shown in FIG. 139 is the data whose data name is "dat21-1-a".
The format type is "basic", and it is stipulated that the basic format shown in FIG. 72 (2) is applied.
The address is "08", and it is stipulated that the address is applied to the light emitter driver 90413b corresponding to the left frame LED 909b.
The data transmission cycle is "10 ms", and it is defined that data is transmitted from the effect control board 9012 to the illuminant driver 90413b every 10 ms.
The unit light emission time is "100 ms", and it is defined that the left frame LED 909b emits light in a unit light emission time of 200 ms.
The light emission control cycle is "200 ms". The light emission type of the light emission pattern is "switching", and in order to perform light emission by switching (changing) between white and blue, a time twice as long as a unit light emission time of 100 ms is defined as a light emission control cycle.

In the format data, the order of light emission is defined from "1" to "P". In the light emission order "1", "F, F, F" are defined as the Q data (RGB values) of each group, and in the light emission order "2", "0," as the Q data (RGB values) of each group. "0, F" is defined, "F, F, F" is defined as the Q data (RGB values) of each group in the light emission order "3", and the Q data of each group is defined in the light emission order "4". "0, 0, F" is defined as (RGB value). The same applies hereinafter. As a result, white light emission and blue light emission are performed every 50 ms unit light emission time. As a result, white-blue light emission is realized.

FIG. 140 is an example of a light emission pattern in this embodiment and a timing chart showing a time change of RGB values corresponding to each light emission pattern.
FIG. 140 (1) shows an example in which the LED 909 emits light in white and blue as the light emission pattern S, corresponding to the jackpot reliability “low”. In this example, the first emission (white) with the R value, G value and B value as "F" and the second emission (blue) with the B value as "F" and the R value and G value as "0". ) And, by switching the switching unit light emission time Δtn1 at a time, white-blue switching light emission is realized.

FIG. 140 (2) shows an example in which the LED 909 emits light in white and blue as the light emission pattern T, corresponding to the jackpot reliability “medium”. In this example, the first emission (white) with the R value, G value and B value as "F" and the second emission (blue) with the B value as "F" and the R value and G value as "0". ) And the switching unit emission time Δtn2, white-blue switching emission is realized. Here, the switching unit light emission time Δtn2 can be set to be shorter than the switching unit light emission time Δtn1 in FIG. 140 (1) (Δtn2 <Δtn1).

FIG. 140 (3) shows an example in which the LED 909 emits light in white and blue as the light emission pattern U, corresponding to the jackpot reliability “high”. In this example, the first emission (white) with the R value, G value and B value as "F" and the second emission (blue) with the B value as "F" and the R value and G value as "0". ) And the switching unit emission time Δtn3, white-blue switching emission is realized. Here, the switching unit light emitting time Δtn3 can be set to be shorter than the switching unit light emitting time Δtn2 in FIG. 140 (2) (Δtn3 <Δtn2).

FIG. 140 (4) shows an example in which the LED 909 emits light in white and blue as the light emission pattern V, which corresponds to the jackpot reliability “highest”. In this example, the first emission (white) with the R value, G value and B value as "F" and the second emission (blue) with the B value as "F" and the R value and G value as "0". ) And the switching unit emission time Δtn4, white-blue switching emission is realized. Here, the switching unit light emitting time Δtn4 can be set to be shorter than the switching unit light emitting time Δtn3 in FIG. 140 (3) (Δtn4 <Δtn3).

The above-mentioned emission patterns S, T, U, and V realize emission patterns having a common mode of color change by switching between white and blue emission. Further, the higher the jackpot reliability, the shorter the white and blue switching unit light emission time is controlled. Further, since the light emission patterns S, T, U, and V are light emission patterns that change a plurality of colors, they correspond to the second pattern and also correspond to a common pattern having a common mode of color change.

In the above description, the white-blue switching light emission has been described as an example, but in the same manner, the white-green switching light emission and the white-red switching light emission may be realized.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 can execute the light emission effect by the second pattern by a plurality of common patterns having a common mode of color change, and the jackpot reliability is different and common in the plurality of common patterns. The color emission cycle is different.
According to this, the jackpot reliability is different in a plurality of common patterns, and by making the light emission cycle of the common color different, it is possible to pay attention to the difference in the light emission cycle of the common color, and the effect of the light emission effect is enhanced. , The game entertainment can be improved.

Regarding the light emission effect based on the light emission pattern described in the fourth embodiment, the principle of the light emission effect including the timing of starting / ending the light emission effect, the data configuration for realizing the light emission effect, and the control method are described in the second embodiment. A method similar to the form can be applied.

[5. Other embodiments]
The embodiment to which this embodiment can be applied is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of this embodiment. Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described. The same configurations as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted again.

[5-1. Game machine]
In the above embodiment, the gaming machine according to this embodiment has been described as a pachinko gaming machine 901, but a slot machine capable of playing a game by a player using a gaming medal is used as a gaming machine according to this embodiment. A light emitting effect similar to that of the above embodiment may be executed.

[5-2. Light emitting part]
In the above embodiment, the light emitting unit according to this embodiment has been described as three types of the left frame LED909b, the top frame LED909a, and the right frame LED909c. However, similarly, for example, the panel-side LEDs 909d and 909e may be used as the light emitting unit according to this embodiment.

Further, for example, a movable member for effect (effect accessory) is configured to be operated by driving a solenoid, and an LED is configured on the effect accessory to provide the accessory LED to a light emitting unit according to this embodiment. May be.

Further, for example, a light guide plate such as an LED light guide plate configured as an acrylic plate that irradiates LED light from the side surface of a laser-processed acrylic plate and emits light on the surface by a special pulse mark, or a 7-segment display method is used for display. A seg display capable of capable of displaying, a dot display capable of displaying in a dot display method, and the like are configured in the pachinko gaming machine 901 as light emitting units, and these light emitting units are used as light emitting units according to this embodiment. , The light emitting effect may be executed.

[5-3. Luminous pattern]
In the above embodiment, as the first pattern, a light emitting pattern in which a specific color is used as a single color and the light emitting portion is made to emit light has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the light emitting portion may be made to emit light by using a light emitting pattern in which a mixed color (a color in which RGB is mixed at a predetermined ratio, etc.) is continuously emitted as a specific color as a first pattern.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, as the first specific pattern, a light emission pattern in which the LED 909 is emitted by a light emission mode in which a specific color is blinked as a single color has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the light emitting unit may be made to emit light by using a light emitting pattern that blinks a mixed color (a color obtained by mixing RGB at a predetermined ratio, etc.) as a specific color as the first specific pattern.

Further, the following light emission pattern may be defined as the light emission pattern.

FIG. 141 is a timing chart showing an example of a light emission pattern in another embodiment and a time change of RGB values corresponding to each light emission pattern.

FIG. 141 (1) shows an example in which the LED 909 emits light in white and blue as the light emission pattern W, corresponding to the jackpot reliability “low”. In this example, the first emission (white) with the R value, G value and B value as "F" and the second emission (blue) with the B value as "F" and the R value and G value as "0". ) And the switching unit emission time Δtn5, white-blue switching emission is realized.

FIG. 141 (2) shows an example in which the LED 909 emits light in white and green as the light emission pattern X, corresponding to the jackpot reliability “medium”. In this example, the first emission (white) with the R value, G value and B value as "F" and the second emission (green) with the G value as "F" and the R value and B value as "0". ) And the switching unit emission time Δtn6, white-green switching emission is realized. Here, the switching unit light emitting time Δtn6 can be set to be shorter than the switching unit light emitting time Δtn5 in FIG. 141 (1) (Δtn6 <Δtn5).

FIG. 141 (3) shows an example in which the LED 909 emits light in white and red as the light emission pattern Y, corresponding to the jackpot reliability “high”. In this example, the first emission (white) with the R value, G value and B value as "F" and the second emission (red) with the R value as "F" and the G value and B value as "0". ) And the switching unit emission time Δtn7, white-red switching emission is realized. Here, the switching unit light emitting time Δtn7 can be set to be shorter than the switching unit light emitting time Δtn6 in FIG. 141 (2) (Δtn7 <Δtn6).

FIG. 141 (4) shows an example in which the LED 909 emits light in rainbow colors as the light emission pattern Z, which corresponds to the jackpot reliability “highest”. In this example, each of the RGB values is changed in the order of "F"-> "0"-> "F"-> "0"->, ... With the switching unit emission time Δtn8, so that the color is rainbow-colored. Realizes light emission. Here, the switching unit light emitting time Δtn8 can be set to be shorter than the switching unit light emitting time Δtn7 in FIG. 141 (3) (Δtn8 <Δtn7).

[5-4. Light emission control]
In the above embodiment, the light emission of the LED 909 is controlled based on the RGB value expressed in a hexadecimal number, but this is only an example, for example, a decimal number (256 gradations: 0 to 255). The light emission of the LED 909 may be controlled based on the RGB value represented by.

Further, for example, even if the light emission control data is configured by modeling based on the HSV (hue, saturation, lightness) color space and the LED 909 is made to emit light using the light emission control data, the light emission effect is realized. Good.

Further, a light emitting region as a light emitting unit is formed for each light emitting element having RGB as one set, or for each of a plurality of light emitting elements having RGB as one set, and each light emitting region is made to emit light with a different light emitting color. It may be. For example, a rainbow-colored light emission may be realized by forming a light-emitting region composed of a plurality of light-emitting elements and emitting light in each light-emitting region with a different color to form a gradation.

[5-5. Luminous production time]
In the above embodiment, it has been described that the light emission effect time is determined for each light emission pattern according to the variation pattern of the special symbol. However, instead of doing so, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the light emission effect time each time according to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command transmitted from the main board 9011, and the determination is made. The light emission control of the LED 909 may be performed during the light emission effect time.

[5-6. Specific color]
In the above embodiment, the specific color has been described as a single color such as blue, green, and red, but the specific color is not limited to these, and the color mixture generated by mixing these single colors is the specific color according to this embodiment. May be.

Also, in general, the term "monochromatic" means a pure color of only one color. In this case, in terms of RGB, it is conceivable to define a single color as having a value only for one component and not having a value for the other components (0). However, a color visually recognized as a single color by the player, that is, a color visually recognized by the player as a single color may be treated as a single color to control light emission.

Specifically, for example, in the case of "blue", for example, even when the B value is set to "255" and the R value and G value are set to minute values of about "1 to 9" in 256 gradations. It is considered that the player visually recognizes it as "blue". The same applies to "green" and "red". Therefore, for example, among the RGB values, the emission pattern in which the value of the component corresponding to the color that is the main element of the single color is the maximum value and the other two components are minute values is defined as the emission pattern of the single color. You may do so. That is, even if the colors are actually mixed, the color that is visually recognized as a single color by the player may be regarded as a single color, and this embodiment may be applied.

Further, the LED 909 may be made to emit light so as to be visually recognized as a specific color by the player, and what kind of light emission control method is applied to make the LED 909 emit light is a design matter, and the above-described embodiment It is not limited to the control method using the serial-parallel conversion circuit described in the above.

[5-7. Hold display related]
In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 is set to the display mode (display color, lighting / blinking, etc.) of the hold display displayed on the hold display 9025 (first hold display 9025A or second hold display 9025B). A light emitting effect that causes the LED 909 to emit light may be executed according to the corresponding light emitting pattern.

FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the hold display advance notice effect determination process executed by the effect control CPU 90120 in this case.
First, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not a start winning determination result designation command has been received from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015 (B1).

On the game control microcomputer 90100 side, at the time of starting winning, a display result (whether or not it is a big hit) and a winning judgment (look-ahead judgment) of a variation pattern type are performed, and a command indicating the winning judgment result (display result specification command, The variation pattern type designation command) is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 as a judgment result command at the time of starting winning.

Here, the fluctuation pattern types include fluctuation pattern types such as "non-reach loss", "normal reach loss", "super reach loss", "normal reach jackpot", and "super reach jackpot". In B1, it is determined whether or not the start winning determination result command is received from the main board 9011.

If it is determined that the command has been received (B1; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the display mode of the hold display from the look-ahead mode determination table 901219 stored in the ROM 90121 based on the received start winning judgment result specification command. Determine (B3). The effect control CPU 90120 controls the hold display 9025 to perform the hold display in the display mode determined in B3.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the light emitting mode of the LED 909 based on the display mode of the hold display determined in B3 (B5). The effect control CPU 90120 controls each LED 909 to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the determined light emitting mode. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 ends the hold display advance notice effect determination process.

FIG. 143 is a diagram showing an example of the table configuration of the look-ahead mode determination table 901219.
In this look-ahead mode determination table, for example, a variation pattern type and a hold display are defined in association with each other.

The type of variation pattern of the special symbol is defined as the variation pattern type.
In the hold display, the mode of the hold display such as "lighting" and "blinking", the display color of the hold display such as normal color, blue, green, and red, or a combination thereof is defined as the display mode of the hold display. .. Further, in the hold display, a selection ratio for selecting the display mode of the hold display is defined.

This will be described in detail.
In the look-ahead mode determination table 901219 shown in FIG. 143, "non-reach out", "normal reach out", "super reach out", "normal reach out", and "super reach out" are defined as fluctuation pattern types. Further, in the hold display, "normal lighting", "blue lighting", "red lighting", and "red blinking" are defined as display modes of the hold display.

Regarding the fluctuation pattern type "non-reach out", in the hold display, "normal lighting" is "75%", "blue lighting" is "25%", "red lighting" and "red flashing" are "red flashing". "0%" is set for each.

Regarding the fluctuation pattern type "normal reach loss", in the hold display, "normal lighting" is "60%", "blue lighting" is "20%", "red lighting" is "15%", and "red". "Blinking" is set to "5%" respectively.

Regarding the fluctuation pattern type "Super Reach Off", in the hold display, "normal lighting" is "20%", "blue lighting" is "25%", "red lighting" is "25%", and " "Blinking red" is set to "30%" respectively.

Regarding the fluctuation pattern type "normal reach jackpot", in the hold display, "normal lighting" is "10%", "blue lighting" is "20%", "red lighting" is "30%", and "red". "Blinking" is set to "40%" respectively.

Regarding the fluctuation pattern type "Super Reach Jackpot", in the hold display, "normal lighting" is "2%", "blue lighting" is "8%", "red lighting" is "40%", and " "Blinking red" is set to "50%" respectively.

The effect control CPU 90120 selects and determines the display mode of one hold display according to the above selection ratio according to the variation pattern type. In this case, when "normal lighting" is determined, the white lighting is held and displayed, and the LED 909 is made to emit light in the white lighting light emission pattern corresponding to the white lighting.

When it is determined to be "blue lighting", the blue lighting is held and displayed, and the LED 909 is made to emit light in the blue lighting light emission pattern corresponding to the blue lighting. When it is determined to be "red lighting", the red lighting is held and displayed, and the LED 909 is made to emit light in the red lighting light emission pattern corresponding to the red lighting. When "blinking red" is determined, the red blinking is held and displayed, and the LED 909 is made to emit light in the red blinking light emission pattern corresponding to the red blinking.

In this way, by executing the light emitting effect by the light emitting pattern according to the display mode of the hold display (specific display) corresponding to the variable display, the effect of the light emitting effect can be enhanced and the game entertainment can be improved.

Here, the specific display corresponding to the variable display is set as the hold display as the display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended, but the active display as the display corresponding to the variable display during execution is set as the specific display. , The light emitting effect may be executed by the light emitting pattern according to the display mode of the specific display. That is, the specific display according to this embodiment can be a variable display compatible display that includes a hold display and an active display.

[5-8. Light emission production start / end timing]
The light emission effect start timing and the light emission effect end timing described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the design can be changed as appropriate.

FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the principle of other light emission effects.
FIG. 144 (1) shows a first example of the light emission effect.
This figure shows a timing chart showing a control example of the light emission effect in a specific super reach effect, and shows a control example of the light emission effect in the battle reach effect.

When the battle reach effect is executed, the effect symbol is displayed in the normal variable display mode as shown in FIG. 136 (A) from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) to the occurrence of the reach state. The variation display of is executed in the effect display device 905.

In the effect display device 905, when a reach state occurs at the time "tm1", a message image 9053 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 115 (B) and 115 (C), and a battle effect corresponding to the battle reach effect is displayed. The moving image of is displayed. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 starts executing the light emission effect in response to the occurrence of this reach state. That is, the start time (start timing) of the light emission effect is the timing (time “tm1”) when the reach state occurs.

FIG. 144 (A) shows an example in which the jackpot reliability is lower than that in the cases of FIGS. 144 (B) and 144 (C), and the variation display result is “missing”.
In this example, the execution of the light emission effect is terminated at the time “ts1” at which the first half of the battle reach effect ends. That is, the light emission effect end timing is the time "ts1", and the light emission effect period is the period from the time "tm1" to "ts1". Further, in this case, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the LED 909 to emit light with the emission color A. The emission color A in this case may be a single emission color and may be an emission color (for example, white or blue) indicating that the jackpot reliability is low.

FIG. 144 (B) shows an example in which the jackpot reliability is higher than that in the case of FIG. 144 (A), but lower than that in the case of FIG. 144 (C), and the variation display result is “missing”. There is.
In this example, an example of a light emitting effect including two effect stages, a first effect stage and a subsequent second effect stage, is shown with the time “tm1” at which the reach state occurs as the light emission effect start timing. In this example, the first production stage ends at the time "ts1" when the first half of the battle reach production ends, and the second production stage ends at the time "ts2" when the second half of the battle reach production which is executed after that ends. To do. That is, as a whole, the light emission effect start timing is the time "tm1", the light emission effect end timing is the time "ts2", and the light emission effect period is the period from the time "tm1" to "ts2".

Further, in the first production stage, the production start timing is the time "tm1" and the production end timing is "ts1", and the production period of the first production stage is the period from the time "tm1" to "ts1". .. Further, in the second production stage, the production start timing is "ts1" and the production end timing is "ts2", and the production period of the second production stage is the period from the time "ts1" to "ts2".

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the LED 909 to emit light in the emission color A in the first effect stage, and controls the LED 909 to emit light in the emission color B in the second effect stage. In this case, the emission color A may be a single emission color and may be an emission color (for example, white or blue) indicating that the jackpot reliability is low, and the emission color B is a single emission color. The emission color (for example, green) indicating that the jackpot reliability is medium may be used.

FIG. 144 (C) shows an example in which the jackpot reliability is the highest and the variable display result is “big hit”.
In this example, an example of a light emitting effect including two effect stages, a first effect stage and a subsequent second effect stage, is shown with the time “tm1” at which the reach state occurs as the light emission effect start timing. In this example, the first production stage ends at the time "ts1" when the first half of the battle reach production ends, and after that, the second half of the battle reach production is executed, and then the reach result production and the stop symbol production are executed, and finally. The second production stage ends at the time "ts3" at which the variation display ends. That is, as a whole, the light emission effect start timing is the time "tm1", the light emission effect end timing is the time "ts3", and the light emission effect period is the period from the time "tm1" to "ts3".

Further, in the first production stage, the production start timing is the time "tm1" and the production end timing is "ts1", and the production period of the first production stage is the period from the time "tm1" to "ts1". Further, in the second production stage, the production start timing is "ts1" and the production end timing is "ts3", and the production period of the second production stage is the period from the time "ts1" to "ts3".

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the LED 909 to emit light with the emission color C in the first effect stage, and controls the LED 909 to emit light with the special emission color in the second effect stage. The emission color C in this case may be a single emission color and may be an emission color (for example, red) indicating that the jackpot reliability is high, and the special emission color indicates that the jackpot reliability is the highest. The emission color (for example, rainbow color) may be used.

Further, in the above example, after the second effect stage, a light emission effect that causes the LED 909 to emit light with a special emission color may be executed. For example, in the first production stage, the LED 909 is made to emit light with the emission color A or the like (first specific color), and in the subsequent second production stage, the LED 909 is emitted with the emission colors B, C or the like (second specific color). , And after the end of the period corresponding to the second effect stage, a light emission effect of emitting the LED 909 with a special emission color may be executed. Further, the light emission pattern exemplified in the third embodiment (light emission pattern blinking in a specific color) and the light emission pattern exemplified in the fourth embodiment (light emission pattern having a common mode of color change including a specific color) are applied. You may. For example, in the first effect stage, the LED 909 is made to emit light by blinking the emission color A or the like (first specific color), and in the subsequent second effect stage, the emission colors B, C or the like (second specific color) are emitted. The LED 909 may be made to emit light according to the light emitting mode in which the color) is blinked, and after the end of the period corresponding to the second effect stage, a light emitting effect in which the LED 909 is emitted with a special light emitting color may be executed. The combination of the emission color and the emission mode can be any combination.
In this way, by executing a plurality of stages of light emitting effect having different colors and modes for emitting light from the light emitting unit, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light emitting effect and improve the game entertainment. In addition, after the end of the period corresponding to the first effect stage and the second effect stage, the player can have a special expectation by executing the light emission effect by the light emission pattern that emits the LED 909 with the special light emission color. it can.

Further, in the above embodiment, the timing at which the reach state occurs is set as the light emitting effect start timing, but this is only an example, and a specific timing after the reach state occurs may be set as the light emitting effect start timing. For example, the timing at which a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of the reach state may be set as the light emission effect start timing.

Further, in each of the light emission patterns shown in FIGS. 125 and 144, the light emission effect start timing (time "tm1") is shown and described as a common timing, but the light emission effect start timing is not necessarily set for all the light emission patterns. It does not have to be common.

Specifically, the light emission effect start timing may be different depending on the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern type, or the light emission effect start timing may be different depending on the type of effect to be executed and the type of reach. You may.

In this case, the higher the jackpot reliability as a result, the more the light emission effect start timing may be set so that the light emission effect is started at a later time. On the contrary, when the jackpot reliability becomes higher as a result, the light emission effect start timing may be set so as to start the light emission effect earlier in time.

Further, the timing of ending the light emission effect (time “tn” in FIG. 125, “ts” in FIG. 144) is shown in the above embodiment only as an example, and of course, it can be changed as appropriate. .. Regardless of whether the light emission effect start timing is the same or different as described above, the higher the jackpot reliability as a result, the later the light emission effect will end. It is preferable to set the end timing of the light emission effect and the light emission effect time.

[5-9. Luminous effect based on the player's movement]
During the execution of the reach effect in the above embodiment, the light emission effect may be executed based on a predetermined action of the player.

Specifically, for example, when the push button 9031B is pressed by the player after the reach effect is executed and the push button 9031B is detected by the push sensor 9035B, a detection signal is output from the push sensor 9035B. In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control board 9012 may start executing the light emission effect.

Further, in this case, the number of times the player presses the push button 9031B, that is, the number of times the push sensor 35 detects the push of the push button 9031B and the detection signal is output is internally counted, and the number of times the push button 9031B is pressed is counted internally. The emission color that causes the LED 909 to emit light may be changed each time the number of times reaches a specified number of times (for example, blue → green → red → rainbow color).

In addition to the above, for example, when the stick controller 9031A is tilted by the player, the tilting operation of the stick controller 9031A is detected by the controller sensor unit 9035B, and the detection signal is output, the effect control is performed. The CPU 90120 may execute the light emission effect.

Further, in this case, the emission color for emitting the LED 909 may be changed according to the tilt angle of the stick controller 9031A. In this case, the emission color is determined for each numerical range corresponding to the tilt angle of the stick controller 9031A, and the effect control CPU 90120 corresponds to the numerical range including the tilt angle detected by the controller sensor unit 9035B. The LED 909 may be made to emit light based on the emission color.

Further, since the stick controller 9031A is provided with a trigger button at a predetermined position of the operation stick held by the player, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the light emission effect when the operation of pressing the trigger button is detected. You may try to do it.

In addition, the button operation and the stick operation in the above case are, for example, as a hidden element (hidden operation: hidden button) related to the execution of the light emission effect, by not performing a notification prompting the execution of the operation, so that the game can be enjoyed. Can be improved.

However, it does not necessarily have to be a hidden element, and a message prompting a button operation or a stick operation or an effect image is displayed on the effect display device 905 so that the player can perform the button operation or the stick operation. May be good.

In this way, by executing the light emitting effect based on the predetermined action of the player during the execution of the reach effect, the effect of the light emitting effect can be enhanced and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 may output a predetermined sound effect from the speaker 908 during the execution of the light emission effect in response to the button operation or stick operation by the player.

Specifically, for example, every time the button is pressed a specified number of times (for example, 10 times) or the stick tilt angle reaches a specified angle, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 908. May be good.

In this case, depending on the number of times the button is pressed and the tilt angle of the stick, the specific color in continuous light emission may be changed (for example, blue → green → red → rainbow color), or the specific color may be turned on / off in blinking light (for example). For example, the blue lighting → blue extinguishing may be changed, or the specific color in the switching light emission may be changed (for example, white → blue, blue → white).

[5-10. Light emission for each light emitting part]
In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be configured with a light emitting unit composed of a plurality of light emitting parts, and a light emitting effect for causing the plurality of light emitting parts to emit light in different colors may be executed.

Specifically, for example, it is a light emitting part having a shape such as a hat, a stick, or an arch, and constitutes a light emitting body composed of a plurality of light emitting parts such as LEDs, and the LEDs of the plurality of light emitting parts are gradation. It may be changed to realize the light emission effect by the rainbow-colored light emission pattern described in the above embodiment.

FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example of the time change of the color of the light emitting portion in this case. Here, an example is illustrated in which a light emitting body composed of three light emitting parts, a first light emitting part, a second light emitting part, and a third light emitting part, is controlled to realize a light emitting effect.

For example, the emission color of the first light emitting portion is changed in the order of "white → red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple → white → ...". In this case, the emission color of the first light emitting part is used as a reference, for example, the color is shifted by one, and the emission color of the second light emitting part is changed to "red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple → white → red → ... Change in the order of "...", for example, shift the color by two, and change the emission color of the third light emitting part in the order of "orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple → white → red → orange → ..." Change with.

In this way, by executing the light emitting effect by the special pattern of emitting light of a plurality of light emitting parts constituting the light emitting unit with different colors, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light emitting effect and improve the game entertainment.

[5-11. Look-ahead notice production]
The effect control CPU 90120 may execute the look-ahead notice effect, and may execute the light emission effect in correspondence with the execution of the look-ahead notice effect.

Specifically, a pre-reading notice determination table prepared in advance is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the presence / absence of the pre-reading notice effect and the pre-reading notice pattern. The look-ahead notice determination table is compared with a random number value for determining the look-ahead notice type according to the specified contents of the change category command transmitted from the main board 9011 based on the start prize corresponding to the change display to be notified. The numerical value (decision value) may be assigned to the determination result of "no execution" corresponding to the case where the look-ahead notice effect is not executed, or to a plurality of look-ahead notice patterns when the look-ahead notice effect is executed.

In this case, for example, a plurality of light emission patterns are defined in the same manner as in the above embodiment in correspondence with the look-ahead notice pattern. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 refers to the pre-reading notice determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for pre-reading advance notice extraction extracted from the random number circuit 90124 or the like, and determines the presence / absence of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the pre-reading advance notice pattern. decide. Then, a light emitting pattern corresponding to the determined look-ahead notice pattern may be selected, and the light emitting effect described in the above embodiment may be executed.

This embodiment can be applied to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

1 Pachinko game machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 effect display device 9a 1st variable display 9b 2nd variable display 9c background symbol display 13 1st start winning opening 13a 1st start opening Switch 14 2nd start winning opening 14a 2nd starting opening switch 15 Variable winning ball device 17 Acting gate 17a Acting gate switch 18c Design hold memory display 20 Special variable winning ball device 22 Special variable winning ball device 23 Bottom member 24 Special winning opening 23a 1st count switch 25a 2nd count switch 31 Main board 32 Gate 56 CPU 80 Production control board 200 Production control microcomputer 201 Production control microcomputer 560 Game control microcomputer 901 Pachinko game machine 905 Production display device 90100 Game control Microcomputer 90102 RAM 90120 CPU for production control 90321 Movable member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can variably display identification information and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel, and
A predetermined state control means that is advantageous to the player and can be controlled to a predetermined state different from the advantageous state.
It is possible to control the normal state and the special state in which the variable display of the second identification information is frequently controlled to the predetermined state by selecting a shorter fluctuation time at a higher rate than the normal state. With a certain state control means
A first hold storage means capable of storing information related to the variable display of the first identification information as a first hold storage, and
A second holding storage means capable of storing information related to the variable display of the second identification information as a second holding storage, and
A hold display means capable of displaying a first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage and a second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage.
With a corresponding display means that can display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display during execution ,
The hold display means
In the normal state, the first hold display can be displayed, but the second hold display can not be displayed.
In the special state, the second hold display can be displayed.
It is possible to make the second hold display difficult to see in a specific period after the specific timing before the end of the special state.
In the normal state, the corresponding display means does not display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information.
further,
Light emitting part and
Further provided with a light emitting effect means capable of executing a light emitting effect using the light emitting unit,
The light emitting effect means has a first specific pattern in which the light emitting unit emits light by a light emitting mode in which a specific color is blinked, and a light emitting mode in which one of a plurality of colors including the specific color is changed to another color. The light emitting effect can be executed by the second specific pattern that causes the light emitting unit to emit light.
Wherein in the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern, the different expectation controlled Advantageously state and Ri wherein the Do different emission cycle of a specific color,
In the light emitting effect according to the first specific pattern, there are a plurality of blinking cycles of the specific color, and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which of the blinking cycles.
A game machine characterized by that.